9077-305 VSE 40-02-007

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION
Renewable Resources Plant
EDITION / AUSGABE - 07.11.2017
CUSTOMER / KUNDE: COOP OF MALLON

WS-ORDER NO. / WS-BESTELL 1452809332
NR.:
SERIE / SERIE: FN 9077-305
MODEL / MODELL: VSE 40-02-007
REVISION / REVISION: 00
engineering for a better world www.gea.com

1452809332 / 00 / 07.11.2017
Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

diese Dokumentation betreffend. Sie können gesandt werden an
The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

improving the documentation. They can be sent to
© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@gea.com, www.gea.com

1452809332 / 00 / 07.11.2017
CONTENTS / INHALT
COVER SHEET
DECKBLATT
1 SAFETY
SICHERHEIT
1.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATIONS 7
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE FUER ANLAGEN
1.2 QUALIFICATION PERSONNEL 23
QUALIFIKATION PERSONAL.
1.3 SAFETY 31
SICHERHEIT
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SYSTEMBESCHREIBUNG
2.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 61
INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN
3 DOCUMENTS RELATING TO ORDERS
PROJEKTBEZOGENE DOKUMENTE
3.1 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS 119
GRAFIKSYMBOLE
3.2 ORDER INFORMATION SPARE PARTS FOR INSTALLATIONS 131
BESTELLINFO ERSATZTEILE F. ANLAGEN
3.3 EQUIPMENT LIST 137
GERAETELISTE
3.4 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM 147
INSTALLATIONSSCHEMA
4 CONTROL UNIT
STEUER- UND REGELEINRICHTUNG
4.1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 151
STROMLAUFPLAN
4.2 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 301
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
4.3 FREQUENCY CONVERTER
FREQUENZUMRICHTER
FC 302 475
5 CENTRIFUGE
ZENTRIFUGE
1452809332 / 00 / 07.11.2017
5.1 TERMINAL PLAN 581

KLEMMENPLAN
5.2 DIMENSIONED DRAWING 583
MASSBLATT
5.3 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 585
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
5.4 SEPARATOR 815
SEPARATOR
5.5 PARTS CATALOGUE 821
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
6 VALVES, FITTINGS, ASSEMBLY
VENTILE, ARMATUREN, ZUBEHÖR
6.1 2/2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE
2/2-WEGE-MAGNETVENTIL
82730-740 887
6.2 BALL VALVE

KUGELHAHN
IM-10-BV 891
6.3 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST.
5281 919
10168 925
TFU006 927
10168 933
6.4 SPILL VALVE

UEBERSTROEMVENTIL
IM-10-SPV 937
7 MEASUREMENT
MESSTECHNIK
7.1 PRESSURE GAUGE
DRUCKMESSGERAET
RGG-63 957
R-P-RS-KP 959
7.2 PRESSURE GAUGE

MANOMETER

1452809332 / 00 / 07.11.2017
232.50 / 233.50 967
7.3 PROXIMITY SENSOR

NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
NJ5-11-N-G 971
8 MOTOR
MOTOR
8.1 THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
DREHSTROMMOTOR
IM-133-MOT 975

Safety precautions
for plants
No.: 9001
Edition: 0712
Designation: Safety precautions
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

2 9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to
GEA Mechanical Equipment

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com,· www.westfalia-separator.com
GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012 3
For your safety

• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.
This avoids damage to the plant or plant components.
• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the plant components and the
processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the plant. The plant operator must ensure
compliance with these regulations.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in this manual may not be carried out.

1 Safety precautions
1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning ......................................................... 5
1.2 Performing work on a plant ...................................................................... 8
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ......................... 8
1.2.2 Spare part requirements .......................................................................... 9
1.2.3 Electrical installation ................................................................................ 9
1.2.4 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 10
1.2.5 Start-up .................................................................................................. 11
1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off« ......................................................... 13

1.1 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesives and metal plates) are attached to all plants, on
the hood and frame of the respective plant component in such a way that they
are clearly visible.
All safety markings on the plant, control system and plant components must al-
ways be in perfect condition.
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the monitoring system as
adhesive labels:
Be sure to adhere to the plant

documentation!
• Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the plant must
have read and understood the doc-
umentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the installation
and be readily accessible to the op-
erators. It must be available to the
operators at all times!
Fig. 1
Disconnect power prior to start-

ing work!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the plant!
Before carrying out work on the

plant and electrical plant compo-
nents:
• Make sure the plant is at a standstill.
• Switch off all electrical appliances
via the main switch,
• Lock the installation to prevent it
Fig. 2 from being accidentally switched on.

Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency convert-
er, do not exceed the admissible
speed (see nameplate)!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 3
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the plant components

can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 4
Danger due to electrical current!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical com-

ponents:
via the main switch,
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can
carry voltage even when the main
Fig. 5 switch is off!
• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national orovisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or EVU
(Europäische Vereinigung für Unfallforschung und Unfallanalyse / European
Association for Accident Research and Analysis) institutions.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).

Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
Fig. 6

1.2 Performing work on a plant
The plant works reliably, provided that

it is operated and maintained in ac-
cordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 7
Special attention must be given to:

• assembly
• electrical installation
• before start-up
• start-up
• shut-down
• maintenance and repair
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
who
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
The operator of the plant

• is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.
• is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.
• must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

ing courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.
1.2.2 Spare part requirements
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
– safety risks,
– less durability and availability,
– increased service requirement.
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
spare parts, this may have legal consequences
Fig. 8 for the responsible persons. In such cases,
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or war-
ranty claims.
1.2.3 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
• The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
• Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfalia
Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 9
• Carry out voltage equalization.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low-voltage guideline 73/23/EWG
– Electro-magnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG.
– Guidelines of the classification societies.

1.2.4 Before start-up
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 10
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 11
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
• Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately by new or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 12

1.2.5 Start-up
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 13
In case of frequency converter

operation:
• Do not under any circumstances
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible speed
(see nameplate).
• The plant may only be operated with
an independent device for speed
limiting.
Fig. 14
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• Do not operate the equipment in ex-
plosion-hazarded areas.
Note:
This is except for plants equipped for
operation in explosion-hazarded areas.
Fig. 15

• The plant may be fed with inflam-

mable product only when being in-
ert-gas blanketed.
• The oxygen level has to be kept be-
low limit of inflammability by means
of an appropriate inert gas.
Fig. 16
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Wear protective clothing.
Fig. 17
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– components,
– vessels
o
reach temperatures over 80 C
o
(176 F).
Fig. 18

1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off«
• For shut-down refer to the chapter

"Operation".
Fig. 19

Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Qualification of staff
Edition: 0712
Designation: Qualification of staff

2 0712 / Qualification of staff
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488

0712 / Qualification of staff 3
Qualification of staff
Work on / with separators requires special skills.

• Provide staff with special training / instruction for the following tasks:
– Operation,
– Maintenance,
– Repair.
• Clearly define responsibilities:
– Work performed by authorised persons only.
Type and source of danger:

Storage, transportation, erection, operation and maintenance of the sep-
arator / system by insufficiently trained staff.
Possible consequences of failure to observe:

Danger Incorrect operation, assembly and handling errors can cause serious damage,
injury / death.
Measures to prevent the danger:

– Use Westfalia Separator service.
– Take advantage of training opportunities.
– Read/follow operating manuals / operating instructions.
Westfalia Separator offers a comprehensive range of training measures.
The owner-operator is responsible for the training of staff.
NOTE
Contact Westfalia Separator or your nearest representative for more infor-

mation.
The owner-operator must select staff who, for example, fulfil the following re-
quirements:
• Minimum requirement:
– Read / understand the markings on the separator,
– Read / understand user instructions.
• Further requirements and skills:
– Basic general technical skills.
– Content of the operating manual / operating instruction.
– Measures for the prevention of accidents.
– Planning and implementation of installation.
– Securing of loads.
– Planning and implementation of start-up.
– Operation of the separator / system.
– Cleaning of the separator / system.
– Maintenance of the separator / system.
– Repair of the separator / system.
– Storage in case of extended periods of stoppage.

– Decommissioning of the separator / system.

– Disposal of operating material.
– Disposal of the separator / system.
• Other suitability:
– Only assign tasks to dependable persons.
– Minimum age of 18 years.
• Only employ persons undergoing training / apprenticeship under supervision.
The required skills and knowledge depend on the

tasks assigned.
NOTE
We reserve all rights to these documents. They may only be passed onto third parties after obtaining prior consent from Westfalia Separator Group GmbH.


Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Pos : 1.2 /BA/Standard/00_Titel_R üc ks eite/D ec kblatt_CD _2016_Ins tall ationsric htlini en @ 34\mod_1465543921873_18.doc x @ 1343889 @ @ 1
Safety Precautions and User Information

Machine and Skid Components
No.: 9953-9001-010
Version: 19.10.2016
About this document 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
ORIGINAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Contents subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for remarks and sugges-

tions for improving the documentation. These can be sent
to:
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Titelseite ===
2 GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 About this document
1 About this document 5
1.1 Sphere of application ................................................................................. 6

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................... 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel .................................................................................. 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel..................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation ................................................................. 7
1.4 Symbols used ............................................................................................ 7
1.5 Structure of the safety references ............................................................. 7
2 Safety precautions 9
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Foreseeable use ...................................................................................... 10
2.3 Residual risk ............................................................................................ 11
2.4 Safety marking ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ....................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning .................................................................. 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ........................................................................... 13
2.8.1 Electrical energy ...................................................................................... 13
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances ................................................ 13
3 Description 15
3.1 Description and functional principles ....................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions ................................................................................ 16
4 Transport and storage 17
4.1 Transport ................................................................................................. 18

4.2 Storage .................................................................................................... 18
5 Assembly and installation 19
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation. ............................................... 20

5.2 Assembly ................................................................................................. 20
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection ............................................... 20
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection .............................................. 20
5.3 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 21
5.4 Pneumatic connection ............................................................................. 21
5.5 Ex zone .................................................................................................... 21
6 Repair 23
6.1 Cleaning and care.................................................................................... 24

6.2 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 24
6.3 Repair ...................................................................................................... 24
GEA Westfalia Separator Group 3

7 Decommissioning 25
7.1 Machine disposal ..................................................................................... 26
8 Spare parts 27
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ................................................................. 28

Pos : 3 /BA/Standar d/00_Übersc hriften/Kapi tel/01_Z u_di es em_D okument @ 0\mod_1315832097673_18.doc x @ 409 @ 1 @ 1

1 About this document

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................... 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel .................................................................................. 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel..................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation ................................................................. 7
1.4 Symbols used ............................................................................................ 7

Pos : 4 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Geltungs ber eich_Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e @ 38\mod_1472029688939_18.doc x @ 1383566 @ 2 @ 1
1.1 Sphere of application

These Safety precautions and User Information are an important aid to
• avoid risks,
• reduce repair costs and downtimes and
• prolong the lifecycle of components.
The term “component” will be used in singular although this document is applicable
to all components incorporated in the separators/plants.
To assure reliable information of the component, the safety precautions and user
information must be read and understood before carrying out the following work:
• Installation
• Transport, storage
• maintenance work (cleaning and care, maintenance, servicing, repair) and
• Disposal
For questions that cannot be solved with the aid of this documentation, please
check back with GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
Pos : 5 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Qualifi kation_des_Personals @ 38\mod_1472030224751_18.doc x @ 1383601 @ 233 @ 1
1.2 Qualification of the personnel

Using these safety and user instructions and direct handling of the component re-
quire specialist qualification of the staff. For identifying the qualification level GEA
Westfalia Separator Group uses the following standard terms:
1.2.1 Operating personnel

• Qualified staff have the necessary technical know-how and extensive experi-
ence enabling them to avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or
mechanical components. Knowledge of English is required.
• Trained staff are instructed or supervised by qualified staff to enable them to
avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or mechanical compo-
nents.
When installing, operating and testing the equipment, the staff has to adhere to the
safety rules applicable in the respective industry.
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel

Service and repair work require specialist knowledge and skills. Such work may be
carried out only by competent persons in terms of specialist knowledge and skills.
Documents in English are provided for this circle of persons. It is essential that this
circle of persons has an adequate command of English.
Pos : 6 /---Neue Seite--- @ 0\mod_1317283043850_0.doc x @ 550 @ @ 1

Pos : 7 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Struktur _der_D okumentati on @ 38\mod_1472030598771_18.doc x @ 1383638 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Structure of the documentation
WARNING Risk due to non-observance of the documentation
There is a threat of serious injuries if the instructions in all documents are not fol-
lowed.
 Refer to the instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down
instructions for skids.
 Pay attention to the safety precautions and user instructions in machine and skid
documentation.
 Refer to the component manual.
 All safety precautions and warning instructions given in the documents have to
be adhered to.
 Access to the documentation must always be assured at the deployment site.
The documentation for components normally consists of:

• Instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down instructions for
skids.
• Safety and user instructions on machine and plant documentation (this docu-
ment).
• Reference to component manual and / or technical datasheet of the component.
Pos : 8 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Ver wendete_Symbole @ 38\mod_1472032765550_18.doc x @ 1383675 @ 2 @ 1
1.4 Symbols used
This symbol gives information for better understanding the compo-

nent and its functions.
 The direction arrow marks work and/or operating steps. Keep to the order shown
from top to bottom.
• The bullet point marks lists.
Pos : 9 /BA/Standar d/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Sig nal wörter /Signal wörter_für _War nhi nweise @ 8\mod_1385644090593_18.doc x @ 475171 @ 2444 @ 1
1.5 Structure of the safety references

The centrifuge has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. Reference will be made in this manual to further potential risks by using
warnings where appropriate.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the centri-
fuge, plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or
probable injury or loss of life.
Signal words and their meaning
DANGER Denotes impending danger. If the preventive measures are not implemented, death
or serious injury will be the consequence.
WARNING Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, death or serious injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, minor injury may be the consequence.

NOTICE Denotes a potentially damaging situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals
This is the danger signal. It warns of injury risks.

 Comply with all measures marked with the danger signal to avoid injury or
death.
Structuring of the safety references according to the 5-point rule

1. Danger signals as a warning of injury risks.
2. Signal words signal the degree of risk.
3. The type and source of the hazard indicate from where the hazard origi-
nates.
4. Explanation of the hazard and consequences in the case of non-
compliance describe the threat and the consequences of human error.
5. Measures give instructions to avoid the hazard.
DANGER Type and source of the hazard
Explanation of the hazard and the consequences in the event of non-compliance.

 Measures to avert or minimise the hazard.
WARNING Type and source of the hazard

CAUTION Type and source of the hazard

NOTICE Type and source of the hazard

Pos : 11 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/02_Sicherheits hinweis e @ 0\mod_1315831900616_18.doc x @ 402 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Safety precautions
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Foreseeable use ...................................................................................... 10
2.3 Residual risk ............................................................................................ 11
2.4 Safety marking ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ....................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning .................................................................. 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ........................................................................... 13
2.8.1 Electrical energy ...................................................................................... 13
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances ................................................ 13

Safety precautions 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 12 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Allgemeines _Sic herheit @ 38\mod_1472109455088_18.doc x @ 1384479 @ @ 1
The machine or skid components have been designed state-of-the-art and in ac-
cordance with the recognised safety regulations. However, when using the compo-
nent, risks may arise for the user or third party or the component or other assets
might get impaired if it is
• operated by persons who have not been trained or briefed,
• not used for the intended application,
• not correctly repaired or maintained.
Pos : 13 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Besti mmungsgemäß e_Verwendung @ 38\mod_1472033909992_18.doc x @ 1383710 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Intended use
The component is incorporated in machines and plants.

Precise details on the function of the component are found in the component man-
ufacturer’s manual.
The type of medium specified in the data sheet as well as the limit values for pres-
sure and temperature of the medium as per the specification must be complied
with at all times (see data sheet of the component manufacturer).
The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have to
be observed and adhered to.
Usage in an explosion-hazarded zone is not permitted. The only exception: this is
confirmed in the order or is in the manual or data sheet of the manufacturer.
Pos : 14 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Vorhersehbar e_Fehlanwendung @ 38\mod_1472036879825_18.doc x @ 1383745 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Foreseeable use

A different usage or a usage which goes beyond the scope is not in compliance
with the intended use. The operator of the machine/skid is exclusively liable for any
damage resulting from such usage. This applies likewise for unauthorized modifi-
cations.
Non-intended use is the use of
• materials with excessively high temperature,
• materials with excessively high pressure,
• materials with smouldering, burning or sticky particles.
• highly explosive and pasty materials,
• materials that act chemically with the materials of the component.
Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the consent of the manufacturer are not in accordance with the in-
tended use.
WARNING Serious injury or death possible due to foreseeable misuse
Death or severe bodily injury to persons or damage to assets through disregarding

mechanical, chemical and electrical risks.
 The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have
to be observed and adhered to.

Pos : 16 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Res trisi ko @ 38\mod_1472037332032_18.doc x @ 1383780 @ 2 @ 1
2.3 Residual risk

An element of risk will remain when using the components, even when strictly ad-
hering to all safety rules and regulations.
All persons working with the component must be familiar with this residual risk and
follow all instructions that prevent accidents or damage.
DANGER Danger to life through electric voltage
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
 Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
 Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
 Secure against unintentional switching back on.
 Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
WARNING Serious injury due to non-use of personal protective gear
Fatal injuries due to non-use of personal protective gear!

 Make it compulsory for the maintenance personnel to wear personal protective
gear.
 Depending on the specific circumstances, wear safety shoes, protective gog-
gles, hearing protection etc.
 When surface temperatures of > 50 °C or < 0 °C (> 122 °F or < 32 °F) prevail,
wear temperature-resistant protective gloves when working on components.
Serious injury as a result of uncoordinated work in the area of the compo-

WARNING
nent
There is a threat of serious crushing, cuts and grazes as a result of uncoordinated
work in the area of the component.
 Be sure to work/move carefully in the area around the component.
Serious eye and/or skin injuries due to discharge of the medium under high
WARNING
pressure
Risk of burns when handling materials with abrasive or corrosive properties.
 Wear protective goggles or mask with eye protection to offset the risk of medium
spurting out.
Pos : 17 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Sic her heits kennz eichnung @ 38\mod_1472038802245_18.doc x @ 1383815 @ 2 @ 1

2.4 Safety marking

The following markings (adhesive and metal plates) are fastened to the component
or its accessories:
Warning of dangerous voltage
The sign is attached to the electric terminal box.

The terminal box may only be opened by a qualified electrician.
Nameplate The nameplate contains specific component specifications.
All safety markings must always be in perfect condition.

 Clean dirty safety markings.
 Replace damaged safety markings.
 Note the safety marking.
Pos : 18 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Sic her heits hinweise_Pers onal @ 38\mod_1472039143285_18.doc x @ 1383850 @ 2 @ 1
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel

Use only components that are in perfect technical condition in accordance with
their intended use, paying attention to safety and hazard awareness and following
the instructions in the documentation.
Eliminate all faults immediately, especially those that can negatively impact safety!
Clearly define and comply with competencies for activities relating to operation and
maintenance. Only in this way can mistakes -- especially in risk situations - be
avoided.
Do not fit the component until all protective and safety devices are fitted and opera-
tional. Do not remove them during operation.
In the event of functional faults or safety-relevant changes in the operating behav-
iour , shut down and secure the separator or skid. Have faults eliminated by quali-
fied personnel immediately.
Discharge leakage from hazardous materials so that no risk arises for the operator
or the environment.
Do not touch damaged, cracked and, in particular, live components.
Pos : 19 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Ei nstellar beiten_Inbetriebnahme @ 38\mod_1472039414715_18.doc x @ 1383885 @ 2 @ 1
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning

Through commissioning the component, the flow of medium can be changed or in-
terrupted. Prior to commissioning, make sure that possible adjustments cannot re-
sult in risks for persons or environment.
Check for correct functioning after each adjustment.
Implement suitable measures to avoid the crushing of limbs by moving actuators.
Pos : 20 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Instandhaltung @ 38\mod_1472109648159_18.doc x @ 1384513 @ 2 @ 1
2.7 Maintenance and servicing

When carrying out maintenance work, strictly adhere to all rules and regulations
applicable for handling the component or the medium (e.g. protective clothing, no
smoking).
Adhere to mandatory recurring tests and the intervals given in the documentation
for such tests and inspections.
Regularly check cables and hose connections, particularly on moving parts, for
damage and replace if necessary.
Pos : 21 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Spezielle_Gefahrenar ten @ 38\mod_1472039510559_18.doc x @ 1383920 @ 233 @ 1

2.8 Special types of hazard
2.8.1 Electrical energy

Never carry out work on live parts!
Do not modify constructional features in a way that impairs safety. Do not reduce
clearances and creepage distances through insulation.
Check the condition of cables on a regular basis and replace if necessary.
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances

When handling oils, fats and other chemical substances, pay attention to and com-
ply with the valid regulations and safety data sheets issued by the manufacturers of
these substances regarding storage, handling, use and disposal!
First-aid measures after skin contact:
 Take off all contaminated pieces of clothing.
 Rinse off the skin thoroughly with water or take a shower.
 consult a doctor immediately.
First-aid measures after eye contact:

 Rinse out with plenty of water.
 consult a doctor immediately.
Pos : 23 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/03_Besc hr eibung @ 0\mod_1315902879297_18.doc x @ 467 @ 1 @ 1


9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Description
3 Description
3.1 Description and functional principles ....................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions ................................................................................ 16

Description 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 24 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Bes chr eibung _und_F unkti ons weis e @ 38\mod_1472040215048_18.doc x @ 1383957 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 Description and functional principles

The detailed description and functional principle of the respective component are
given in the corresponding component manual.
Pos : 25 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Eins atz bedi ngungen @ 38\mod_1472040299849_18.doc x @ 1383992 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Operating conditions

The housing and sealing materials are selected to suit the operating conditions.
The operating conditions have a major impact on the life of the component.
 Technical characteristics and the essential permissible limit values, especially
for pressure and temperature of the medium, are given in the manufacturer’s
manual.
 Care must be taken that the component is only used where the rating criteria
comply with the values stated on the nameplate. Proper and correct transport
and storage is essential.
 Faults arising from moving elements must be prevented by taking appropriate
measures.
Pos : 27 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/05_Trans port_und_Lager ung @ 0\mod_1326207116268_18.doc x @ 12410 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Transport and storage
4 Transport and storage
4.1 Transport ................................................................................................. 18

4.2 Storage .................................................................................................... 18

Transport and storage 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 28 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Tr ans port @ 38\mod_1472040425733_18.doc x @ 1384027 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 Transport
The following conditions must be observed:
WARNING Danger through contact with substances hazardous to health
The component can come in contact with substances potentially harmful to health
during operation.
 De-contaminate the component prior to packing and/or transport.
• Use hoists to transport components that are too heavy to move by hand.
• Screw eye bolts or lugs into the component, attach properly to the hoist and then
transport the components.
• When using lifting straps, place them around the component, provide sharp-
edge protection if required, and watch for proper weight distribution.
• Protect the component against outside force during transport (impacts, vibra-
tions etc.).
• Protect the sealing surfaces of the connections against damage.
• Do not remove the corrosion protection layer.
Pos : 29 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Lag erung @ 38\mod_1472040914661_18.doc x @ 1384062 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Storage
Protect the component against external impacts and contamination.
• Keep the storage room dry and dust-free.
• Avoid condensate formation.
• Protect connection openings against dirt.
Pos : 31 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/06_M ontage_und_Installati on @ 0\mod_1326806855797_18.doc x @ 12953 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Assembly and installation
5 Assembly and installation
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation. ............................................... 20

5.2 Assembly ................................................................................................. 20
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection ............................................... 20
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection .............................................. 20
5.3 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 21
5.4 Pneumatic connection ............................................................................. 21
5.5 Ex zone .................................................................................................... 21

Assembly and installation 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 32 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Allgemeines_Installati on @ 38\mod_1472041207296_18.doc x @ 1384097 @ @ 1
• Refer to the component manual for specific information on the component.

• Before installation, read and follow the instructions in the chapter “Safety pre-
cautions”.
• Observe accident prevention regulations!
Pos : 33 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/M aß nahmen_vor_der _Installati on @ 38\mod_1472041459351_18.doc x @ 1384132 @ 2 @ 1
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation.
CAUTION Injuries as a result of non-compliance with safety requirements
Transport and/or storage may result in damage to the packaging to the extent that
the component no longer meets the safety requirements.
 Check for potential damage prior to fitting.
 Do not fit a damaged component.
Before fitting, pay attention to the following:

 Check the piping and component for absolute cleanliness.
 Remove the protective caps from the caps only just before fitting.
 Do not damage the sealing surfaces or threads.
Pos : 34 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/M ontage @ 38\mod_1472042030055_18.doc x @ 1384167 @ 2433 @ 1
5.2 Assembly
 Remove all the packaging parts directly before fitting.
 No dirt particles must be allowed to enter the component.
 When required, keep to the flow of direction shown on the component.
After fitting
 Perform a leakage and function test.
 Create the specified operating status.
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection

 Use a suitable sealant.
 Lay the piping so that no flow of forces runs through the component.
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection

 Fit the specified screws. Use all flange bores provided.
 Fit suitable gaskets and center between flanges.
 Tighten the screws evenly and crosswise to avoid distortion. A pipe must under
no circumstances be pulled against the component.
 Pay attention to correct seating of the gaskets.
 Tighten the screws with the specified torque.
Pos : 35 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Elektrisc her _Ansc hlus s @ 38\mod_1472042244966_18.doc x @ 1384205 @ 2 @ 1

5.3 Electrical connection

For components with electrical accessories.
DANGER Danger to life through electric voltage
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
 Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
 Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
 Secure against unintentional switching back on.
 Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
 Ground the component in accordance with the local regulations.
 Comply with the protective measures when connecting the component in ac-
cordance with the provisions of the responsible power company.
Pos : 36 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Pneumatisc her _Ansc hlus s @ 38\mod_1472042436028_18.doc x @ 1384240 @ 2 @ 1
5.4 Pneumatic connection

Actuate only with conditioned compressed air. Install a compressed air control unit
upstream if required.
Pos : 37 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Ex-Z one @ 38\mod_1472042494120_18.doc x @ 1384278 @ 2 @ 1
5.5 Ex zone
Usage in an explosion-hazarded zone is not permitted. The only exception: this is
confirmed in the order or is in the manual or technical data sheet of the manufac-
turer.
Pos : 39 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/12_Instands etzung @ 0\mod_1328003270613_18.doc x @ 14220 @ 1 @ 1


9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Repair
6 Repair
6.1 Cleaning and care.................................................................................... 24

6.2 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 24
6.3 Repair ...................................................................................................... 24

Repair 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 40 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Allgemei nes_Ins tandhaltung @ 38\mod_1472042876993_18.doc x @ 1384313 @ @ 1
This chapter is divided into the sections cleaning and care, maintenance and re-
pair.
 Before carrying out maintenance and repair, read and follow the instructions in
the chapter “Safety precautions”.
Pos : 41 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/R einig ung_und_Pfleg e @ 38\mod_1472042973596_18.doc x @ 1384347 @ 2 @ 1
6.1 Cleaning and care
NOTICE Damage to the component due to a dirt layer coating
Blockage of function openings. Reduction of heat dissipation.

 Arrange for efficient covering of the component when carrying out dirty work
near the separator or the plant (e.g. laying concrete, brickwork, painting, sand-
blasting).
 Clean the component regularly.
NOTICE Functional fault and damage to the component
There is a threat of damage to property due to improper cleaning.

 When cleaning with aqueous cleaning agents, pay attention to the type of pro-
tection of the electric components. In case of doubt, do not use it!
 Do not use aggressive detergents. The latter can attack metal and plastic sur-
faces as well hose connections.
 Never clean sensitive components with coarse brushes under strong mechanical
pressure.
 Functional
Pos : 42 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Wartung @ 38\mod_1472043384840_18.doc x @ 1384382 @ 2 @ 1
6.2 Maintenance
 The maintenance intervals have to be re-determined (shortened) by the operator
according to prevailing operating conditions.
 Check or maintain the component for safety reasons. Note the following mini-
mum requirements:
- Regular check of the outer condition of the component and the accessories.
- Regular actuation so as not to impair the smoothness of action of all movable
parts through excessively long standstill times.
Pos : 43 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Ins tandsetz ung @ 38\mod_1472043537652_18.doc x @ 1384417 @ 2 @ 1
6.3 Repair
NOTICE Material damage due to mechanical stressing of the components
Tread load, stress through connected pipes, excessively high ambient temperature
destroy the component.
 Fit without using force. Avoid stresses.
 No additional stress, e.g. tread load (use as unauthorized climbing aid).
 No welding and heat treatment.
 No tool machining (e.g. drilling).
Pos : 45 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/13_Auß erbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1328016515064_18.doc x @ 14509 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Decommissioning
7 Decommissioning
7.1 Machine disposal ..................................................................................... 26

Decommissioning 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 46 /BA/Standard/13_Außer betriebnahme/Z entrifuge_ents orgen/Maschi ne_ents orgen @ 16\mod_1416303007584_18.doc x @ 869138 @ 2 @ 1
7.1 Machine disposal

When the machine has reached the end of its useful service life, the plant operator
is responsible for proper and correct disposal.
It is recommended to commission a company specialized in the disposal of ma-
chines or to obtain information from GEA Westfalia Separator service.
 Observe the local disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Have electrical connections disconnected by qualified personnel, e.g. electri-
cians.
IMPORTANT: Residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines can cause injury. Pro-
tective clothing must therefore be worn when dismantling lines.
WARNING Danger of acid and alkali burns
After cleaning, hot lye and acid residues can still be in the machine and the pipe-
lines. When working on the machine, contact with the lyes and acids can cause
burns.
 Wear acid-resistant safety gear, e.g. safety goggles, safety gloves, protective
overalls or protective suits.
 Take special care.
 Observe the plant operator's SOPs on handling acids and lyes as well as local
disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Drain residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines into suitable vessels and dis-
pose of them properly.
 Observe regulations on product contact.
 Dismantle feed lines and utility lines, clean superficial impurities caused by lubri-
cants or product with suitable media and dispose of separately.
 Dismantle all seals and non-metallic materials, clean them to remove lubricants
and dispose of them separately or recycle.
 Separate and sort metal parts and recycle them.
Pos : 48 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/14_Ersatzteile @ 0\mod_1328016648937_18.doc x @ 14543 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Spare parts
8 Spare parts

Spare parts 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 49 /BA/Standard/14_Ers atzteile/Original _Ersatzteile/Original _Ers atzteile_M asc hine @ 17\mod_1416476908928_18.doc x @ 872255 @ 2 @ 1
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts.

All spare parts, wear parts and operating materials are originally packed by GEA
Westfalia Separator.
The original packing is provided with the

marking shown.
Fig. 1
WARNING Danger due to defective spare parts
Non-original or unauthorized parts or supplies endanger the personnel working on

the machine.
Non-genuine or non-approved spare parts or operating materials reduce the avail-
ability of the machine.
 Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator to assure the oper-
ating safety and optimum availability of the machine.

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Spare parts
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt ===

Pos : 52 /BA/Standard/00_Ti tel _Rüc ks eite/Ruec ks eite_CD_2016 @ 33\mod_1463040149761_18.doc x @ 1329773 @ @ 1
We live our values.

Excellence • Passion • Integrity • Responsibility • GEA-versity
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations in more than 50 countries.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 index.
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ruec ks eite ===
Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
Installation guidelines
Separator
No. 2058-9601-040
Edition 0117
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT

tions for improving the documentation. Remarks and sug-
gestions can be sent to:
GEA Deutschland
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com


1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 6
2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 10
3.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 12

3.2 Transport in the transport packaging ....................................................... 12
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist .............................................................. 12
3.2.1 Transport with fork-lift trucks ................................................................... 13
3.3 Transporting the separator ...................................................................... 13
3.4 Storage after delivery .............................................................................. 14
3.4.1 Separator ................................................................................................. 14
3.4.2 Control cabinet......................................................................................... 15
3.5 Preservation measures on site ................................................................ 15
4 Installation 17
4.1 Installation ................................................................................................ 18
5 Separator 19
5.1 Space requirement for the separator ....................................................... 20

5.2 Bowl weights ............................................................................................ 22
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators........................................................... 23
5.4 Ventilation of the installation room........................................................... 23
5.5 Foundation ............................................................................................... 24
5.5.1 Dimension specifications for foundation frame construction of the
plant operator........................................................................................... 25
5.5.2 Rating the profile thickness ..................................................................... 28
5.6 Installing the separators .......................................................................... 29
5.6.1 Separators on concrete foundation ......................................................... 29
5.7 Screw torques .......................................................................................... 32
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................... 32
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ......................................... 33
5.8 Vibrations ................................................................................................. 34
6 Operating and hood flush water 35
6.1 Operating, hood flush water discharge lines .......................................... 36

6.2 Water quality ............................................................................................ 36
6.3 Supply pressure and temperature ........................................................... 37
6.4 Rating the water lines .............................................................................. 38
6.5 Operating water quantity ......................................................................... 41

7 Solids tank 43
7.1 Solid tank aeration and deaeration .......................................................... 44

7.2 Solid discharge lines ................................................................................ 45
7.2.1 Solid discharge lines with shut-off flap .................................................... 47
8 Electrical installation 49
8.1 Installing control cabinets ........................................................................ 50

8.1.1 Installation site and operation .................................................................. 50
9 Control 51
9.1.1 Timer overview ........................................................................................ 52

9.1.2 Ejection diagram ...................................................................................... 53
10 Spare parts 55




This document represents an integral part of the contract when procuring separator
installations and is part of the complete documentation. The document describes
the specifications for the design, manufacture and implementation of separator
systems.
For the plant operator, this document is considered to be a basis for planning and
executing the installation of separator installations.
1.2 Other applicable documents

• P&ID (Piping & Instrumentation Diagram)
• Installation diagram and equipment list
• Dimensioned drawing
Information on space requirement for operation and maintenance, minimum
clearance from walls/pillars or other machines
• Centrifuge operating manual
• Control unit manual
• Instruction manuals for components from other manufacturers such as motors
and valves.
• Further order-specific documents if relevant.
1.3 Structure of the safety references

The centrifuge has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. Reference will be made in this manual to further potential risks by using
warnings where appropriate.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the centri-
fuge, plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or
probable injury or loss of life.
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals

death.


nates.



NOTICE Type and source of the hazard

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 10

2.1 Materials
• All components are functional and of the best possible materials in terms of suit-
ability for the application.

3.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 12

3.2 Transport in the transport packaging ....................................................... 12
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist .............................................................. 12
3.2.1 Transport with fork-lift trucks ................................................................... 13
3.3 Transporting the separator ...................................................................... 13
3.4 Storage after delivery .............................................................................. 14
3.4.1 Separator ................................................................................................. 14
3.4.2 Control cabinet......................................................................................... 15
3.5 Preservation measures on site ................................................................ 15

3.1 Safety during transport

When the centrifuge is transported with hoists and fork-lift trucks, hazards can oc-
cur. Risk of injury and material damage are a threat when unqualified persons are
deployed and unsuitable or damaged lifting gear is used.
Therefore, pay attention to the following points during transportation:
 Assign only qualified personnel with the task of transporting the centrifuge.
 Use approved and intact lifting gear and hoists for transportation.
 Use only suitable hoists with adequate lifting capacity.
- For the weight of the centrifuge, refer to the separator manual, chapter "Tech-
nical Data / Weights".
3.2 Transport in the transport packaging
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist
 Always secure the goods to be trans-

ported in a suitable way against slip-
ping and tilting.
 When transporting the centrifuge in the
transport packaging, use only suitable
vehicles or suitable cranes.
 Ensure an even pressure distribution
on the bottom panel.
Fig. 1
Packaging example: Centrifuge with belt

drive
Fig. 2

3.2.1 Transport with fork-lift trucks
 Remove side walls, filling material and

all loose parts.
 Use the bottom panel of the transport
packaging as a pallet for transporting
the centrifuge with a fork-lift truck.
 Ensure an even pressure distribution
on the bottom panel.
Fig. 3
3.3 Transporting the separator
WARNING Danger of injury due to overturning of the separator during transport
Separators and their transport packaging can cause injuries through impacts and
crushing and tilting or slipping.
 Transport only by briefed and assigned persons.
 Pay attention to separator weight specifications (see separator manual, chapter
"Technical Data".
 Comply with the instructions for safe transportation.
 Secure separators adequately against slipping and tilting.
 Refer to the chapter "Transport" in the separator manual for suitable suspension
points and correct fastening methods.
 Remove the bowl from the frame be-

fore transporting the separator.
IMPORTANT: The separator is normally

delivered without installed bowl.
 Refer to the instruction manual.
Fig. 4

3.4 Storage after delivery

• The original transport packaging must not be stored in the open.
• All parts must be stored in their original transport packaging in a suitable place
until commissioning.
• IMPORTANT: When stored under proper conditions, all separator parts are ad-
equately protected for maximum one year. A storage duration longer than 12
months is only possible after prior consultation with the manufacturer.
Pay attention to the following notes on storage and transport packaging:
• Handle delicate goods with care.
• Protect the goods against moisture and humidity.
• Protect the goods against heat.
• Pay attention when erecting the goods.
3.4.1 Separator
• If the separator is not installed immediately after delivery, it must be stored in the
original transport packaging.
• The storage location must be a closed, dry room.
• The storage temperature must not be lower than 5 C (41 F) and must not ex-
o o
o o
ceed 50 C (122 F).
• A storage duration longer than 12 months is only possible after prior consultation
with the manufacturer.
- If the machine is in storage for longer than 12 months, the maintenance inter-
vals specified in the separator manual must be adhered to.

3.4.2 Control cabinet

IMPORTANT: Improper storage discharges the manufacturer or supplier from the
warranty obligation.
• If the control cabinet is not installed immediately after delivery, it must be stored
in the original transport packaging in a protected place.
• The control cabinet must not come in contact with dusty and corrosive atmos-
phere.
• The storage location must be a closed, dry room.
• The control cabinet may not be exposed to foreign heat sources (e.g. direct sun-
light, heater fans etc.).
Additional requirements to be met by the place of storage
Ambient temperatures +5 to +45 °C (41 to 113 °F)

Air humidity max. 50 % at 40 °C (104 °F)
max. 90 % at 20 °C (68 °F)
Transport temperatures -25 to +55 °C ( -13 to 131 °F)
3.5 Preservation measures on site
After installation until commissioning

• The spindle and drive chamber are lubricated at the factory. This affords them
protection for 12 months.
• After this time (12 months) has elapsed, it must be checked at 12 month inter-
vals whether all roller bearings and the spindle are adequately lubricated.
• Required lubricants:
- Shell Oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE 50) for roller bearings and spindle
- Roller bearing grease for the spindle cone.

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Installation
4 Installation
4.1 Installation ................................................................................................ 18

Installation 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
4.1 Installation
• The prevailing regulations and standards of classification societies or other au-

thorized bodies must be complied with.
• All lubricating points and the drive housing of the separator must be easily ac-
cessible without having to remove pipes or gratings.
• All operating elements must be within easy reach of the operator and at an ap-
propriate height.
• Operating elements must not be mounted higher than 1800 mm above the work-
ing platform.
• All devices must be arranged so that they do not cramp the working area and so
that they can be safely serviced and operated.
• All fixed pipes and fittings must be securely attached in order to minimize vibra-
tions and movements.
• Contact points and supports must be attached in such a way that pipes can still
move in the event of temperature variations without causing stresses in the
lines.
• Pipes and pipe joints must be accessible for maintenance.
• Pipes may not be used to support electric distributors or devices.
• These installation guidelines do not apply for small, specially manufactured
components whose durability, accessibility and operation are not impacted.
These components must be mounted in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer.
Protective sleeve for cables
 Important: Avoid abrasion.

- Fit protective sleeve (1) along the
full length of the cable harness (con-
tact points to the machine).
- Adapt the length of the hose (1).
Fig. 5

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator
5 Separator
5.1 Space requirement for the separator ....................................................... 20

5.2 Bowl weights ............................................................................................ 22
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators........................................................... 23
5.4 Ventilation of the installation room........................................................... 23
5.5 Foundation ............................................................................................... 24
plant operator........................................................................................... 25
5.5.2 Rating the profile thickness ..................................................................... 28
5.6 Installing the separators .......................................................................... 29
5.6.1 Separators on concrete foundation ......................................................... 29
5.7 Screw torques .......................................................................................... 32
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................... 32
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ......................................... 33
5.8 Vibrations ................................................................................................. 34

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
5.1 Space requirement for the separator

• IMPORTANT: Apart from the feed and discharge pipes of the separator, ni pipes
may be laid in the operating area.
• it must be ensured that the separator is readily accessible from all sides.
• Minimum clearance to walls of buildings and other machines must be observed.
- All machine parts must be readily accessible for maintenance and repair work.
• Before installing the separator, pay special attention to the removal dimension g
of the electric motors.
The operating range is displayed hatched in the following diagrams. See the follo-
wing table to determine the operating range.
Front view of separator
Fig. 6
Top view of separator
Fig. 7

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator
Range of operation for separators
Separator Dimensions [mm]

(1) (1)(2) (1)(3)
a b c d e f g h
…SE 5-…-… 790 400 800 300 300 300 1200 850
…SC 10-…-…
890 460 900 300 300 300 1400 1000
…SE 10-…-…
…SC 18-…-…
1400 540 1010 300 300 300 1650 1100
…SE 20-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SE 40-…-… 1700 790 1260 300 300 300 2100 1450
…SE 50-…-…
…SC 60-…-…
…SE 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
2010 940 1500 300 300 300 2250 1650
…SE 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SC 110-…-…
…SD 110-…-… 2440 1270 1850 300 300 300 2750 1800
…SE 120-…-…
…TC 5-…-… 650 340 800 300 300 300 1200 850
…TC 10-…-… 690 410 900 300 300 300 1400 1000
…TC 20-…-… 810 470 1010 300 300 300 1650 1100
…TC 40-…-… 1060 630 1260 300 300 300 2100 1450
…TC 80-…-… 1650 720 1500 300 300 300 2250 1650
(1)
Height specification without foundation frame.
(2)
The bowl can be transported over a machine of identical type.
(3)
The bowl can be lifted out of the machine.

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
5.2 Bowl weights
Hoist rating specifications
Fig. 8
(1)
Separator b H Bowl weight [kg]
…SE 5-…-… 220 225 30
…SC 10-…-…
260 275 50
…SE 10-…-…
…SC 18-…-…
315 320 65
…SE 20-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SE 40-…-… 440 450 205
…SE 50-…-…
…SC 60-…-…
…SE 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
560 570 400
…SE 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SC 110-…-…
…SD 110-…-… 660 645 660
…SE 120-…-…
…TC 20-…-…
315 320 52
…TC 40-…-…
…TC 80-…-… 560 570 545
(1)
The bowl height can vary by a few millimetres depending on the version

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators

• The hoisting equipment must be mobile or swivel-type.
• The hoist be rated to enable the following:
- Vertical removal and fitting of the bowl (see chapter “Space requirement for
the separator", table - dimensions g).
- Horizontal removal and fitting of the drive motor (see chapter “Space require-
ment for the separator", table - dimensions g).
5.4 Ventilation of the installation room

• The air supply and exhaust lines must be fitted correctly:
- Efficient aeration and deaeration of the separator room.
- No vacuum in the air intake lines and air exhaust lines.
o
- Do not exceed the permitted room temperature (normally max. 45 C
o
(113 F) ).
IMPORTANT:
• Dimensioning of the electrical devices is crucial in this connection.
• If the permissible temperatures are exceeded, special action must be taken. The
maintenance intervals and measures may have to be adapted accordingly.
• it must always be ensured that the vent (2) is present.

- The vent (2) can only be dispensed with in exceptional circumstances and af-
ter prior consultation with GEA Westfalia Separator.
• In the case of separators featuring an ejection system, the operating water dis-
charge (3) must be provided with a siphon.
- Adhere to the dimensions specified on the corresponding dimensioned draw-
ing.
• In the case of separator versions …-02-… and …-03-…, that feature gravity dis-
charge of one phase, this discharge must also be immersed (see the example
below).
- Adhere to the dimensions specified on the corresponding dimensioned draw-
ing.

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
Installation example for ventilation systems for separators
Separator version
…-01-… and …-06-…
Fig. 9
1 Aeration
2 Vent
3 Siphon (operating water discharge)
Separator version
…-02-… and …-03-…
Fig. 10
1 Aeration
2 Vent
3 Siphon (operating water discharge)
4 Siphon (product discharge, light or heavy phase)
5.5 Foundation
• To avoid the influence of foreign vibrations, foundations and foundation frames
for separators which have contact with other foundations must not exceed the
specified vibration values (see chapter "Vibrations").
• The installation surface must be stable as otherwise the separator could be se-
verely damaged by vibrations or falling down.
• It is recommended to use a foundation frame from GEA Westfalia Separator.
IMPORTANT: If the foundation frame does not have an appropriate rigidity and
bending strength, this can result in loss of warranty.

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator

plant operator
Separators with rubber-metal cushioned feet
Foundation frame
A Center of the machine foot
Fig. 11
Dimensions [mm]
Separator
a b Thread diameter
…SC 10-…-… 220 350
M 12
…SC 18-…-… 270 425
…SC 40-…-… 380 555
M16
…SC 60-…-… 460 700

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
Separators with two fastening screws
Foundation frame
Fig. 12

a b c Thread diameter
…SE 5-…-… 220 326 104 M 10
…SE 10-…-… 220 350 104 M 10
…SE 20-…-… 270 425 104 M 10
…TC 5-…-… 220 326 104 M 10
…TC 10-…-… 220 350 104 M 10
…TC 20-…-… 270 425 104 M 10

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator
Separators with two fastening screws
Foundation frame
Fig. 13
Dimensions [mm]
Separator
a b c d Thread diameter
…SE 40-…-…
380 555 132 132 M 12
…SE 50-…-…
…SE 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
…SE 70-…-… 460 700 132 132 M 12
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SC 110-…-… 620 850 150 150 M 12
…SE 120-…-…
…TC 40-…-… 380 555 132 132 M 12
…TC 80-…-… 460 700 132 132 M 12

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
5.5.2 Rating the profile thickness
• The foundation frames must be de-

signed so that dimensions a and b in
• When other parts are used, the mo-

the table below are adhered to.
ment of resistance of the U-sections

may not be below the value stipulated
• The foundation frame must have a

in DIN 1026.
rigidity with a maximum permitted de-
• The separator feet must be fastened at

flection of 1:1000.
the neutral axis of the foundation

frame.
Fig. 14

a b
…SE 5-…-…
…SC 10-…-…
…SE 10-…-… 120 55
…SE 18-…-…
…SE 20-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SE 40-…-…
…SE 50-…-…
…SC 60-…-…
…SE 60-…-… 160 65
…SD 70-…-…
…SE 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SC 110-…-… 220 80
…SE 120-…-…
…TC 5-…-…
…TC 10-…-… 120 55
…TC 20-…-…
…TC 40-…-…
160 65
…TC 80-…-…

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator
5.6 Installing the separators

The following chapters will show how the different separators are installed.
5.6.1 Separators on concrete foundation

The foundation frame is secured on a concrete foundation. The required fastening
materials are supplied to suit the order.
DANGER Risk of accident due to suspended loads
There is risk of fatal injury through raised and unsecured loads.

 Never stand under suspended loads.
 Use only hoists with adequate lifting capacity and suitable load suspension de-
vices.
• Align the foundation frame in accordance with the dimensioned drawing or in-
stallation diagram.
• Drill fastening holes in the foundation in accordance with the assembly diagram
or dimensioned diagram and the screws or anchor bolts supplied (if required).

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
Separators with rubber-metal cushioned feet
 Screw four anchor bolts (2) into the

foundation.
 Embed the foundation frame (1) in the
floor and align it horizontally.
- The foundation frame must be abso-
lutely level!
 Fasten and tighten the foundation
frame (1) with four hexagon nuts (3).
Fig. 15
 Grout in the foundation frame up to A with grouting compound, e.g. cement mor-
tar.
 The four cams (4) must protrude 20 mm out of the foundation.
 Let the grouting compound set hard.
 Screw the feet (6) onto the foundation frame (1).
 Place the separator (5) on the feet (6).
 Tighten hex head screws (7) firmly.
Separator Hex head screw

(7)
…SC 10-…-…
M 12
…SC 18-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
M 16
…SC 60-…-…

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator
All other separators
 Screw four anchor bolts (2) into the

foundation.
 Embed the foundation frame (1) in the
floor and align it horizontally.
- The foundation frame must be abso-
lutely level!
 Fasten and tighten the foundation
Fig. 16
 Grout in the foundation frame up to A with grouting compound, e.g. cement mor-
tar.
 The four cams (4) must protrude 20 mm out of the foundation.
 Let the grouting compound set hard.
 Align separator (5) with feet (7) on the foundation frame (1).
 Screw in hex head screws (6) firmly.
 Tighten hex head screws (8) firmly.
Separator Hex head screw Hex head screw

(6) (8)
…SE 5-…-…
…SE 10-…-… M 10 M 12
…SE 20-…-…
…SE 40-…-…
…SE 50-…-…
…SE 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
…SE 70-…-…
M 12 M 16
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SC 110-…-…
…SE 120-…-…
…TC 10-…-…
M 10 M 12
…TC 20-…-…
…TC 40-…-…
M 12 M 16
…TC 80-…-…

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
5.7 Screw torques

The torques apply for the following conditions:
• Metric screws with coarse-pitch threads.
- Hex head screws according to DIN EN ISO 4014
- Allen screws according to DIN EN ISO 4762
• Through holes according to DIN ISO 20273 (medium).
• Greased screws (total minimum coefficient of friction = 0.10).
• Torque wrench with a scatter (tolerance) of ±10 %.
• Material combinations:
- Steel-steel
- Stainless steel-stainless steel.
IMPORTANT: Screws whose torque deviates from this table are marked with the
required torque in the manual.
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm)
Super
A2-70 A2-80 Hastelloy
Strength class 8.8 10.9 12.9 Duplex
A4-70 A4-80 2.4819
1.4501
Yield stress/yield strength 640 450
940 1100 600 550 360
in N/mm² 660 250
Parameter Torque in Nm
M4 2.6 3.9 4.5 1.9 2.5 1.9 1.5
M5 5.2 7.6 8.9 3.6 4.8 3.6 2.9
M6 9.0 13.2 15.4 6.3 8.4 6.3 5.0
M8 21.6 31.8 37.2 15.2 20.2 15.2 12.1
M 10 43.0 63.0 73.0 30.0 40.0 30.0 24.0
M 12 73.0 108.0 126.0 52.0 69.0 52.0 42.0
M 14 117.0 172.0 201.0 82.0 109.0 82.0 65.0
M 16 180.0 264.0 309.0 126.0 168.0 126.0 100.0
M 18 259.0 369.0 432.0 177.0
M 20 363.0 517.0 605.0 248.0
M 22 495.0 704.0 824.0 187.0
M 24 625.0 890.0 1041.0 237.0
M 30 1246.0 1795.0 2077.0 472.0
M 36 2164.0 3082.0 3607.0
Screws made of Super Duplex 1.4501 are treated like A4-70 screws while neglect-
ing the higher yield stress.
In the case of screws larger than M 16, an individual drop in strength due to the
degree of deformation of the screw raw material and the thread rolling procedure
must be taken into account.

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Separator
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb)

The following formula is used to convert the torques (Ma) from “Nm“ to “inlb“:
Mainlb = MaNm x 8.85
Example:
Mainlb = Wanted (screw tightening torques in “inch-pound”)

MaNm = 50 (screw tightening torques in “Newtonmeter“)
Mainlb = 50 Nm x 8.85
Mainlb = 442.5 inlb

Separator 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
5.8 Vibrations
Fig. 17
The following vibration values apply for all separators:
Tolerable vibration values at the separator supporting sur-

face (measured at separator standstill and for separators in
1 mm/s max. 2.0
shipboard operation, in the case of normal shipboard opera-
tion).
Permitted vibration value at the reference point (measured
2 mm/s 4.5
during operation of the separators).
Limit values for Vibro 1 with installed vibration sensor (the
mm/s 4.5
vibration sensor is fitted in this area).
3
Limit values for Vibro 2 with installed vibration sensor (the
mm/s 7.0
vibration sensor is fitted in this area).

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Operating and hood flush water
6 Operating and hood flush water
6.1 Operating, hood flush water discharge lines .......................................... 36

6.2 Water quality ............................................................................................ 36
6.3 Supply pressure and temperature ........................................................... 37
6.4 Rating the water lines .............................................................................. 38
6.5 Operating water quantity ......................................................................... 41

Operating and hood flush water 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
6.1 Operating, hood flush water discharge lines

• Operating, dirty water and hood flush water discharge lines may not be led into
public sewage systems, draining ditches and waters.
- Comply with environmental protection legislation.
6.2 Water quality

• IMPORTANT: When desalinated water or condensate is used, corrosion must
be reckoned with.
• The use of boiler feed water is not permitted.
• land water is not recommended since its degree of hardness is normally too
high.
• The water must be as pure as possible and meet the following standards:
Hardness
- up to 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature < 12° dH
- above 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature < 6° dH
The different hardness values are linked by the following relationships:
1° dH = 1.79° fH = 1.25° eH = 17.9 ppm CaCO3
pH 6.5 – 7.5
Chloride ions < 100 mg/l
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l
Particle size max. 50 µm
dH = German hardness | fH = French hardness | eH = English hardness

6.3 Supply pressure and temperature
Fig. 18
IMPORTANT: The pressure downstream of the water pressure reducer must be

set to 0.25 Mpa (2.5 bar) when the operating water valve is open.
 Refer to the dimensioned drawing of the separator.
• The supply pressure and the temperature for the operating, filling and displace-
ment water must meet the following specifications:
Supply pressure 0.3 – 1.0 MPa (3 – 10 bar)

Temperature min. 10 °C (50 °F)
max. 85 °C (185 °F)

6.4 Rating the water lines

• Manifolds must be dimensioned in such a way that the separators are always
supplied with an adequate water volume to ensure smooth operation.
• The manifolds must be laid in such a way as to enable fitting and removing the
solenoid valves and filters,
• The maximum length between the pressure reducer and solenoid valve must not
exceed 5 m.
• Feed line R to the separator with one

consumer (see the following table).
Fig. 19 1 Separator
Fig. 20 2 Separators

With two separators:

IMPORTANT: When two separators request water simultaneously, the water sup-
ply can be dimensioned as for one separator.
• The manifold must have a nominal width S (see following table).
• The feed lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see the follow-
ing table).
Separator Nominal diameter DN

Manifold Feed line
S R
…SE 5-…-…
…SC 10-…-…
…SE 10-…-… 25
…SC 18-…-…
…SE 20-…-…
…SE 40-…-…
…SE 50-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SC 60-…-… 20
…SE 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
32
…SE 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SC 110-…-…
…SE 120-…-…

With three and more separators

• The manifold must have a nominal width S (see following table).
• The feed lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see the follow-
ing table).
Separator Nominal diameter DN

Manifold Feed line
S R
…SE 5-…-…
…SC 10-…-…
…SE 10-…-…
…SC 18-…-…
…SE 20-…-…
…SE 40-…-…
…SE 50-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SC 60-…-… 32 20
…SE 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
…SE 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SC 110-…-…
…SE 120-…-…

6.5 Operating water quantity

For exact program control, the following water quantities are required in the mani-
fold:
Separator Solenoid valve V3 for operating wa-

ter [l/s]
…SE 5-…-…
…SC 10-…-…
…SE 10-…-… 0.5
…SC 18-…-…
…SE 20-…-…
…SE 40-…-…
…SE 50-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SC 60-…-…
…SE 60-…-… 0.8
…SD 70-…-…
…SE 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SC 110-…-… 0.8
…SE 120-…-…

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Solids tank
7 Solids tank
7.1 Solid tank aeration and deaeration .......................................................... 44

7.2 Solid discharge lines ................................................................................ 45
7.2.1 Solid discharge lines with shut-off flap .................................................... 47

Solids tank 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
7.1 Solid tank aeration and deaeration

IMPORTANT: Adequate tank venting is essential to ensure a safe process.
• In the case of one or more separators which are connected to a solids tank, the
nominal widths DN to be used are given in the table below:
Separator per Tank venting DN [mm]

solids tank
…SE 5 …SE 10 …SC 18 …SC 40 …SC 60 …SC 110
…SC 10 …SE 20 …SE 40 …SE 60 …SD 110
…SE 50 …SD 70 …SE 112
…SE 70
…SC 80
…SE 80
1 50 80 80 125 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150 150
• In the case of a combination of different separator models on one solids tank:

- The total number of all separators must be taken into consideration and
- and the largest model taken as the basis.
• The following criteria must be taken into consideration when venting the tank:
- Installation in accordance with the guidelines of the classification societies.
- An uncontrolled discharge of the solids must be avoided.
- The vent lines must be laid so that a suction effect develops.
• Vent lines may not be laid horizontally.

o
They must have a slope of at least 5 .
• When laying vent lines, avoid water

pockets.
Fig. 21
• All possible bends in the vent lines

must be arranged stepwise.
Fig. 22

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Solids tank
7.2 Solid discharge lines
• IMPORTANT: This piping arrange-

ment is not permissible.
Fig. 23
• The solid discharge lines must, if pos-
• The maximum level in the solids tank

sible, always be vertical.
must be monitored with the aid of a
• The pipeline network of the solids dis-

level monitoring device.
charge lines must be attached without

reduction and with compensators.
Fig. 24
• If there is a deviation from the vertical

arrangement, an angle of 45° must not
be exceeded.
Fig. 25
1 Level monitoring
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge line
4 Solids tank illumination

Solids tank 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
• The connection to the machine must

Connection to the machine
be via a compensator. For this pur-

pose, it is recommended to use the
hose supplied.
Fig. 26
Separator Diameter d [mm]

…SE 5-…-…
…SC 10-…-…
…SE 10-…-… 90
…SC 18-…-…
…SE 20-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SE 40-…-…
…SE 50-…-…
…SC 60-…-…
…SE 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
141
…SE 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SC 110-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SE 120-…-…

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Solids tank
7.2.1 Solid discharge lines with shut-off flap
• A shut-off valve in the solids line prevents vapours from entering the a stationary
separator while another separator is desludging.
• If more than one separator is used for a solids tank, a shut-off flap must be in-
stalled in the solids discharge line.
• Shut-off flaps are not included in the standard scope of supply of GEA Westfalia
Separator but can be supplied by GEA Westfalia Separator.
• CIP units or modules delivered with a solids tank from GEA Westfalia Separator
and equipped with more than one separator are always delivered with shut-off
flaps.
IMPORTANT: It must be ensured that the shut-off flaps are open during separator
operation.

Solids tank 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Electrical installation
8 Electrical installation
8.1 Installing control cabinets ........................................................................ 50

8.1.1 Installation site and operation .................................................................. 50

Electrical installation 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
8.1 Installing control cabinets

• Control cabinets may only contain electrical components, assemblies or systems
specified in the circuit diagram.
• Incorrect and improper installation discharges the supplier from his warranty ob-
ligation.
8.1.1 Installation site and operation

• The control cabinets may not be installed in the open.
• Select the installation site so that
- the control cabinet does not come in contact with dust and corrosive atmos-
phere.
- the control cabinet is not installed in an excessively moist or damp environ-
ment.
- the sun does not shine on the control panel or the displays since this would
make operation and monitoring more difficult.
- heating up of the controls is avoided.
• If necessary, check screwed connections and plug-in connections for reliable

contact.
• Connect the thermostat-controlled control cabinet heating to an external energy
source and switch on to avoid damage.
• The control cabinet heating must be switched on before the temperature drops
below the dew point.
Dewing can occur during the night which is not good for the electrical compo-
nents.
• Check that the mains voltage and frequency correspond to the connection data
of the control system (see nameplate).
Permissible installation and operation data:
Voltage fluctuations +/- 10 % of the mains voltage

Frequency fluctuations +/- 2 % of the mains frequency
o o
Ambient temperatures + 5 to + 45 C (41 to 113 F)
o o
Air humidity max. 50 % at 40 C (104 F)
o o
max. 90 % at 20 C (68 F)
Installation height up to 1000 m above sea level
o o
Transport temperatures – 25 to + 55 C (–13 to 131 F)

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Control
9 Control
9.1.1 Timer overview ........................................................................................ 52

9.1.2 Ejection diagram ...................................................................................... 53

Control 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
9.1.1 Timer overview

The timer parameters specified in the following table are
• fixed values (*) and
• standard values (**).
…SC 110-…-…
…SD 110-…-…
…SE 120-…-…
…SC 18-…-…
…SC 40-…-…
…SC 60-…-…
…SD 70-…-…
…SC 80-…-…
…SE 20-…-…
…SE 40-…-…
…SE 50-…-…
…SE 60-…-…
…SE 70-…-…
…SE 80-…-…
…SC 10-…-…
…SE 10-…-…
…SE 5-…-…
Designation
Separator start-up (*) 240 240 480 600 600

Separation- partial ejection (**) 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
Closing water pulse - pause (*) 600 600 600 600 600
Closing water pulse (*) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1
Close the bowl prior to a partial ejection (*) 0 0 0 0 0
Delay - overflow after total ejection (**) 300 300 300 300 300
Wait before displacement (**) 0 0 0 0 0
Displacement and flushing prior to a total
(**) 0 0 0 0 0
ejection
Overflow (**) 10 10 10 10 10
Wait before total ejection (**) 5 5 5 5 5
Total ejection (*) 1 1 2 3 5
Speed recovery (*) 10 10 15 20 20
Partial ejection (*) 1 1 2 3 5
Close bowl after partial ejection/total ejec-
(*) 0 0 0 0 0
tion
Post-flush hood (**) 5 5 5 5 5
Separation total ejection (**) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
CIP overflow/total ejection (**) 900 900 900 900 900
Separator start from min. speed (**) 240 240 240 240 240
Hood flush water - pulse (**) 5 5 5 5 5
Hood flush water - pause (**) 120 120 120 120 120

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Control
9.1.2 Ejection diagram
Total ejection / Optional

Partial ejection in the case of total ejection
Waiting after
1st Ejection
Total ejection
Waiting time
after ejection
Closing water pulse
Separation
Fig. 27

Control 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Spare parts
10 Spare parts

Spare parts 2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17


marking shown.
Fig. 28

ability of the centrifuge.
ating safety and optimum availability of the centrifuge.

2058-9601-040 / 16.01.17 Spare parts

We live our values.
GEA Germany
59302 Oelde, Germany Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
GEA Service
Ordering of replacement parts and other consumable items for centrifuge-specific GEA
systems.
For all questions concerning technical support, the ordering of replacement parts or to
request on-site support for your systems please contact your nearest GEA agent.
IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE CONTACT DETAILS TO HAND, YOU CAN ACCESS
THEM QUICKLY AND CONVENIENTLY AT:
gea.com/Service
If you do not have access to the internet please call our German head office in Oelde and
ask for the contact details for your location:
Tel.:+49 2522 77 – 0
To speed up your request and to ensure that we deliver the right parts please include the
following information:
- For model designation and serial number of the equipment please refer to the nameplate
- Number of parts required
- Part numbers and designations as per parts list
- Your enquiry / order number
- Preferred delivery date (from GEA works)
- Your company address
• Your complete company name or customer number
• Your invoice address (if it differs from the delivery address)
• Your delivery address
THE GEA SERVICE PHILOSOPHY

Our integrated approach to service partnership ensures long-term business success – for our
customers and for GEA.
We work alongside our customers as a partner and support you over the whole life cycle of
your system as well as that of the particular equipment.
From tailored installation and commissioning to professional maintenance that guarantees a
smooth production run, from proactive process improvement to continuing customer service
–we are always on the spot to maximise the safety, performance and reliability of our
customers’ systems.
Fig. 1:GEA Service – Four levels for lasting success
The service products

FIELD SERVICE
Our customers expect that as a service provider, GEA will have the necessary expertise
and experience to carry out all the maintenance measures needed for a specific machine
or process. Service activities have to be supplied globally, regardless of which local
market our customers are active in and where the value-added process takes place.
We are always close at hand and can provide you with advice and practical support
within Germany, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Original GEA replacement parts provide reliability and protect your investment.
Our high quality replacement parts will keep your operation running with maximum efficiency.
Original replacement parts are manufactured to the highest quality standards. Moreover, the
advance identification of critical parts, short delivery periods and constant availability will
ensure the safe and reliable operation of your plant.
We can give you the assurance of:

• Tested high standard of processing and delivery quality:
• The development of new machinery and hence the further development of spare
parts
• Maximum operational security for your equipment
• Permanent and partly very long-term availability of parts
• Optimised logistics processes and locations of our logistics centres
• Short delivery periods
REPAIRS – CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

The GEA repair service is always close at hand.
We not only carry out repairs all over the world, but also optimisation measures individually
tailored to your GEA equipment using state-of -the-art technology.
We can guarantee you:
• The same care, precision and responsibility as we exercise in the manufacture of
GEA equipment
• Certification to DIN EN ISO 9001
• Original spare parts
• Attractive upgrade options
• Proven safety, quality and performance
RENTAL AND EXCHANGE COMPONENTS

GEA constantly endeavours to maintain the safety and availability of your systems at the
highest possible level. To do this, we can offer rental bowls and a trade-in and part exchange
service, so that downtimes can be reduced to the absolute minimum. In addition to bowls and
screws, various other exchange components are available for centrifuges.
UPGRADES / MODERNISATION / OPTIMISATION

Our proactive service concept includes ongoing identification and introduction of possible
optimisations of processes and systems.
Do your systems require an upgrade or modernisation as a result of market conditions or
new regulations? We will support you on the path to energy savings, cost reductions,
capacity adjustments and enhanced security. We will provide you with our expertise and
latest innovations in order to implement precisely the optimisations that you require.
Our global consultancy and certification framework is part of the GEA service philosophy and
will be of benefit to you all over the world..
We can guarantee you:
• A longer service life
• Lower capital expenditure compared to purchasing new equipment
• A reduction in production costs
• The maintenance of individual safety standards with qualified information on industrial
safety with corresponding specialist machine safety audits.
• Reliability and optimal benefit-cost ratio
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Our GEA PerformancePlus service concept takes an intelligent and economic approach to
ensuring plant availability and security.
The availability of historic and actual measurement data provides you and also GEA with a
detailed insight into the status of the plant. This enables a forward-looking introduction of
corrective, and in particular, planned measures.
We can guarantee:
• The planning of optimal service intervals
• Concise status information
• Minimum unplanned downtimes
• Enhanced plant security
• Optimised plant availability
PERFORMANCE AGREEMENTS
Even the best plant is worthless without the right service.GEA provides an approach for
preventing expensive cost traps.
Our service packages, individually tailored to your requirements, place particular emphasis
on plant availability, security and cost controls. Let the GEA experts take over the inspection,
maintenance and status control of your plant.
Our service modules can be adapted to changes in production conditions in all life cycle
phases without additional costs.
We can guarantee:
• A high level of plant availability
• A reduction in downtimes
• Optimised plant operation
• Maximum planning security
• Short response times
TRAINING
Our qualified staff will train your employees on site in one of our excellently equipped training
centres.
GEA training modules are tailored to your individual requirements. Our experienced
engineers offer comprehensive practical training, impart process expertise and raise
awareness in your employees of plant status to ensure safe, professional plant operation
from the outset.
We can guarantee:
• Optimal plant efficiency
• High availability and reliability
• Highly qualified personnel
• Awareness of plant status
• Motivation
USED MACHINES – FACTORY-REFURBISHED PLANT

Used GEA systems are efficient, reliable and are rapidly installed in situ where they still have
many years of operation ahead of them.
Because the systems were manufactured by GEA, we have the technical expertise to
guarantee their efficient and safe operation.
We can guarantee:
• Factory-refurbished systems
• Service for refurbished systems
• Shorter delivery periods than for new systems
• Excellent price-performance ratio
• The expertise of the manufacturer
• Safety, quality, performance and guarantee
SERVICE CONSULTANCY
Service consultancy is an essential stage in the optimisation and adaptation of operating
processes. Even in this area we have set ourselves the goal of fulfilling the requirements of
our clients with a market-leading service through the use of the latest technology – so that
you can provide your customers with superb products. That is why we bring all the necessary
tools and latest technical know-how together with our experience to bear on the problem
analysis, assessments and complex solutions to problems, in order to jointly overcome the
challenges.
Customer: Standard - PID Project-/Order-No.: 000001 / 000001
Location: --- Project-title: RR_N_DMR440_VSE40-02-007

GEA Westfalia Separator
Devicelist 1
Quotation-No.: ---
Global Comments:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 02.03.2017 Dept.: Renewable Resources Description : Devicelist 1

VSE 40-02-007
Type: --- ---
Corr. Drawing: NVSE4002007-9902-PID001B
Explanations:
Scope of Quotation / Delivery:
L,WS = Scope by WS S,C = Scope by client
Created Date: 13.09.2016 Checked Date: 13.09.2016 Approved Date: Document No.: Revision: Page:
By: Langer.Me By: 2131Sc By: NVSE4002007-9902-DVL002C C 1/9
Copyright. © All rights reserved Issued for: ,
Filename: SV42080OEL0038\BL Renewable Resources - RR\Angebote\Angebote Single Machines NawaRo\N Angebote Neutral Standard\S - Selbstentl. Separator Mineraloel\DMR0440\VSE40\RR_N_DMR440_VSE40-02-007.prj@SV42080OEL0038\Projekt/Dokumentablage\Basic and Process
Engineering\Reports\NVSE4002007-9902-DVL002C

Devicelist 1
Plant Tag No. Quantity Description Nominal Bore Power EMSR Code Belongs to Part-No.
Position in PID Usage Safety Position Control Range Measuring point Comments
Scope Execution cabinet Comments Indicating range
010-1-001 1 Stk Separator --- 18,50 kW ---

PID001B.9G Olive Oil Polishing ---
L
010-1-001/M1 1 Stk Motor control On/Off --- --- NS

PID001B.7E Main drive separator --- -
L On/Off Control -
010-2-001 1 Stk Solids cyclone ---

PID001B.10G Separator belong to separator
L
010-9-014 1 Stk Current monitoring IIAH

PID001B.6E Main drive separator --- --- - belong to separator
L -
010-9-014/B1 1 Stk Current monitoring --- --- II IIAH

PID001B.7E Main drive separator --- 010-9-014 belong to separator
L -
010-9-022 1 Stk Speed monitoring unit SIAL

PID001B.9G Separator --- --- -
L -
010-9-022/B1 1 Stk Speed indicator --- --- SE SIAL

PID001B.9G Separator --- - 010-9-022
L -

Devicelist 1
010-9-024 1 Stk Temperature monitoring TAH

PID001B.6F Main drive separator --- --- -
L -
010-9-024/B1 1 Stk Temperature PTC --- --- TE TAH

PID001B.7F Main drive separator --- - 010-9-024
L -
010-9-027 1 Stk Hour counter KQI

PID001B.6E Separator --- --- - belong to separator
L -
010-9-027/B1 1 Stk Hour counter --- --- KQI KQI

PID001B.6E Separator --- - 010-9-027 belong to separator
L -
011-3-001 1 Stk Eccentric screw pump --- ---

PID001B.3D Feed ---
S
011-3-001/M1 1 Stk Frequency converter high --- --- NCH FIAH

PID001B.3C Feed pump --- - 011-9-056
S -
011-7-029 1 Stk Manual valve DN40 --- ---

PID001B.5D Feed --- ---
S --- -

Devicelist 1
011-7-039 1 Stk Automatic valve DN40 --- ---

PID001B.2D Feed NC ---
S --- -
011-7-039/YS1 1 Stk 3/2 way solenoid valve ---

Feed --- -
S -
011-7-059 1 Stk Sample valve DN15 --- ---

PID001B.5D Feed Sample NC ---
S --- -
011-8-009 1 Stk Sight Glass DN40 ---

PID001B.8D Feed --- --- belong to separator
L
011-8-017 1 Stk Compensator DN40 ---

PID001B.8D Feed ---
S
011-9-001 1 Stk Temperature monitoring TAH

PID001B.3C Feed pump --- --- -
S -
011-9-001/B1 1 Stk Temperature PTC --- --- TE TAH

PID001B.3C Feed pump --- - 011-9-001
S -

Devicelist 1
011-9-056 1 Stk Flow indicator FIAH

PID001B.4C Feed pumpFeed --- --- -
S 0 - 3 m3/h
011-9-056/B1 1 Stk Flow indicator DN40 --- FIT FIAH ---

PID001B.4D Feed --- 0 - 3 m3/h 011-9-056
S -
012-2-002 0,0 m Siphon ---

PID001B.13F Discharge light phase ---
L

PID001B.12D Heavy phase ---
S
013-7-046 1 Stk Constant pressure valve DN40 --- ---

PID001B.11D Light phase NC --- belong to separator
L --- -
013-7-084 1 Stk Sample valve DN15 --- ---

PID001B.12D Light phase sample --- ---
S --- -
013-8-011 1 Stk Sight Glass DN40 --- ---

PID001B.10D Light phase --- ---
S

Devicelist 1

PID001B.12D Light phase ---
S
013-9-048 1 Stk Pressure gauge PI

PID001B.9D Light phase --- --- belong to separator
L 0 - 10 bar
013-9-048/B1 1 Stk Pressure gauge DN40 --- PI PI ---

PID001B.9D Light phase --- 0 - 10 bar 013-9-048 belong to separator
L -
014-8-025 1 Stk Compensator DN200

PID001B.10G Solids --- belong to separator
L

PID001B.7C Process water --- ---
S --- -
015-7-163 1 Stk Non return valve DN40 ---

PID001B.7C Process water NC ---
S --- -

PID001B.7B Process water --- ---
S --- -

Devicelist 1

PID001B.8B Process water --- ---
S --- -
015-7-503 1 Stk Needle valve DN25 ---

PID001B.7B Process water NC ---
S --- -
015-9-082 1 Stk Flow measuring FI

PID001B.7B Process water --- --- belong to separator
S 0 - 1000 l/h
015-9-082/B1 1 Stk Flow indicator DN25 --- FI FI ---

PID001B.7B Process water --- - 015-9-082 belong to separator
S 0 - 1000 l/h
016-2-500 1 PCS Siphon

PID001B.10J Operating water discharge
L
016-7-020 1 Stk Pressure reducer DN20 ---

PID001B.7H Operating water --- --- belong to separator
L with filter --- -
016-7-024 1 Stk Solenoid valve DN20 ---

PID001B.7H Operating water NC --- belong to separator
L --- -

Devicelist 1
016-7-080 1 Stk Manual valve DN20 ---

L --- -
016-7-501 1 Stk Solenoid valve DN20 ---

L --- -
016-8-001 0,0 m Hose ---

PID001B.8F ---
L

PID001B.6H Operating water --- belong to separator
L

PID001B.10G Operating water discharge --- belong to separator
L
016-8-502 1 Stk Funnel --- ---

PID001B.10J Operating water discharge --- ---
S
016-9-019 1 PCS Contact pressure gauge PAL

PID001B.4H Operating water feed --- --- -
S -

Devicelist 1
016-9-019/B1 1 PCS Contact pressure gauge DN20 --- PIS PAL

PID001B.3H Operating water feed --- 0 - 6 bar 016-9-019
S -
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - 59302 Oelde ( Germany ) - Phone +49 2522 77-0
Customer : -
‎Πελάτής
Designation of plant : GEA Westfalia Separator IO prime
‎ΟΝΟΜAΣΙA ΕΓΚAΤAΣΤAΣΗΣ
Drawing no. : 8552-7000-102
‎AΡΙΘΜΟΣ ΣΧΕΔΙΟΥ
Internal order no. : -
‎ΠAΡAΓΓΕΛΙA
Manufacturer (company) : GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

‎ΚAΤAΣΚΕΥAΣΤΗΣ (ΕΤAΙΡΙA)
Name of project :
‎ΟΝΟΜA ΕΡΓΟΥ
Type : VSE 40-02-007 (15kW FU)
‎Τυπος
Language : en/el
‎ΓΛΩΣΣA
Technical data : 400V AC 50 Hz +/-5 % -
‎Τεχνικά χ ρ κτήριςτικά
Prepared : 04.08.2017 Processed : 15.09.2017 Applied standards IEC 81346

IEC 61355
IEC 60617
GEA project contact : Grossecossmann
‎GEA ανώτερος υπάλληλος έργου
Date 06.09.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: =

Editor FAL/PLE
Customer: GEA Westfalia Separator IO prime +
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Title- / cover sheet
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Τίτλος- / συνοdευτικό φυλλο Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 1
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EAA 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents
‎ΠεριεχόμενΎ
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Πλευρά ‎Περιγραφή σελίδας ‎ΣΥΓΚΡΟΤΗΜA ‎Χώρος τοποθέτησης ‎ΗΜΕΡΟΜΗΝΙA ‎Επεξεργαστής
Title- / cover sheet
&EAA 1 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Τίτλος- / συνοdευτικό φυλλο
Table of contents
&EAB 2 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Περιεχόμενα
Table of contents
&EAB 3 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Table of contents
&EAB 4 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Table of contents
&EAB 5 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Revision overview
&EBH 6 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Επισκόπηση αναθεώρησης
Overview structure indicator
&EDB 7 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Επισκόπηση σήμανσης δομής
Information-sheet
&EDB 8 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Φυλλο πληροφοριων
Information-sheet
&EDB 9 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Φυλλο πληροφοριων
Incoming
&EFS 10 =0 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Ταροχά ρευματος
Control voltage
&EFS 11 =0 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Τάςις ελέγχου
Control voltage AC
&EFS 12 =0 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Τάςις ελέγχου AC
Control voltage DC
&EFS 13 =0 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC
Cabinet fan
&EFS 14 =0 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Ανεμιςτήρ ς ερμ ρίου μετ γωγών
Emergency stop
&EFS 15 =0 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Κίνdυνος-στοπ
Separator
&EFS 16 =_1_001 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Γιαχωριστησ
Separator
&EFS 17 =_1_001 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Separator
&EFS 18 =_1_001 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Separator
&EFS 19 =_1_001 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Table of contents
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Περιεχόμενα Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 2
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EAB 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents
Level solids tank
&EFS 20 =_9 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Στάθμή dεξαμενής ςτερεών ςωμάτων
PAL control water
&EFS 21 =_9_019 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Νερό ελέγχου PAL
PAL control air
&EFS 22 =_9_034 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎PAL ελεγχος πεπιεσμένου έρ
Valves
&EFS 23 =Y +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Βαλβίδες
Valves
&EFS 24 =Y +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Βαλβίδες
Valves
&EFS 25 =Y +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Βαλβίδες
Feed control valve
&EFS 26 =_7_039 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Ρυθμιστικη βαλβιδα εισοδου
(optional) flow measuring feed
&EFS 27 =_9_056 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎(επιλογή) μετρηση διαρροησ προςαγωγή
Speed measuring
&EFS 28 =_9_022 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Μέτρήςή αριθμου ςτροφών
Signal exchange
&EFS 29 =100 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Αντ λλ γή ςήμ τος
Signal exchange
&EFS 30 =100 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Αντ λλ γή ςήμ τος
PLC analog earth bridges S7-1200
&EFS 31 =00 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎SPS αναλογικά γέφυρες γείωσης S7-1200
Operating panel KTP400
&EFS 32 =00 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Πίνακας χειρισμού KTP400
Power supply (S7-1200)
&EFS 33 =00 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Τροφοδοσια (S7-1200)
PLC overview Onboard S7-1200
&EFS 34 =00 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎SPS γενική άποψή Onboard S7-1200
PLC overview S7-1200 4AI/2AO
&EFS 35 =00 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎SPS γενική άποψή S7-1200 4AI/2AO
PLC overview S7-1200 16DI
&EFS 36 =00 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎SPS γενική άποψή S7-1200 16DI
PLC overview S7-1200 16DO
&EFS 37 =00 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎SPS γενική άποψή S7-1200 16DO
Arrangement drawing
&ELU 38 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Εχεδιο δομησ

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents
Arrangement drawing
&ELU 39 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Εχεδιο δομησ
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-N
&EMA 40 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-N
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-PE
&EMA 41 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-PE
&EMA 42 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 43 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-SC
&EMA 44 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-SC
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-SC1
&EMA 45 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-SC1
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-X1
&EMA 46 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-X1
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-X1.1
&EMA 47 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-X1.1
&EMA 48 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 49 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 50 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 51 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-XQ1
&EMA 52 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-XQ1
Terminal connection diagram =_1_001+CC-XT1
&EMA 53 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =_1_001+CC-XT1
Terminal connection diagram =_7_039+CC-X1
&EMA 54 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =_7_039+CC-X1
&EMA 55 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 56 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 57 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents
&EMA 58 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Terminal connection diagram =Y+CC-X2
&EMA 59 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =Y+CC-X2
Terminal connection diagram =Y+CC-X2
&EMA 60 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =Y+CC-X2
&EMA 61 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 62 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 63 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
&EMA 64 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Terminal connection diagram =sep+CC-X12
&EMA 65 +CC 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =sep+CC-X12
Terminal connection diagram =sep+JB-X12
&EMA 66 +JB 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =sep+JB-X12
Cable layout
&EMB 67 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Συνοπτικη ραρασταση καλωδιων
Cable layout
&EMB 68 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Συνοπτικη ραρασταση καλωδιων
Spare
&EMB 69 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Εφεdρεία
Instructions for installation
&EMB 70 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Υποδείξεις εγκατάστασης
Potential equalization separator
&EMB 71 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Ισοδυναμικη συνδεση γιαχωριστησ
Parts list
&EPB 72 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
‎Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων
Parts list
&EPB 73 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Parts list
&EPB 74 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE
Parts list
&EPB 75 06.09.2017 FAL/PLE

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Revision overview
‎Επισκόπηση αναθεώρησης
Revision name Revision comment Revision on the basis of change Page name Author Date
‎Όνομα αναθεώρησης ‎Σχόλιο αναθεώρησης ‎Αίτιο τροποποίησης αναθεώρησης ‎Όνομα σελίδας ‎Παραγωγοσ ‎Ημερομηνια

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Revision overview
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Επισκόπηση αναθεώρησης Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 6
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EBH 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Overview structure indicator

‎Επισκόπηση σήμανσης δομής
Complete name Labelling Structure descprition Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
‎Πλήρης χαρακτηρισμός ‎Επιγραφή ‎Περιγραφή δομής ‎Πλήρης χαρακτηρισμός ‎Επιγραφή ‎Περιγραφή δομής
Document type Cover sheet Plant Speed bowl
&EAA =_9_022
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Συνοdευτικό φυλλο ‎Συγκροτημα ‎Στροφεσ κυλινδρου
Document type Table of contents Plant Signal exchange
&EAB =100
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Περιεχόμενα ‎Συγκροτημα ‎Αντ λλ γή ςήμ τος
Document type Revision overview Plant PLC
&EBH =00
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Επισκόπηση αναθεώρησης ‎Συγκροτημα SPS
Document type Structure indentification overview / instructions Plant Separator
&EDB =SEP
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Σήμανση δομής γενική άποψή / προδιαγραφές ‎Συγκροτημα ‎Γιαχωριστησ
Document type Circuit diagram Mounting place Compact control cabinet
&EFS +CC
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Κυκλωματικο διαγραμμα ‎Χώρος τοποθέτησης ‎Συνεκτικός πίνακας χειρισμού
Document type Arrangement drawing Mounting place Terminal box
&ELU +JB
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Εχεδιο δομησ ‎Χώρος τοποθέτησης ‎Κουτι ακροδεκτων
Document type Terminal connection diagram, terminal connecting plan Mounting place Locally at the separator
&EMA +L
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών, σχεδιάγραμμα σύνδεσης ακροδεκτών ‎Χώρος τοποθέτησης ‎Τοπικά σε γιαχωριστησ
Document type Cable layout
&EMB
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Συνοπτικη ραρασταση καλωδιων
Document type Article parts list
&EPB
‎Είδος εγγράφου ‎Κατάλογος εξαρτημάτων
Plant Customer
=CUSTOMER
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Πελάτής
Plant General
=0
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Ελέγχου
Plant Separator
=_1_001
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Γιαχωριστησ
Plant Measurement
=_9
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Μέτρηση
Plant Probe solids tank
=_9_015
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Αισθητηρασ δοχείο στερεών
Plant Probe solids tank
=_9_016
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Αισθητηρασ δοχείο στερεών
Plant Operating water
=_9_019
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Νερό ελέγχου
Plant Control air
=_9_034
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Αέρας ελέγχου
Plant Valves
=Y
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Βαλβίδες
Plant Valve
=_7_039
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Βαλβίdα
Plant Valve
=_7_501/Y1
Plant Valve
=_7_024
Plant Valve
=_7_022
Plant Flow
=_9_056
‎Συγκροτημα ‎Διαρροή
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Overview structure indicator
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Επισκόπηση σήμανσης δομής Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 7
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EDB 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Instruction / specification
‎Διατάξεις / προδιαγραφές
Control cabinet : Version:
‎Ερμάριο μετ γωγών : ‎Έκδοση:
Denomination control cabinet Core indentification No
CC ‎Ενδεικτησ συρματοσ
‎Χαρακτηρισμός ερμάριο μετ γωγών ‎Οχι
Painting cabinet Potential designation No
‎Βαφή περίβλήμ
RAL 7035 ‎Ονομασια δυναμικου ‎Οχι
Protective rating Halogen free wiring / channels No
‎Ειδοσ προστασιασ
IP54 ‎Συρμάτωση/κανάλια χωρίς αλογόνο ‎Οχι
Ambient temperature Cable marking plates No
‎Θερμοκραςία περιβάλλοντος
5-35 °C ‎Πινακίδα χαρακτηρισμού καλωδίου ‎Οχι
Classification No
‎Ταξινόμηση ‎Οχι
Control cabinet: Extra specification No
‎Ερμάριο μετ γωγών: ‎Πρόσθετα προδιαγραφές ‎Οχι
Denomination control cabinet Labels Plastic white, lettering black
- ‎Πινακίδα σήμανσης
‎Χαρακτηρισμός ερμάριο μετ γωγών ‎Πλαστικό ΛΕΥΚΟ, γραμματοσειρά ΜAΥΡΟ
Painting cabinet
-
Protective rating Interface:

-
‎Διεπαφή:
Ambient temperature Bus connection to customer PLC
- ‎Αρτήίi συνδεση προς το πελατεσ PLC
-
Control cabinet: Power supply

‎Ερμάριο μετ γωγών: ‎Ταροχά ρευματος:
Denomination control cabinet Mains-/ input voltage
- ‎Τάση δικτύου / σύνδεσης
400V AC
‎Χαρακτηρισμός ερμάριο μετ γωγών
Painting cabinet Mains frequency
- ‎Συχνότητα δικτύου
50 Hz
Protective rating Mains form

- ‎Μορφή δικτύου
TN-C-S
Ambient temperature Rotary field Clockwise rotary field

- ‎Περιςτρεφόμενο πεdίο ‎Δεξιόστροψοαπείίο
Voltage tolerance
‎Ανοχή τάσης
+/-5 %
Cable inlet Bottom

‎Εισαγωγη καλωδιου ‎ΚAΤΩ
Incoming redundant No
‎Ταροχά ρευματος πλεοναστικός ‎Οχι
Control voltages:
‎Τάσεις ελέγχου:
Control voltage 1
‎Τάςις ελέγχου 1
230V AC
Control voltage 2
‎Τάςις ελέγχου 2
24V DC

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Information-sheet
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Φυλλο πληροφοριων Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Wiring
‎Συρμάτωση
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
‎Κυκλώματα ‎Αγωγός ‎Χρώμα ‎Διατοκό ‎Κυκλώματα ‎Αγωγός ‎Χρώμα ‎Διατοκό
Main circuits 400V AC L1 Black ≥ 1,5mm² Control voltage 230V AC L Red ≥ 0,75mm²
‎Κεντρικα κυκλωματα ‎Μαυρο ‎Τάςις ελέγχου ‎Κοκκινο
L2 Black N Red / white
‎Μαυρο " ‎Κοκκινο / ΛΕΥΚΟ "
L3 Black
‎Μαυρο "
N Light blue ≥ 1,5mm² Control voltage 24V AC L Red ≥ 0,75mm²
‎Μπλε ανοιχτο ‎Τάςις ελέγχου ‎Κοκκινο
PE Green / yellow ≥ 2,5mm² N Red / white
‎Φρασινο / κιτρινο ‎Κοκκινο / ΛΕΥΚΟ "
Control voltage 24V DC + Blue ≥ 0,75mm²

‎Τάςις ελέγχου ‎Μπλε
- Blue / white
‎Μπλε / ΛΕΥΚΟ "
Analog screened L+ White ≥ 0,75mm²

‎Αναλογικό θωρακισμενο ‎ΛΕΥΚΟ
M Brown
‎ΚAΦΕ "
Current transformer lines Black ≥ 2,5mm²

‎Αγωγοι μορφοτροπεα ρευματοσ ‎ΜAΥΡΟ
Conductors with external voltage (AC/DC) Orange ≥ 1,0mm²

‎Αγωγοί με εξωγενής τάση (AC/DC) ‎ΠΟΡΤΟΚAΛΙ

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Information-sheet
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Φυλλο πληροφοριων Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC
L1 / 16.0
L2 / 16.0
L3 / 16.0
400V AC
L1.1 / 11.0
L2.1 / 11.0
1
-Q1
24...32A
In.:30A
I> I> I>
2
-XQ1
Data Power supply

-PE -N ‎Δεδομένα ταροχά ρευματος:
Min. Cross-section:
10 mm²
PE
‎ΕΛAΧ. Διατοκό:
N
-PE -SC -PE -SC1 -PE -PE -PE

PEN
Pre-fuse:
-PE
-SC
-PE
-SC1
-PE
-PE
-PE ‎Προαςφάλεια:
NH 50 A
Ambient temperature:
5-35 °C
PE
PE
PE
-WD1 ‎Θερμοκραςία περιβάλλοντος:

_-J
4x10 Max. Cable length:
-1M -1T -1G ‎Μέγ.. Μήκος καλωδίου:
50 m
‎Γείωση πλάκα συναρμολόγησης 1
PEN
U: 400V AC
L1
L2
L3
f: 50 Hz
P: ~15 kW
Earthing mounting plate 1
=CUSTOMER Icn:
50 KA
+L-X
‎Γείωση περίβλήμ 1
Earthing cabinet 1
Full load current:

‎Γείωση πόρτα 1
Earthing door 1
~30 A
Incoming ‎Ρευμα πλήρους φορτίου:
Date 06.09.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: =0

Editor FAL/PLE
Customer: GEA Westfalia Separator IO prime + CC
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Incoming
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Ταροχά ρευματος Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 10
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EFS 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC
10.9 / L1.1
10.9 / L2.1
230V AC
L / 12.0
N / 12.0
1
-F1 -F3
2
1,4...2,0A C 6A
EW:1,5A
I> I> I>
2
N/L2
+20V
230V
400V
460V
520V
-20V
L1
0
-T1 -T2 INPUT

0,4kVA 120/230VAC GEA
24VDC/5A power
OFF
ON
GND
0
115V
115V
-PE
A
B
OUTPUT
-PE
L+
L+'
-PE PE
M'
-PE
1
-F2
2
D 10A
24V DC
L+ / 13.0
M / 13.0
1
5
-X1 -X2
-PE
-PE
-PE -PE
Control voltage AC Control voltage DC

‎Τάςις ελέγχου AC ‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Control voltage
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Τάςις ελέγχου Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
11.9 / L
1
-F4 2 -F5
2
C 2A C 4A
1L.A / 14.0
2L.A / 19.0
1
-X1.1 -X1.1
26.0 / 4L.X
26.0 / 4L.R
1N.A / 14.0
2N.A / 19.0
11.9 / N
1
-X1.2
26.0 / 4N.X
Control voltage AC Control voltage AC

air conditioning ‎Τάςις ελέγχου AC
‎κλιματισμός

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Control voltage AC
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Τάςις ελέγχου AC Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 12
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
11.9 / L+
-F6 1
2
C 6A
1L+.A / 17.0
2L+.A / 18.0
2L+.K / 33.0
1
4
-X2.1
15.0 / 1L+.T
27.0 / 1L+.X
32.0 / 2L+.T
20.0 / 2L+.X
2M.K1 / 31.0
1M.A / 15.0
2M.A / 15.7
2M.K / 31.0
2M.F / 16.4
11.9 / M
1
-X2.2
27.0 / 1M.X
32.0 / 2M.T
20.0 / 2M.X
26.4 / 2M.R
27.0 / 2M.X1
30.0 / 2M.R1
Control voltage DC Control voltage DC

control PLC
‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC ‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC
‎έλεγχος SPS

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Control voltage DC
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 13
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
12.1 / 1L.A
12.1 / 1N.A
-B1
0°C - +60°C
KTS 011
30°C
-PE
-PE
N
L
-M1
M
45/39W 1~
PF 43.000A
PE
Cabinet fan

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Cabinet fan
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Ανεμιςτήρ ς ερμ ρίου μετ γωγών Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 14
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
13.1 / 1L+.T 1.1L+.A / 17.6
-PE
-PE
6
-X2
21
Remove link in case of

Emergency
-S0 stop external
an external emergency
stop!
22
1NC ‎Εκτ κτή ‎Αφαιρέστε γέφυρα

Emergency stop ‎νάγκή σταμάτημα Εξωτερικός ‎κατά τη σύνδεση
‎Κίνdυνος-στοπ ‎εξωτερικής διακοπής
‎ανάγκης!
10
7
-X2
X10
-PE
DI0.3
-PE
/34.4
8
-X2
=00-K1
Emergency stop
13
Remove link in case of
-K3
Emergency
stop external
an external emergency
stop! /15.8 =00-K1
14
‎Εκτ κτή ‎Αφαιρέστε γέφυρα
‎νάγκή σταμάτημα Εξωτερικός ‎κατά τη σύνδεση /34.5
‎εξωτερικής διακοπής
‎ανάγκης! DQ0.1
X12
9
-X2
IN F/S
4
A1
T4
-K1
24VAC/DC START
13
23
33
41
AUTO
/16.6
/16.5
/17.6
/30.2
MONITORED
14
24
34
42
A1
A2
T1
IN1
T2
IN2
T3
IN3
-K3
A2
13.1 / 1M.A 1M.A / 17.0 13.2 / 2M.A 2M.A / 18.0
13 14 /15.5
23 24
33 34 /17.3
43 44
Emergency stop Emergency stop reset

‎Κίνdυνος-στοπ ‎Εκτ κτή νάγκή σταμάτημα απομανdάλωςή

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Emergency stop
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Κίνdυνος-στοπ Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC
10.9 / L1 13.2 / 2M.F
10.9 / L2
10.9 / L3
Current measuring
separator
‎Μέτρήςή ρευματος
‎διαχωριστησ
=00-K2
4-20mA = 0-51,2A
/35.5
AI128
X10
AI 0+
4
-PE
=0-PE
SC
SC
91
92
93
95
42
39
50
53
55
4-20mA
0V
OUT
IN
0V
Failure Operation
OFF:U
OFF:U
‎Βλάβή ‎Λειτουργία
ON:I
ON:I
FC302P15K ON=abgeschlossen
1 ● ON=closed 1 ●
01
04
BUS TER. A53
OFF:U
● ●
ON:I
(S801) 2 OFF=offen (S201) 2
OFF=open
-T1 SB-FC302P15K-15,0kW
03
02
06
05
-400502-0-4060 A54 1 ●
(S202) 2 ●
/18.3
+24V
+24V
D IN
D IN
D IN
D IN
D IN
A IN
10V
96
97
98
99
SC
54
50
SC
12
18
27
29
32
13
37
-XT1
23
23
=0-K1 -K4
24
24
/15.5 /17.3
13
13
13
-K1 =0-K1 -K3
14
14
14
/18.3 /15.4 /17.1
-WD1 -WG1
15
FC.CY-J .CY-O
4x6 2x0,75 -K2
16
18
/17.5
W1
U1
V1
PE
Anti-clockwise rotation M
‎Aριςτερή ροή +L 3~
-M1 SC
‎Θ
15kW
T1
T2
29A
60Hz
Separator PTC thermistor Start/stop Freewheel Emergency stop

‎Γιαχωριστησ ‎Αιςθήτήρ ς PTC ‎Εκκίνηση/στοπ ‎Ελεύθερος τροχός ‎Κίνdυνος-στοπ
Date 06.09.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: = _1_001

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Separator
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Γιαχωριστησ Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 16
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
13.1 / 1L+.A 1L+.A / 28.0
33
13
33
=0-K3 -K4 =0-K1
/15.5
34
14
34
/15.8 /17.3
15.9 / 1.1L+.A
33
-K1
/18.3
34
10
16
=_9_022-T1 =_9_022-T1
12
11
18
17
/28.2 /28.2
A1
A1
A1
B1
-K3 -K4 -K2
A2
A2
A2
ca. xx min.
15.6 / 1M.A 1M.A / 28.0

60
40
80
20
5 100%
8
100
10 M A
h 1 L B
min 10
100
K
J
↑ C
D
s I E
10 1 H G F
13 14 /16.7 13 14 /17.4 18
15 /16.7
23 24 23 24 /16.7 16
33 34 /18.1 33 34 /18.2 28
25 /18.4
43 44 43 44 26
Setting >= slowing-down time separator

‎Ρύθμιση >= χρόνος επιβράδυνσης γιαχωριστησ
Zero speed Over speed Switching off

bowl bowl FC
‎Ακινητοποιηση ‎Υπερβαση στροφων ‎Απενεργοποίηση
‎τυμπ νο ‎τυμπ νο ‎ΜΣ

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
13.2 / 2L+.A 2L+.A / 28.0
33
33
04
25
-K3 -K4 -T1 -K2
/17.1 /17.3
34
34
06
05
26
28
/16.7 /17.5
13
11
12
9
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI0.6 DI0.4 DI0.5 DI0.2

/34.4 /34.4 /34.4 /34.4
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

SLL SIAH Separator Switching off FC
zero speed bowl over speed bowl operation ‎Απενεργοποίηση ΜΣ
SLL SIAH ‎Λειτουρπα
‎ακινητοποιηση τυμπ νο ‎υπερβαση στροφων τυμπ νο ‎διαχωριστησ
=00-K1
/34.5
DQ0.3
X12
6
A1
-K1
A2
15.9 / 2M.A
13 14 /16.5
23 24 /19.1
33 34 /17.6
43 44 /30.1
Separator
start/stop
‎εκκίνηση/στοπ

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
12.2 / 2L.A
23
-K1
/18.3
24
1
-P1
h
2
12.2 / 2N.A
Hours counter
‎Μετρήτής ωρών λειτουργί ς

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3 =00-K3
/36.5 /36.5
DI12.2 DI12.3
X10 X10
DI a .2
6
DI a .3
7
24V DC
13.2 / 2L+.X 2L+.X / 21.0
13.2 / 2M.X 2M.X / 23.0
1
=_9_015-X2 =_9_016-X2
(optional) (optional)
LSL solids tank LAH solids tank
probe min. probe max.
‎(επιλογή) ‎(επιλογή)
‎LSL δοχείο στερεών ‎LAH δοχείο στερεών
‎αισθητηρασ ΕΛAΧ. ‎αισθητηρασ μέγ..
Date 06.09.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: = _9
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Level solids tank
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Στάθμή dεξαμενής ςτερεών ςωμάτων Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3
/36.5
DI12.6
X11
DI a .6
6
24V DC
20.9 / 2L+.X 2L+.X / 22.0
-PE
=0-PE
1
-X2
(optional)
PAL operating water
‎(επιλογή)
‎PAL νερό ελέγχου

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH PAL control water
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Νερό ελέγχου PAL Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3
/36.5
DI12.7
X11
DI a .7
7
24V DC
21.9 / 2L+.X 2L+.X / 27.0
-PE
=0-PE
1
-X2
(optional)
PAL control air
‎(επιλογή)
‎PAL αέρας ελέγχου

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH PAL control air
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎PAL ελεγχος πεπιεσμένου έρ Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 22
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K1

/37.5 /37.5 /37.5 /34.5
DQ17.1 DQ17.4 DQ17.0 DQ0.7
X12 X13 X12 X12
DQ b .1
5
DQ b .4
4
DQ b .0
4
10
20.9 / 2M.X 2M.X / 24.0
-PE -PE -PE -PE -PE -PE
=0-PE
1
6
-
-
-X2
=_7_024-WG1
.-J
3x1,5
=_7_024
PE
1
+L
2
-M1
Spare (optional) (optional) (optional) Spare Opening water

‎Εφεdρεία hydrohermetic probe flushing C02 hood ‎Εφεdρεία ‎Νερό ανοίγματος
‎(επιλογή) ‎(επιλογή) ‎(επιλογή)
‎υδροερμητικη ‎έκπλυση αισθητήρα ‎C02 κ πάκι
Date 06.09.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: =Y

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Valves
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Βαλβίδες Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K4 =00-K1 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4

/34.5 /37.5 /34.5 /37.5 /37.5 /37.5
DQ0.6 DQ16.0 DQ1.0 DQ16.4 DQ16.5 DQ17.5
X12 X10 X12 X11 X11 X13
9
DQ a .0
4
11
DQ a .4
4
DQ a .5
5
DQ b .5
5
23.9 / 2M.X 2M.X / 25.0
-PE -PE -PE -PE -PE -PE
=0-PE
10
11
12
7
9
-
-
-X2
=_7_022-WG1
.-J
3x1,5
=_7_022
PE
1
+L
2
-M1
(optional) Hood flush water Spare (optional) Spare Spare

closing water ‎Νερό ξεπλυματος καλυμματος ‎Εφεdρεία control ‎Εφεdρεία ‎Εφεdρεία
‎(επιλογή) air constant pressure valve
‎Νερό κλειςίμΎτος ‎(επιλογή)
‎αέρας ελέγχου
‎βαλβίdα ςταθερής πίεςής
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4

/37.5 /37.5 /37.5 /37.5
DQ16.2 DQ16.3 DQ17.3 DQ16.6
X10 X10 X12 X11
DQ a .2
6
DQ a .3
7
DQ b .3
7
DQ a .6
6
24.9 / 2M.X 2M.X / 27.0
-PE -PE -PE -PE
=0-PE
13
14
15
16
-
-
-X2
=_7_501/Y1-WG1
.-J
3x1,5
=_7_501/Y1
PE
1
+L
2
-M1
(optional) (optional) Addendum water (optional)

water feed product ‎Συμπληρωματικο νερο spray ball
‎(επιλογή) discharge tank / drain ‎(επιλογή)
‎συρροή νερου ‎(επιλογή) ‎κεφαλη ψεκασμου
‎εκροή προiόντος
‎ρεζερβουαρ / καναλι
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
12.2 / 4L.R
11
-K1
12
14
/26.4
=00-K4
/37.5
DQ16.1
X10
DQ a .1
-K1 A1 5
230V AC
A2
12.2 / 4L.X 4L.X / 27.0 24V/DC
12.2 / 4N.X 4N.X / 27.0 13.2 / 2M.R 2M.R / 30.0
-PE
=0-PE
1
-X1
-WG1
.-J
5x1,5
14
11 /26.1
12
PE
1
+L
close
open
M
-M1 1~
230VAC
Product feed Product feed

‎Συρροή προiόντος ‎Συρροή προiόντος

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Feed control valve
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Ρυθμιστικη βαλβιδα εισοδου Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 26
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3 =00-K2
4-20mA = 0-....l/h
/36.5 /35.5
DI12.1 AI130
X10 X10
DI a .1
5
AI 1+
6
-SC1
=0-SC1
230V AC
26.2 / 4L.X
26.2 / 4N.X
24V DC
13.1 / 1L+.X
24V DC
22.9 / 2L+.X 2L+.X / 29.0
13.1 / 1M.X
25.9 / 2M.X
13.3 / 2M.X1
-PE -PE -SC -PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-SC
=0-PE
1
-X1 -X2 -X2
(optional) 24VDC (optional) (optional) Potential equalization

230VAC impulse flow feed flow feed flow transmitter
‎(επιλογή) ‎(επιλογή) ‎(επιλογή) ‎Ισοδυναμικη συνδεση
230VAC ‎παλμοσ διαρροή ‎διαρροή ‎προςροφήτήρας dιαρροής
‎προςαγωγή ‎προςαγωγή

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH (optional) flow measuring feed
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎(επιλογή) μετρηση διαρροησ προςαγωγή Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 27
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
17.9 / 1L+.A
24V DC
18.9 / 2L+.A
17.9 / 1M.A
=00-K1
/34.4
DI0.0
X10
-SC1
=0-SC1
19+
8+
20-
7-
-T1 4-20mA
23+
24V DC
24-
-SC1
=0-SC1
1+
3-
-SC
=0-SC
1
2
=SEP-X12
=SEP-X12_WG1
.CY-O
2x0,75
Bowl speed = 8.200RPM

‎Τύμπανο αριθμός ςτροφών = 8.200UPM
=SEP+JB
Terminal box
0-290Hz = 4-20mA = 0-9.000RPM separator
1
0-290Hz = 4-20mA = 0-9.000UPM ‎Κουτι ακροδεκτων -X12

‎διαχωριστησ
Max / Picking off zero speed > 30RPM -> 1Hz
‎Μέγ. / ΤΡAΒΗΓΜA ακινητοποιηση > 30UPM -> 1Hz 11
+JB-WG1
10 /17.1 _.-O
12
17 2x0,5
Max / falling off over speed > 8.610RPM - > 287Hz 16 /17.3 Westfalia Separator
‎Μέγ. / καθοδικα υπερβαση στροφων > 8.610UPM - > 287Hz 18
+
2 impulse. / round
‎2 παλμοσ. / στροφη +L
-B1
-
+ BN = brown
- BU = blue
SIALH/SLL
proximity switch bowl
SIALH/SLL
‎εκκινήτήρας τυμπ νο

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Speed measuring
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Μέτρήςή αριθμου ςτροφών Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 28
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
27.9 / 2L+.X
9
-X2
-WG1 -WG2 -WG3 -WG4 -WG5
.-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5
+L +L +L +L +L
Customer Customer Customer Customer Customer
‎Πελάτής
-S1 ‎Πελάτής
-S5
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
-WG1 -WG2 -WG3 -WG4 -WG5
.-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5 .-J 3x1,5
10
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
2
8
-X2
-PE -PE -PE -PE -PE

16
17
18
20
19
X10 X10 X10 X10 X10
DI1.1 DI1.2 DI1.3 DI1.5 DI1.4

/34.4 /34.4 /34.4 /34.4 /34.4
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

Separator Product CIP Overflow Partial eject
start/stop start/stop start/stop total eject ‎Αdειαςμα εν μέρει
‎Γιαχωριστησ ‎Προιόν CIP ‎Υπερχείλιςή
‎εκκίνηση/στοπ ‎εκκίνηση/στοπ ‎εκκίνηση/στοπ ‎πλήρής εκκένωςή
Date 06.09.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: = 100

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Signal exchange
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Αντ λλ γή ςήμ τος Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 29
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K4

/34.5 /34.5 /34.5 /37.5
DQ0.0 DQ0.4 DQ0.5 DQ17.2
X12 X12 X12 X12
DQ b .2
6
A1
A1
A1
A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4
A2
A2
A2
A2
24V/DC 24V/DC 24V/DC 24V/DC
26.5 / 2M.R
13.3 / 2M.R1
14 14 14 14
11 /30.4 11 /30.5 11 /30.6 11 /30.8
12 12 12 12
43
41
11
11
11
11
=_1_001-K1 -PE =0-K1 -PE -K1 -PE -K2 -PE -K3 -PE -K4 -PE
/18.3
11 44
13 42
-K1 12
-K1 14
-K2 12
-K2 14
-K3 12
-K3 14
-K4 12
-K4 14
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
/15.5 /30.4 /30.5 /30.7 /30.8
-K1
-K2
-K3
-K4
12
14
-X2 -X2 -X2 -X2 -X2 -X2

-WG6 -WG7 -WG8 -WG9 -WG10 -WG11
.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
3x1,5 3x1,5 4x1,5 3x1,5 3x1,5 3x1,5
+L
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
Customer
‎Πελάτής
-X -X -X -X -X -X
Separator Emergency stop Common failure Separator Product pump Solids pump start
start/stop ‎Κίνdυνος-στοπ ‎Γενική βλάβή ready for operation start/stop / stop
‎Γιαχωριστησ ‎Διαχωριςτής ‎Αντλία προiόντος ‎Αντλία ςτερεών
‎εκκίνηση/στοπ ‎ςε ετοιμότήτα ‎εκκίνηση/στοπ ‎ςωμάτων εκκίνηση / στοπ

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Signal exchange
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Αντ λλ γή ςήμ τος Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 -K1 -K2 -K2 -K2 -K2 -K2 -K2 -K2 -K2
/34.4 /34.4 /35.5 /35.5 /35.5 /35.5 /35.5 /35.5 /35.5 /35.5
AI64 AI66 AI132 AI134
X11 X11 X10 X10 X11 X11 X11 X11 X13 X13
5
AI 0-
5
AI 1-
7
AI 2+
4
AI 2-
5
AI 3+
6
AI 3-
7
AQ 0M
4
AQ 1M
6
13.2 / 2M.K 2M.K / 33.0
13.3 / 2M.K1 2M.K1 / 33.0
Earth bridges
‎Γέφυρες γείωσης

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH PLC analog earth bridges S7-1200
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎SPS αναλογικά γέφυρες γείωσης S7-1200 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 31
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-P1
GEA Westfalia Separator IO prime
S1 X60 X61
X2
DP/MPI/PPI USB USB
Profibus Profinet
1 2 3 4
X1
POWER DC ON ●
● ● ●
SC
SC
OFF
A
A
B
B
X80:L+
X80:M
PA
=0-PE
24V DC
13.2 / 2L+.T ETH1 / 33.0
13.2 / 2M.T
-PE
Operating panel KTP400


Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Operating panel KTP400
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Πίνακας χειρισμού KTP400 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 32
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 CPU 1215C

-K2 4AI / 2AO
-K3 16DI
-K4 16DO 0,5A
6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0
SIMATIC
S7 1200
AQ64 - AQ66
DI0.0 - DI1.5 AI128 - AI134 DI12.0 - DI12.7 DQ16.0 - DQ16.7
AI64 - AI66
RUN / STOP
ERROR
MAINT
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
SM 1234 SM 1221 SM 1222
DC
DQ0.0 - DQ1.1 AQ128 - AQ130 DI13.0 - DI13.7 DQ17.0 - DQ17.7
DQ a 4L+ /34.5
DQ a 4M /34.5
Ethernet Ethernet
DQ a L+ /37.5
DI b 3M /36.5
DI b 4M /36.5
DI a 1M /34.4
DI a 1M /36.5
DI a 2M /36.5
DQ a M /37.5
AQ 2M /34.4
AI 3M /34.4
AI L+ /35.5
AI M /35.5
24V DC 24V DC P1 P2
GND
GND
GND
GND
L+
L+
M
M
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:4
X10:5
X10:6
X11:1
X11:4
X12:1
X12:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X11:1
X10:3
X11:3
X12:3
X13:3
X11:1
X10:1
X10:2
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
24V DC -PE -PE -PE -PE
13.2 / 2L+.K
31.9 / 2M.K
31.9 / 2M.K1
32.9 / ETH1

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Power supply (S7-1200)
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Τροφοδοσια (S7-1200) Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 33
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
X10:6 X12:1
0V /33.3 1M 4L+ /33.4 24V
SIALH/SLL proximity switch bowl X10:7 X12:2

=_9_022-T1:20- /28.4 DI0.0 4M /33.4 0V
‎SIALH/SLL εκκινήτήρας τυμπ νο
X10:8 X12:3 Common failure
DI0.1 DQ0.0 /30.4 =100-K1:A1
‎Γενική βλάβή
Switching off FC X10:9 X12:4 Emergency stop reset
=_1_001-K2:28 /18.4 DI0.2 DQ0.1 /15.8 =0-K3:A1
‎Απενεργοποίηση ΜΣ ‎Εκτ κτή νάγκή σταμάτημα απομανdάλωςή
Emergency stop X10:10 X12:5
=0-K1:34 /15.8 DI0.3 DQ0.2
SIAH over speed bowl X10:11 X12:6 Separator start/stop
=_1_001-K4:34 /18.2 DI0.4 DQ0.3 /18.3 =_1_001-K1:A1
‎SIAH υπερβαση στροφων τυμπ νο ‎Γιαχωριστησ εκκίνηση/στοπ
Separator operation X10:12 X12:7 Separator ready for operation
=_1_001-T1:05 /18.3 DI0.5 DQ0.4 /30.5 =100-K2:A1
‎Λειτουρπα διαχωριστησ ‎Διαχωριςτής ςε ετοιμότήτα
SLL zero speed bowl X10:13 X12:8 Product pump start/stop
=_1_001-K3:34 /18.1 DI0.6 DQ0.5 /30.7 =100-K3:A1
‎SLL ακινητοποιηση τυμπ νο ‎Αντλία προiόντος εκκίνηση/στοπ
X10:14 X12:9 (optional) closing water
DI0.7 DQ0.6 /24.1 =Y-X2:7
‎(επιλογή) Νερό κλειςίμΎτος
X10:15 X12:10 Opening water
DI1.0 DQ0.7 /23.8 =Y-X2:6
‎Νερό ανοίγματος
Separator start/stop X10:16 X12:11 Spare
=100-X2:2 /29.1 DI1.1 DQ1.0 /24.4 =Y-X2:9
‎Γιαχωριστησ εκκίνηση/στοπ ‎Εφεdρεία
Product start/stop X10:17 X12:12
=100-X2:4 /29.2 DI1.2 DQ1.1
‎Προιόν εκκίνηση/στοπ
CIP start/stop X10:18
=100-X2:6 /29.4 DI1.3
‎CIP εκκίνηση/στοπ
Partial eject X10:19
=100-X2:10 /29.7 DI1.4
‎Αdειαςμα εν μέρει
Overflow total eject X10:20
=100-X2:8 /29.5 DI1.5
‎Υπερχείλιςή πλήρής εκκένωςή
X11:1
0V /33.3 2M
X11:2
AQ64
X11:3
AQ66
X11:4
0V /33.3 3M
Earth bridges X11:5

=_7_039-K1:A2 /31.1 AI64 V
Earth bridges X11:6
-K1:X11:5 /31.2 AI66 V

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH PLC overview Onboard S7-1200
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎SPS γενική άποψή Onboard S7-1200 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 34
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K2
X10:1
/33.5 24V
AI L+
X10:2
/33.5 0V
AI M
X10:4 Current measuring separator
AI128 /16.3 =_1_001-T1:42
AI 0+ ‎Μέτρήςή ρευματος διαχωριστησ
V X10:5 Earth bridges
A /31.3
AI 0- ‎Γέφυρες γείωσης
X10:6 (optional) flow feed
AI130 /27.4 =_9_056-X2:5
AI 1+ ‎(επιλογή) διαρροή προςαγωγή
A /31.4
X11:4 Earth bridges

AI132 /31.5 -K2:X10:7
AI 2+ ‎Γέφυρες γείωσης
A /31.6
X11:6 Earth bridges
AI134 /31.6 -K2:X11:5
AI 3+ ‎Γέφυρες γείωσης
A /31.7
X13:4 Earth bridges

/31.8
AQ 0M ‎Γέφυρες γείωσης
X13:5
AQ128
AQ 0
X13:6 Earth bridges
/31.8
AQ 1M ‎Γέφυρες γείωσης
X13:7
AQ130
AQ 1

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH PLC overview S7-1200 4AI/2AO
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎SPS γενική άποψή S7-1200 4AI/2AO Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 35
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K3
X10:3
/33.6 0V
DI a 1M
X10:4
DI12.0
DI a .0
X10:5 (optional) impulse flow feed
DI12.1 /27.3 =_9_056-X2:4
DI a .1 ‎(επιλογή) παλμοσ διαρροή προςαγωγή
X10:6 (optional) LSL solids tank probe min.
DI12.2 /20.1 =_9_015-X2:1
DI a .2 ‎(επιλογή) LSL δοχείο στερεών αισθητηρασ ΕΛAΧ.
X10:7 (optional) LAH solids tank probe max.
DI12.3 /20.3 =_9_016-X2:1
DI a .3 ‎(επιλογή) LAH δοχείο στερεών αισθητηρασ μέγ..
X11:3
/33.6 0V
DI a 2M
X11:4
DI12.4
DI a .4
X11:5
DI12.5
DI a .5
X11:6 (optional) PAL operating water
DI12.6 /21.1 =_9_019-X2:2
DI a .6 ‎(επιλογή) PAL νερό ελέγχου
X11:7 (optional) PAL control air
DI12.7 /22.1 =_9_034-X2:2
DI a .7 ‎(επιλογή) PAL αέρας ελέγχου
X12:3
/33.6 0V
DI b 3M
X12:4
DI13.0
DI b .0
X12:5
DI13.1
DI b .1
X12:6
DI13.2
DI b .2
X12:7
DI13.3
DI b .3
X13:3
/33.6 0V
DI b 4M
X13:4
DI13.4
DI b .4
X13:5
DI13.5
DI b .5
X13:6
DI13.6
DI b .6
X13:7
DI13.7
DI b .7

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH PLC overview S7-1200 16DI
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎SPS γενική άποψή S7-1200 16DI Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 36
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K4
X10:1
/33.7 24V
DQ a L+
X10:2
/33.8 0V
DQ a M
X10:4 Hood flush water
DQ16.0 /24.2 =Y-X2:8
DQ a .0 ‎Νερό ξεπλυματος καλυμματος
X10:5 Product feed
DQ16.1 /26.4 =_7_039-K1:A1
DQ a .1 ‎Συρροή προiόντος
X10:6 (optional) water feed
DQ16.2 /25.1 =Y-X2:13
DQ a .2 ‎(επιλογή) συρροή νερου
X10:7 (optional) product discharge tank / drain
DQ16.3 /25.2 =Y-X2:14
DQ a .3 ‎(επιλογή) εκροή προiόντος ρεζερβουαρ / καναλι
X11:4 (optional) control air constant pressure valve

DQ16.4 /24.5 =Y-X2:10
DQ a .4 ‎(επιλογή) αέρας ελέγχου βαλβίdα ςταθερής πίεςής
X11:5 Spare
DQ16.5 /24.7 =Y-X2:11
DQ a .5 ‎Εφεdρεία
X11:6 (optional) spray ball
DQ16.6 /25.5 =Y-X2:16
DQ a .6 ‎(επιλογή) κεφαλη ψεκασμου
X11:7
DQ16.7
DQ a .7
X12:4 (optional) C02 hood

DQ17.0 /23.5 =Y-X2:4
DQ b .0 ‎(επιλογή) C02 κ πάκι
X12:5 (optional) hydrohermetic
DQ17.1 /23.2 =Y-X2:2
DQ b .1 ‎(επιλογή) υδροερμητικη
X12:6 Solids pump start / stop
DQ17.2 /30.8 =100-K4:A1
DQ b .2 ‎Αντλία ςτερεών ςωμάτων εκκίνηση / στοπ
X12:7 Addendum water
DQ17.3 /25.4 =Y-X2:15
DQ b .3 ‎Συμπληρωματικο νερο
X13:4 (optional) probe flushing

DQ17.4 /23.4 =Y-X2:3
DQ b .4 ‎(επιλογή) έκπλυση αισθητήρα
X13:5 Spare
DQ17.5 /24.8 =Y-X2:12
DQ b .5 ‎Εφεdρεία
X13:6
DQ17.6
DQ b .6
X13:7
DQ17.7
DQ b .7

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH PLC overview S7-1200 16DO
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎SPS γενική άποψή S7-1200 16DO Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 37
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
800 mm 300 mm
760 mm
8,5 mm
1 =0-Q1 ‎Isolator Γενικός dιακόπτής

3 2 =0-S0 ‎Emergency stop Κίνdυνος-στοπ
3 =00-P1 ‎Operating panel KTP400 Πίνακας χειρισμού KTP400
4
4 =0-M1 ‎Cabinet fan Ανεμιςτήρ ς ερμ ρίου μετ γωγών
2
1200 mm
1160 mm
1
I
On
TRIP.
RESET
O
Off

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Arrangement drawing
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Εχεδιο δομησ Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 38
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & ELU 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 =00-K1
2 =00-K2
3 =00-K3
4 =00-K4
5 =0-T2
6 =0-K3
7 =_1_001-K1
SC1
8 =_1_001-K3
1 2 3 4 5
9 =_1_001-K4
10 =_7_039-K1
11 =0-B1
12 =0-K1
13 =_1_001-K2
6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 14 =_9_022-T1
15 =0-F1
16 =0-F2
17 =0-F3
151617181920 212223 24 25 26
18 =0-F4
19 =0-F5
20 =0-F6
21 =0-X1.1
28 22 =0-X1.2
27 23 =0-X2.1
24 =0-X2.2
25 =_1_001-P1
29 30 3132 33 34353637 38 39 40
41
42
43
4445 26 =_1_001-T1
SC 27 =0-Q1 ‎Isolator Γενικός dιακόπτής
PE 28 =0-T1
29 =0-N
30 =0-X1
31 =_7_039-X1
32 =_9_056-X1
33 =0-X2
34 =_9_015-X2
35 =_9_016-X2
36 =_9_019-X2
37 =_9_034-X2
38 =Y-X2
39 =_9_056-X2
40 =100-X2
41 =100-K1
42 =100-K2
43 =100-K3
44 =100-K4
45 =SEP-X12

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Arrangement drawing
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Εχεδιο δομησ Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 39
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & ELU 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal strip designation
‎ΤΥΠΟΣ ΚAΛΩΔΙΟΥ
‎ΧAΡAΚΤΗΡΙΣΜΟΣ ΛΩΡΙΔAΣ AΚΡΟΔΕΚΤΩΝ
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-N
‎AΚΡΟΔΕΚΤΗΣ
‎ΟΝΟΜA ΚAΛΩΔΙΟΥ
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
Function text Target designation Target designation Page / column
‎ΤΕΣΤ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΙAΣ ‎ΧAΡAΚΤΗΡΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟΧΟΥ ‎ΧAΡAΚΤΗΡΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟΧΟΥ ‎Πλευρά / ΣΤΗΛΗ
Incoming &EFS/10.2
-PE PE N -N
WDU 10 BL

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-N
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-N Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 40
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EMA 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
_-J 4x10 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-PE
=_7_024+CC
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
=0+CC
Link
WD1
WG1
Incoming &EFS/10.1
PE =CUSTOMER+L-X PEN PEN
&EFS/10.1
= PE -PE
-N N
PE busbar &EFS/10.2
‎Μπάρα PE
-SC SC PE -PE
&EFS/10.3
= -SC1 SC1 PE -PE
Earthing mounting plate 1 &EFS/10.4

‎Γείωση πλάκα συναρμολόγησης 1
-1M PE PE -PE
Earthing door 1 &EFS/10.4

‎Γείωση πόρτα 1
-1T PE PE -PE
Earthing cabinet 1 &EFS/10.5

‎Γείωση περίβλήμ 1
-1G PE PE -PE
Transformer &EFS/11.1
‎Μετασχηματιστής
-PE PE -T1 GND
Control voltage AC &EFS/11.3

-PE PE -X1 5
Power supply &EFS/11.6

‎Μετ =χήμ τι=τής Ίικτυου
-PE PE -T2 PE
Control voltage DC &EFS/11.6

-PE PE -X2 5
Cabinet fan &EFS/14.3

-PE PE -M1 PE
Emergency stop &EFS/15.3

PE -PE
&EFS/15.3
= PE -PE
Separator &EFS/16.1
-PE PE =_1_001-T1 95
(optional) PAL operating water &EFS/21.2

‎(επιλογή) PAL νερό ελέγχου
PE -PE
(optional) PAL control air &EFS/22.2

‎(επιλογή) PAL αέρας ελέγχου
PE -PE
Spare &EFS/23.1
‎Εφεdρεία
PE -PE
(optional) hydrohermetic &EFS/23.2

‎(επιλογή) υδροερμητικη
PE -PE
(optional) probe flushing &EFS/23.4

‎(επιλογή) έκπλυση αισθητήρα
PE -PE
(optional) C02 hood &EFS/23.5

‎(επιλογή) C02 κ πάκι
PE -PE
Spare &EFS/23.7
‎Εφεdρεία
PE -PE
Opening water &EFS/23.8

PE =_7_024+L-M1 PE PE -PE
(optional) closing water &EFS/24.1

PE -PE
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-PE
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-PE Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-PE
=_7_501/Y1+CC
=_7_039+CC
=_7_022+CC
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
Link
WG7
WG6
WG5
WG4
WG3
WG2
WG1
WG1
WG1
WG1
Hood flush water &EFS/24.2
‎Νερό ξεπλυματος καλυμματος
Spare &EFS/24.4
‎Εφεdρεία
PE -PE
(optional) control air constant pressure valve &EFS/24.5

‎(επιλογή) αέρας ελέγχου βαλβίdα ςταθερής πίεςής
PE -PE
Spare &EFS/24.7
‎Εφεdρεία
PE -PE
Spare &EFS/24.8
‎Εφεdρεία
PE -PE
(optional) water feed &EFS/25.1

‎(επιλογή) συρροή νερου
PE -PE
(optional) product discharge tank / drain &EFS/25.2

‎(επιλογή) εκροή προiόντος ρεζερβουαρ / καναλι
PE -PE
Addendum water &EFS/25.4

‎Συμπληρωματικο νερο
PE =_7_501/Y1+L-M1 PE PE -PE
(optional) spray ball &EFS/25.5

‎(επιλογή) κεφαλη ψεκασμου
PE -PE
Product feed &EFS/26.2

‎Συρροή προiόντος
(optional) 230VAC &EFS/27.1

‎(επιλογή) 230VAC
PE -PE
&EFS/27.2
24VDC PE -PE
Potential equalization flow transmitter &EFS/27.5

‎Ισοδυναμικη συνδεση προςροφήτήρας dιαρροής
PE -PE
Separator start/stop &EFS/29.1

‎Γιαχωριστησ εκκίνηση/στοπ
PE =100+L-S1 PE PE -PE
Product start/stop &EFS/29.3

CIP start/stop &EFS/29.4

Overflow total eject &EFS/29.5

Partial eject &EFS/29.7


PE =100+L-X PE PE -PE


Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-PE
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
Link
Function text Target designation Target designation
WG11
WG10
Page / column
WG9
WG8
Common failure &EFS/30.4
Separator ready for operation &EFS/30.6

‎Διαχωριςτής ςε ετοιμότήτα
Product pump start/stop &EFS/30.7

‎Αντλία προiόντος εκκίνηση/στοπ
Solids pump start / stop &EFS/30.9

‎Αντλία ςτερεών ςωμάτων εκκίνηση / στοπ
Operating panel KTP400 &EFS/32.1

-PE PE =00-P1 X80:PA
CPU &EFS/33.1
CPU
-PE PE =00-K1 X10:3
Analog input card / output card &EFS/33.4

‎Αναλογικό κάρτα εισόδου / κάρτα εξόδου
-PE PE =00-K2 X10:3
Digital input card &EFS/33.5

‎Ψηφιακη καρτα εισοδοσ
-PE PE =00-K3 X11:1
Digital output card &EFS/33.6

‎Ψηφιακη καρτα εξοδου
-PE PE =00-K4 X11:1

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-SC
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
X12_WG1
=SEP+CC
Link
Sc busbar &EFS/10.3
‎Μπάρα sc
-PE PE SC -SC
KLBUE 3-8
SIALH/SLL proximity switch bowl &EFS/28.4
SC =SEP-X12_WG1 SC SC -SC
KLBUE 3-8
(optional) flow feed &EFS/27.5
‎(επιλογή) διαρροή προςαγωγή
SC -SC
KLBUE 3-8

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-SC
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-SC Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 44
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-SC1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
Sc busbar &EFS/10.3
‎Μπάρα sc
-PE PE SC1 -SC1

SC1 -SC1
KLBUE 3-8
SC1 -SC1
KLBUE 3-8
&EFS/28.4
= SC1 -SC1
KLBUE 3-8

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-SC1
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-SC1 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-X1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
1 -F2 2
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.2
= 2 -F3 1
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.3
= 3 -T2 N/L2
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.3
= 4 -T1 0.
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.3
= -PE PE 5
WTR 2,5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-X1
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-X1 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 46
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-X1.1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
Control voltage AC air conditioning &EFS/12.1
‎Τάςις ελέγχου AC κλιματισμός
1 -F4 2
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/12.1
= 1 -B1 1

=_7_039-X1 1 2 -F5 2
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/12.2
= =_7_039-K1 11 2 =_1_001-K1 23

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-X1.1
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-X1.1 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 47
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-X1.2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
Control voltage AC air conditioning &EFS/12.1
‎Τάςις ελέγχου AC κλιματισμός
1 -T2 N/L2
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/12.1
= 1 -M1 N

=_7_039-X1 2 2
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/12.2
= 2 =_1_001-P1 2

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
Control voltage DC &EFS/11.5
1 -T2 L+
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.6
= 2 -F6 1
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.6
= 3 -T2 M
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.6
= 4 -X2.2 1
WDU 2,5
&EFS/11.6
= -PE PE 5
WTR 2,5
6 -S0 22
WDU 2,5
&EFS/15.3
= 7
WDU 2,5
&EFS/15.3
= 8
WDU 2,5
&EFS/15.3
= 9 -K1 A1
WDU 2,5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-X2.1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
Control voltage DC control &EFS/13.1
‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC έλεγχος
1 -F6 2
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.1
= -S0 21 1 =_9_022-T1 10
&EFS/13.1
= =_9_056-X2 1 2
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.1
= 2
Control voltage DC PLC &EFS/13.2
‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC SPS
3
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.2
= =00-P1 X80:L+ 3 =_1_001-K3 33
&EFS/13.2
= =_9_015-X2 2 4
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.2
= 4 =00-K1 X10:1

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-X2.2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
Control voltage DC control &EFS/13.1
‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC έλεγχος
1 -X2 4
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.1
= 1 -K1 A2
&EFS/13.1
= =_9_056-X2 2 2
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.1
= 2
Control voltage DC PLC &EFS/13.2
‎Τάςις ελέγχου DC SPS
3
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.2
= =00-P1 X80:M 3 -K3 A2
&EFS/13.2
= =_9_015-X2 3 4 =_1_001-T1 39
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.2
= =_7_039-K1 A2 4 =00-K1 X11:5
&EFS/13.3
= =_9_056-X2 6 5
ZDU 2,5/4AN
&EFS/13.3
= =100-K4 A2 5 =00-K2 X13:4

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
_-J 4x10 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+CC-XQ1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
=0+CC
Link
WD1
Incoming &EFS/10.1
1 =CUSTOMER+L-X L1 2 -Q1 2
&EFS/10.1
= 2 =CUSTOMER+L-X L2 4 -Q1 4
&EFS/10.1
= 3 =CUSTOMER+L-X L3 6 -Q1 6

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-XQ1
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =0+CC-XQ1 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
FC.CY-J 4x6 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=_1_001+CC-XT1
=_1_001+CC
=_1_001+CC
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
WD1
WG1
PTC thermistor &EFS/16.3
‎Αιςθήτήρ ς PTC
1 +L-M1 T1 50 -T1 50
&EFS/16.3
= 2 +L-M1 T2 54 -T1 54
&EFS/16.4
= SC -WG1 SC SC -T1 SC.
Separator &EFS/16.1
1 +L-M1 V1 96 -T1 96
&EFS/16.1
= 2 +L-M1 U1 97 -T1 97
&EFS/16.1
= 3 +L-M1 W1 98 -T1 98
&EFS/16.1
= PE +L-M1 PE 99 -T1 99
&EFS/16.2
= SC +L-M1 SC SC -T1 SC,

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =_1_001+CC-XT1
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =_1_001+CC-XT1 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 53
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=_7_039+CC-X1
=_7_039+CC
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
WG1
1 +L-M1 1 1 =0-X1.1 2
WDU 2,5
=_9_056-X1 1

2 +L-M1 2 2 =0-X1.2 2
WDU 2,5
=_9_056-X1 2

3 +L-M1 3 3 -K1 12
WDU 2,5
&EFS/26.1
= 4 +L-M1 4 4 -K1 14
WDU 2,5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =_7_039+CC-X1
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =_7_039+CC-X1 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 54
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=_9_015+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
(optional) LSL solids tank probe min. &EFS/20.1
‎(επιλογή) LSL δοχείο στερεών αισθητηρασ ΕΛAΧ.
1 =00-K3 X10:6
WDU 2,5
&EFS/20.1
= 2 =0-X2.1 4
WDU 2,5
=_9_016-X2 2
(optional) LSL solids tank probe min. &EFS/20.1

‎(επιλογή) LSL δοχείο στερεών αισθητηρασ ΕΛAΧ.
3 =0-X2.2 4
WDU 2,5
=_9_016-X2 3

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=_9_016+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
(optional) LAH solids tank probe max. &EFS/20.3
‎(επιλογή) LAH δοχείο στερεών αισθητηρασ μέγ..
1 =00-K3 X10:7
WDU 2,5
&EFS/20.3
= 2 =_9_015-X2 2
WDU 2,5
=_9_019-X2 1
(optional) LAH solids tank probe max. &EFS/20.3

‎(επιλογή) LAH δοχείο στερεών αισθητηρασ μέγ..
3 =_9_015-X2 3
WDU 2,5
=Y-X2 -

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=_9_019+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
1 =_9_016-X2 2
WDU 2,5
=_9_034-X2 1

2 =00-K3 X11:6
WDU 2,5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=_9_034+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
1 =_9_019-X2 1
WDU 2,5
=_9_056-X2 3

2 =00-K3 X11:7
WDU 2,5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=Y+CC-X2
=_7_022+CC
=_7_024+CC
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
WG1
WG1
Spare &EFS/23.1
‎Εφεdρεία
1
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/23.1
= - =_9_016-X2 3
(optional) hydrohermetic &EFS/23.2

‎(επιλογή) υδροερμητικη
2 =00-K4 X12:5
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/23.3
= -
(optional) probe flushing &EFS/23.4
‎(επιλογή) έκπλυση αισθητήρα
3 =00-K4 X13:4
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/23.4
= -
(optional) C02 hood &EFS/23.5
‎(επιλογή) C02 κ πάκι
4 =00-K4 X12:4
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/23.6
= -
Spare &EFS/23.7
‎Εφεdρεία
5
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/23.7
= -
Opening water &EFS/23.8
1 =_7_024+L-M1 1 6 =00-K1 X12:10
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/23.8
= 2 =_7_024+L-M1 2 -
(optional) closing water &EFS/24.1
7 =00-K1 X12:9
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/24.1
= -
Hood flush water &EFS/24.2
‎Νερό ξεπλυματος καλυμματος
1 =_7_022+L-M1 1 8 =00-K4 X10:4
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/24.3
= 2 =_7_022+L-M1 2 -
Spare &EFS/24.4
‎Εφεdρεία
9 =00-K1 X12:11
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/24.4
= -
(optional) control air constant pressure valve &EFS/24.5
‎(επιλογή) αέρας ελέγχου βαλβίdα ςταθερής πίεςής
10 =00-K4 X11:4
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/24.6
= -
Spare &EFS/24.7
‎Εφεdρεία
11 =00-K4 X11:5
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/24.7
= -
Spare &EFS/24.8
‎Εφεdρεία
12 =00-K4 X13:5
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/24.8
= -
13 =00-K4 X10:6
WDK 2,5 ZQV
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =Y+CC-X2
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =Y+CC-X2 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 59
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=Y+CC-X2
=_7_501/Y1+CC
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
WG1
-
(optional) product discharge tank / drain &EFS/25.2
‎(επιλογή) εκροή προiόντος ρεζερβουαρ / καναλι
14 =00-K4 X10:7
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/25.3
= -
Addendum water &EFS/25.4
‎Συμπληρωματικο νερο
1 =_7_501/Y1+L-M1 1 15 =00-K4 X12:7
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/25.4
= 2 =_7_501/Y1+L-M1 2 -
(optional) spray ball &EFS/25.5
‎(επιλογή) κεφαλη ψεκασμου
16 =00-K4 X11:6
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/25.6
= - =_9_056-X2 6

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =Y+CC-X2
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =Y+CC-X2 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=_9_056+CC-X1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
(optional) 230VAC &EFS/27.1
‎(επιλογή) 230VAC
1 =_7_039-X1 1
WDU 2,5
&EFS/27.1
= 2 =_7_039-X1 2
WDU 2,5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=_9_056+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
Link
&EFS/27.2
24VDC 1 =0-X2.1 2
WDU 2,5
&EFS/27.2
= 2 =0-X2.2 2
WDU 2,5
(optional) impulse flow feed &EFS/27.3
‎(επιλογή) παλμοσ διαρροή προςαγωγή
3 =_9_034-X2 1
WDU 2,5
=100-X2 1
(optional) impulse flow feed &EFS/27.3

‎(επιλογή) παλμοσ διαρροή προςαγωγή
4 =00-K3 X10:5
WDU 2,5
5 =00-K2 X10:6
WDU 2,5
&EFS/27.5
= 6 =Y-X2 -
WDU 2,5
=0-X2.2 5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=100+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
Link
WG10
Page / column
WG9
WG8
WG7
WG6
WG5
WG4
WG3
WG2
WG1
1 +L-S1 1 =_9_056-X2 3
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/29.1
= 2 +L-S1 2 =00-K1 X10:16
Product start/stop &EFS/29.2

1 +L-S2 3
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/29.2
= 2 +L-S2 4 =00-K1 X10:17
CIP start/stop &EFS/29.4

1 +L-S3 5
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/29.4
= 2 +L-S3 6 =00-K1 X10:18
Overflow total eject &EFS/29.5

2 +L-S4 7
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/29.5
= 1 +L-S4 8 =00-K1 X10:20
Partial eject &EFS/29.7

2 +L-S5 9
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/29.7
= 1 +L-S5 10 =00-K1 X10:19

1 +L-X 11 =_1_001-K1 44
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/30.1
= 2 +L-X 12 =_1_001-K1 43

1 +L-X 13 =0-K1 42
WDK 2,5 ZQV
&EFS/30.2
= 2 +L-X 14 =0-K1 41
Common failure &EFS/30.4

1 +L-X -K1 -K1 12
&EFS/30.4
= 2 +L-X -K1 -K1 14
&EFS/30.4
= 3 +L-X -K1 -K1 11
Separator ready for operation &EFS/30.5

‎Διαχωριςτής ςε ετοιμότήτα
-K2 -K2 12
&EFS/30.5
= 1 +L-X -K2 -K2 14
&EFS/30.5
= 2 +L-X -K2 -K2 11
Product pump start/stop &EFS/30.6

‎Αντλία προiόντος εκκίνηση/στοπ
-K3 -K3 12
&EFS/30.7
= 1 +L-X -K3 -K3 14
&EFS/30.7
= 2 +L-X -K3 -K3 11

-K4 -K4 12

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=100+CC-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
=100+CC
Link
WG11
Page / column
1 +L-X -K4 -K4 14
&EFS/30.8
= 2 +L-X -K4 -K4 11

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=SEP+CC-X12
Connection
Connection
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
X12_WG1
=SEP+CC
Link
1 +JB-X12 1 1 =_9_022-T1 1+
WDU 2,5
&EFS/28.4
= 2 +JB-X12 2 2 =_9_022-T1 3-
WDU 2,5

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =SEP+CC-X12
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =SEP+CC-X12 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 65
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²

_.-O 2x0,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=SEP+JB-X12
Connection
Connection
=_9_022+JB
Terminal
‎ΓΕΦΥΡA
Cable name
Cable name
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
‎ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
X12_WG1
=SEP+CC
Link
WG1
BN =_9_022+L-B1 + 1 +CC-X12 1 1
&EFS/28.4
= BU =_9_022+L-B1 - 2 +CC-X12 2 2

Editor FAL/PLE
Customer: GEA Westfalia Separator IO prime + JB
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Terminal connection diagram =SEP+JB-X12
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Σχεδιάγραμμα ακροδεκτών =SEP+JB-X12 Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 66
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable layout
‎ΣΥΝΟΠΤΙΚΗ ΠAΡAΣΤAΣΗ ΚAΛΩΔΙΩΝ
Wires used
Cable name Target (to) Cable type Cross-section Length External diameter Remark
/page.path Source (from) Wires total ‎ΣΥΡΜAΤA
‎ΔιΎτοκό ‎Μήκος ‎Εξωτερική διάμετρος
‎ΟΝΟΜA ΚAΛΩΔΙΟΥ Target (Up to) ‎ΤΥΠΟΣ ΚAΛΩΔΙΟΥ ‎ΧΡΗΣΗ ‎ΠAΡAΤΗΡΗΣΗ
=0+CC-WD1 &EFS/10.1 =0+CC-PE;=0+CC-XQ1 =CUSTOMER+L-X _-J 4x 4 10 mm² 17,6 mm
=_1_001+CC-WD1 &EFS/16.1 =_1_001+CC-XT1 =_1_001+L-M1 FC.CY-J 4x 4 6 mm² 16,6 mm
=_1_001+CC-WG1 &EFS/16.3 =_1_001+CC-XT1 =_1_001+L-M1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm
=0+CC-PE;=_7_039+CC-X
=_7_039+CC-WG1 &EFS/26.1 =_7_039+L-M1 .-J 5x 5 1,5 mm² 10 mm
1
=_7_501/Y1+CC-WG1 &EFS/25.4 =0+CC-PE;=Y+CC-X2 =_7_501/Y1+L-M1 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² 8,1 mm
=_7_024+CC-WG1 &EFS/23.8 =0+CC-PE;=Y+CC-X2 =_7_024+L-M1 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² 8,1 mm
=_7_022+CC-WG1 &EFS/24.2 =0+CC-PE;=Y+CC-X2 =_7_022+L-M1 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² 8,1 mm
=100+CC-WG1 &EFS/29.1 =0+CC-PE;=100+CC-X2 =100+L-S1 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² 8,1 mm
=100+CC-WG6 &EFS/30.1 =0+CC-PE;=100+CC-X2 =100+L-X .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² 8,1 mm
=SEP+CC-X12_WG1 &EFS/28.4 =0+CC-SC;=SEP+CC-X12 =SEP+JB-X12 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Cable layout
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Συνοπτικη ραρασταση καλωδιων Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 67
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EMB 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable layout
‎ΣΥΝΟΠΤΙΚΗ ΠAΡAΣΤAΣΗ ΚAΛΩΔΙΩΝ
Wires used
Cable name Target (to) Cable type Cross-section Length External diameter Remark
/page.path Source (from) Wires total ‎ΣΥΡΜAΤA
‎ΔιΎτοκό ‎Μήκος ‎Εξωτερική διάμετρος
‎ΟΝΟΜA ΚAΛΩΔΙΟΥ Target (Up to) ‎ΤΥΠΟΣ ΚAΛΩΔΙΟΥ ‎ΧΡΗΣΗ ‎ΠAΡAΤΗΡΗΣΗ
=_9_022+JB-WG1 &EFS/28.4 =SEP+JB-X12 =_9_022+L-B1 _.-O 2x 2 0,5 mm² 4,8 mm Westfalia Separator

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Cable layout
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Συνοπτικη ραρασταση καλωδιων Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 68
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Spare
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Εφεdρεία Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 69
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hinweise zur Installation von Kabeln und Leitungen

Directions for installation from cables and conductors
* Schutzmaßnahmen nach Bestimmungen des VDE bzw. zuständigen EVU ausführen!

All protective measures are to be taken in accordance with electric codes, rules and regulations!
* Generell sind die Vorgaben des lokalen Energieversorgers zwingend einzuhalten
In general the rules and regulations of the local power authorities have to be followed.
* Kabel und Leitungen sind so auszuwählen und zu verlegen, dass eine Gefährdung von Personen und der Umgebung ausgeschlossen ist.
Die angegebenen Kabelquerschnitte sind bezogen auf eine Kabellänge von 50m, Kupfer als Leitematerial, Verlegeart "C" und
eine maximale Umgebungstemperatur von 30°C. Siehe hierzu DIN VDE 0298-4 (Verwendung von Kabeln und isolierten Leitungen für Starkstromanlagen - Teil 4:
Empfohlene Werte für die Strombelastbarkeit von Kabeln und Leitungen für feste Verlegung in und an Gebäuden und von flexiblen Leitungen).
Neben der Strombelastung sind bei der Errichtung von Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen weitere Faktoren zu berücksichtigen.
Siehe hierzu IEC 60364-5-52 (Errichten von Niederspannungsanlagen - Teil 5: Auswahl und Errichtung elektrischer Betriebsmittel - Kapitel 52: Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen)
Cables and conductors must be selected and installed in a way to eliminate any risk to persons and the environment.
The cable cross-sections specified in these drawings are based on a max. length of 50m, copper as conducting material, laying version "C" and a maximum ambient temperature of 30°C.
Refer also to DIN VDE 0298-4 (Usage of cables and cords in power installations - Part 4:
Recommended current-carrying capacity for screened and unscreened cables for fixed wirings in and around buildings and for flexible cables and cords).
Besides the current load additional parameters have to taken into account for the erection of wiring sxstems.
Refer also to IEC 60364-5-52 (Erection of low voltage installations - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Chapter 52: Wiring systems)
* Messleitungen sind grundsätzlich abgeschirmt zu verlegen!

Measuring lines must always be laid shielded!
* WD-Kabel getrennt vom WF-/WG-Kabeln verlegen!

WD-cables to be installed separate from WF-/WG-cable!
WD-Kabel Energiekabel < 1kV WE-Kabel Erdungs-/Potentialausgleichsleiterleiter

WD-cable = Energy cable < 1kV WE-cable = Earth-/ Equipotential bonding conductor
WF-Kabel Datenbus WG-Kabel Steuer-/ Messkabel WH-Kabel Lichtwellenleiter
WF-cable = Data bus WG-cable = Control-/measuring cable WH-cable = Optical fibre
* Legende Kabeltypen (Kabelliste)

Legend cable typ (list of cables)
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter

-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor FC.CY = Motorkabel FU mit konzentrischem Außenleiter (PE)
Motor cable FC with concentric outer (PE)
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter
-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor PL = Potentialausgleichsleiter
Equipotential bonding conductor
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor screened Ex-CY = Steuerleitung blau für eigensichere Stromkreise
Control line blue for intrinsically safe circuits
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor screened CY-TP = Datenleitung paarverseilt
Data line twisted pair
Motorkabel FU geschirmt mit Schutzleiter
FC.CY-J = Motor cable FC screened with protective conductor

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Instructions for installation
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Υποδείξεις εγκατάστασης Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 70
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FC
=..-U.
Generelle Information zum Potentialausgleich.
Die Informationen auf diesem Blatt sind nicht
kundenspezifisch angepasst.
IP54
General Information for the equipotential bonding system.

≥10 mm²
GN YE Please note, that the information shown on this page are
not customised.
PE-Schiene
protective earth - rail
IDM
≥25 mm²
GN YE
≥10 mm²
GN YE
PA
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
≥10 mm²
GN YE
equipotential bonding building
Potentialausgleich Gebäude
≥25 mm²
GN YE
Fundamenterder
foundation earth

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Potential equalization separator
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Ισοδυναμικη συνδεση γιαχωριστησ Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 71
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Parts list
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
=0+CC-N &EFS/10.2 1020380000 1020380000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 10 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, blau, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1437-030 GV2P32 Motorschutzschalter GV2-P - 24...32A Groupe Schneider
Motor circuit breaker GV2-P - 24...32A
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1437-240 GV2APN01 Drehantrieb für Türeinbau, abschließbar, schwarz Groupe Schneider
Front-rotating drive, black
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 GVAPK11 GVAPK11 Achshalter für Drehantrieb Groupe Schneider
Axle mount for actuator
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-4670-030 GV1G09 Anschlussblock Groupe Schneider
Bloco de terminais
=0+CC-SC &EFS/10.3; 1600480000 1600480000 Klemmbügel für Schirmanschluss, zur Montage auf Sammelschiene 10x3mm Weidmueller
Retaining clip for shield connection
=0+CC-F1 &EFS/11.1 0005-1872-170 3RV2011-1BA10 Leistungsschalter, 1,4...2,0A, BGR S00, für den Motorschutz Siemens
Circuit-breaker, 1,4...2,0A, size S00, motor protection
=0+CC-F2 &EFS/11.2 566532 566532 Sicherungsautomat, D 10A, 1 pol AEG
Circuit breaker
=0+CC-F3 &EFS/11.6 0005-1551-060 566516 Sicherungsautomat, C 6A, 1 pol AEG
Circuit breaker
=0+CC-T1 &EFS/11.1 STU400/2X115 STU400/2X115 Steuerspannungstransformator, Prim.: 210-540V, Sec.: 2x115V, 400VA Block
Control voltage transformer
=0+CC-T2 &EFS/11.5 0005-1407-050 6EP1333-2BA20-0AA0 Einphasennetzgerät, Prim.: 120/230V, 50/60Hz, Sec.: 24VDC, 5A Siemens
Single phase power supply, Prim.: 120/230V, 50/60Hz, Sec.: 24VDC, 5A
=0+CC-X1 &EFS/11.2; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=0+CC-X1 &EFS/11.3 1855610000 1855610000 Trenn- und Messtrenn-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, beige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Disconnect and modular disconnect terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=0+CC-X2 &EFS/11.5; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=0+CC-X2 &EFS/11.6 1855610000 1855610000 Trenn- und Messtrenn-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, beige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Disconnect and modular disconnect terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker
=0+CC-X1.1 &EFS/12.1; 1608570000 1608570000 Federzug-Reihenklemme, 2,5 mm², Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, tension clamp connection
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Separator Group GmbH Parts list
Tested 06.09.2017/GR Project: ‎Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 72
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: en/el Drawing No.: 8552-7000-102 & EPB 75 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Parts list

Circuit breaker
=0+CC-X2.2 &EFS/13.1.. 1608570000 1608570000 Federzug-Reihenklemme, 2,5 mm², Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=0+CC-B1 &EFS/14.2 01141.0-00 01141.0-00 Thermostat für Lüftersteuerung, 1 NO, 0-60°C Ingenieur-Büro Böhm
Thermostat
=0+CC-M1 &EFS/14.2 0005-1409-380 116 43 10 1 054 Filterlüfter, 207-253V, 50/60Hz, 45/39W, 231/265m³/h Pfannenberg
Filter fan
=0+CC-M1 &EFS/14.2 0005-1409-240 117 40 00 1 055 Austrittsfilter Pfannenberg
Discharge filter
=0+CC-K1 &EFS/15.3 3SK1111-1AB30 3SK1111-1AB30 Sicherheitsschaltgerät, Grundgerät Standard 24VAC/DC, 3NO/1NC Siemens
Emergency stop relay, 24VAC/DC, 3NO/1NC
=0+CC-K3 &EFS/15.8 0005-1870-200 3RH2140-1JB40 Koppelhilfsschütz, 4S 24VDC, mit Diode Siemens
Coupling contactor relay, 4NO 24VDC, integrated diode
=0+CC-S0 &EFS/15.1 3SB3000-1HA20 3SB3000-1HA20 PILZDRUCKTASTER RUND 40MM Siemens
MUSHROOM-SHAPED PUSHBUTTON
=0+CC-S0 &EFS/15.1 3SB3400-0M 3SB3400-0M SCHALTELEMENT MIT 1 SCHALTGLIED, 1OE, MONTAGEUEBERWACHUNGSKONTAKT Siemens
CONTACT BLOC WITH 1 CONTACT 1NC
=0+CC-S0 &EFS/15.1 0005-4393-000 3SB3921-0AB GELBES UNTERLEGSCHILD, RUND SELBSTKLEBEND, OHNE AUFSCHRIFT 80MM Siemens
YELLOW BACKING PLATE, ROUND SELF-ADHESIVE WITHOUT INSCRIPTION 80MM
=_1_001+CC-T1 &EFS/16.1 0005-5302-110 FC 302P15K T5E20H1X Frequenzumrichter 15kW, 380-500VAC, Gr.B3 Danfoss
Frequency converter
=_1_001+CC-K2 &EFS/17.5 3RP2505-1RW30 3RP2505-1RW30 Zeitrelais, Multifunktion, 2 W, 13 Funktionen, 7 Zeitbereiche 0,05 s...100 h, 24...240 Siemens
Time relay, multi-function, 2 C/O, 13 functions, 7 time set. ranges 0,05 s...100 h, 24... 240
=_1_001+CC-K3 &EFS/17.1 0005-1870-200 3RH2140-1JB40 Koppelhilfsschütz, 4S 24VDC, mit Diode Siemens
=_1_001+CC-P1 &EFS/19.1 0005-1187-040 BW70.29-230V/50-60Hz Stundenzähler, auf Montageplatte, 230V/50-60Hz Hugo Mueller Elektrotechnik
Hours counter
=_9_015+CC-X2 &EFS/20.1 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Parts list
=Y+CC-X2 &EFS/23.1; 0005-4705-000 1041100000 Durchgangs-Doppelklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=_7_039+CC-K1 &EFS/26.4 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contact
Relay single contact
=0+CC-SC1 &EFS/27.4; 1600480000 1600480000 Klemmbügel für Schirmanschluss, zur Montage auf Sammelschiene 10x3mm Weidmueller
Retaining clip for shield connection
=_9_056+CC-X2 &EFS/27.2.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=_9_022+CC-T1 &EFS/28.2 0005-1487-010 KFD2-UFC-1.D Drehzahlmessgerät, 24VDC, Eingangsfrequenz 1 mHz ... 12kHz, Stromausgang 0/4mA ... Pepperl + Fuchs
Speed measuring unit
=SEP+CC-X12 &EFS/28.4 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=100+CC-X2 &EFS/29.1; 0005-4705-000 1041100000 Durchgangs-Doppelklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=100+CC-K1 &EFS/30.4 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contact
=00+CC-P1 &EFS/32.1 0005-4760-010 6AV2124-5DC00-0AC0 Touchpanel KTP400 Comfort, 4" Farb-Display, 24VDC Siemens
Touchpanel KTP400 Comfort, 4" Color-Display, 24VDC
=00+CC-P1 &EFS/32.1 0005-3668-100 6AV2181-8XP00-0AX0 SIMATIC HMI SD-SPEICHERKARTE 2 GB Siemens
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 0005-4760-600 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 Zentralbaugruppe, SIMATIC S7-1200, CPU 1215C, 14DI/10DO/2AI/2AO Siemens
CPU module
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 0005-4278-060 6XV1850-2GH20 SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD RJ45/RJ45, LAENGE 2 M Siemens
Simatic NET, ind. ethernet TP cord RJ45/RJ45, length 2m
Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Parts list
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 Speicherkarte, 12 MByte, MMC Siemens

Memory card, 12 MByte, MMC
=00+CC-K2 &EFS/33.4 0005-4281-100 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 Analogein-/ausgabe, SM 1234, 4AE/2AA, U/I, 13/14BIT Siemens
Analoge module in-/output
=00+CC-K3 &EFS/33.5 0005-4280-040 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Eingangsmodul, SM 1221, 16DI Siemens
Digital input, SM 1221, 16DI
=00+CC-K4 &EFS/33.6 0005-4280-060 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Ausgangsmodul, SM 1222, 16 DO, 24VDC/0,5A Siemens
Digital output, SM 1222, 16 DO, 24VDC/0,5A
+CC-CABINET &ELU/38.1 1280500 1280500 Kompakt-Schaltschrank AE, lackiert RAL 7035, mit Montageplatte, eintürig Rittal
Compact enclosure AE, painted RAL 7035, with mount. plate, single door
+CC-FITTINGS &ELU/38.0 8556-9999-000 KLEINMATERIAL Kleinmaterial Schaltschrank Plenge
Incidentals control cabinet
+CC-FITTINGS &ELU/38.0 1080100000 1080100000 Endwinkel (Schirmschiene einseitig) Weidmueller
End angle
+CC-Verschraubung &ELU/38.1 0005-4486-930 70-16-060-000-10-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=5-10mm Jacob
Screw connection polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogen free, 5-10mm
+CC-Verschraubung &ELU/38.1 0005-4442-900 81-16-866-0000-04 Blindstopfen Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Blanking plug polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
+CC-Verschraubung &ELU/38.1 0013-0130-630 82-16-02-0-04 Gegenmutter Messing vernickelt, M16x1,5 Jacob
Counter nut brass nickeled, M16x1,5
+CC-Verschraubung &ELU/38.1 0005-4443-900 81-20-866-0000-04 Blindstopfen Polyamid, M20x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Blanking plug polyamide, M20x1,5, RAL 7035

Editor FAL/PLE
Projekt:
Instruction manual
Designation: Operating panel
Model: IO prime
No. 8555-9001-050
Edition 11.08.2017
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

The authors are always grateful for remarks and suggestions

for improving the documentation. These can be sent to:
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com


1.2 Note on figures and descriptions ............................................................... 8
1.4 Structure of safety notices ....................................................................... 10
1.5 Target groups .......................................................................................... 11
1.5.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 11
1.5.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 12
1.5.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 12
1.6 Service offers ........................................................................................... 12
1.6.1 Service ..................................................................................................... 12
1.6.2 Training .................................................................................................... 12
1.7 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 13
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 16

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 16
2.3 Qualification of personnel ........................................................................ 16
2.1 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 17
2.2 Modifications or manipulation of the unit ................................................. 17
2.3 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device ................................................. 17
2.3.1 Open equipment ...................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Electrical power ....................................................................................... 18
2.3.3 Operating the HMI device safely ............................................................. 18
2.3.4 Areas at risk of explosion ........................................................................ 18
2.3.5 High-frequency radiation ......................................................................... 18
2.3.6 Instructions for using the device .............................................................. 18
2.4 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 19
2.5 Liability ..................................................................................................... 19
3 Description 21
3.1 Personal safety gear ................................................................................ 23

3.2 Function of control unit and GEA IO operator panel ............................... 23
3.3 HMI device ............................................................................................... 23
3.3.1 4“ HMI device........................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 Interfaces ................................................................................................. 26
3.4 Features ................................................................................................... 27
3.5 Getting to know the operator panel of your GEA IO ................................ 27
3.5.1 Treating the GEA IO user interface properly ........................................... 27
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel ............................................................ 29
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area ................................... 29
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays ................................................................ 31
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens ................................................. 32
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements .................................................. 33
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off ................................................ 35
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines .................................................................. 35
3.5.9 Displaying output fields ............................................................................ 36
3.5.10 Displaying input fields .............................................................................. 37
3.6 Editing data in input fields ........................................................................ 38
3.6.1 Opening input fields ................................................................................. 38
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields ................................................................ 38
3.7 Password protection ................................................................................ 40

3.8 Commissioning ........................................................................................ 40

3.9 Commissioning (Easyline) ....................................................................... 41
3.10 Factory settings ....................................................................................... 42
3.11 I/O check .................................................................................................. 45
3.11.1 Test digital inputs ..................................................................................... 47
3.11.2 Test digital outputs .................................................................................. 49
3.11.3 Test analogue inputs ............................................................................... 50
3.11.4 Test analogue outputs ............................................................................. 51
3.12 Data backup............................................................................................. 52
3.12.1 Backup data ............................................................................................. 52
3.13 User management ................................................................................... 53
3.14 Operation ................................................................................................. 55
3.14.1 Display and set feed data ........................................................................ 56
3.14.2 Displaying and setting machine data ....................................................... 64
3.14.3 Displaying and setting discharge data ..................................................... 67
3.14.4 Displaying alarms and warnings .............................................................. 69
3.14.5 Opening the “Motor" screen..................................................................... 70
3.14.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen ...................................................... 72
3.14.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen ......................................................... 76
3.14.8 Opening the “Valve" screen ..................................................................... 76
3.14.9 Open the “Controller” screen ................................................................... 78
3.14.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen ....................................................... 81
3.15 Help ......................................................................................................... 85
3.15.1 Documentation......................................................................................... 86
3.15.2 Colour concept......................................................................................... 86
3.15.3 Messaging function .................................................................................. 87
3.15.4 Remote operation .................................................................................... 88
3.15.5 Screen settings ........................................................................................ 89
3.15.6 Machine information ................................................................................ 94
3.15.7 Measurements ......................................................................................... 95
3.16 Service ..................................................................................................... 97
3.16.1 Contact/hotline ......................................................................................... 97
3.16.2 4.2 Preventative maintenance ................................................................. 98
3.17 Training .................................................................................................. 100
3.18 GEA Westfalia Separator ...................................................................... 101
4 Technical data 103
4.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................... 104

4.1.1 Certificates and approvals ..................................................................... 104
4.1.2 Directives and declarations ................................................................... 104
4.1.3 Dimensional drawings of 4" Operator panel .......................................... 104
4.1.4 Technical data of the Operator panel .................................................... 104
5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device ........................................................... 110

5.1.1 Safety during transport .......................................................................... 110
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures ..................................................... 110
5.1.3 Check for transport damage .................................................................. 110
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions ..................................... 110
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage ................ 110
6 Assembly and installation 111
6.1 Safety information .................................................................................. 112

6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection ................................. 112
6.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 112

6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use ............................................ 112

6.2.2 Use with additional measures................................................................ 112
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions ............................................................. 112
6.3 Specify mounting position ...................................................................... 113
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out ............................................................. 114
6.5 Installing the HMI device ....................................................................... 115
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps ........................................................................... 115
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket ............................................................... 116
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device ........................................................................ 116
6.6 Connecting the HMI device ................................................................... 117
6.6.1 Connection instructions ......................................................................... 117
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding ............................................................................ 117
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding ................................................ 118
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply ................................................................ 119
6.6.5 Connecting the configuration PC ........................................................... 120
6.6.6 Connecting the control unit .................................................................... 121
6.6.7 Connecting a USB device ...................................................................... 121
6.6.8 Connecting a printer .............................................................................. 122
6.6.9 Connecting an audio device .................................................................. 122
6.6.10 Switching on and testing the HMI device .............................................. 123
7 Settings 125
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device ............................................................. 126

7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel ............................................... 126
7.2 Visualisation file in the HMI device ........................................................ 128
7.2.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”) ............................................. 128
7.2.2 Backing up the current visualisation ...................................................... 132
7.3 Set IP address ....................................................................................... 136
8 Commissioning 141

8.1.1 Safety during commissioning................................................................. 142
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device ............................................................. 142
8.2.1 Program memory ................................................................................... 142
8.2.2 Front panel controls ............................................................................... 144
8.3 Setting the CPU to RUN mode .............................................................. 144
8.4 Using the service concept ..................................................................... 146
8.4.1 Activating the service concept ............................................................... 146
8.4.2 Replacing HMI device ............................................................................ 146
8.4.3 Deactivating the service concept ........................................................... 146
8.5 Commissioning the project .................................................................... 147
8.5.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device .................................................. 147
8.5.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project ........................................ 147
8.5.3 Operating modes of the HMI ................................................................. 147
8.5.4 Change operating mode ........................................................................ 147
8.5.5 Possibilities of data transfer ................................................................... 148
8.5.6 Set transfer mode .................................................................................. 148
8.5.7 Start transfer .......................................................................................... 149
8.5.8 Test project ............................................................................................ 150
8.5.9 Backup and restore data ....................................................................... 151
8.5.10 Update operating system ....................................................................... 151
8.5.11 Manage options and license keys ......................................................... 151
9 Operation 153
9.1 Operate device IO.................................................................................. 154

9.1.1 Use on-screen keyboard ....................................................................... 154

9.2 Initial Commissioning (Easyline) ............................................................ 154
9.2.1 Select user language ............................................................................. 154
9.2.2 Setting the time ...................................................................................... 155
9.2.3 Selecting the software ........................................................................... 156
10 Trouble shooting 159
10.1.1 Status and fault indication ..................................................................... 160
11 Maintenance 163
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance ............................................... 164

11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen ...................................................................... 164
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices ...................................... 164
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen ............................................................................... 165
12 Repair 167
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ...................................... 168

12.1.2 Hazards from electricity ......................................................................... 168
12.2 Repair .................................................................................................... 168
13 Decommissioning 169
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal ...................................................... 170
14 Spare parts 171
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 172

14.2 Use only genuine spare parts. ............................................................... 172


1.2 Note on figures and descriptions ............................................................... 8
1.4 Structure of safety notices ....................................................................... 10
1.5 Target groups .......................................................................................... 11
1.5.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 11
1.5.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 12
1.5.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 12
1.6 Service offers ........................................................................................... 12
1.6.1 Service ..................................................................................................... 12
1.6.2 Training .................................................................................................... 12
1.7 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 13


This document applies to all persons who work with or on the system. It applies to
the plant operator as a basis for compiling standard operating procedures (SOP)
for conduct at the workplace on the HMI device of the machine/system.
This manual is valid for HMI devices with 4" operating panels.
This document is part of the HMI device and is also required for repeat commis-
sioning:
• Retain documents supplied and supplementary documents throughout the life-
time of the HMI device.
• Pass on all retained documents to the subsequent owner of the HMI device.
Due to the colour scheme, approved copies of this document of any kind are only
valid if prepared using the RGB (red-green-blue) colour space. Black and white co-
pies are not admissible.
1.2 Note on figures and descriptions

This operating unit is used for many machines / systems in many different versions
and for many processes.
The figures, diagrams and layout examples shown in this manual serve only to il-
lustrate the text of this manual and should be regarded as exemplary.
Content in texts and tables may apply also to features that are optional and do not
necessarily match the actual type or version of the machine/system delivered in
any case.
GEA cannot accept any liability or responsibility for claims that are asserted be-
cause of differences between the figures in this manual and the actual application.
We reserve the right to make general program changes in the course of further de-
velopment, without replacing these instructions through change management. If
necessary, please contact the GEA Service.
1.3 Other applicable documents

The following documents contained in the full plant documentation apply in addition
to this instruction manual:
• Safety information about the machine/plant
• Operating manual of the controller manufacturer
• Manual entitled "Settings and faults"
• Operating manual of the machine/plant
• Project-related documents
• Set of drawings
• Data sheets
• Plans and lists
• P&ID (Piping and Instrumentation Diagram)
• Documentation on the control of the machine/plant
• Operating manuals for the components of other manufacturers, such as motors,
heaters, pumps, measuring technology valves and fittings.
Pertinent standards and regulations:
• DIN EN 62079 for operating manuals


1.4 Structure of safety notices

The device has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operated
safely. This manual will refer to further potential risks by using warning notices at
the relevant points.
A distinction is made between hazards which result in damage to the device, to
system components and to the environment and hazards which lead to potential or
probable injury or loss of life to staff.
plemented, the device or something else in its vicinity may be damaged.
Danger signals

death.


nates.



NOTICE Type and source of hazard
1.5 Target groups

The target groups for this documentation are all persons involved in installing, as-
sembling, operating, maintaining and repairing the machine.
What work may be carried out by what target group depends on the qualification of
the personnel and on the type of work.
In the tables in the chapters entitled "Troubleshooting" and "Maintenance", the re-
sponsible target group is specified in addition to the activity.
1.5.1 Operator
Abbreviation: Op
The operator is employed by the customer and has been briefed in the following
operations:
• Starting and shutting down the machine.
• Monitoring the machine and process (e.g. by means of indicators).
• Execution of easy re-lubrication and cleaning operations.
When given specific directions, the operator is able to carry out simple modifica-
tions to the process, e.g.:
• Adjusting temperatures, pressures and throughput capacities.
• Dosing additives.

1.5.2 Skilled worker

Abbreviation: Skilled
The skilled worker is normally employed by the customer and has been briefed in
the following areas:
• Performing easy assembly work
• Performing routine maintenance work or servicing
• Limited settings and parametrization on the components and control system
The skilled worker has basic technical knowledge. The basic knowledge corre-
sponds to a technical apprenticeship (mechanical or electrical).
The skilled worker is selected and deployed by the employer (plant operator).
GEA Westfalia Separator will carry out the briefing only in specific technical fea-
tures that are part of the supply schedule and and will indicate potential hazards.
This briefing is no substitute for an apprenticeship.
1.5.3 Trained specialist

Abbreviation: Tspec
The trained specialist normally belongs to the service team of GEA Westfalia Sep-
arator Group.
In exceptional cases, skilled workers employed by the customer can obtain a cor-
responding qualification by attending training courses held by GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator Group.
1.6 Service offers
1.6.1 Service
GEA Westfalia Separator offers comprehensive service for the following areas:
• Assembly
• Commissioning
• Regular maintenance
• Repairs
• Checking the operating state
• Checking in dismantled state
• Decommissioning for a long-term shut-down
• Storage and conservation during long-term standstill
• Restarting
• Decommissioning and disposal
• Training
1.6.2 Training
GEA Westfalia Separator regularly holds training courses for customer employees.
Training content is aimed at the customer's operating and service staff who work
with the machine. The operator must know how the machine functions.
Trained operators assure the operating safety of the machine.
Many different applications require competent process engineering know-how. On-
ly adequately trained employees in service ensure a high quality standard. This re-
quires ongoing further training.

The demands on the qualification of the service staff are growing increasingly.
GEA Westfalia Separator consequently offers a qualification model and training
concept.
• Contact the following addresses for training courses for operating and service
staff.
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Werner Habig Straße 1 • 59302 Oelde
(Germany) • Tel. +49 (0)2522 77-1469 • Fax +49 (0)2522 77-31469 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Hammerbrook Straße 90 • 20097 Ham-
burg (Germany) • Phone +49 40 589650-0 • Fax +49 40 7380585 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
1.7 Additional documentation

Request further information and technical documentation from the following places:
• Directly from GEA Westfalia Separator in Oelde.
• From the nearest representative of GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Per Internet under: gea.com
• Vie e-mail at: wsinfo@gea.com


2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 16

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 16
2.3 Qualification of personnel ........................................................................ 16
2.1 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 17
2.2 Modifications or manipulation of the unit ................................................. 17
2.3 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device ................................................. 17
2.3.1 Open equipment ...................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Electrical power ....................................................................................... 18
2.3.3 Operating the HMI device safely ............................................................. 18
2.3.4 Areas at risk of explosion ........................................................................ 18
2.3.5 High-frequency radiation ......................................................................... 18
2.3.6 Instructions for using the device .............................................................. 18
2.4 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 19
2.5 Liability ..................................................................................................... 19

2.1 Intended use

The operator panel in conjunction with the control unit is for
• Visualization of the machine / skid with all required actuators, valves and regula-
tors.
• menu-controlled user guidance.
• Measurement of the specific machine parameters. e.g. bowl and gear speeds.
• monitoring sensors and safety functions.
• Controlling/locking pumps and peripheral equipment.
2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

The manual contains instructions for the intended use. Any operation of the HMI
device that does not fall under the intended use constitutes unintended use and is
considered to be misuse.
Reasonably foreseeable misuse includes:
• Use of unsuitable spare parts
• Use of non-approved external storage media.
• Exceeding the defined limits.
• Modification or extension of the HMI device.
• Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the manufacturer's consent.
Any misuse of the control may cause personal injury and property damage.
 Use the unit only as intended.
2.3 Qualification of personnel

Special expertise is required for working on and with the HMI device. The qualifica-
tion of the personnel with this expertise is an important requirement for the opera-
tional reliability. The requirements for the qualification are described in the individ-
ual chapters of the instruction manual. They depend on the tasks assigned.
Faulty operation, installation errors and handling errors can result in danger to life
and limb as well as severe damage to property.
The plant operator must implement measures for the qualification of its personnel:
 Assign only reliable persons to work on the HMI device.
 Allow only authorised individuals to work on the HMI device.
 Give special training and briefings to the personnel for the tasks assigned.
 Clearly define responsibilities.
 Make sure that the assigned individuals have read and understood the safety in-
formation before beginning work.
 Make sure that the assigned individuals have read and understood all sections
of the instruction manual required for their work before beginning work.
 Give special briefings to persons who cannot read, and monitor their work.
 Persons still undergoing training may only be deployed under supervision.

2.1 Responsibility of the plant operator

The operation of a machine/system and its control unit is subject to rules and regu-
lations for occupational health and safety.
The order of the rules and regulations listed below is not a reflection of their priori-
ty. The list lays no claim to completeness:
• Regulations relating to safety and health (accident prevention regulations) based
on Article 118a of the treaty establishing the EEC, e.g. directive 89/655/EEC and
follow-up versions or corresponding national regulations issued by the country of
operation.
• Regular check of safety devices
• Compliance with regulations governing occupational health and safety of em-
ployees in areas at risk of explosion, e.g. directive 1999/92/EC or corresponding
national regulations issued by the country of operation.
• Compliance with directive 94/9/EC (ATEX), directive 2004/108/EC (electromag-
netic compatibility), directive 2006/95/EC (low-voltage directive) or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
• Compliance with directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive) or corresponding
national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within the
responsibility of the manufacturer.
• Compliance with the German Equipment and Product Safety Act or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
The plant operator is responsible for complying with rules and regulations and the
safety-conscious and hazard-conscious work of the assigned persons. These in-
clude the following measures:
 Ensuring that the statutory and other binding regulations on safety, accident pre-
vention and occupational safety are known and complied with.
 Assigning only qualified and authorised staff with technical understanding and
fundamental technical knowledge and skills to work on the control unit.
 Clearly defining and communicating responsibilities for tasks.
 Operating the control of the machine/system only when it is in perfect working
order in accordance with intended use, see the section entitled "Intended use“.
 Checking all safety devices for proper functioning before each startup.
 Having the control unit checked regularly by qualified persons for its operational
reliability. Having the control unit checked in accordance with the maintenance
schedule.
2.2 Modifications or manipulation of the unit

Modifications to the operator terminal are prohibited. They represent an unintended
use and endanger the operational reliability of the machine / system. This may
cause physical injury and damage to property.
 If modifications to the operator terminal are necessary, e.g., due to new opera-
tional sequences, contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
 Clarify the planning and the measures for the modifications to the control unit
with GEA Westfalia Separator.
2.3 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device

2.3.1 Open equipment

The HMI device is an open piece of equipment. In other words, the HMI device
may only be fitted in housings or cabinets. The HMI device is operated from its
front.
Only qualified staff may open the switch cabinet in which the HMI device is located.
Keys or a special tool should be used for this.
2.3.2 Electrical power

When the switch cabinet is open, individual areas or components may carry a le-
thal voltage.
If it is possible for these areas or components to be contacted, death or electric
shock may result.
2.3.3 Operating the HMI device safely

Directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive) regulates inter alia precautions to be
taken during the startup and operation of machines within the European Economic
Area.
Ignoring these regulations is a breach of the machinery directive and the plant op-
erator is liable for the consequences. Depending on the machine being operated,
personal and material damage over and above this is not excluded.
Only start up the HMI device in a machine/system which complies with the terms of
directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive).
2.3.4 Areas at risk of explosion

The HMI device is suitable for use in areas at risk of explosion under special condi-
tions.
Follow the instructions in the manufacturer's manual.
2.3.5 High-frequency radiation

High-frequency radiation, e.g. from a mobile phone, interferes with the HMI de-
vice's functions and can lead to it malfunctioning.
 For further information, see the chapter of the same name in the manufacturer's
manual for the HMI device.
2.3.6 Instructions for using the device

Requirement for place of use
If the HMI device is operated outside closed indoor areas, it may be damaged. To
prevent damage, take suitable measures. Discuss suitable measures with GEA
 Use the HMI device only indoors.
Place of use
The HMI device is not intended for use in residential areas. If the HMI device is
used in residential areas, radio or television reception may be affected.
If the HMI device is used in a residential area, limit value class B to EN 55011 with
regard to the emission of radio interference must be ensured.

Suitable measures for achieving radio interference suppression of limit value class
B include, for example:
• fitting the HMI device in earthed switch cabinets
• using filters in power supply cables
Separate approval is also required.
2.4 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials

Spare parts, wear parts, and operating materials can cause bodily injury and prop-
erty damage if they do not meet the requirements.
Genuine spare parts and operating materials from GEA Westfalia Separator Group
satisfy all pre-conditions for the operating safety of the unit.
 Use only genuine spare parts.
 Use only genuine operating materials.
 Use the order-specific spare parts catalog supplied.
 See the chapter "Spare parts" for ordering spare parts and operating materials.
 Comply with limits.
2.5 Liability
Reasons for the immediate passing of liability to the plant operator independent of
existing warranty and guarantee periods.
• Improper installation by inadequately trained persons.
• Improper handling in deviation from the intended use.
• Non-observance of the user instructions.
Warranty and liability conditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA
Westfalia Separator are not extended by the above information.
Note:
GEA Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified or
unauthorised personnel.


8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3 Description
3.1 Personal safety gear ................................................................................ 23

3.2 Function of control unit and GEA IO operator panel ............................... 23
3.3 HMI device ............................................................................................... 23
3.3.1 4“ HMI device........................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 Interfaces ................................................................................................. 26
3.4 Features ................................................................................................... 27
3.5 Getting to know the operator panel of your GEA IO ................................ 27
3.5.1 Treating the GEA IO user interface properly ........................................... 27
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel ............................................................ 29
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area ................................... 29
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays ................................................................ 31
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens ................................................. 32
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements .................................................. 33
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off ................................................ 35
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines .................................................................. 35
3.5.9 Displaying output fields ............................................................................ 36
3.5.10 Displaying input fields .............................................................................. 37
3.6 Editing data in input fields ........................................................................ 38
3.6.1 Opening input fields ................................................................................. 38
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields ................................................................ 38
3.7 Password protection ................................................................................ 40
3.8 Commissioning ........................................................................................ 40
3.9 Commissioning (Easyline) ....................................................................... 41
3.10 Factory settings ....................................................................................... 42
3.11 I/O check .................................................................................................. 45
3.11.1 Test digital inputs ..................................................................................... 47
3.11.2 Test digital outputs .................................................................................. 49
3.11.3 Test analogue inputs ............................................................................... 50
3.11.4 Test analogue outputs ............................................................................. 51
3.12 Data backup............................................................................................. 52
3.12.1 Backup data ............................................................................................. 52
3.13 User management ................................................................................... 53
3.14 Operation ................................................................................................. 55
3.14.1 Display and set feed data ........................................................................ 56
3.14.2 Displaying and setting machine data ....................................................... 64
3.14.3 Displaying and setting discharge data ..................................................... 67
3.14.4 Displaying alarms and warnings .............................................................. 69
3.14.5 Opening the “Motor" screen..................................................................... 70
3.14.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen ...................................................... 72
3.14.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen ......................................................... 76
3.14.8 Opening the “Valve" screen ..................................................................... 76
3.14.9 Open the “Controller” screen ................................................................... 78
3.14.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen ....................................................... 81
3.15 Help ......................................................................................................... 85
3.15.1 Documentation......................................................................................... 86
3.15.2 Colour concept......................................................................................... 86

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.15.3 Messaging function .................................................................................. 87

3.15.4 Remote operation .................................................................................... 88
3.15.5 Screen settings ........................................................................................ 89
3.15.6 Machine information ................................................................................ 94
3.15.7 Measurements ......................................................................................... 95
3.16 Service ..................................................................................................... 97
3.16.1 Contact/hotline ......................................................................................... 97
3.16.2 4.2 Preventative maintenance ................................................................. 98
3.17 Training .................................................................................................. 100
3.18 GEA Westfalia Separator ...................................................................... 101

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.1 Personal safety gear

Follow the instructions on general requirements for working on electrical installa-
tions.
To prevent danger to life and limb, the specified personal safety gear must be
worn. If a machine or system belongs to the HMI, the personal safety gear speci-
fied for this machine/system must also be worn for operation. The safety gear must
also be worn for maintenance and repair work on the HMI or the machine/system,
see the chapter entitled "Personal safety gear" in the machine/system manual.
3.2 Function of control unit and GEA IO operator panel

Visualizing and operating the control unit
The GEA IO operator panel is programmed at the factory for the required operation
of the control task.
The motors and valves connected to the control unit are actuated in accordance
with the control task in question.
Measuring (control unit)

The speeds of the connected machines are measured and displayed. This is ef-
fected via speed sensors installed on the machines, see the section entitled "Areas
of application".
Displays (GEA IO operator panel)

The following measured/calculated values can be displayed:
• speeds, e.g. bowl speeds
• torques of drives
• state of the connected valves and motors
• feed quantities, discharge quantities, pressures, temperatures.
Controlling (control unit)

Speeds can be controlled fully automatically on some machines, e.g. In the case of
summation drives. In this connection, the use of frequency converters for the mo-
tors plays an important role.
NOTE: The plant operator is not authorized to carry out program modifications.
The plant operator can make the following settings on the touchscreen of the Op-
erator panel:
• machine-specific, product-specific and process-specific preselections
• threshold values
• System-specific settings
3.3 HMI device

This chapter describes the control hardware of the 4“ HMI device.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.3.1 4“ HMI device
Fig. 1 HMI device user interface with function keys
NOTE: The function keys (1) are not used.
Rear view
Fig. 2 Rear view of the HMI device
1 Nameplate
2 Slots for SD memory cards-– accessible from the side of the unit

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Side view
Fig. 3 Side view of the HMI device
1 Clamps
2 Interfaces
3 Mounting gasket
4 Slots for SD cards

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.3.2 Interfaces
Interfaces of the HMI device
Fig. 4 Interfaces of the HMI device
Legend 1 X2 PROFIBUS (Sub-D RS422/485)
2 Port for equipotential bonding (earthing)
3 X60 USB type Mini-B
4 X1 PROFINET (LAN), 10/100 Mbps
5 X61 USB type A
6 X80 port for power supply
NOTE:
• Use the X1 interface or X60 interface to connect a configuration PC.
• Use the X61/X62 interfaces to connect peripherals, such as a printer or key-
board.
• Use the X90 interface to connect a speaker.
• Secure USB and PROFINET connection cables with cable ties on the rear of the
HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.4 Features
The HMI device has the following features:
• Graphic display for machine monitoring and machine control
• Control system with modular expandability
• Multilingual text display
• Touch screen or function keys with LED status display
• Programmable logic control
• Control voltage 24V
• High operational reliability
• Long service life
3.5 Getting to know the operator panel of your GEA IO

The user interface of the "GEA IO" was developed in accordance with the new
standardized operating philosophy at GEA Westfalia Separator. All operator panels
are equipped with touchscreens. The fixed arrangement of the screen and stand-
ardised symbols ensure rapid orientation.
NOTE: The touchscreen is adapted for use in industry. Gentle touching of the pan-
el, like that on tablets, is not sufficient to execute the command. Noticeable pres-
sure needs to be exerted on the panel.
3.5.1 Treating the GEA IO user interface properly

The GEA IO user interface is operated using the touchscreen. All the control ob-
jects required for operation are shown on the touchscreen after the operator panel
is started up.
Fig. 5 Start screen after switching on and booting of the Operator panel
If you press one of the symbols with your finger, the respective menu opens.
The following points should be observed when operating the touchscreen:

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
 Do not execute several operations simultaneously.

This may trigger an unintended action.
 Always press only one control object on the screen.
 Do not touch the touchscreen with sharp or pointed objects.
 Avoid contacting the screen by hitting it with hard objects.
Both can lead to a significant reduction in lifetime up to and including total failure of
the touchscreen.
 Only touch the operator panel touchscreen with a finger.
 If necessary, use protective films for the touchscreen.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel

The control panel is divided up into fixed areas.
Fig. 6
1 Visualisation (process, assistance systems,...)
2 Process operation tool bar
3 Main navigation area
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area

On the right-hand side is the main navigation area with the assistants. The mean-
ing of the icons is explained below.
The active or selected assistant is white, the others are shown in grey.
S8555002 Fig. 7
Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area
Commissioning
Factory settings, commissioning information, I/O check, customer-

specific extensions
Operation
Operation, overview of system, process status information
Help Desk
Documentation, colour concept, remote access facilities, screen

settings, customer-specific extensions
Service
Contact/hotline, servicing information, customer-specific extensions
Training
Safety instructions, separation technology, operating simulation,

customer training
Company portrait
General information about GEA
Screenshot
Screenshot function for current screen display; image saved to USB

stick.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays
Show status display
Example of a status display
Fig. 8 Example: Skid with separator, start screen with status indicators
Icons can display a status using various forms and indicator colours. Status dis-
plays can be found on modules or complex components.
Status relates to the complete sensor system on this module or the component.
The indicator colours correspond to traffic light colours.
NOTE: The status displays are designed in such a way that people with a disability
in colour vision are also able to correctly assign them from their shape.
Meaning of the status displays
Green indicates a correct status.
Yellow defines an incorrect status, a warning.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Meaning of the status displays
The red triangle indicates a fault/alarm.
When the status display is pressed, the message screen for associated active
warnings and alarms opens.
Status displays are found only on modules which are also equipped with sensor
systems. The sensor system must be able to generate warnings and alarms.
Faults and alarms can be acknowledged, see the section entitled "Alarms, warn-
ings and message screens".
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens
The Operation icon in case of alarm
The "Operation" icon starts flashing red. This alarm can always be
seen, regardless of the current display being shown.
NOTE: No additional pop-up screen appears.
After pressing the "Operation" icon, the "Process" overview screen appears.
Pressing on a yellow or red status indicator opens a screen containing the associ-
ated and currently active alarms or warnings.
02.05.01 Fig. 9 Example for alarm messages, here the alarm archive
The status of the messages is "K", i.e. "Alarm message has arrived".
The following designations show the status of the alarm message:
Designation of alarm message status
K Alarm message has arrived

KQ Alarm message (has arrived and) has been acknowledged

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Designation of alarm message status
KQG Alarm message (has arrived, has been acknowledged) and has
gone
Acknowledging alarms and warnings
Acknowledgement key
Acknowledge active alarm messages individually or en masse,

depending on application.
 Press the icon for the acknowledgement key to acknowledge
messages and alarms.
No alarms or warnings active.
Active alarms and warnings are acknowledged with the "Acknowledgement" key.
The status of the acknowledged warnings and alarms in each case switches to
"KQ". When all active alarms and warnings have been acknowledged, the colour of
the acknowledgement key switches from red to white.
Alarm key
The "Alarm memory" screen can also be opened via the "Alarm
key" in the toolbar of the "Active alarm messages/warnings"
screen.
The "Alarm memory" shows all the alarms including active ones.
Pressing the "Alarm key" again returns you to the "Active alarm messag-
es/warnings" screen
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements

In addition to the indicator colours, other colours are used for elements:
• White icons are active. They are significant for the selected screen or show the
user where he or she currently is. When pressed, the assigned function (e.g. "X"
to close a screen) is executed.
• Grey icons are inactive elements. Grey icons occur in the navigation bar. When
they are selected, the level is changed and their colour changes to white.
Displaying active and inactive elements
The white colour indicates an active element.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
The grey colour indicates an inactive element.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off

Different functions can be switched on and off. The icons used for this are shown in
white, supplemented by a green or red icon to activate or deactivate the function in
question.
Examples for icons for switching on and off
Activate process.
Disable process.
Open valve.
Close valve.
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines

The colours assigned to pipelines on the operating panel depend on the media be-
ing transported in them and are generally based on “ISO 2403 marking of pipelines
on seagoing ships”.
These colours are assigned to the following media:
Colour display Main colour Medium
Yellow Product
Green Water
Red Steam
Blue Air
Brown Solids
Green Centrate
Purple Polymer
Orange Acid

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
NOTE:
• Standards which deviate from this colour system may be followed on the basis
of a specific application.
• Persons with a disability in colour perception may only be able to assign these
colours to a limited extent . This should be taken into account when selecting
operating staff.
3.5.9 Displaying output fields

Measured values are shown in green typeface on a black background.
If they are assigned to a module, they are shown as follows, e.g. on the feed side:
Example: Displaying the measured values of a module
Rectangles with
• rounded corners,
• a white edge and
• green typeface on a
• black background.
Pressing on a "measured value" opens the associated screen to the analogue val-
ue.
Example: Displaying output values which are not measured values
Other output values or display values

which are not measured values are
shown in white typeface on a black
background.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.5.10 Displaying input fields

Input fields are kept GEA IO-compliant with black typeface on a white background.
Example: Displaying input fields
07.00.01 Fig. 10 Example of input fields
 For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.6 Editing data in input fields

In input fields, it is possible to enter on the control panel numbers and text required
for the process.
Certain input fields are password-protected and may only be changed by author-
ised persons.
3.6.1 Opening input fields

Input fields are present in various menus.
02/01/2003 Fig. 11 Example: Opening input fields
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields
Changing a value in an input field
 Press on the white input field to change values.
The numerical or alphanumerical input field for manual entry appears on the
screen.
Manual input of numerical values
Manual input
 Press on keys to enter values.
 Press the ENTER key.

The value entered is saved.
Display switches back to previous page.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the
previous menu level.
Manual input of alphanumerical data
Manual input
 Press keys to enter text or numbers.
 Press the ENTER key.

The value entered is saved.
Display switches back to previous page.
Exit input field

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.7 Password protection

Certain entries and functions are only possible after entering a password.
• Company-related basic settings (password level 1)
• Readout of CPU data (password level 2)
When selecting enter the required pass-

word after being asked to do so.
NOTE: You can obtain the password
from GEA Westfalia Separator.
If no operation is carried out for 10
minutes, the programme returns to entry
level 0 (logout). For further processing
the password has to be entered again.
Fig. 12
IMPORTANT: However, the menu opened now is not protected. This means that
unauthorised persons can make changes in this menu.
To protect the control unit against unauthorised access, go back in the menu until
only the freely accessible menus are shown on the display.
3.8 Commissioning
The Start-up assistant includes assistance systems which support both initial
commissioning of the machine and optimisation of the machine's performance
characteristics.
Further assistants can be installed here depending on machine type and applica-
tion, sales & marketing requirements or customer requirements.
Opening the Start-up menu

 Press the "Start-up" icon in the navigation bar.
The icon changes colour from grey (inactive) to white (active).

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
01:00 Fig. 13 Example of commissioning menu
Commissioning menu
1.1 Factory settings Machine-specific default settings.
NOTE: This area is password-protected and

accessible only to authorised persons.
1.2 I/O test Digital and analogue inputs and outputs can be
tested, see section entitled "I/O check".
1.5 Data backup Contents of the menu:

• Data backup on memory card,
• load data from memory card
• Reset data to factory settings
1.6 User management As soon as a user has registered with his

password, he is entered in a list of users in the
user management system.
For further information, see chapter “User Man-
agement”.
The start-up menus are standard in all controls.
3.9 Commissioning (Easyline)

NOTE: For the separator series Easyline with the types Easycream, Easyrefine
and Easyclear, settings must be carried out after the initial commissioning of the
operating device. These are described in chapter Operation / Initial Commission-
ing (Easyline).

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.10 Factory settings

Basic settings to the machine or system before initial commissioning are made in
the menu “Factory Settings”.
These settings can be made at the following locations:
• On GEA test rigs
• During the switch cabinet test
• At the customer’s premises
Changes to factory settings are password-protected and can only be made by
trained specialists if the following conditions are met:
• All machine-specific GEA safety instructions have been noted and complied
with.
• The associated machine record is available and has been followed.
• The customer-specific installation is understood and has been followed.
Settings in the factory settings are made on a menu-guided basis. The user is led
systematically step-by-step through the values to be set. All the values which have
to be set once can be found in the factory settings.
Values which only have to be changed in exceptional circumstances are likewise
stored here.
 Switch on the operator panel and wait until the project starts.
Opening the "Start-up" menu.
 Press the "Start-up" icon in the navigation bar.
The icon changes colour from grey (inactive) to white (active).
Opening the "Factory settings" menu
1.1 Factory settings  To display the “Factory Settings” menu, press

the factory settings icon.
NOTE: This area is password-protected and

accessible only to authorised persons.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
1.1.01 Fig. 14 Example: Factory settings
 To change data, press the respective input field and select the desired data in
the selection window.
Accept and save selection
 Press the icon to accept and save the selection.
To navigate in the menu
 Press arrow for next page.
 Press arrow for previous page.
NOTE: This table lists examples of some general works settings for the
skid/machine together with a a description of their meaning. Further machine-
specific details are given in the machine-specific manual of the GEA IO.
Basic machine values
Designation input field Description
Process This is where the fields of application of the

machine/plant can be selected, e.g. chemi-
cals/pharma, milk/whey, drinks etc.
Machine type Press input field to select the type of installed
centrifuge according to the application, e.g.
Easyscale or FSD 10.
…

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Basic machine values
Designation input field Description

…
…
Machine type Enter the machine type e.g. RSE 50
Machine no. Enter the machine no. / serial no.
Software no. Current software no.
Schematic no. Current schematic no.
 Press the icon to return to the Start-up Assistant overview.
Backup data
 Press on the field “1.5 “Data backup” to open the “Data backup”
menu.
 Press on the memory card icon in the area “Save commissioning
data on a memory card”.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.11 I/O check

NOTE: These specifications are examples. Further descriptions are set out in the
machine-specific control manuals.
In this menu, it is possible to open and test all digital and analogue inputs and out-
puts.
The I/O functions can differ depending on the various applications. The assignment
of the I/O functions is visible in plain text on the current wiring diagram of the con-
trol device, and is essential for the test described below.
NOTE: Access to the menu is password-protected and requires the name of the
user and their password
Open menu I/O check
1.2 I/O test  Press icon to open the I/O menu.
01/02/2000 Fig. 15 I/O check portal
 Press the designations to open the inputs or outputs.

All inputs and outputs are grouped numerically and their individual statuses dis-
played.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Digital inputs:
1.2.1.01 Fig. 16 Example for displaying the inputs DI 0.0 to1.xx
Digital outputs:
1.2.2.01Fig. 17 Example for displaying the outputs DQ0.0- DQ 1.xx
An icon in the form of a square shows the status of the signal and links to the rele-
vant screen.
NOTE:
Only the input numbers are displayed, e. g. DQ0.0. The precise designation (input
assignment) of the signal is contract-specific and can be found on the wiring sche-
matic.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
The following icons are used:

Icons for inputs and outputs
Signal "0" in automatic mode.
Signal "1" in automatic mode.
Signal "Fault" in automatic mode.
Signal "0" in simulation mode/manual mode, yellow frame flashes.
Signal "1" in simulation mode/manual mode, yellow frame flashes.
Signal "Fault" when simulation mode/manual mode are switched

on, yellow frame flashes.
When any input or output is selected, the associated screen component in which
simulation or manual mode can be selected opens.
 Press the arrow to return to the previous menu item.
3.11.1 Test digital inputs
Open digital inputs
Digital inputs  Press icon to open the pages of the digital

inputs.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
1.2.1.01 Fig. 18 Example: Digital inputs
NOTE:
Only the input numbers are displayed, e. g. DQ0.0. The precise designation (input
matic.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.11.2 Test digital outputs
Open digital outputs
Digital outputs  Press icon to open the pages of the digital

outputs.
01.02.02.01 Fig. 19 Example: Digital outputs
NOTE:
Only the output numbers are displayed, e. g. DQ0.0. The precise designation (out-
put assignment) of the signal is contract-specific and can be found on the wiring
schematic.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.11.3 Test analogue inputs
Open analogue inputs
Analogue inputs  Press icon to open the pages of the ana-

logue inputs.
01.2.01.04 Fig. 20 Examples for analogue inputs
NOTE:
Only the input numbers are displayed, e. g. AI.128. The precise designation (input
matic.
 For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.11.4 Test analogue outputs
Open analogue outputs
Analogue outputs  Press icon to open the pages of the ana-

logue outputs.
01.02.03.01 Fig. 21 Examples for analogue outputs
NOTE: Only the output numbers are displayed, e. g. AQ.64. The precise designa-
tion (output assignment) of the signal is contract-specific and can be found on the
wiring schematic.
 Press the icon to return to the overview page of the Start-up menu.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.12 Data backup
Display the “Data backup” menu
1.5 Data backup  Press field.

The login window for the input of a password is
opened.
The data backup, loading of data from a memory card or resetting to factory set-
tings is reserved to authorised persons after having entered a password.
 Enter password.
 Press again on the field “Data backup”
to open the menu “Data backup”.
 Should you have any questions, kindly
contact GEA Service, see chapter
“Service”.
Fig. 22
3.12.1 Backup data
Fig. 23
 Insert a suitable memory card in the HMI device, see chapter “HMI devices 4 –
9”.
IMPORTANT: If no saved data is available yet, the button <Load from memory
card> is hidden.
Data for the following areas can be saved or loaded in the Data Backup menu:
• Factory settings
• Commissioning data
• The latest settings

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Backup or load data or reset it to factory settings.
 Press field to backup settings to memory card.
 Press field to load settings from memory card.
IMPORTANT: Pressing the button <Load from memory card> in the column “Facto-
ry Settings” takes you to the “Presetting software” area. Further details can be
found in the chapter “Settings” and subsection “Switching on for the first time”
Returning to the Main Menu
 Press the icon to return to the input window of the “Start-up” menu.
3.13 User management

The User Management menu lists all users of the HMI device and the time that
they have used the HMI.
Display the “Data backup” menu
1.6 User management  Press on field to open the User Management

menu.
Leaving the list
 Press the icon to exit the User Management menu.
Returning to the Main Menu

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
 Press the icon to return to the input window of the “Start-up” menu.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.14 Operation
Open the "Operation" menu
 Press the "Operation" icon in the navigation bar.
Fig. 24 Example of operation menu, here for a separator
The overview operation screen shows the feed top left, the machine/skid in the
middle and the discharge bottom right.
NOTE: The icons displayed below are general. Machine-specific icons are de-
scribed in the respective machine-specific documentation.
Basic measured values are assigned to the following areas here:
Meaning of the Operation Menu icons
If you press "Feed", the "Feed" page is shown, e.g. feed

rates for product/water, feed paths, controls in the feed
… to the extent that these are recorded by sensors.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting feed
data".
When the centrifuge icon is pressed, the "Centrifuge"

page is displayed.
Information about the machine, including its speed and
power reserves, is also displayed.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting ma-

chine data".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Pressing the discharge icon displays the "Discharge"

page, including discharge quantities, discharge paths,
discharge controls … to the extent that these are record-
ed by sensors.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting dis-
charge data".
Pressing this button is powers up the machine until the standby mode
is reached.
Pressing this button stops the process stops and shuts down the ma-
chine .
Pressing this button starts the production and terminates the standby
mode
Pressing this button halts the process. Valves and pumps are shut or
stopped and the machine continues in standby mode.
Pressing this button stops the production and starts a cleaning pro-
cess (CIP).
When this button is pressed, the cleaning process is stopped (CIP)

and production is started.
When this button is visible the machine is in standby mode.

Pressing this button supplies water to the machine
When this button is visible, water is supplied to the machine.

Pressing this button blocks the water supply.
3.14.1 Display and set feed data

Display product feed rates
Display product feed data
 Press the rectangle in the main menu to display and amend

product feed data.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
02/01/2001 Fig. 25 Example: 2. Menu level, feed of a separator
Display and set feed data
 Press the pump icon to display the pump motor

screen and to edit settings.
 Press the valve icon to display the valve screen and

to edit settings.
Output field for feed temperature and icon for controller

“WXY”.
 Press the controller icon to display and modify cur-

rent control parameters and graphs of controller
characteristics.
 Press the icon to carry out settings on the product /

CIP feed.
 Press the icon to edit settings on the water inlet.
Display and set pump data
 Press the pump icon to display the pump motor

screen and to edit settings.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
07/03/2001
Fig. 26 3. Menu level: Settings for feed pump motor ,example
 Description of the icons and timer see chapter “Display “Motor” window”.
 To amend input, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the previous
menu level.
Back
 Press the "Mode" icon to return to the overview on the first menu
level.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Show valve data
Display and set valve data
 Press the valve icon to display the valve screen and

to edit settings.
07/01/2001 Fig. 27 Window: Valve, automatic mode, example
Set manual mode, terminate automatic mode.
 Press icon to exit automatic mode and activate manual mode.

This area is protected and requires the entering of a password.
Fig. 28 Window: Valve, manual mode, example
In this window settings can be made to the timers of the valve.

 For a description of the icons and timer see chapter “Valve screen” window.
 To amend values, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Terminate manual mode, activate automatic mode.
 Press the icon to activate automatic mode.
Display product feed and control data
Display and set product feed
 Press on the analogue value “100%” to open the

analogue window of the product feed.
2.1.01. Fig. 29 Analogue window feed controller, example
 For a description of the data and designations see chapter “Display analogue in-
put” window”.
 To edit threshold values and areas, see chapter "Editing data in input fields".
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to return to the overview on the first menu lev-
el.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Display and adjust the product feed control data
 Press on controller symbol “WXY” to open the con-

troller analogue window.
07.04.01-1 Fig. 30 Controller window, example
 For a description of the data and designations see chapter “Display controller
window”.
 To edit threshold values and areas, see chapter "Editing data in input fields".
Feed data settings
 Press the icon to display the feed data settings.
Fig. 31 Example: “Settings” window: Feed
NOTE: These data are machine-specific and application-specific and are not de-
scribed at length here. They are described in the specific GEA IO manuals.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Activates and deactivates the feed ramping

Only selectable with dynamic feed regulation turbidity monitoring
Return to the controller window
 Press the icon to return to the Feed menu.
Navigating back
level.
Setting product/CIP feed data
 Press the icon to carry out settings on the product /

CIP feed.
2.1.3.01 Fig. 32 Example of the menu window for product / CIP feed
Return to Feed menu
 Press the icon to return to the discharge menu.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Water data settings
 Press the icon to edit settings on the water feed.
2.1.4.01 Fig. 33 Example of the menu window for product / CIP feed
2.1.4.01 Fig. 34 Example of the settings window for water feed

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Exit input field
menu level.
Back
level.
3.14.2 Displaying and setting machine data

Open second menu level

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
2. Open menu level
 Press the "Machine" icon to display machine data.
02/02/2001 Fig. 35 Example: 2. Menu level: Machine data of a separator
Control water val- Control water valves

ves
 Press on the valve icons to display the "Control water
valves" menu and edit settings.
Note: Input is protected and a password is required to
make changes.
For further information refer to the section “Setting times

for control water valves”.
Process valves Process valves
 Press on individual valve icons to open the "Valve"

screen and edit settings.
make changes.
For more information, see the section entitled "Display

"Valve" screen".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Drive motor
 Press the "!" status symbol to display alarm messages.

For the meaning of the icons refer to the section
“Alarms, warnings and message screens” in the chapter
“Getting to know the operating panel”.
 Press the green analogue value “Bowl Speed” to display
the analogue screen “Bowl Speed”
 Further descriptions see chapter “Display analogue
input screen”.

make changes.
Motor  Press on the motor icon “M” in the “motor” window.

The “Motor” screen opens.
 Further details see section “Displaying the Motor
screen”.
 Press on the analogue value “Motor Current” to display
the “ Analogue Input” screen.
- Press the input icon to display the current of the drive
motor during ejection monitoring and to specify a set
difference.
- Press the “Progression Curve” icon to display the
electric current progression curve. For further details
see chapter “Displaying the analogue input screen”.
 Press the icon to shut down the machine /plant.
 Press the icon to display the speed settings and edit timer settings
for centrifuge functions e.g. run-up time.
 For the values for speeds, timers and counters refer to the corre-
sponding GEA IO manual and the centrifuge manual.
Descriptions of the “Speed Settings” window:
No. Function Description

Speed min. If the value is undercut, the machine is shut
down.
Overspeed If the value is exceeded, the machine is shut
down.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Exiting screen
menu level.
Back one menu level
 Press the "Mode" icon to return to the first level of the operation
menu
3.14.3 Displaying and setting discharge data

From first Menu level:
 Press in a rectangle bottom right to display and edit
the discharge data.
2.3.1.00 Fig. 36 2. Menu level: Discharge menu of a separator (example)
NOTE: The display will vary depending on the sensors and/or actuators used in the
discharge. The preselection is made in the factory settings, see chapter entitled
"Description”, section “Factory Settings”.
Editing discharge settings
 Press the icon to display the “Discharge settings” screen and to

check the discharge settings.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Fig. 37 Example of settings at the discharge of a separator
 Press the icon to exit the screen and return to the previous menu
level.
Exit input field
 Press icon to exit the screen and get to the first menu level.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.14.4 Displaying alarms and warnings
 Press the status symbol to have alarm messages

displayed.
02/05/2001 Fig. 38 Example: From first + second Menu level: Displaying alarm messages
Acknowledging active alarm messages

 Press the icon for the acknowledgement key to
acknowledge messages and alarms. individually or
en masse, depending on application.
Symbol is white, i.e. all alarm messages have been

acknowledged.
 Press the "Alarm screen" icon to switch between the

"Active alarm messages" and "Alarm memory"
screens.
 Press the "info" icon to display help texts.
Exit input field

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.14.5 Opening the “Motor" screen

The “Motor” screen is divided into 3 levels.
In the top level, the system number and a free description (max. 12 characters)
about the motor are displayed, together with an icon for closing the "Motor" screen.
The next level includes the manual/automatic modes and a status display for the
motor.
In the bottom level, delay times can be set.
M004 Fig. 39 "Motor" screen
Meaning of the icons in the “Motor” screen
System number of the motor and its designation, e.g. PID

no./motor name.
Closes the “Motor” screen and displays the previous

screen.
Switch off motor.
Switch on motor.
Activate manual mode.
Activate automatic mode.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Alarm delay
 To edit input, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input

fields".
Switch-on delay

fields".
Switch-off delay

fields".
Status display of motor
Motor fault
Motor Off
Motor On
No motor feedback.
Motor in manual mode.
Motor locked or simulating.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.14.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen

The information on the analogue input is presented in three screens (1-3).
In all three screens is the same top level, which consists of information on the ana-
logue input and the current value of the analogue input.
“Analogeingang” screen 1 is used to make basic settings for the measuring range
and the limits.
In the “Analogeingang” screen 2, the short time curve or the current curve is dis-
played below the first level.
In the “Analogeingang” screen 3, the long time archive of the measured value of
the analogue input is displayed below the first level.
Opening the “Analogeingang” screen 1
07.00.01 Fig. 40 Analogue input screen1
Description of the icons in the top level of the 3 “Analogue input” screens
System number of the analogue input, e.g. “A4”.

Right field, PID no. or name of the analogue input.
Current measured value of the analogue input with unit.
Closes the “analogue input” screen and displays the previ-

ous screen.
Description of the icons in the medium level of the 3 screens:
Setting the measuring range of the analogue

value.
Option: Compensation of the measured value (for PT 100

only).

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Description of the icons in the lower level of the 3 screens:
Limit for alarm “Low Low”.

limit
Limit for alarm “Low”.

limit
Limit for alarm “High”.

limit
Limit for alarm “High High”.

limit
Press <I> to get further information about the meaning of

the input fields in the medium and bottom level of the
screen.
Open the progression curves
Opens screen 2, curve representation of the measured

value of the analogue input, e.g. here the short time curve.
Display “Analogue input” screen 2

The “Analogeingang” screen 2 displays the short time curve of the measured val-
ue. The right-hand pane shows the current time value; the stored values move to
the left in the display. If necessary, the scaling of the time axis can be adjusted us-
ing the zoom buttons.
Fig. 41 Analogue input screen 2

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Meaning of the icons in “Analogue input” screen 2
Opens the curve representation of the measured value of

the analogue input, e.g. here the long time curve.
Zooms into the curve.
Zooms out of the curve.
Opening the “Analogeingang” screen 3

The “Analogue input” screen 3 displays the long time curve of the measured value.
The right of the screen initially shows the time value when switching to the long-
term archive. The archived values can be viewed using the arrow buttons depend-
ing on the sampling frequency. If necessary, the scaling of the time axis can be ad-
justed using the zoom buttons.
Fig. 42 Analogue input screen 3
Scrolls the long-term curve to the left.
Scrolls the long-term curve to the right.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Zooms into the curve.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.14.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen

The “Digital signal” screen is divided into 3 levels.
The top level displays information about the digital signal and an icon for closing
the "Digital signal" screen.
The next level includes the simulation/automatic modes and a status display for the
digital signal.
D_000. Fig. 43 "Digital signal" screen
Meaning of the icons in the “Digital signal” screen
Code/designation of digital signal
Closes the “Digital signal” screen and displays the previ-

ous screen.
Alarm delay

fields".
Status display of the digital signal
No digital signal/input 0
Digital signal active/input 1
Fault
Digital signal simulating (yellow square flashing)/input 1
3.14.8 Opening the “Valve" screen

The “Valve” screen is divided into 3 levels.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
The top level displays information about the valve and an icon for closing the
"Valve" screen.
valve.
V 000. Fig. 44 "Valve" screen
Description of the icons in the “Valve” screen
System number of the valve and PID no. or valve name
Close "Valve" screen and display previous screen.
Close valve.
Open valve.
Manual mode ON.
Automatic mode ON.
Alarm delay

fields".
Alarm delay

fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Description of the icons in the “Valve” screen
Switch-off delay

fields".
Select NC (normally closed)
Select NO (normally open)
Status display of the valve
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
Valve in manual mode.
Valve locked or simulating.
3.14.9 Open the “Controller” screen

The “Controller” screen is divided into 4 sections.
The top level displays the system number of the controller, the measuring point
used and the manipulated variable of the controller.
The middle level contains information on the analogue input in the left section, and
on the analogue output driven by the controller in the right section.
In the lower level, the behaviour of the controller can be set.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
07.04.01-1 Fig. 45 “Controller” screen
Description of the icons in the “Regler” screen
System number of the controller.
The analogue input “A 003” is the measuring point of con-

troller “C 105”, the analogue output “Q 000” is the assigned
manipulated variable.
Closes the “Regler” screen and displays the previous

screen.
Measuring range of the analogue input “A 000”.
Actual value (controlled variable)
Current value of the analogue input.
Setpoint
Specifies the setpoint of the analogue input

fields".
Proportional coefficient (P term of the controller)
The actual value of “x” varies proportionally with the set-

point “y”. The proportional coefficient is proportional factor.
“Gain> 1” has an increasing effect
“Gain <1” has a decreasing effect

fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Description of the icons in the “Regler” screen
Integral time (I term of the controller)
The integral term responds sluggishly to a deviation. Devi-

ations are added over time. The greater the integration
time, the slower the changes of the I term of the controller.
The I term makes the controller more stable but also slow-
er (more sluggish).

fields".
Calculation of control difference
The difference of nominal and actual value is the control

difference. For purposes of suppression of a minor contin-
uous oscillation due to the variable quantisation (e.g. with
a pulse-width modulation with PULSEGEN) the control
difference is guided via a deadband. With DEADB_W = 0
the deadband is switched off.

fields".
The output parameter “output signal positive impulse” is

set, if an impulse is to be emitted.

fields".
The output parameter “output signal negative impulse” is

set, if an impulse is to be emitted.

fields".
 Press icon to call up the controller graphs.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
07.04.01-2 Fig. 46 Time progression curve of the controller
 Display real time progression time progression curve.
 Stop real rime progression of the time progression curve.
 Zoom into the time progression curve.
 Zoom out of the time progression curve.
Return to the controller window
 Press icon to return to the controller window.
Back
level.
3.14.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen

The “Step motor valve” screen is divided into 3 levels.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
The top level displays information about the step motor valve and an icon for clos-
ing the "Valve" screen.
valve.
07/01/2001 Fig. 47 Screen “Step motor valve”, automatic mode
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen
System number of the valve and PID no. or valve name
Close "Valve" screen and display previous screen.
Manual mode ON.
Automatic mode ON.
Run time of the motor control valve from 0 to 100%.

fields".
The output parameter “Output signal negative impulse” is

set for the set time.

fields".

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen

set, if an impulse is to be emitted. In case of manual mode
an impulse is emitted once.

fields".
Current position in % of the motor control valve.
Set manual mode
 Press the icon to activate manual mode.
Fig. 48 Open the “Step motor valve manual mode" screen
Settings for the timers of the step motor can be effected in this window.
 To change timer settings, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen in manual mode

set, if an impulse is to be emitted. Pressing the button
emits a singe pulse
The valve is in manual mode.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Status display of the valve
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
Valve in manual mode.
Valve locked or simulating.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.15 Help
Opening Help and information
Open Help
 Press the “Help” icon in the navigation bar.
03.00 Fig. 49 Example: Opening the Help Desk
Help menu
3.1 Documentation Documentation relating to the job, such as the

manual, can be retrieved here.
3.2 Colour concept Details on the colour concept of the control panel,
colour allocations, notes on standards and suitable
operating staff.
 Further information on the colour concept can
be found in chapter “Getting to know the operat-
ing panel”.
3.3 Notification function Notes on the option of sending SMS or email mes-
sages from the control unit (e.g. in the event of an
alarm).
3.4 Remote access Notes on the option of visualising or controlling the

control unit via a wide variety of IT components
from your own network or on an Internet-supported
basis.
3.5 Panel settings In this menu, it is possible to make various screen

settings, such as cleaning the screen, calibrating
the screen or brightness.
3.6 Machine information In this menu different information about the system
can be displayed, e.g. serial number of the separa-
tor, date of commissioning, program number etc.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
3.7 Measurements Display machine data, measured values and set-

tings.
3.15.1 Documentation
Opening the “Documentation” help menu
3.1 Documentation Display documentation
 Press the “Documentation” icon.
03/01/2001 Fig. 50 Help: View documentation through PDF viewer (example)
NOTE: Depending on the application, various documents may be stored in the

control unit. At the USB port on the operator panel, there is the option of updating
these documents using a memory stick.
Open documentation
Open documentation
 Press the PDF icon of the desired documentation.
PDF viewer opens, the desired document is displayed.
NOTE: The 4“ monitor is not suited to display documents.
3.15.2 Colour concept
Open the “Colour concept” help menu
3.2 Colour concept Display colour concept
 Press the “Colour concept" icon.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
03/02/2001 Fig. 51 Help: Information about the colour concept of the IO operator panel (example)
 For further notes see chapter “Displaying pipeline media”.

NOTE:
• Standards which deviate from this colour system may be followed on the basis
of a specific application.
• Persons with a disability in colour perception may only be able to assign these
colours to a limited extent . This should be taken into account when selecting
operating staff.
3.15.3 Messaging function

This menu displays information about the messaging function.
Open the "Messaging function" menu
3.3 Messaging Notes on the option of sending SMS or email

messages from the control unit (e.g. in the event
of an alarm).

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
03/03/2001 Fig. 52 Help: Information about the messaging function of the operator panel( example)
NOTE: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO Operator panels provide the option of
sending SMS or email messages to fixed addresses in defined operating situa-
tions. Essentially this requires an email address for the Operator panel and a link
between the control unit and a local SMTP server. SMS messaging is also de-
pendent on the provider and the receiver's associated mobile wireless contract.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
3.15.4 Remote operation

This menu includes information about the option of operating the panel remotely.
Opening the "Remote operation" menu
3.4 Remote operation Open remote operation
 Press the “Remote operation" icon.
03/04/2001 Fig. 53 Help: Information about remote access to the control unit( example)

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
NOTE: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO Operator panels offer the option of visualis-
ing or even operating the control unit via remote IT components (PCs, mobile
phones, tablets …). This essentially requires the control unit to be connected either
to a local network or the Internet. Additional measures (for the technical security of
this "Smart Service", for example) may be necessary depending on use.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
3.15.5 Screen settings

In this menu it is possible to make adjustments to the screen and call up other in-
formation.
Open the “Screen settings” menu
3.5 Screen settings Open the “Screen settings” menu
 Press the "Screen settings" icon.
This area is protected and can only be opened after entering a user name and
password.
 Enter user name and password, see chapter “Password protection”.
03/05/2000 Fig. 54 Help: Screen settings (example)
Configuring screen settings
Terminate runtime
 Press the icon to terminate the programme. The execution requires
the input of a password and is accessible only to authorised per-
sons.
Change language setting

 Press the icon, see Section “Change language”.
Cleaning the screen

 Press the icon, see Section “Cleaning the screen”.
 Clean the screen with a soft cloth.
Functions are blocked until the progress bar is complete.
Adjust the brightness

 Press the icon, see section entitled “Adjusting the brightness”.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Calibrating the screen

 Press the icon, see Section “Calibrating the screen”
Set the date and time

 Press the icon and make the desired settings.
Changing language
3.5.03 Fig. 55 Help: Screen settings - changing language (example)
Changing language
 Type to change language
Exit language setting
Cleaning the screen
Cleaning the screen
 Press the icon to clean the screen.

 Watch the screen cleaning time elapse.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Please clean the screen!
Fig. 56 Help: Screen settings: Cleaning the screen (example)
The screen should be cleaned with a soft cloth. During screen cleaning, remaining
time is indicated by a grey progress bar shrinking to the left.
 Clean the screen, see also chapter entitled “Maintenance”.
Changing the brightness
Adjust the brightness

 Press the icon, see section entitled “Adjusting the brightness”.
03/05/2002 Fig. 57 Help: Screen settings , brightness control (example)
 Enter the desired percentage value in the input field.

Max. brightness at 100 %.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
 Press the icon to save the setting.

 Press the icon to calibrate the screen.
Fig. 58 Help: Screen settings: Calibrating the screen (example)
 Briefly press the centre of the calibration target.

The calibration crosshairs are displayed at the next position.
 Proceed as outlined above for each of the following four positions of the calibra-
tion target.
When the calibration target has been contacted in all positions, the following dia-
logue is displayed:

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
03/06/2004 Fig. 59 Help: Confirm screen settings / calibration (example)
 To accept the calibration, touch the touchscreen within 30 seconds.

After touching within 30 seconds, the new calibration is saved and the display
changes back to the “Screen settings” overview screen.
Otherwise, the calibration is discarded and the original calibration is used.
Setting the time and date

 Press the icon to calibrate the screen.
03/05/2001 Fig. 60 Help: Screen settings: Display or edit time and date (example)

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
 Press on the input field.

An input keyboard is shown.
 Enter the current data using the input keyboard.
Further information, see chapter "Description”, section “Editing data in input fields".
 Press the icon to save the setting.
3.15.6 Machine information

Information about the machine/system can be retrieved in this menu.
Open “Machine information” menu
3.6 Machine information

 Press “Machine information” field.
03/06/2001 Fig. 61 Help: Display machine information (example)
The following information can be retrieved:

• Machine type
• Serial number of the machine
• Software programme number
• Wiring schematic number

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
Fig. 62 Help: Display machine information (example)
The following information can be retrieved:

• Standard HMI IP address: 10.202.55.151
• Standard HMI subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
NOTE: A smart client function is optionally available.
3.15.7 Measurements
This menu shows information on actual measured data of the centrifuge.
Open the "Measurements" menu.
3.7 Measurements Calling up measurements
 Press the “Measurements" icon.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
03/04/2001 Fig. 63 Help: Information about remote access to the control unit
Overview of all registered measured values
Measurements
Measured value: Description / Unit of measurement

Main motor current / power [A]
Bowl speed [rpm]
Product throughput [hl/h]
Discharge pressure [bar]
Turbidity [%]
Concentrate [hl/h]

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
3.16 Service
This menu provides the relevant information for servicing and maintenance of the
system, e.g. service intervals or contact data.
Open the "Service" menu
 Press the "Service" icon in the navigation bar.
04:00 Fig. 64 Open the "Service" menu
Description of the icons in the “Service” menu
4.1 Contact/hotline Contact data and hotline for GEA Westfalia Separator.
4.2 Preventative main- Information about the benefits of the GEA preventative
tenance maintenance service.
4.3 Condition monito- Information about condition monitoring of the machine

ring by GEA Westfalia Separator wewatch®.
3.16.1 Contact/hotline
Open“Contact/ Hotline” menu
4.1 Contact/Hotline  Press field to open the “Contact/Hotline”

menu.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Fig. 65
IMPORTANT: The data is filled in during start-up
Press the icon to return to the start page of the service menu.
3.16.2 4.2 Preventative maintenance
Open the “Preventative maintenance” menu
4.2 Preventative maintenance  Press field to open the “Preventative mainte-

nance” menu.
Fig. 66
The “Preventative maintenance” menu shows the service interval arranged in a cir-
cle. The next service is always at the top.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
When the date for the next service is approaching the Service icon in the naviga-
tion bar is highlighted.
Displaying the upcoming service
When the service icon in the navigation bar is flashing yellow, the
next service is due. Then there is only 10% of the interval left before
the next service.
When the service icon in the navigation bar is flashing red, the time
for the next service has arrived.
The meaning and function of the service cycle
Fig. 67
Key to the service cycle
Item Meaning
1 This service at the top is the next upcoming on 01.04.2017 or after 1500
operating hours, whichever is the sooner. Kit A (ordering instructions)
must be ready for the service.
2 The next service but one, with date or after operating hours, and the re-
quired service kits.
3 The next service but two, with date or after operating hours, and the re-
quired service kits.
4 Date and operating hours of the last service.
5 Current total operating hours
Editing preventative service settings
Setting service dates

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
 Press the icon to edit preventative service settings.

This menu is restricted to service technicians and requires a pass-
word.
Fig. 68
 To change settings, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Saving data changes
After all current data has been entered, press the memory card icon to
accept and save the settings.
Press the icon to return to the start page of the service menu.
3.17 Training
In this menu general information can be retrieved about centrifuges, their safety,
centrifugal separation technology and also about training offers for operating staff
run by GEA .
Opening the "Training" menu
Opening the Training menu

 Press the "Training" icon in the navigation bar.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Description
05:00 Fig. 69 Opening "Training" (example screen)
"Training" menu
5.1 Separation technology General information about separation technology

and how it is used at GEA.
5.2 GEA IO Information about the concept of the new genera-

tion of GEA IO controls.
5.3 Customer training Information on training offers.
5.4 E-Learning Information on online training offer from GEA.
3.18 GEA Westfalia Separator

In this chapter you can find information about the GEA Westfalia Separator.
Open the "Company portrait" menu
Open GEA
 Press the "Company portrait" icon in the navigation bar.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
06:00 Fig. 70 Open company portrait
IMPORTANT: Documents are only available for screen sizes above 9”.
Company profile menu
GEA Group company profile
Company profile of GEA Westfalia Separator

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Technical data
4 Technical data

4.1.1 Certificates and approvals ..................................................................... 104
4.1.2 Directives and declarations ................................................................... 104
4.1.3 Dimensional drawings of 4" Operator panel .......................................... 104
4.1.4 Technical data of the Operator panel .................................................... 104

Technical data 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
4.1 Technical specifications
4.1.1 Certificates and approvals

For certificates and approvals for the operator panel, see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
The certificates and approvals include:
• CE approval
• UL approval
• FM approval
• Ex approval
• Marking for Australia
• Marking for Korea
4.1.2 Directives and declarations

For directives and declaration for the operator panel, see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
The directives and declarations include:
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• ESD guidelines (electrostatic sensitive device)
4.1.3 Dimensional drawings of 4" Operator panel

For the dimensions of the Operator panel, see the manufacturer's operating in-
structions in Chapter “Technical information”.
4.1.4 Technical data of the Operator panel

The information provided here is the technical data of the 4” operator panel em-
ployed by GEA. .
For more information and details of the operator panel, see the manufacturer's op-
erating instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
Technical data of the Operator panels
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Weight [kg] 0.6 1.4 1.9 5.2
Active display area [mm] 4.3“ 7.0“ 9.0“ 15,4“
95x53 152x91 195x117 331x207
Resolution [Pixels] 480x272 800x480 800x480 1280x800
Number of colours up to 16 million

Brightness control Yes, value range 0 to 100 1, 0 = backlight off
Backlight [h] LED
Half brightness Life time 80000
(MTBF 2)

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Technical data
Technical data of the Operator panels
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Pixel error class according II I
ISO 9241-307
Function keys 4 - - -
Labelling strips Yes - - -
Usable memory for [Mbytes 4 12 12 24
user data ]
Usable memory for [Mbytes 0.512 2 2 4
Recipe data ]
Additional memory for [Mbytes 4 12 12 24
options ]
Memory card 2 x MMC/SD combination slot
Interfaces
1 x RS 422/485 [Mbps] 12
(PROFIBUS) (Applies to DP mode)
Ethernet (PROFINET) 1 x RJ45 2 x RJ45 10/100Mbps

10/100
Mbps
Ethernet (PROFINET - - - 1 x RJ45
basic functionality) 10/100/
1000
Mbps
Audio Line In and Line Out
USB 2.0 1 x Host 2 x Host
1 x De- 1 x Device
vice
Power supply
Rated voltage [DC V] 24
Permissible voltage range [V] +19.2 V to +28.8 V
Rated current [A] 0.13 0.5 0.75 1.5
Inrush current I2t [A²s] 0.5
Rating [W] 3.1 12 18 36
Max. permissible tran- [V] 35 (500ms)
sients
Minimum time between [s] 50
two
transients
Internal protection Electronic
Other
Buffered real-time clock Yes
Sound Onboard Integrated or external via Line OUT
beeper
Magnetic field strength 50/60 Hz;
100 A/m RMS

Technical data 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for the operator panel are specified in the table
in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.
Frequency range f Continuous Occasional
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz
1
Amplitude 0.0375 mm Amplitude 0.075 mm
8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz Constant acceleration 0.5 Constant acceleration 1
g g
1) Frequency range for 4“ operator panel: 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 9 Hz
Climatic ambient conditions
Ambient conditions Permissible range Remarks
Temperature [°C]:
Vertical installation 0 to 50 °C
(Landscape)
0 to 40 °C
(Portrait) Inclination angle
Inclined installation 0 to 40 °C max. 35°
(Landscape)
0 to 35 °C
(Portrait)
Relative humidity 10 to 90%
without condensation
Air pressure 1 080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an alti-
tude of
-1000 m to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
Insulation test
Test voltages
The insulation strength is demonstrated by the type test using the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with rated voltage Ue rela- Test voltage

tive to other circuits or ground
24 V 520 VDC or 370 VAC
For Ethernet port: 1500 VAC

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Technical data
Protection class
Protection class I acc. to IEC 61140, i.e. earthing conductor connected to mounting
rail required!
Foreign body and water protection
Protection class Explanation

acc. to
IEC 60529
Front face in built-in condition
IP65
Front face only Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only)
Back cover IP20
Protection against contact with standard probes.
Not protected against ingress of water!
Note:
The protection class at the front can only be ensured if the mounting seal rests
completely against the mounting cut-out.

Technical data 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17

5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device ........................................................... 110

5.1.1 Safety during transport .......................................................................... 110
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures ..................................................... 110
5.1.3 Check for transport damage .................................................................. 110
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions ..................................... 110
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage ................ 110

5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device
5.1.1 Safety during transport

Note the following information for transport and storage:
• Transport the HMI device only in the original packaging.
• Note the transport instructions on the packaging.
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures

The HMI device has sensitive electronic components. The HMI device can be
damaged as a result of frost or high temperatures.
 To avoid damage, prevent the effects of frost during transport and storage.
 Avoid installing or storing the HMI device near objects with string heat radiation.
5.1.3 Check for transport damage

Check the package contents for visible transport damage and completeness.
Damaged parts
A damaged part leads to malfunctions of the operator terminal.
Do not install damaged parts included in the package.
Contact GEA Westfalia Separator if there are any damaged parts.
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage

The HMI device exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 regarding transport and
storage conditions. The following specifications apply for an HMI device that is
transported and stored in its original packaging.
The climatic conditions conform to the following standards:
• IEC 60721-3-2, Class 3K7 for storage
• IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transport
The mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 61131-2.
Avoid condensation
If the HMI device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme temperature fluctu-
ations, moisture may condense on or inside the HMI device. Condensation may
occur. This can cause malfunction.
Before commissioning, the HMI device must be allowed to reach room tempera-
ture.
 Do not exposed the HMI device to direct heat radiation from a heater.
 In case of condensation, switch on the HMI device only after complete drying af-
ter a waiting time of approximately 4 hours.
Problem-free and safe operation of the HMI device requires proper transport, stor-
age, installation and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Failure to comply with these provisions will void the warranty of the HMI device.

6 Assembly and installation

6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection ................................. 112
6.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 112
6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use ............................................ 112
6.2.2 Use with additional measures................................................................ 112
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions ............................................................. 112
6.3 Specify mounting position ...................................................................... 113
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out ............................................................. 114
6.5 Installing the HMI device ....................................................................... 115
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps ........................................................................... 115
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket ............................................................... 116
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device ........................................................................ 116
6.6 Connecting the HMI device ................................................................... 117
6.6.1 Connection instructions ......................................................................... 117
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding ............................................................................ 117
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding ................................................ 118
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply ................................................................ 119
6.6.5 Connecting the configuration PC ........................................................... 120
6.6.6 Connecting the control unit .................................................................... 121
6.6.7 Connecting a USB device ...................................................................... 121
6.6.8 Connecting a printer .............................................................................. 122
6.6.9 Connecting an audio device .................................................................. 122
6.6.10 Switching on and testing the HMI device .............................................. 123

6.1 Safety information
6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection

Choose the installation location of the HMI device.
The following must be observed when installing the HMI device:
• Position the HMI device such that it is not exposed to direct sunlight.
• Place the HMI device in a position that is ergonomically convenient to the opera-
tor.
• Choose an appropriate installation height.
• Avoid glare from light.
• Avoid covering the vents of the HMI device by the installation.
• Observe the permissible mounting positions.
6.2 Operating conditions
6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use

The HMI device is designed for weather-protected locations. The operating condi-
tions meet the requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
• Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
6.2.2 Use with additional measures

Do not use the HMI device in the following locations without additional measures:
• In locations with a high degree of ionising radiation.
• In locations with difficult operating conditions, for example by: corrosive vapours,
gases, oils or chemicals,
• strong electric or magnetic fields,
• in installations requiring special monitoring, for example, in lifts or elevators,
• in systems in particularly hazardous areas.
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device are listed in Chapter “Tech-
nical data”.
Reducing vibrations
If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, acceleration or the
amplitude must be reduced by appropriate measures.
We recommend to mount the HMI device or the control cabinet on damping mate-
rials, for example, elastic mounts.
Check conditions of use

Check the following points before installing the HMI device:
 standards, approvals, EMC parameters and technical information on the applica-
tion of the HMI device.

You can find this information in the following chapters:

• “Technical data”, Section “Certificates and approvals”
• “Technical data”, Section “Electromagnetic compatibility”
Check the mechanical and climatic ambient conditions for operation of the HMI de-
vice; see Chapter “Technical data”, Section “Ambient conditions”.
 See the information on the local use of the HMI device; see Chapter “Safety”,
Section “Usage notes”.
Permissible rated voltage and corresponding tolerance range:
• Rated voltage: +24 VDC
• Tolerance range: 19.2 V to 28.8 V
6.3 Specify mounting position

Determine the installation position of the HMI device; see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions for the HMI device.
• Mounting the HMI device horizontally.
For vertical installation (0° inclination

angle), a max. ambient temperature of
+50 °C is permissible, +40 °C for installa-
tion at an angle.
Fig. 71
The HMI device is designed for installation in:

• Built-in cabinets
• Control cabinets
• Control panels
• Panels
All of these mounting options are referred to as “control cabinet”.
The HMI device is self-ventilated and allowed for inclined installation up to an angle
of +/-35° in stationary control cabinets.
Damage by overheating
When installed at an angle, the convection through the HMI device is reduced,
which also lowers the maximum permissible ambient temperature during operation.
If there is sufficient forced ventilation, the HMI device can also be operated at an
inclined mounting position up to the maximum permissible ambient temperature for
vertical installation. Otherwise, the HMI device may be damaged and its approvals
and warranty may be void.

For information on the ambient conditions, see Chapter “Technical data”, Section
“Ambient conditions”.
Check clearances
Required clearance around the HMI device to ensure sufficient self-ventilation must
be maintained.
X clearance at least 15 mm.

Y clearance at least 50 mm.
Z clearance at least 10 mm.
Fig. 72
NOTE:
For installation in control cabinets and specifically in closed housings, be sure not
to exceed the permitted ambient temperature.
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out

The following requirements must be observed for selecting the installation location:
• The material around the cut-out must be sufficiently stable to ensure a secure at-
tachment.
• The material must not be deformed by the fastening elements, so that the re-
quired protection classes are achieved.
Protection classes
For the requirements to comply with the protection classes, see also the manufac-
turer's operating instructions for the HMI device:
• material thickness for protection class IP65 or protection class front face only
Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only) at the mounting cut-out: 2 mm to 6 mm
• Permissible deviation from flatness at the mounting cut-out: ≤ 0.5 mm
• This condition must be fulfilled also for the installed HMI device.
• Permissible surface roughness around the mounting gasket: ≤ 120 μm (Rz
120)

Compatibility of the mounting cut-out with other HMI devices

For mounting cut-outs of other HMI devices, see the manufacturer's operating in-
structions for the HMI device.
Dimensions of the mounting cut-out
Note:
For vertical installation, width and height
have to be changed accordingly.
Fig. 73
Dimensions of the mounting cut-outs
HMI device W [mm 0/+1]] h [mm 0/+1]

4“ 122 98
6.5 Installing the HMI device
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps

Position the clamps as shown below so that the specified protection class is
achieved.
Insert the clamps as follows:
 Position the clamps at the cut-outs, note the embossing.
 Insert one clamp into each embossing.
The table below shows the type, number and location of the clamps for the HMI
device.
Clamps at the HMI device
HMI device Clamps

Type Quantity Location on the HMI device
4“ plastic clamps 4

The following requirements must be met before installing the HMI device:
• All the packaging components and protective foils on the HMI device have been
removed.
• The mounting clamps from the accessory kit are complete.
• The mounting gasket on the HMI device is present.
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket
CAUTION Property damage caused by improperly installed mounting gasket.
The assured protection class is not ensured If the mounting gasket is damaged,
twisted or protrudes beyond the HMI device.
 Check the fit of the mounting gasket; it must not be damaged, twisted or pro-
trude in order to avoid leaks.
 Replace damaged mounting gasket.
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device
 Insert the HMI device from the front

into the mounting cut-out.
Fig. 74
 1. Insert the clamp into the cut-out

provided on the HMI device.
 2. Tighten the set screw to secure the
clamp, tightening torque 0.2 Nm.
 Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until all
clamps are installed.
 Check the fit of the mounting gasket.
Fig. 75

6.6 Connecting the HMI device
6.6.1 Connection instructions

Conditions for connection:
• The control unit is installed in accordance with the specifications of this instruc-
tion manual.
• Only use standard shielded cables for data cables.
Order of connections
Failure to follow the proper order in making the connections may cause
CAUTION
damage to the HMI device.
The HMI device may be damaged if it is not connected in the order described be-
low.
 Connect the HMI device in the order listed below.
Connect the HMI device in the following order:

• Equipotential bonding
• Power supply
 Perform a power-on test to make sure that the power supply is not connected
with reverse polarity.
• Control unit
• Configuring PC if required
• Peripherals if required
IMPORTANT:
If the HMI device ever has to be disconnected, it must be done in reverse order.
Connecting the cables

Connect the HMI device with the connecting cable to the terminal box of the asso-
ciated machine/system; see circuit diagram.
Information on the connecting cable:
 Route the cable from the HMI device to the machine/system without using the
terminal block in the control cabinet.
Only this will ensure that a proper and EMC-compliant connection of the proximity
switches is established to the evaluation unit.
 Cut excess cable length. If it is not possible to cut the cable. wrap up the cable
and secure it with cable ties.
 When connecting the cables, make sure that the contact pins are not bent.
 Secure the cable connectors to the socket with screws.
 Provide adequate cable strain relief.
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding

Differences in potential
Differences in potential can occur between spatially separated system parts. The
potential differences can lead to high transient currents over the data cables there-

by destroying their interfaces. Transient currents can develop if the cable shielding
is terminated at both ends and earthed at different system parts.
Potential differences can be caused by different power inputs.
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding

Potential differences must be reduced by means of equipotential bonding to a level
that does not affect the proper functioning of the electronic components.
When fitting the equipotential bonding, note the following:
• The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases, the smaller the impedance
of the equipotential bonding conductor or the large the cross-section of the equi-
potential bonding conductor.
• If two system parts are connected to each other via shielded data cables whose
shields are both connected to the protective earthing conductor, the impedance
of the additional equipotential bonding conductor must not exceed 10% of the
shield impedance.
• The cross-section of an equipotential bonding conductor must be rated for the
maximum transient current. In practice, equipotential bonding conductors with a
minimum cross-section of 16 mm² have proved effective.
• Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanised steel.
• Connect the equipotential bonding conductors over a large area to the protective
earthing conductor and protect them from corrosion.
• Clamp the shield of the data cable flat to the equipotential bonding rail using a
cable tie. Keep the cable length between the HMI device and the equipotential
bonding rail as short as possible.
• Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables parallel to each oth-
er with minimum clearance.
Connection diagram
CAUTION Unsuitable cables may damage interface components.
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding. Equipotential bonding

conductors must have a minimum cross-section of 16 mm², otherwise the interface
modules can be damaged.
 Use only prescribed equipotential bonding conductors.

Connection of equipotential bonding by the example of the 7" HMI device.
Fig. 76 Equipotential bonding by the example of the 7" HMI device.
1 Earth connection
2 Cable tie
3 PROFIBUS data line
4 PROFINET data line
5 Equipotential bonding conductor
6 Equipotential bonding rail
7 Control cabinet
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply
Damage to the HMI device by external voltages or excessive operating volt-

CAUTION
ages.
There is a risk of property damage, if the connection voltages do not match the
specifications on the nameplate of the HMI device. Potential-free contacts of cou-
pling relays carry external voltages that need to be considered.
 Connect the HMI device only to voltages that are specified on the nameplate in-
side the HMI device.
 Only use power supplies with DC 24V supply voltage and safe electrical isolation
in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDI 0100, part 410), for
example, according to PELV standard.
For a non-isolated system setup:
Connect the GND 24V port of the 24V power supply output to the equipotential
bonding for uniform reference potential. Choose a central connection point if possi-
ble.

Power supply connection diagram
 Note when connecting:

The electrical mains terminal for connec-
tion of the supply voltage is included in
the accessory kit.
The electrical mains terminal is rated for
cables with a cross-section of max.
1.5 mm².
 Do not tighten the cable fastening
screws of the mains terminal with a
screwdriver, if it is already plugged into
the HMI device.
Fig. 77 The pressure by the screwdriver might
damage the socket in the HMI device.
Reverse polarity protection

The HMI device has reverse polarity protection.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

The uninterruptible power supply is connected to the 24V input and to a type A
USB port on the HMI device.
When connected to the USB interface of the HMI device, the following uninterrupti-
ble power supplies are supported:
SITOP DC UPS modules from a current rating of 6 A, e.g. 6EP1931-2DC42
For details on the uninterruptible power supply, refer to the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions.
6.6.5 Connecting the configuration PC

Connection diagram
 Refer to Chapter “Technical data” for a

description of the interfaces.
1 = connection to the configuration PC
via USB type Mini-B.
2 = connection to the configuration PC

via PROFINET (LAN).
Note:
Alternatively, the HMI device can also be
connected to the configuration PC via
PROFIBUS. However, the transfer
speeds are lower, the transfer times
Fig. 78 longer.
Information on the USB type Mini-B

Note the following points before using the USB type Mini-B:
• The USB type Mini-B interface is suitable only for commissioning or mainte-
nance purposes.
• For connecting to the USB type Mini-B interface, a USB 2.0 certified cable is re-
quired.
• Max. USB cable length is 1.5 m.

 Switch off the HMI device.

 Connecting the configuration PC
 Connect the PROFINET interface or USB type Mini-B with the configuration PC.
 Note for the USB connection:
- Connect the USB Mini-B connector to the USB Mini-B socket of the HMI de-
vice.
- Connect the USB A plug to a free USB interface on the configuration PC
 Switch on the HMI device.
IMPORTANT:
For further details on connecting the configuration PC, see the operating instruc-
tions of the manufacturer of the HMI device, e.g., assigning an IP address, updat-
ing the operating system, or connecting several HMI devices.
6.6.6 Connecting the control unit

Connection diagram
Malfunction if control is connected to the HMI device with non-approved ca-

CAUTION
bles.
The use of non-approved cables for connecting a control may cause malfunctions.
 Use only approved cables to connect a control.
 Standard cables are available for cou-

pling. For details see the operating in-
structions of the manufacturer of the
HMI device.
1 = connection to control via PROFIBUS
2 = connection to control via PROFINET

(LAN)
Fig. 79
For more information on connecting a control, refer to the operating instructions of

the manufacturer of the HMI device, for example on connecting via PROFINET.
6.6.7 Connecting a USB device

Note the following when connecting to the USB type A interface:
• The USB type A interface is not suitable for commissioning.
• A USB 2.0 certified cable is required.
• Max. USB cable length is 1.5 m.
• Malfunction of the USB interface.
• Note the maximum load to avoid overloading USB interface with excessive cur-
rent.
For more information on connecting to the USB type A interface, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.

The following devices can be connected to the USB type A interface of the HMI
device:
• External mouse
• External keyboard
• Printer
• USB memory stick
• Industrial USB hub 4
The industrial USB hub 4 can be obtained from GEA Westfalia Separator if re-
quired.
6.6.8 Connecting a printer
Malfunctions can occur when using connection cables without a metallic

CAUTION
braid shield.
If lines are used without a metallic braid shield between the HMI device and the
printer, malfunctions may occur.
 Use only connecting cables with metallic shields earthed at both end.
The figure shows the connection be-

tween the printer and the HMI device.
Note:
For further details on connecting a printer
to the HMI device, refer to the operating
instructions of the manufacturer.
Fig. 80
6.6.9 Connecting an audio device
CAUTION Interference when cable is connected to “Line Out” port.
If an audio device is connected to the “Line Out” port, the connecting cable of the
audio device may cause increased interference.
 Use inadequately shielded audio devices, such as headsets and headphones, at
the “line-out” port only during commissioning.
If audio devices are used during production operation, the connecting cables of this
audio equipment must be shielded such that the current guidelines for interference
emission are adhered to.
The following ports can be used for audio devices:
• “Line Out”, for example, for active speakers or other audio amplifiers.
• “Line In” for audio sources with line-in level.
IMPORTANT:

For more information on connecting audio devices, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.
6.6.10 Switching on and testing the HMI device

 Switch on the power supply.
After switching on the power supply, the monitor screen lights up.
An animated graphic is displayed during the start-up process.
If the HMI device does not start, the wires on the mains terminal may be reversed.
 Check the connected wires and change their connection if necessary.
After starting the operating system, the loader is displayed.
Under the following conditions, the HMI device automatically enters “transfer”
mode during commissioning:
• No project is defined on the HMI device.
• At least one data channel is configured.
Meanwhile, the transfer is performed.
If the transfer is to be aborted, use the “Cancel” button.
The loader appears again.

IMPORTANT:
When restarting the system, a project may already exist on the HMI device. The
project will then start after an adjustable delay time or via the “Start” button.
The project is exited with the appropriate control object.
Refer to the system documentation for more detailed information.
Function test
After commissioning, run a functional test.
If any of the following conditions occurs, the HMI device is functional:
• The “Transfer” dialogue box is displayed.
• The loader is displayed.
• A project is started.
Switching off the HMI device

Exit the project on the HMI device before the HMI device is turned off.
The following options are available to switch off the HMI device:
• Cut off the power supply.
• Pull out the mains terminal on the HMI device.


8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device ............................................................. 126

7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel ............................................... 126
7.2 Visualisation file in the HMI device ........................................................ 128
7.2.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”) ............................................. 128
7.2.2 Backing up the current visualisation ...................................................... 132
7.3 Set IP address ....................................................................................... 136

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device

The following parameters can be set for the HMI device; see the operating instruc-
7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel
After starting the HMI device, the “Start

centre” is displayed.
If a project (operating program of the

machine/system) exists in the HMI de-
vice, it is automatically started after a
delay time.
If the button “Settings” is pressed during

the delay time, an overview page opens
in the operating system of the HMI de-
vice. All symbols shown there are listed
and described below.
Fig. 81
The following parameter can be shown and set on the overview page in the operat-
ing system of the HMI:
Setting option in the operating system of the HMI device
Symbol Description
Import and delete certificates.
Set date and time.
Change the monitor settings.
Configure the on-screen keyboard.
Change general Internet settings.

Set proxy server.
Change security settings.
Set the character repeat.
Set double-clicking characteristics.
Change network settings.
Change login data.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
Display system data of the HMI device.
Change password protection.
Change print settings.
Activate PROFINET services.
Country-specific settings
Set the screen saver.
“Service & Commissioning”

Backup to an external storage device.
Restore from an external storage device.
Enable sound and adjust sound volume.

Assign a sound to an event.
View system settings.

View memory allocation.
Set the computer name of the HMI device.
Configure the data channel.

Set the delay time.
Set the storage location.
Change MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings.
Switch on the uninterruptable power supply.
Status of the uninterruptible power supply.
Change e-mail settings.

Configure Telnet for remote control.
 For more information on settings, refer to the operating instructions of the manu-
facturer of the HMI device.

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
7.2 Visualisation file in the HMI device

It is possible to load a new program of the visualisation interface into the HMI de-
vice without a programming device (“Restore”) or to store the current program
stored on a storage medium as a backup (“Backup”).
7.2.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”)
Fig. 82
1 Slot “X51”
2 HMI Memory Card, SD Card
 Disconnect power to the control.

 Import the HMI memory card (2) into the “X51” slot (1).
IMPORTANT: Alternatively, the visualisation can also be updated from other stor-
age media, such as a USB stick. The restore procedure is then analogous to the
process described here. Only the selection of the storage medium is to be adapted.
 Switch the power back on.
The loader is briefly displayed in the start phase of the operator panel.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
 Touch “Settings” button in the “Start

centre”.
An overview screen in the operating sys-
tem of the HMI device opens, which is
shown below.
Fig. 83
Fig. 84
 Open the “Service & Commissioning” button with a double-click.
 Touch the “RESTORE” button to start

the “Restore a visualisation” operation.
 Touch the “Next” button.
Fig. 85

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Multiple storage media can be connected

to the controller. The available storage
media are displayed.
 Select the desired-storage medium.

Only then the next step can be executed.
Fig. 86
The visualisation files available on the

selected storage medium are scanned
and listed automatically in a new screen.
Fig. 87
 Select the desired visualisation file.

Only then further options are available.
 Touch the “Restore” button to restore
the selected visualisation file.
When selecting the “Details” button,
properties of the selected file are availa-
ble.
Fig. 88
IMPORTANT: The “Delete” button is used to delete the selected file from the stor-
age medium.
Selecting the “Details” and “Delete” buttons opens another screen that can be
closed by touching the “X” icon.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
Touching the “Restore” button opens the

screen shown here with an additional
security prompt.
 When you touch the “Yes” button, the

visualisation currently stored in the
panel visualization is deleted and re-
placed with the previously selected
new visualisation file from the storage
medium.
Fig. 89
The storage process is automatic and

may take a few minutes. The status of
the process is displayed by a progress
bar.
Fig. 90
When the restore operation is complete, the system displays an appropriate mes-
sage in an additional screen.
 Touch the “OK” button to confirm.
The panel will then automatically reboot, which may take a few minutes.

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
7.2.2 Backing up the current visualisation
Fig. 91
1 Slot “X51”
2 HMI Memory Card, SD Card

 Import the HMI memory card (2) into the “X51” slot (1).
IMPORTANT: Alternatively, the visualisation can also be updated from other stor-
age media, such as a USB stick. The backup procedure is then analogous to the
process described here. Only the selection of the storage medium is to be adapted.
 Touch “Settings” button in the “Start

centre”.
An overview screen in the operating sys-
tem of the HMI device opens, which is
shown below.
Fig. 92

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
Fig. 93
 Open the “Service & Commissioning” button with a double-click.
 Touch the “BACKUP” button to start

the “Backup the current visualisation”
operation.
Fig. 94
Multiple storage media can be connected

to the controller. The available storage
media are displayed.
 Select the desired-storage medium.

Only then the next step can be executed.
Fig. 95

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
The selected storage medium is first

scanned and the contents are automati-
cally listed in a new screen.
Fig. 96
The files available on the selected stor-

age medium are listed.
 Touch the “Backup” button to save the

current visualisation as a file on this
storage medium.
Fig. 97
The settings shown here are recom-

mended to backup the current visualisa-
tion.
 Touch the “File name” input screen.
Fig. 98

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
Fig. 99
 Enter a file name for the backup of the current visualisation file.
The storage process is automatic and

may take a few minutes. The status of
the process is displayed by a progress
bar.
Fig. 100
When the restore operation is complete,

the system displays an appropriate mes-
sage in an additional screen.
The panel will then automatically reboot,

which may take a few minutes.
Fig. 101

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
7.3 Set IP address

For using data communication with the HMI device, connection to existing net-
works/systems or commissioning of replacement components, it may be necessary
to set the IP address of the HMI device.
This is possible on the HMI device without additional hardware.
IMPORTANT: When setting the IP address of the HMI device, be sure to observe
also the IP address assigned to the control (CPU) to avoid compromising the
communication between the HMI device and the CPU.

 Touch the “Control Panel” button in the

loader.
An overview page opens in the operating
system of the HMI device, see image
below.
Fig. 102
Fig. 103
 Open the “Transfer” button with a double click.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
To transfer data, settings can be made

for different selectable data connections
in this screen.
The default data transfer method of the
IO control is “Ethernet”.
 Touch the “Properties...” button to

configure the properties of the Ether-
net connection.
Fig. 104
 Touch the “PN_X1” button to select the

Ethernet interface to be configured.
Fig. 105
Fig. 106
In the settings screen of the Ethernet interface, enter the “IP Address” and the as-
sociated “Subnet Mask”.

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
 Touch input fields to open the alphanumeric keyboard.
Fig. 107 Keyboard display for input
IMPORTANT: The alphanumeric keyboard can be moved on the screen so the in-
put field remain visible during the entry.
Move alphanumeric keyboard on the menu image
 Press symbol and move while pressing to position the keyboard.
 Accept the input by double-clicking on the designated area of the keyboard.

 After finishing the entry, exit the settings screen with “OK”.
Fig. 108
 Press button “X” to close the configuration page

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Settings
 Close the settings screen by touching

the “OK” or “X” button.
Fig. 109

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Commissioning
8 Commissioning

8.1.1 Safety during commissioning................................................................. 142
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device ............................................................. 142
8.2.1 Program memory ................................................................................... 142
8.2.2 Front panel controls ............................................................................... 144
8.3 Setting the CPU to RUN mode .............................................................. 144
8.4 Using the service concept ..................................................................... 146
8.4.1 Activating the service concept ............................................................... 146
8.4.2 Replacing HMI device ............................................................................ 146
8.4.3 Deactivating the service concept ........................................................... 146
8.5 Commissioning the project .................................................................... 147
8.5.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device .................................................. 147
8.5.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project ........................................ 147
8.5.3 Operating modes of the HMI ................................................................. 147
8.5.4 Change operating mode ........................................................................ 147
8.5.5 Possibilities of data transfer ................................................................... 148
8.5.6 Set transfer mode .................................................................................. 148
8.5.7 Start transfer .......................................................................................... 149
8.5.8 Test project ............................................................................................ 150
8.5.9 Backup and restore data ....................................................................... 151
8.5.10 Update operating system ....................................................................... 151
8.5.11 Manage options and license keys ......................................................... 151

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
8.1 Safety information
8.1.1 Safety during commissioning

Commissioning
The commissioning of the HMI device serves to import project data and enter op-
erating parameters, if this has not already been done at the factory. This may only
be performed by trained personnel of the operator or by service personnel or by
commissioning personnel of GEA Westfalia Separator.
Follow the commissioning check list for the machine/system

To commission the machine/system with the HMI device, follow the check list of the
machine/system and perform the necessary tests; refer to the operating instruc-
tions of the machine/plant, Chapter “Commissioning”.
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device
8.2.1 Program memory

The HMI device uses the following memory types:
• Internal memory
• Memory card
• System memory card
• USB mass storage
Internal memory
The following data is stored in the internal memory:
• Operating system
• Project file
• Licence keys
• User management
• Control program
Note:
Cyclic write access to internal memory is not allowed; see the operating instruc-
Use only external memory cards for the storage of data and archives.
Memory card
The following data is stored on the memory card:
• Archives
• Backups
• Control program
Standard SD(IO/HC) or MMC type commercial memory cards can be used. For da-
ta consistency, we recommend memory cards of the manufacturer; see the operat-
ing instructions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Commissioning
NOTE:
Data consistency:
• If the HMI device is switched off, consistency of stored data is only ensured for
the 2 GB or higher memory card recommended by the manufacturer.
• In commercially available memory cards, shutdown of the device may result in
the loss of stored data, e.g. due to a power outage.
• In archives, consistency of the stored data is only ensured if you use the RDB
format.
System memory card

The system memory card is part of the service concept of the HMI devices. If the
service concept is enabled, all data in the internal memory of the HMI device are
transferred to the system memory card.
If the HMI device fails, insert the system memory card into the replacement device.
In this way, downtime of your machine/system is reduced to a minimum.
The system memory card is not visible in the user interface of the HMI device and
is not available for data storage.
In order to be recognised by HMI device, insert the system memory card into the
slot provided.
NOTE:
Format of the system memory card:
• Only the 2GB or more memory card offered by the manufacturer is allowed as
system memory card. All other memory cards are not recognised as system
memory card by the HMI device.
Slots for memory cards and system memory cards

On the 4" HMI device, the slots for memory cards and system memory cards are
on the side of the housing.
On the 7" to 15" HMI device, the slots are on the rear of the housing. The memory
cards and system memory cards are therefore accessible from the rear inside the
control cabinet.
Memory cards and system memory cards are protected by a safety latch.
Memory cards and system memory cards can be inserted and removed during op-
eration of the HMI device.
Replacing the memory card

Memory cards and system memory cards are protected by a safety latch.
Memory cards and system memory cards can be inserted and removed during op-
eration of the HMI device.
CAUTION Potential data loss if memory card is pulled out during data transfer.
If the HMI device is accessing data on the memory card when pulling the memory
card, the data may be destroyed on the memory card.
 Do not pull the memory card during data access.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
 Note corresponding messages on the screen.
NOTE: The project is terminated if the system memory card is pulled out during a
running project.
Prerequisite
There is no write access to the memory cards.
Replace the memory card as follows:

 Move the safety latch to the appropriate position.
 To remove the memory card and/or system memory card, briefly push on the
card.
The card is released and can be removed.
This step does not apply during commissioning.
 Insert the new memory card and/or system memory card.
 Move the safety latch back into the original position.
After the system memory card has been inserted, the HMI device will prompt the
operator to enable the service concept.
The memory card and/or system memory card is swapped.
For more details, refer to the manufacturer's instruction manual for the HMI device.
8.2.2 Front panel controls

The front panel controls are described in Chapter “Description”, Section “Getting to
know the WS IO user interface”.
 Read the description of the touch user interface in Chapter “Description”, Sec-
tion “Getting to know the WS IO user interface”.
8.3 Setting the CPU to RUN mode

If the CPU (Central Processing Unit) has to be restarted after a program change or
update, depending on the scope of the change, it does not happen automatically
after switching on and HMI start-up. The CPU has to be manually started from the
HMI as follows:
Open the "Start-up" menu.
 Press the icon to display the overview page of the Start-up menu.
1.2 I/O check  Press in the field to display the "I/O check" start page.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Commissioning
Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert

Fig. 110
Setting the CPU to RUN mode
 Press the icon to start the “CPU” menu.
IMPORTANT: This page can only be accessed if the CPU is in stop mode.
Fig. 111
Starting the CPU
 Press the button to restart the CPU.

This process can take some time.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Fig. 112
The CPU is running.
Exiting the menu
8.4 Using the service concept

If the service concept is activated, the HMI device saves all the necessary operat-
ing data on the system memory card. The system memory card can be used in any
device of identical design. Once the data have been copied and the HMI device
has been re-started, it is ready for operation.
IMPORTANT: System memory cards can only be used in HMI devices of identical
design.
8.4.1 Activating the service concept

Service concepts may only be activated by authorised persons.
For more detailed information, see the chapter of the same name in the manufac-
turer's manual for the HMI device.
8.4.2 Replacing HMI device

HMI devices may only be replaced by authorised persons.
8.4.3 Deactivating the service concept

If you do not want to continuously back up the data of an HMI device to a memory
card for information security reasons, the service concept can be deactivated.
Service concepts may only be deactivated by authorised persons.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Commissioning
8.5 Commissioning the project
8.5.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device

To visually display automated work processes, a project, the image of the work
process, is programmed. Thus the term project stands in this text for the operating
programme of the machine/system.
Projects must only be transferred to the HMI device by authorised persons and
transfer processes are password protected.
There are the following possibilities to transfer a projet to the HMI device:
• Transfer from the projecting PC.
• Restore via ProSave from a PC.
Here a saved project is transferred from a PC to the HMI. It is not necessary that
the projecting software is installed on this PC.
• Insertion of a system memory card filled with project data from an identical HMI.
For further information, see “Activate service concept” in the manufacturer's manu-
al for the HMI device.
• Restoring from an external storage medium from an identical HMI (restore).
8.5.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project

Initial commissioning
On initial commissioning there is no project in the HMI. This is also the case when
the operating system has been updated.
Restarting
During restarting a project already existing on the HMI is replaced.
8.5.3 Operating modes of the HMI

The following operating modes of the HMI are possible:
• Offline
• Online
• Transfer
8.5.4 Change operating mode

To change the operating mode of the HMI during the running operation, the project
engineer must have projected the associated operating objects.
Operating mode “offline”

In this operating mode there is no communication connection between HMI and
control. The HMI can be operated, however no data are transferred to the control
or received from the same. To familiarise yourself with the HMI, see chapter “De-
scription”.
Operating mode “online”

In this operating mode there is a communication connection between HMI and con-
trol. The machine/system is operated with the HMI according to the project.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Operating mode “transfer”

The following can be carried out in this operating mode:
• A project can be transferred from the projecting PC to the HMI device.
• Backup and restore data of the HMI device.
The following possibilities are available to switch the HMI device to the “transfer”
operating mode:
• When starting the HMI device
The “transfer” operating mode is started manually in the “start centre” of the HMI
device.
• In running operation
The “transfer” operating mode is started manually with an operating object within
the project. In case of automatic transfer, the HMI device changes to “transfer” op-
erating mode if a transfer is started at the projecting PC.
8.5.5 Possibilities of data transfer

A table in the operating manual of the manufacturer in chapter “Possibilities of data
transfer” shows the possible data transfers between the HMI device and a project-
ing PC.
8.5.6 Set transfer mode

The data transfer can be effected manually or automatically.
If automatic transfer is activated, the HMI device changes to the transfer mode af-
ter starting the connected projecting PC.
NOTE
In case of automatic transfer, the HMI device changes only to the “transfer” operat-
ing mode, if the project is running on the HMI device.
The automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project, as
the transfer is effected without intervention from the HMI device.
If automatic transfer is activated on the HMI device and if on the projecting PC a

transfer is started, the running project is automatically terminated. The HMI device
automatically changes to the “transfer” operating mode.
Deactivate automatic transfer after the commissioning phase so that the HMI de-
vice does not enter transfer mode unintentionally. The transfer mode can trigger
unintentional reactions in the system.
A password is assigned in the control panel to block access to the transfer settings
and thus avoid unauthorised modification.
Pre-conditions:
• Control panel is open.
• Runtime software is terminated.
Open dialogue “Transfer settings”

 Press button “Transfer” in the control panel.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Commissioning
 Change to “General” in register.

 Select data channel in “Transfer chan-
nel” and set via “Properties” if possible.
 Select “Automatic” to start the “Trans-
fer” operating mode automatically.
 Select “Automatic” to start the “Trans-
fer” operating mode manually.
 Close dialogue with “OK”.
 Close control panel.
 Activate the transfer mode with “trans-
fer” in the “start centre”.
Fig. 113
Result
The project is transferred to the HMI device from the projecting PC via the selected
data channel. If required, set the data channel also on the projecting PC. The data
are written to the internal memory of the HMI device.
Further information see operating manual of the HMI device’s manufacturer, e.g.
“Alternative procedure” when setting the “Transfer” operating mode and “Parame-
terise data channel”.
8.5.7 Start transfer

The project must be transferred to the HMI device so that the machine/ system can
be operated. It must be specified if the existing data on the HMI device should be
overwritten.
Preconditions for the data transfer are:
• Project is open in WinCC on the projecting PC.
• Project navigation is shown.
• Projecting PC is connected to the HMI device.
• The transfer mode is set on the HMI device.
The procedure is as follows:

 Select the command “Load in device > software" in the context menu.
 If the dialogue “Extended loading” is opened, configure the “Settings for loading”.
Ensure that the “Settings for loading” meet the “Transfer settings” on the HMI:
- – Select the protocol used, e.g. Ethernet or USB.
If you use Ethernet or PROFINET, the network address can also be configured in
WinCC in the editor "Devices & networks". Further information on this topic can be
found in the online help of WinCC.
 –Configure appropriate interface parameters at the projecting PC.
 –If required effect settings related to interfaces or protocols.
 –Click on “load".
The dialogue “Extended loading” can be opened at any time via the menu com-
mand "Online >Extended loading in device…".
The dialogue “Load preview” is opened. The project is translated at the same time.
The result is shown in the dialogue “Load preview”.
 Check shown presettings and edit if required.
 Click on “load”.
The project is not transferred to the selected HMI device.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
If errors or warnings occur during transfer, appropriate messages will be displayed

under "Info > Load".
The project can be run on the HMI device after successful transfer.
8.5.8 Test project

If a project should be tested, there are the following possibilities:
• Test project on the projecting PC.
You can test a project on a projecting PC using the simulator. Detailed information
can be found in the online help of WinCC.
• Test project offline on the HMI device.
Offline testing means that the communication is interrupted between HMI device
and control during the tests.
• Test project online on the HMI device.
Online testing means that the HMI device and control communicate with each other
during the tests.
Carry out the tests in the sequence “Offline test” and “Online test”.
Note
Always test the project on the HMI device on that the project is used.
Test the following:
 Check images for proper display.
 Check image hierarchy.
 Check input objects.
 Enter variable values.
The test increases the safety that the project runs without errors on the HMI de-
vice.
Offine test
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Offline” mode.
The project can be tested without influence from the control. Control variables are
not changed.
Note
Customer-specific machine parameters/ system parameters can be entered in of-
fline test, see chapter “Description”, section “Show and edit input fields”.
Online test
Note
An online test corresponds to a test run of the machine/ system, see operating
manual of the machine/ system, section “Carry out test run”. The checks and in-
structions listed there are to be followed to prevent risks with consequences for life
and limb.
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Online” mode.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Commissioning
• Customer-specific parameters were checked and updated, if needed.

• I/O test was carried out and all errors rectified.
The project can be tested with influence from the control. Control variables are
changed.
8.5.9 Backup and restore data

During backup the contents of the internal memory are stored.
Message archives and process value archives are not backed up. If required, the
contents of the external memory card must be backed up manually.
If the HMI device is integrated in a network, the data can also be backed up to a
network drive.
The following data are backed up:
• Project and HMI device image
• User management
• Recipe data
• Licence keys
Use WinCC for backup and restore.
NOTICE Data loss possible in case of power cut.
If complete restoring is interrupted by a power cut at the HMI device, the operating
system of the HMI device can be deleted. In this case, reset the HMI device to fac-
tory settings. The operating device changes automatically to “bootstrapping” mode.
 Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer
in chapter “Backup and restore”.
8.5.10 Update operating system

Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer in
chapter “Update operating system”.
8.5.11 Manage options and license keys

Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer in
chapter “Options and license keys”.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Operation
9 Operation
9.1 Operate device IO.................................................................................. 154

9.1.1 Use on-screen keyboard ....................................................................... 154
9.2 Initial Commissioning (Easyline) ............................................................ 154
9.2.1 Select user language ............................................................................. 154
9.2.2 Setting the time ...................................................................................... 155
9.2.3 Selecting the software ........................................................................... 156

Operation 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
9.1 Operate device IO

After starting the HMI device, the “Start centre” is displayed automatically. If an op-
erating programme is available on the HMI device, it is automatically started after
the delay time.
NOTE: The display of the “Start centre” is part of the initialisation of the HMI device
after switching on. It can take up to 40 seconds and should not be interrupted
manually.
If the “Start centre” is operated during this delay time, the project is no longer start-
ed automatically.
If “Runtime” is terminated on the HMI device or if the Windows CE desktop is faded
it, the “Start centre” is opened automatically.
The figure shows “Start centre” with ver-

sion details in title bar.
Fig. 114
Depending on the software installed, other icons can be shown in the status bar of
the desktop.
9.1.1 Use on-screen keyboard

The on-screen keyboard can be used to enter values on an HMI device with touch
screen.
The on-screen keyboard is operated like a normal keyboard.
If an operating object with value input is touched, the on-screen keyboard opens
automatically. Depending on the operating object, either the alphanumerical or
numerical on-screen keyboard will open.
The appearance and the layout of the on-screen keyboard depends on the HMI
device used.
Depending on the configuration in the control panel, the on-screen keyboard can
be moved or its size can be changed.
Further information on on-screen keyboards for touch screens can be found in the
operating manual of the HMI device’s manufacturer in the eponymous chapter.
9.2 Initial Commissioning (Easyline)

NOTE: These chapters and the settings apply only to the separator series
Easyline with the types Easycream, Easyrefine and Easyclear.
When the control is switched on for the first time, the HMI device must be config-
ured with the basic settings.
9.2.1 Select user language

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Operation
Fig. 115 Menu presetting language (example)
Language setting
 Keep pressing the icon until the desired language is displayed.
Navigate to the next menu item
9.2.2 Setting the time
Fig. 116 Menu presetting time (example)

Operation 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Set the date and time
local set  Press in the input field <local set value>.

value  To edit input, refer to chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
 Press the icon to save the entries and update the display.
Navigate to the next menu item
9.2.3 Selecting the software
Fig. 117 Menu presetting software (example)
 Enter the number of the circuit diagram, see documentation of the machine /
system.
After the number of the circuit diagram was entered, all associated settings are au-
tomatically adopted.
 Press the accept key to confirm the entries, to save them and to
proceed to the next menu page.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Operation
Select further options
Fig. 118
Fig. 119 Selection window software (example)
 Enter in menu:
- Machine type
- Machine no.
- Software no.
- Schematic no.
Save settings
 Press the icon to save the presettings.
Presetting has been finalised.

Operation 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
Menu end presettings
 Press the icon to exit the Presetting menu.
NOTE: The Presetting menu can be opened at any time via the 1.0 Startup
menu.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Trouble shooting
10 Trouble shooting
10.1.1 Status and fault indication ..................................................................... 160

Trouble shooting 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
10.1.1 Status and fault indication

NOTE: The control cabinet may only be opened by appropriately qualified person-
nel.
The processor is located on the mounting plate in the control cabinet.
Fig. 120
The operating mode indicator (1) indicates the different operating modes by way of
colour-coded LEDs. The states of the digital inputs integrated in the processor unit
are indicated via LEDs (2). The same apples for the digital outputs(3).
Fault and status are indicated by the following LEDs:
Fault and status indication of the LEDs
Display Meaning
RUN / STOP (green • Yellow continuous light indicates the operating state
/ yellow) STOP.
• Green continuous light indicates the operating state
RUN.
• Flashing (green and yellow alternately) indicates that
the CPU is in the operating mode STARTUP.
ERROR (red) • Flashing indicates a fault, e.g. an internal fault in the
CPU, a fault in the memory card or a configuration fault
(incompatible modules).
• A red continuous light indicates defective hardware.
• All LEDs flash when a fault is identified in the firmware.
MAINT (green) • Flashing, when starting the CPU, when the memory
card is inserted, during the LED test, in the case of de-
fective CPU firmware or unknown/incompatible version
of the CPU configuration.
• A green continuous light indicates that servicing is re-
quired.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Trouble shooting
Fault and status indication of the LEDs
Display Meaning
RUN (green)
Operating state RUN of the control unit CPU.
• This LED lights up when the control unit is processing
the user program.
• This LED flashes (2 Hz) during the control start-up (the
STOP LED then also lights up; when the STOP LED
goes out the outputs are released).
STOP (yellow)
Operating state STOP of the control unit CPU.
The LED:
• lights up when the control unit is not processing the user
program.
• flashes slowly when the control unit requests a master
reset.
• flashes fast when the control unit executes a master
reset.

Trouble shooting 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance ............................................... 164

11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen ...................................................................... 164
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices ...................................... 164
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen ............................................................................... 165

Maintenance 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance

The HMI device is designed for low maintenance operation. However, the touch
screen and keyboard membrane should be cleaned regularly.
Pay attention to the following points during maintenance and cleaning:
• Unintentional response
If the touch screen or an HMI device with keyboard membrane is cleaned while ac-
tivated, operating errors may be triggered.
 Switch off the HMI device or clean the touch screen during operation only in
locked condition.
 Note that the locked state of the touch screen is automatically terminated after
15 seconds.
• Damage caused by non-approved cleaning agents
The use of compressed air, steam cleaners or aggressive solvents or scouring
agents may damage the HMI device.
 Do not clean the HMI device using compressed air or steam cleaners.
 Do not use aggressive solvents or scouring agents.
11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices

The touchscreen of the HMI device can be cleaned when switched on and with a
project running. For this purpose, a control object must be available in the project
which can be used to call up the Cleaning screen. Once the Cleaning screen has
been activated, the touchscreen is locked for operation for the projected time span.
The time span for lockout can be between 5 and 30 seconds. The time remaining
until the end of lockout is indicated by a progress bar.
Note the information below when cleaning the touchscreen.

Unintended reactions
When the touchscreen is being cleaned, touching keys may trigger an unintended
reaction in the control unit.
 If the device is running, only clean the touchscreen with the Cleaning screen ac-
tivated or switch off the HMI device.
No operation with the Cleaning screen active

If the Cleaning screen is active, the HMI device cannot be operated.
 To call up the Cleaning screen, see the chapter entitled "Descrip-
tion/Help/Screen settings/Clean screen".
 Wait for the Cleaning screen time span.
After this, the system can then be operated with the HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Maintenance
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen

A damp cleaning cloth and commercial detergent or foaming screen cleaner can be
used for cleaning.
 Switch off the HMI device or lock the touchscreen with the Cleaning screen.
 Spray detergent onto the cleaning cloth.
 Do not spray directly onto the HMI device.
 Clean the HMI device.
 When cleaning, wipe from the edge of the screen inwards.

Maintenance 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Repair
12 Repair
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ...................................... 168

12.1.2 Hazards from electricity ......................................................................... 168
12.2 Repair .................................................................................................... 168

Repair 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work

Safety and availability of the system are dependent on proper carrying-out of re-
pairs.
Repairs may only be carried out by persons qualified to perform these activities,
e.g., technicians from GEA Westfalia Separator and personnel trained and author-
ized (certified) by GEA Westfalia Separator.
12.1.2 Hazards from electricity

The following must be observed for handling of electricity when performing repairs:
• Observe the values for the power supply specified on the system.
• Perform only repair work that is described in the manual.
• Do not touch electrical components with wet hands!
• Before working on electrical components, switch off the power supply and se-
cure it to prevent switch-on.
• Defective cables must be replaced by qualified personnel as soon as possible.
12.2 Repair
For repairs, the HMI device must be returned to GEA Westfalia Separator or to an
authorised representative.
The operator is not authorised to carry out any repairs.
Assign only a qualified specialist, such as an electrician, with disconnecting and
removing the HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Decommissioning
13 Decommissioning
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal ...................................................... 170

Decommissioning 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal
Do not dispose of HMI devices as normal household waste, as dam-

age to humans and the environment is possible.
Dispose of or recycle electronic components and plastics in accordance with the

applicable rules at the location of operation.
The described HMI devices can be recycled due to their low pollutant design.
Assign a certified disposal organisation with the environment-friendly recycling and
disposal of waste equipment.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Spare parts
14 Spare parts
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 172

14.2 Use only genuine spare parts. ............................................................... 172

Spare parts 8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts

Rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order con-
tains the following details:
• Type: see the nameplate on the rear of the HMI device
• Order number with the main item of the associated machine/system
The information must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.


marking shown.
Fig. 121

ating safety and optimum availability of the centrifuge.

8555-9001-050 / 24.08.17 Spare parts

We live our values.
GEA Germany
VLT®AutomationDrive FC 300 Operating
Instructions Contents
Contents
1 How to Read these Operating Instructions 3

Approvals 4
Symbols 4
Abbreviations 5
2 Safety Instructions and General Warning 7

High Voltage 7
Avoid Unintended Start 8
Safe Stop of FC 300 8
Safe Stop Installation - FC 302 only (and FC 301 in frame size A1) 10
IT Mains 10
3 How to Install 11
Mechanical Installation 14
Electrical Installation 16
Connection to Mains and Earthing 17
Motor Connection 20
Fuses 23
Electrical Installation, Control Terminals 27
Connection Examples 28
Electrical Installation, Control Cables 29
Switches S201, S202, and S801 32
Additional Connections 35
Mechanical Brake Control 35
Motor Thermal Protection 35
How to Connect a PC to the frequency converter 36
The FC 300 PC Software 36
4 How to Programme 37
The Graphical and Numerical LCP 37
How to Programme on the Graphical LCP 37
How to Programme on the Numerical Local Control Panel 38
Quick Setup 40
Basic setup parameters 44
Parameter Lists 63
5 General Specifications 91
6 Troubleshooting 97
Warnings/Alarm Messages 97
Index 104
MG.33.AC.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

1 How to Read these Operating Instructions Instructions
2 MG.33.AC.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Instructions 1 How to Read these Operating Instructions
1 How to Read these Operating Instructions

1
VLT AutomationDrive
Operating Instructions
Software version: 5.0x
These Operating Instructions can be used for all VLT AutomationDrive frequency converters with software version 5.0x.
The software version number can be seen from par. 15-43 Software Version.
1.1.1 How to Read these Operating Instructions
VLT AutomationDrive is designed to provide high shaft performance on electrical motors. Please read this manual carefully for proper use. Incorrect
handling of the frequency converter may cause improper operation of the frequency converter or related equipment, shorten lifetime or cause other
troubles.
These Operating Instructions will help you get started, install, program, and troubleshoot your VLT AutomationDrive.
The VLT AutomationDrive comes in twoshaft performance levels. FC 301 ranges from scalar (U/f) to VVC+ and handles asynchronous motors only. FC
302 is a high performance frequency converter for asynchronous as well as permanent motors and handles various kinds of motor control principles such
as scalar (U/f), VVC+ and Flux vector motor control.
These Operating Instructions cover both FC 301 and FC 302. Where information covers both series, we refer to FC 300. Otherwise, we refer specifically
to either FC 301 or FC 302.
Chapter 1, How to Read these Operating Instructions, introduces the manual and informs you about the approvals, symbols, and abbreviations
used in this literature.
Chapter 2, Safety Instructions and General Warnings, entails instructions on how to handle the FC 300 correctly.
Chapter 3, How to Install, guides you through mechanical and technical installation.
Chapter 4, How to Programme, shows you how to operate and programme the FC 300 via the LCP.
Chapter 5, General Specifications, contains technical data about FC 300.
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting, assists you in solving problems that may occur when using FC 300.
Available Literature for FC 300

- The VLT AutomationDrive Operating Instructions provide the neccessary information for getting the drive up and running.
- The VLT AutomationDrive Design Guide entails all technical information about the drive design and applications including encoder, resolver and
relay options.
- The VLT AutomationDrive Profibus Operating Instructions provide the information required for controlling, monitoring and programming the
drive via a Profibus fieldbus.
- The VLT AutomationDrive DeviceNet Operating Instructions provide the information required for controlling, monitoring and programming the
drive via a DeviceNet fieldbus.
- The VLT AutomationDrive MCT 10 Operating Instructions provide information for installation and use of the software on a PC.
- The VLT AutomationDrive IP21 / Type 1 Instruction provides information for installing the IP21 / Type 1 option.
- The VLT AutomationDrive 24 V DC Backup Instruction provides information for installing the 24 V DC Backup option.
Danfoss technical literature is also available online at www.danfoss.com/drives.

1 How to Read these Operating Instructions Instructions
1.1.2 Approvals
1.1.3 Symbols
Symbols used in this Operating Instructions.
NB!
Indicates something to be noted by the reader.
Indicates a general warning.
Indicates a high-voltage warning.
∗ Indicates default setting

Instructions 1 How to Read these Operating Instructions
1.1.4 Abbreviations
Alternating current
American wire gauge
AC
AWG
1
Ampere/AMP A
Automatic Motor Adaptation AMA
Current limit ILIM
Degrees Celsius °C
Direct current DC
Drive Dependent D-TYPE
Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC
Electronic Thermal Relay ETR
Drive FC
Gram g
Hertz Hz
Kilohertz kHz
Local Control Panel LCP
Meter m
Millihenry Inductance mH
Milliampere mA
Millisecond ms
Minute min
Motion Control Tool MCT
Nanofarad nF
Newton Meters Nm
Nominal motor current IM,N
Nominal motor frequency fM,N
Nominal motor power PM,N
Nominal motor voltage UM,N
Parameter par.
Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV
Printed Circuit Board PCB
Rated Inverter Output Current IINV
Revolutions Per Minute RPM
Regenerative terminals Regen
Second s
Synchronous Motor Speed ns
Torque limit TLIM
Volts V
1.1.5 Disposal Instruction
Equipment containing electrical components may not be disposed of together with domestic waste.
It must be separately collected with electrical and electronic waste according to local and currently valid leg-
islation.

2 Safety Instructions and General Warning Instructions

Instructions 2 Safety Instructions and General Warning
2 Safety Instructions and General Warning
The DC link capacitors remain charged after power has been disconnected. To avoid electrical shock hazard, disconnect the frequency
converter from mains before carrying out maintenance. When using a PM-motor, make sure it is disconnected. Before doing service
on the frequency converter wait at least the amount of time indicated below:
2
Voltage Power Waiting Time

200 - 240 V 0.25 - 3.7 kW 4 minutes
5.5 - 37 kW 15 minutes
380 - 500 V 0.37 - 7.5 kW 4 minutes
11 - 75 kW 15 minutes
525 - 600 V 0.75 - 7.5 kW 4 minutes
2.1.1 High Voltage
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous whenever the frequency converter is connected to mains. Incorrect installation
or operation of the motor or frequency converter may cause damage to the equipment, serious personal injury or death. The instructions
in this manual must consequently be observed, as well as applicable local and national rules and safety regulations.
Installation in high altitudes

380 - 500 V: At altitudes above 3 km, please contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
525 - 690 V: At altitudes above 2 km, please contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
2.1.2 Safety Precautions
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of the motor, frequency
converter or fieldbus may cause damage to the equipment, serious personal injury or death. Consequently, the instructions in this
manual, as well as national and local rules and safety regulations, must be complied with.
Safety Regulations
1. The mains supply to the frequency converter must be disconnected whenever repair work is to be carried out. Check that the mains supply has
been disconnected and that the necessary time has elapsed before removing motor and mains supply plugs.
2. The [OFF] button on the control panel of the frequency converter does not disconnect the mains supply and consequently it must not be used
as a safety switch.
3. The equipment must be properly earthed, the user must be protected against supply voltage and the motor must be protected against overload
in accordance with applicable national and local regulations.
4. The earth leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA.
5. Protection against motor overload is not included in the factory setting. If this function is desired, set par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to
data value ETR trip 1 [4] or data value ETR warning 1 [3].
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and mains supply while the frequency converter is connected to mains. Check that the mains supply has
been disconnected and that the necessary time has elapsed before removing motor and mains plugs.
7. Please note that the frequency converter has more voltage sources than L1, L2 and L3, when load sharing (linking of DC intermediate circuit)
or external 24 V DC are installed. Check that all voltage sources have been disconnected and that the necessary time has elapsed before
commencing repair work.

2.1.3 General Warning
Warning:
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the equipment has been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as load-sharing (linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as
2 the motor connection for kinetic back-up.

Using VLT AutomationDrive: wait at least 15 minutes.
Shorter time is allowed only if indicated on the nameplate for the specific unit.
Leakage Current
The earth leakage current from the frequency converter exceeds 3.5 mA. To ensure that the earth cable has a good mechanical
connection to the earth connection (terminal 95), the cable cross section must be at least 10 mm2 or 2 times rated earth wires termi-
nated separately.
Residual Current Device
This product can cause a D.C. current in the protective conductor. Where a residual current device (RCD) is used for extra protection,
only an RCD of Type B (time delayed) shall be used on the supply side of this product. See also RCD Application Note MN.90.GX.02.
Protective earthing of the VLT AutomationDrive and the use of RCD's must always follow national and local regulations.
NB!
For vertical lifting or hoisting applications it is strongly recommended to ensure that the load can be stopped in case of an emergency
or a malfunction of a single part such as a contactor, etc.
If the frequency converter is in alarm mode or in an over voltage situation, the mechanical brake cuts in.
2.1.4 Before Commencing Repair Work
1. Disconnect the frequency converter from mains
2. Disconnect DC bus terminals 88 and 89 from load share applications
3. Wait for discharge of the DC-link. See period of time on the warning label
4. Remove motor cable
2.1.5 Avoid Unintended Start
While the frequency converter is connected to mains, the motor can be started/stopped using digital commands, bus commands, references or via the
Local Control Panel (LCP).
• Disconnect the frequency converter from mains whenever personal safety considerations make it necessary to avoid unintended start.
• To avoid unintended start, always activate the [OFF] key before changing parameters.
• An electronic fault, temporary overload, a fault in the mains supply, or lost motor connection may cause a stopped motor to start. Frequency
converter with Safe Stop (i.e. FC 301 in A1 enclosure and FC 302) provides protection against unintended start, if the Safe Stop Terminal 37 is
on low voltage level or disconnected.
2.1.6 Safe Stop of FC 300
The FC 302, and also the FC 301 in A1 enclosure, can perform the safety function Safe Torque Off (As defined by IEC 61800-5-2) or Stop Category 0 (as
defined in EN 60204-1).
FC 301 A1 enclosure: When Safe Stop is included in the drive, position 18 of Type Code must be either T or U. If position 18 is B or X, Safe Stop Terminal
37 is not included!
Example:
Type Code for FC 301 A1 with Safe Stop: FC-301PK75T4Z20H4TGCXXXSXXXXA0BXCXXXXD0

Instructions 2 Safety Instructions and General Warning
It is designed and approved suitable for the requirements of Safety Category 3 in EN 954-1. This functionality is called Safe Stop. Prior to integration and
use of Safe Stop in an installation, a thorough risk analysis on the installation must be carried out in order to determine whether the Safe Stop functionality
and safety category are appropriate and sufficient. In order to install and use the Safe Stop function in accordance with the requirements of Safety
Category 3 in EN 954-1, the related information and instructions of the VLT AutomationDrive Design Guide MG.33.BX.YY must be followed! The information
and instructions of the Operating Instructions are not sufficient for a correct and safe use of the Safe Stop functionality!

2.1.7 Safe Stop Installation - FC 302 only (and FC 301 in frame size A1)
To carry out an installation of a Category 0 Stop (EN60204) in

conformance with Safety Category 3 (EN954-1), follow these
instructions:
2 1. The bridge (jumper) between Terminal 37 and 24 V DC must be

removed. Cutting or breaking the jumper is not sufficient. Re-
move it entirely to avoid short-circuiting. See jumper on illus-
tration.
2. Connect terminal 37 to 24 V DC by a short-circuit protected ca-

ble. The 24 V DC voltage supply must be interruptible by an
EN954-1 Category 3 circuit interrupt device. If the interrupt de-
vice and the frequency converter are placed in the same instal-
lation panel, you can use a regular cable instead of a protected
one.
3. The Safe Stop function only fulfills EN 954-1 Category 3 if it is Illustration 2.1: Bridge jumper between terminal 37 and 24 VDC
protected by an enclosure with protection class IP 54 or higher.
Therefore, FC 302s, with a protection class lower than IP54,
must be mounted inside a housing (cabinet) that provides IP54
protection. FC 302s with protection class IP54 or higher need no
further protection. FC 302 A1 is only delivered with an IP21 en-
closure and must therefore always be mounted in a cabinet.
The illustration below shows a Stopping Category 0 (EN 60204-1) with safety Category 3 (EN 954-1). The circuit interrupt is caused by an opening door
contact. The illustration also shows how to connect a non-safety related hardware coast.
Illustration 2.2: Illustration of the essential aspects of an installation to achieve a Stopping Category 0 (EN 60204-1) with safety Category 3 (EN 954-1).
2.1.8 IT Mains
par. 14-50 RFI Filter can be used to disconnect the internal RFI capacitors from the RFI filter to ground in the 380 - 500 V frequency converters. If this
is done it will reduce the RFI performance to A2 level. For the 525 - 690 V frequency converters, par. 14-50 RFI Filter has no function. The RFI switch
cannot be opened.

Instructions 3 How to Install
3 How to Install
3.1.1 About How to Install
This chapter covers mechanical and electrical installations to and from power terminals and control card terminals.
Electrical installation of options is described in the relevant Operating Instructions and Design Guide.
3
Read the safety instructions before installing the unit.
Illustration 3.1: Diagram showing basic installation including mains,

motor, start/stop key, and potentiometer for speed adjustment.
3.1.2 Checklist
When unpacking the frequency converter, ensure that the unit is undamaged and complete. Use the following table to identify the packaging:
Frame size: A1 A2 A3 A5 B1/B3 B2/B4 C1/C3 C2/C4

IP: 20 20/21 20/21 55/66 20/21/5/66 20/21/55/66 20/21/55/66 20/21/55/66
For power ratings, please see Mechanical Dimensions table on the next page
Table 3.1: Unpacking table
Please note that a selection of screwdrivers (phillips or cross-thread screwdriver and torx), a side-cutter, drill and knife is also recommended to have
handy for unpacking and mounting the frequency converter. The packaging for these enclosures contains, as shown: Accessories bag(s), documentation
and the unit. Depending on options fitted there may be one or two bags and one or more booklets.

3
A1 A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
12
3 How to Install
IP20 IP20/21 IP20/21 IP55/66 IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20 IP20 IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20 IP20
Accessory bags containing necessary brackets, screws and connectors are included with the drives upon delivery. Top and bottom mounting holes (B4, C3 and C4 only)
MG.33.AC.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

All measurements in mm.
* A5 in IP55/66 only
Instructions
Frame Size A1 A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Rated Power 200-240 V 0.25–1.5 0.25-3 3.7 0.25-3.7 5.5-7.5 11 5.5-7.5 11-15 15-22 30-37 18.5-22 30-37
[kW] 380-480/500 V 0.37-1.5 0.37-4.0 5.5-7.5 0.37-7.5 11-15 18.5-22 11-15 18.5-30 30-45 55-75 37-45 55-75
525-600 V 0.75-4.0 5.5-7.5 0.75-7.5 11-15 18.5-22 11-15 18.5-30 30-45 55-90 37-45 55-90
Instructions
IP 20 20 21 20 21 55/66 21/ 55/66 21/55/66 20 20 55/66 55/66 20 20

NEMA Chassis Chassis Type 1 Chassis Type 1 Type 12 Type 1/Type Type 1/Type Chassis Chassis Type 1/Type Type 1/Type Chassis Chassis
12 12 12 12
Height
Height of back plate A 200 mm 268 mm 375 mm 268 mm 375 mm 420 mm 480 mm 650 mm 399 mm 520 mm 680 mm 770 mm 550 mm 660 mm
Height with de-coupling plate A 316 mm 374 mm 374 mm - - - - 420 mm 595 mm 630 mm 800 mm
Distance between mounting
a 190 mm 257 mm 350 mm 257 mm 350 mm 402 mm 454 mm 624 mm 380 mm 495 mm 648 mm 739 mm 521 mm 631 mm
holes
Width
Width of back plate B 75 mm 90 mm 90 mm 130 mm 130 mm 242 mm 242 mm 242 mm 165 mm 230 mm 308 mm 370 mm 308 mm 370 mm
Width of back plate with one C
B 130 mm 130 mm 170 mm 170 mm 242 mm 242 mm 242 mm 205 mm 230 mm 308 mm 370 mm 308 mm 370 mm
option
Width of back plate with two C
B 150 mm 150 mm 190 mm 190 mm 242 mm 242 mm 242 mm 225 mm 230 mm 308 mm 370 mm 308 mm 370 mm
options
Distance between mounting
b 60 mm 70 mm 70 mm 110 mm 110 mm 215 mm 210 mm 210 mm 140 mm 200 mm 272 mm 334 mm 270 mm 330 mm
holes
Depth
Depth without option A/B C 207 mm 205 mm 207 mm 205 mm 207 mm 195 mm 260 mm 260 mm 249 mm 242 mm 310 mm 335 mm 333 mm 333 mm
With option A/B C 222 mm 220 mm 222 mm 220 mm 222 mm 195 mm 260 mm 260 mm 262 mm 242 mm 310 mm 335 mm 333 mm 333 mm
Screw holes
c 6.0 mm 8.0 mm 8.0 mm 8.0 mm 8.0 mm 8.25 mm 12 mm 12 mm 8 mm 12.5 mm 12.5 mm
d ø8 mm ø11 mm ø11 mm ø11 mm ø11 mm ø12 mm ø19 mm ø19 mm 12 mm ø19 mm ø19 mm
e ø5 mm ø5.5 mm ø5.5 mm ø5.5 mm ø5.5 mm ø6.5 mm ø9 mm ø9 mm 6.8 mm 8.5 mm ø9 mm ø9 mm 8.5 mm 8.5 mm
f 5 mm 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm 7.9 mm 15 mm 9.8 mm 9.8 mm 17 mm 17 mm
Max weight 2.7 kg 4.9 kg 5.3 kg 6.6 kg 7.0 kg 13.5/14.2 kg 23 kg 27 kg 12 kg 23.5 kg 45 kg 65 kg 35 kg 50 kg

3 How to Install
13
3
3 How to Install Instructions
3.2 Mechanical Installation

3.2.1 Mechanical mounting
All IP20 Frame Sizes as well as IP21/ IP55 Frame Sizes except A1*, A2 and A3 allow side-by-side installationOpen Chassis, Nema 12, and Nema 4 drives
can be mounted side-by-side..
3 If the IP 21 Enclosure kit is used on frame size A1, A2 or A3, there must be a clearance between the drives of min. 50 mm.
For optimal cooling conditions allow a free air passage above and below the frequency converter. See table below.
Air passage for different frame sizes
Frame
A1* A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
size:
a
100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 225 200 225
(mm):
b
100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 225 200 225
(mm):
Table 3.2: * FC 301 only!
1. Drill holes in accordance with the measurements given.
2. You must provide screws suitable for the surface on which you want to mount the frequency converter. Retighten all four screws.
Table 3.3: Mounting frame sizes A5, B1, B2, B3, B4, C1, C2, C3 and C4 on a non-solid back wall, the drive must be provided with a back plate A due
to insufficient cooling air over the heat sink.

3.2.2 Panel Through Mounting
A Panel Through Mount Kit is available for frequency converter series , VLT Aqua Drive and VLT AutomationDrive.
In order to increase heatsink cooling and reduce panel depth, the frequency converter may be mounted in a through panel. Furthermore the in-built fan
can then be removed.
The kit is available for enclosures A5 through C2.
3
NB!
This kit cannot be used with cast front covers. No cover or IP21 plastic cover must be used instead.
Information on ordering numbers is found in the Design Guide, section Ordering Numbers.
More detailed information is available in the Panel Through Mount Kit instruction, MI.33.H1.YY, where yy=language code.

3.3 Electrical Installation

NB!
Cables General
All cabling must comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections and ambient temperature. Copper (60/75°C) con-
ductors are recommended.
3 Aluminium Conductors
Terminals can accept aluminium conductors but the conductor surface has to be clean and the oxidation must be removed and sealed by neutral acid-
free Vaseline grease before the conductor is connected.
Furthermore the terminal screw must be retightened after two days due to softness of the aluminium. It is crucial to keep the connection a gas tight
joint, otherwise the aluminium surface will oxidize again.
Tightening-up Torque
Frame size 200 - 240 V 380 - 500 V 525 - 690 V Cable for: Tightening up torque
A1 0.25-1.5 kW 0.37-1.5 kW - Mains, Brake resistor, load sharing, Motor cables 0.5-0.6 Nm
A2 0.25-2.2 kW 0.37-4 kW 0.75-4 kW
A3 3-3.7 kW 5.5-7.5 kW 5.5-7.5 kW
A5 3-3.7 kW 5.5-7.5 kW 0.75-7.5 kW
B1 5.5-7.5 kW 11-15 kW - Mains, Brake resistor, load sharing, Motor cables 1.8 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
B2 11 kW 18.5-22 kW - Mains, Brake resistor, load sharing cables 4.5 Nm
Motor cables 4.5 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
B3 5.5-7.5 kW 11-15 kW - Mains, Brake resistor, load sharing, Motor cables 1.8 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
B4 11-15 kW 18.5-30 kW - Mains, Brake resistor, load sharing, Motor cables 4.5 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
C1 15-22 kW 30-45 kW - Mains, Brake resistor, load sharing cables 10 Nm
Motor cables 10 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
C2 30-37 kW 55-75 kW - Mains, motor cables 14 Nm (up to 95 mm2)

24 Nm (over 95 mm2)
Load Sharing, brake cables 14 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
C3 18.5-22 kW 30-37 kW - Mains, Brake resistor, load sharing, Motor cables 10 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
C4 37-45 kW 55-75 kW - Mains, motor cables 14 Nm (up to 95 mm2)
24 Nm (over 95 mm2)
Load Sharing, brake cables 14 Nm
Relay 0.5-0.6 Nm
Earth 2-3 Nm
3.3.1 Removal of Knockouts for Extra Cables
1. Remove cable entry from the frequency converter (Avoiding foreign parts falling into the frequency converter when removing knockouts)
2. Cable entry has to be supported around the knockout you intend to remove.
3. The knockout can now be removed with a strong mandrel and a hammer.
4. Remove burrs from the hole.
5. Mount Cable entry on frequency converter.

3.3.2 Connection to Mains and Earthing
NB!
The plug connector for power is plugable on frequency converters up to 7.5 kW.
1. Fit the two screws in the de-coupling plate, slide it into place and tighten the screws.
2. Make sure the frequency converter is properly earthed. Connect to earth connection (terminal 95). Use screw from the accessory bag. 3
3. Place plug connector 91(L1), 92(L2), 93(L3) from the accessory bag onto the terminals labelled MAINS at the bottom of the frequency converter.
4. Attach mains wires to the mains plug connector.
5. Support the cable with the supporting enclosed brackets.
NB!
Check that mains voltage corresponds to the mains voltage of the name plate.
IT Mains
Do not connect 400 V frequency converters with RFI-filters to mains supplies with a voltage between phase and earth of more than
440 V.
The earth connection cable cross section must be at least 10 mm2 or 2 x rated mains wires terminated separately according to EN
50178.
The mains connection is fitted to the mains switch if this is included.

Mains connection for Frame sizes A1, A2 and A3:

Mains connector frame size A5 (IP 55/66)
When disconnector is used (frame size A5) the PE must be mounted on the left side of the drive.
Illustration 3.2: Mains connection frame sizes B1 and B2 (IP 21/NEMA

Type 1 and IP 55/66/ NEMA Type 12).
Illustration 3.3: Mains connection frame size B3 (IP20).
Illustration 3.4: Mains connection frame size B4 (IP20).
Illustration 3.5: Mains connection frame size C1 and C2 (IP 21/ NEMA
Type 1 and IP 55/66/ NEMA Type 12).

Illustration 3.6: Mains connection frame size C3 (IP20). Illustration 3.7: Mains connection frame size C4 (IP20).
Usually the power cables for mains are unshielded cables.
3.3.3 Motor Connection
NB!
Motor cable must be screened/armoured. If an unscreened/unarmoured cable is used, some EMC requirements are not complied with.
Use a screened/armoured motor cable to comply with EMC emission specifications. For more information, see EMC Test Results.
See section General Specifications for correct dimensioning of motor cable cross-section and length.
Screening of cables: Avoid installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails). They spoil the screening effect at higher frequencies. If it is necessary to
break the screen to install a motor isolator or motor contactor, the screen must be continued at the lowest possible HF impedance.
Connect the motor cable screen to both the decoupling plate of the frequency converter and to the metal housing of the motor.
Make the screen connections with the largest possible surface area (cable clamp). This is done by using the supplied installation devices in the frequency
converter.
If it is necessary to split the screen to install a motor isolator or motor relay, the screen must be continued with the lowest possible HF impedance.
Cable-length and cross-section: The frequency converter has been tested with a given length of cable and a given cross-section of that cable. If the
cross-section is increased, the cable capacitance - and thus the leakage current - may increase, and the cable length must be reduced correspondingly.
Keep the motor cable as short as possible to reduce the noise level and leakage currents.
Switching frequency: When frequency converters are used together with Sine-wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the switching
frequency must be set according to the Sine-wave filter instruction in par. 14-01 Switching Frequency.
1. Fasten decoupling plate to the bottom of the frequency converter with screws and washers from the accessory bag.
2. Attach motor cable to terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W).
3. Connect to earth connection (terminal 99) on decoupling plate with screws from the accessory bag.
4. Insert plug connectors 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W) (up to 7.5 kW) and motor cable to terminals labelled MOTOR.
5. Fasten screened cable to decoupling plate with screws and washers from the accessory bag.
All types of three-phase asynchronous standard motors can be connected to the frequency converter. Normally, small motors are star-connected (230/400
V, Y). Large motors are normally delta-connected (400/690 V, Δ). Refer to the motor name plate for correct connection mode and voltage.

Illustration 3.9: Motor connection for frame size A5 (IP 55/66/NEMA

Type 12)
Illustration 3.8: Motor connection for A1, A2 and A3
Illustration 3.10: Motor connection for frame size B1 and B2 (IP 21/
NEMA Type 1, IP 55/ NEMA Type 12 and IP66/ NEMA Type 4X)
Illustration 3.11: Motor connection for frame size B3.
Illustration 3.12: Motor connection for frame size B4 .

Illustration 3.14: Motor connection for frame size C3 and C4.
Illustration 3.13: Motor connection frame size C1 and C2 (IP 21/ NEMA
Type 1 and IP 55/66/ NEMA Type 12)
Illustration 3.17: Cable entry holes for frame size C1. The suggested
Illustration 3.15: Cable entry holes for frame size B1. The suggested use of the holes are purely recommendations and other solutions are
use of the holes are purely recommendations and other solutions are possible.
possible.
Illustration 3.18: Cable entry holes for frame size C2. The suggested
Illustration 3.16: Cable entry holes for frame size B2. The suggested use of the holes are purely recommendations and other solutions are
use of the holes are purely recommendations and other solutions are possible.
possible.
Term. no. 96 97 98 99
U V W PE1) Motor voltage 0-100% of mains voltage.
3 wires out of motor
U1 V1 W1 Delta-connected
PE1)
W2 U2 V2 6 wires out of motor
U1 V1 W1 PE1) Star-connected U2, V2, W2
U2, V2 and W2 to be interconnected separately.
1)Protected Earth Connection

NB!
In motors without phase insulation paper or other in-
sulation reinforcement suitable for operation with volt-
age supply (such as a frequency converter), fit a Sine-
wave filter on the output of the frequency converter.
3
3.3.4 Fuses
Branch circuit protection:

In order to protect the installation against electrical and fire hazard, all branch circuits in an installation, switch gear, machines etc., must be short-circuited
and overcurrent protected according to national/international regulations.
Short-circuit protection:
The frequency converter must be protected against short-circuit to avoid electrical or fire hazard. Danfoss recommends using the fuses mentioned below
to protect service personnel and equipment in case of an internal failure in the drive. The frequency converter provides full short-circuit protection in case
of a short-circuit on the motor output.
Overcurrent protection:
Provide overload protection to avoid fire hazard due to overheating of the cables in the installation. The frequency converter is equipped with an internal
overcurrent protection that can be used for upstream overload protection (UL-applications excluded). See par. 4-18 Current Limit. Moreover, fuses or
circuit breakers can be used to provide the overcurrent protection in the installation. Overcurrent protection must always be carried out according to
national regulations.
Fuses must be designed for protection in a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100,000 Arms (symmetrical), 500 V maximum.
Non UL compliance
If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, we recommend using the following fuses, which will ensure compliance with EN50178:
In case of malfunction, not following the recommendation may result in unnecessary damage to the frequency converter.
FC Type Max. fuse size1) Voltage Type

K25-K75 10A 200-240 V type gG
1K1-2K2 20A 200-240 V type gG
3K0-3K7 32A 200-240 V type gG
5K5-7K5 63A 200-240 V type gG
11K 80A 200-240 V type gG
15K-18K5 125A 200-240 V type gG

22K 160A 200-240 V type aR
30K 200A 200-240 V type aR
37K 250A 200-240 V type aR
1) Max. fuses - refer to national/international regulations to select an appropriate fuse size.
FC Type Max. fuse size1) Voltage Type

K37-1K5 10A 380-500 V type gG
2K2-4K0 20A 380-500 V type gG
5K5-7K5 32A 380-500 V type gG
11K-18K 63A 380-500 V type gG
22K 80A 380-500 V type gG
30K 100A 380-500 V type gG
37K 125A 380-500 V type gG
45K 160A 380-500 V type aR
55K-75K 250A 380-500 V type aR

UL Compliance
200-240 V
FC Type Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann

kW Type RK1 Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
K25-K37 KTN-R05 JKS-05 JJN-06 FNQ-R-5 KTK-R-5 LP-CC-5
K55-1K1 KTN-R10 JKS-10 JJN-10 FNQ-R-10 KTK-R-10 LP-CC-10
1K5 KTN-R15 JKS-15 JJN-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
3 5K5
7K5
KTN-R50
KTN-R60
KS-50
JKS-60
JJN-50
JJN-60
-
-
-
-
-
-
11K KTN-R80 JKS-80 JJN-80 - - -
15K-18K5 KTN-R125 JKS-150 JJN-125 - - -
Ferraz- Ferraz-
FC Type SIBA Littel fuse
Shawmut Shawmut
kW Type RK1 Type RK1 Type CC Type RK1
K25-K37 5017906-005 KLN-R05 ATM-R05 A2K-05R
K55-1K1 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 A2K-10R
1K5 5017906-016 KLN-R15 ATM-R15 A2K-15R
2K2 5017906-020 KLN-R20 ATM-R20 A2K-20R
3K0 5017906-025 KLN-R25 ATM-R25 A2K-25R
3K7 5012406-032 KLN-R30 ATM-R30 A2K-30R
5K5 5014006-050 KLN-R50 - A2K-50R
7K5 5014006-063 KLN-R60 - A2K-60R
11K 5014006-080 KLN-R80 - A2K-80R
15K-18K5 2028220-125 KLN-R125 - A2K-125R
Ferraz-
FC Type Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse
Shawmut
kW Type JFHR2 Type RK1 JFHR2 JFHR2
22K FWX-150 2028220-150 L25S-150 A25X-150
30K FWX-200 2028220-200 L25S-200 A25X-200
37K FWX-250 2028220-250 L25S-250 A25X-250
KTS-fuses from Bussmann may substitute KTN for 240 V frequency converters.
FWH-fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for 240 V frequency converters.
KLSR fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute KLNR fuses for 240 V frequency converters.
L50S fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute L50S fuses for 240 V frequency converters.
A6KR fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A2KR for 240 V frequency converters.
A50X fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A25X for 240 V frequency converters.
380-500 V

K37-1K1 KTS-R6 JKS-6 JJS-6 FNQ-R-6 KTK-R-6 LP-CC-6
1K5-2K2 KTS-R10 JKS-10 JJS-10 FNQ-R-10 KTK-R-10 LP-CC-10
3K0 KTS-R15 JKS-15 JJS-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
11K KTS-R40 JKS-40 JJS-40 - - -
15K KTS-R50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
18K KTS-R60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
22K KTS-R80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
30K KTS-R100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
37K KTS-R125 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
45K KTS-R150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -

Ferraz- Ferraz-
Shawmut Shawmut
kW Type RK1 Type RK1 Type CC Type RK1
K37-1K1 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 A6K-6R
1K5-2K2 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 A6K-10R
3K0 5017906-016 KLS-R15 ATM-R15 A6K-15R
4K0 5017906-020 KLS-R20 ATM-R20 A6K-20R
5K5 5017906-025 KLS-R25 ATM-R25 A6K-25R
7K5 5012406-032 KLS-R30 ATM-R30 A6K-30R
11K 5014006-040 KLS-R40 - A6K-40R
15K 5014006-050 KLS-R50 - A6K-50R
18K
22K
30K
5014006-063
2028220-100
2028220-125
KLS-R60
KLS-R80
KLS-R100
-
-
-
A6K-60R
A6K-80R
A6K-100R
3
37K 2028220-125 KLS-R125 - A6K-125R
45K 2028220-160 KLS-R150 - A6K-150R
FC Type Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann

kW JFHR2 Type H Type T JFHR2
55K FWH-200 - - -
75K FWH-250 - - -
Ferraz- Ferraz-
Shawmut Shawmut
kW Type RK1 JFHR2 JFHR2 JFHR2
55K 2028220-200 L50S-225 - A50-P225
75K 2028220-250 L50S-250 A50-P250
Ferraz-Shawmut A50QS fuses may be substituted for A50P fuses.
170M fuses shown from Bussmann use the -/80 visual indicator. –TN/80 Type T, -/110 or TN/110 Type T indicator fuses of the same size and
amperage may be substituted.
550 - 600V

K75-1K5 KTS-R-5 JKS-5 JJS-6 FNQ-R-5 KTK-R-5 LP-CC-5
Ferraz-
Shawmut
kW Type RK1 Type RK1 Type RK1
K75-1K5 5017906-005 KLSR005 A6K-5R
2K2-4K0 5017906-010 KLSR010 A6K-10R
5K5-7K5 5017906-020 KLSR020 A6K-20R
Ferraz-
FC Type Bussmann SIBA
Shawmut
kW JFHR2 Type RK1 Type RK1
P37K 170M3013 2061032.125 6.6URD30D08A0125
P45K 170M3014 2061032.160 6.6URD30D08A0160
P55K 170M3015 2061032.200 6.6URD30D08A0200
P75K 170M3015 2061032.200 6.6URD30D08A0200
170M fuses shown from Bussmann use the -/80 visual indicator. –TN/80 Type T, -/110 or TN/110 Type T indicator fuses of the same size and
amperage may be substituted.
170M fuses from Bussmann when provided in the 525-600/690 V FC-302 P37K-P75K, FC-102 P75K, or FC-202 P45K-P90K drives are 170M3015.
170M fuses from Bussmann when provided in the 525-600/690V FC-302 P90K-P132, FC-102 P90K-P132, or FC-202 P110-P160 drives are
170M3018.
170M fuses from Bussmann when provided in the 525-600/690V FC302 P160-P315, FC-102 P160-P315, or FC-202 P200-P400 drives are
170M5011.

3.3.5 Access to Control Terminals
All terminals to the control cables are located underneath the terminal
cover on the front of the frequency converter. Remove the terminal cover
with a screwdriver.
130BT248
Illustration 3.19: Access to control terminals for A2, A3, B3, B4, C3 and
C4 enclosures
Remove front-cover to access control terminals. When replacing the

front-cover, please ensure proper fastening by applying a torque of 2 Nm.
Illustration 3.20: Access to control terminals for A5, B1, B2, C1 and C2
enclosures

3.3.6 Electrical Installation, Control Terminals
To mount the cable to the terminal:

1. Strip insulation of 9-10 mm
2. Insert a screwdriver1) in the square hole.
3. Insert the cable in the adjacent circular hole.
4. Remove the screw driver. The cable is now mounted to the terminal.
To remove the cable from the terminal:

1. Insert a screwdriver1) in the square hole.
3
2. Pull out the cable.
1) Max. 0.4 x 2.5 mm
1.
2. 3.

3.4 Connection Examples

3.4.1 Start/Stop
Terminal 18 = par. 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start

Terminal 27 = par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No operation (De-
fault coast inverse)
3 Terminal 37 = Safe stop (where available!)
3.4.2 Pulse Start/Stop
Terminal 18 = par. 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital InputLatched start, [9]

Terminal 27= par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital InputStop inverse, [6]
Terminal 37 = Safe stop (where available!)

3.4.3 Speed Up/Down
Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down:.

Terminal 18 = par. 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input Start [9] (de-
fault)
Terminal 27 = par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input Freeze refer-

ence [19]
3
Terminal 29 = par. 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input Speed up [21]
Terminal 32 = par. 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input Speed down

[22]
Note: Terminal 29 only in FC x02 (x=series type).
3.4.4 Potentiometer Reference
Voltage reference via a potentiometer:

Reference Source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default)
Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 Volt
Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 Volt
Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM
Switch S201 = OFF (U)

3.5.1 Electrical Installation, Control Cables
Illustration 3.21: Diagram showing all electrical terminals without options.

A = analog, D = digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Stop. For instructions on Safe Stop installation please refer to the section Safe Stop Installation of the Design Guide.
* Terminal 37 is not included in FC 301 (Except FC 301 A1, which includes Safe Stop).
Relay 2 and Terminal 29, have no function in FC 301.
Very long control cables and analogue signals may in rare cases and depending on installation result in 50/60 Hz earth loops due to noise from mains
supply cables.
If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor between screen and chassis.
The digital and analogue inputs and outputs must be connected separately to the common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) of the frequency converter to
avoid ground currents from both groups to affect other groups. For example, switching on the digital input may disturb the analog input signal.

Input polarity of control terminals
NB!
Control cables must be screened/armoured.
See section entitled Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control Cables for

130BA681.10
the correct termination of control cables.
130BA681.10

3.5.2 Switches S201, S202, and S801
Switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) are used to select a current (0-20 mA) or a voltage (-10 to 10 V) configuration of the analog input terminals 53 and
54 respectively.
Switch S801 (BUS TER.) can be used to enable termination on the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and 69).
See drawing Diagram showing all electrical terminals in section Electrical Installation.
3
Default setting:
S201 (A53) = OFF (voltage input)
S202 (A54) = OFF (voltage input)
S801 (Bus termination) = OFF
When changing the function of S201, S202 or S801 be careful not to use force for the switch over. It is recommended to remove the
LCP fixture (cradle) when operating the switches. The switches must not be operated with power on the frequency converter.

3.6.1 Final Set-Up and Test
To test the set-up and ensure that the frequency converter is running, follow these steps.
Step 1. Locate the motor name plate
NB!
The motor is either star- (Y) or delta- connected (Δ). This information is located on the motor name plate data.
Step 2. Enter the motor name plate data in this parameter list.
1. par. 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
To access this list first press the [QUICK MENU] key then select “Q2 Quick par. 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
Setup”. 2. par. 1-22 Motor Voltage
3. par. 1-23 Motor Frequency
4. par. 1-24 Motor Current
5. par. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
Step 3. Activate the Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Performing an AMA will ensure optimum performance. The AMA measures the values from the motor model equivalent diagram.
1. Connect terminal 37 to terminal 12 (if terminal 37 is available).
2. Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or set par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input to 'No function'.
3. Activate the AMA par. 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).
4. Choose between complete or reduced AMA. If a Sine-wave filter is mounted, run only the reduced AMA, or remove the Sine-wave filter during
the AMA procedure.
5. Press the [OK] key. The display shows “Press [Hand on] to start”.
6. Press the [Hand on] key. A progress bar indicates if the AMA is in progress.
Stop the AMA during operation

1. Press the [OFF] key - the frequency converter enters into alarm mode and the display shows that the AMA was terminated by the user.
Successful AMA
1. The display shows “Press [OK] to finish AMA”.
2. Press the [OK] key to exit the AMA state.

Unsuccessful AMA
1. The frequency converter enters into alarm mode. A description of the alarm can be found in the Warnings and Alarms chapter.
2. "Report Value” in the [Alarm Log] shows the last measuring sequence carried out by the AMA, before the frequency converter entered alarm
mode. This number along with the description of the alarm will assist you in troubleshooting. If you contact Danfoss for service, make sure to
mention number and alarm description.
NB!
Unsuccessful AMA is often caused by incorrectly registered motor name plate data or a too big difference between the motor power
3 size and the frequency converter power size.
Step 4. Set speed limit and ramp times
par. 3-02 Minimum Reference

par. 3-03 Maximum Reference
Table 3.4: Set up the desired limits for speed and ramp time.
par. 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par. 4-12 Motor Speed
Low Limit [Hz]
par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or par. 4-14 Motor Speed
High Limit [Hz]
par. 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time

par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

3.7 Additional Connections

3.7.1 Mechanical Brake Control
In hoisting/lowering applications, it is necessary to be able to control an electro-mechanical brake:

• Control the brake using any relay output or digital output (terminal 27 or 29).
3
• Keep the output closed (voltage-free) as long as the frequency converter is unable to ‘support’ the motor, for example due to the load being
too heavy.
• Select Mechanical brake control [32] in par. 5-4* for applications with an electro-mechanical brake.
• The brake is released when the motor current exceeds the preset value in par. 2-20 Release Brake Current.
• The brake is engaged when the output frequency is less than the frequency set in par. 2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]or par. 2-22 Activate
Brake Speed [Hz], and only if the frequency converter carries out a stop command.
If the frequency converter is in alarm mode or in an over-voltage situation, the mechanical brake immediately cuts in.
3.7.2 Parallel Connection of Motors
The frequency converter can control several parallel-connected motors.

The total current consumption of the motors must not exceed the rated
output current IM,N for the frequency converter.
NB!
Installations with cables connected in a common joint
as in the illustration below, is only recommended for
short cable lengths.
NB!
When motors are connected in parallel, par. 1-29 Au-
tomatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) cannot be used.
NB!
The electronic thermal relay (ETR) of the frequency
converter cannot be used as motor protection for the
individual motor in systems with parallel-connected
motors. Provide further motor protection by e.g. ther-
mistors in each motor or individual thermal relays (cir-
cuit breakers are not suitable as protection).
Problems may arise at start and at low RPM values if motor sizes are widely different because small motors' relatively high ohmic resistance in the stator
calls for a higher voltage at start and at low RPM values.
3.7.3 Motor Thermal Protection
The electronic thermal relay in the frequency converter has received UL-approval for single motor protection, when par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protec-
tionis set for ETR Trip and par. 1-24 Motor Current is set to the rated motor current (see motor name plate).
For thermal motor protection it is also possible to use the MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card option. This card provides ATEX certificate to protect motors in
explosion hazardous areas, Zone 1/21 and Zone 2/22. Please refer to the Design Guide for further information.

3.7.4 How to Connect a PC to the frequency converter
To control the frequency converter from a PC, install the MCT 10 Set-up
Software.
The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB cable, or via the
RS485 interface as shown in the section Bus Connection in the Program-
ming Guide.
3
NB!
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage termi-
nals. The USB connection is connected to protection
earth on the frequency converter. Use only isolated
laptop as PC connection to the USB connector on the
frequency converter.
Illustration 3.22: USB connection.
3.7.5 The FC 300 PC Software
Data storage in PC via MCT 10 Set-Up Software: Data transfer from PC to drive via MCT 10 Set-Up Software:
1. Connect a PC to the unit via USB com port 1. Connect a PC to the unit via USB com port
2. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software 2. Open MCT 10 Set-up software
3. Select in the “network” section the USB port 3. Choose “Open”– stored files will be shown
4. Choose “Copy” 4. Open the appropriate file
5. Select the “project” section 5. Choose “Write to drive”
6. Choose “Paste” All parameters are now transferred to the drive.
7. Choose “Save as”

A separate manual for MCT 10 Set-up Software is available.
All parameters are now stored.

Instructions 4 How to Programme
4 How to Programme
4.1 The Graphical and Numerical LCP

The easiest programming of the frequency converter is performed by the Graphical LCP ( 102). It is necessary to consult the frequency converter Design
Guide, when using the Numeric Local Control Panel (LCP 101).
4.1.1 How to Programme on the Graphical LCP
The following instructions are valid for the graphical LCP (LCP 102): 4
The control panel is divided into four functional groups:
1. Graphical display with Status lines.
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing parameters and

switching between display functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
All data is displayed in a graphical LCP display, which can show up to five
items of operating data while displaying [Status].
Display lines:
a. Status line: Status messages displaying icons and graphic.
b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data defined or chosen

by the user. By pressing the [Status] key, up to one extra line
can be added.
c. Status line: Status messages displaying text.

4 How to Programme Instructions
4.1.2 How to Programme on the Numerical Local Control Panel
The following instructions are valid for the numerical LCP (LCP 101):
The control panel is divided into four functional groups:

1. Numerical display.
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing parameters and

switching between display functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

4.1.3 Initial Commissioning
The easiest way of carrying out the initial commissioning is by using the Quick Menu button and follow the quick set-up procedure using LCP 102 (read
table from left to right). The example applies to open loop applications:
Press
Q2 Quick Menu
par. 0-01 Language Set language
par. 1-20 Motor Power [kW] Set Motor nameplate power

4
par. 1-22 Motor Voltage Set Nameplate voltage
par. 1-23 Motor Frequency Set Nameplate frequency
par. 1-24 Motor Current Set Nameplate current
par. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed Set Nameplate speed in RPM
If terminal default is Coast inverse it is possible to change this

par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input setting to No function. No connection to terminal 27 is then
needed for running AMA
par. 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation Set desired AMA function. Enable complete AMA is recommen-
(AMA) ded
par. 3-02 Minimum Reference Set the minimum speed of the motor shaft
par. 3-03 Maximum Reference Set the maximum speed of the motor shaft
Set the ramping up time with reference to synchronous motor

par. 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time
speed, ns
Set the ramping down time with reference to synchronous mo-

par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
tor speed, ns
par. 3-13 Reference Site Set the site from where the reference must work

4.2 Quick Setup

0-01 Language
Option: Function:
Defines the language to be used in the display.
The frequency converter can be delivered with 4 different language packages. English and German
are included in all packages. English cannot be erased or manipulated.
[0] * English Part of Language packages 1 - 4
4 [1] Deutsch Part of Language packages 1 - 4
[2] Francais Part of Language package 1
[3] Dansk Part of Language package 1
[4] Spanish Part of Language package 1
[5] Italiano Part of Language package 1
[6] Svenska
[7] Nederlands
[10] Chinese Language package 2
[20] Suomi
[22] English US Part of Language package 4
[27] Greek Part of Language package 4
[28] Bras.port
[36] Slovenian Part of Language package 3
[39] Korean Part of Language package 2
[40] Japanese Part of Language package 2
[41] Turkish Part of Language package 4
[42] Trad.Chinese
[43] Bulgarian Part of Language package 3
[44] Srpski
[45] Romanian Part of Language package 3
[46] Magyar
[47] Czech Part of Language package 3
[48] Polski
[49] Russian Part of Language package 3
[50] Thai Part of Language package 2
[51] Bahasa Indonesia
1-20 Motor Power [kW]

Range: Function:
4.00 kW* [0.09 - 3000.00 kW] Enter the nominal motor power in kW according to the motor nameplate data. The default value
corresponds to the nominal rated output of the unit.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running. This parameter is visible in LCP if
par. 0-03 Regional Settings is International [0].

NB!
Four sizes down, one size up from nominal VLT rating.
1-22 Motor Voltage

Range: Function:
400. V* [10. - 1000. V] Enter the nominal motor voltage according to the motor nameplate data. The default value corre-
sponds to the nominal rated output of the unit.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
4
1-23 Motor Frequency
Range: Function:
50. Hz* [20 - 1000 Hz] Min - Max motor frequency: 20 - 1000 Hz.
Select the motor frequency value from the motor nameplate data. If a value different from 50 Hz
or 60 Hz is selected, it is necessary to adapt the load independent settings in par. 1-50 Motor
Magnetisation at Zero Speed to par. 1-53 Model Shift Frequency. For 87 Hz operation with 230/400
V motors, set the nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM] and par. 3-03 Maximum Reference to the 87 Hz application.
1-24 Motor Current

Range: Function:
7.20 A* [0.10 - 10000.00 A] Enter the nominal motor current value from the motor nameplate data. This data is used for cal-
culating motor torque, motor thermal protection etc.
NB!
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

Range: Function:
1420. RPM* [100 - 60000 RPM] Enter the nominal motor speed value from the motor nameplate data. This data is used for calcu-
lating automatic motor compensations.
NB!
This parameter cannot be changed while the motor is running.
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input

Option: Function:
Select the function from the available digital input range.
No operation [0]
Reset [1]
Coast inverse [2]
Coast and reset inverse [3]
Quick stop inverse [4]
DC-brake inverse [5]
Stop inverse [6]
Start [8]
Latched start [9]
Reversing [10]
Start reversing [11]
Enable start forward [12]
Enable start reverse [13]

Jog [14]
Preset ref bit 0 [16]
Freeze reference [19]
Freeze output [20]
Speed up [21]
Speed down [22]
Set-up select bit 0 [23]
Set-up select bit 1 [24]
Catch up [28]
Slow down [29]
Pulse input [32]
Ramp bit 0 [34]
Ramp bit 1 [35]
Mains failure inverse [36]
4 DigiPot Increase
DigiPot Decrease
DigiPot Clear
[55]
[56]
[57]
Reset Counter A [62]
Reset Counter B [65]
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Option: Function:
The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor performance by automatically optimizing the advanced
motor parameters (par. 1-30 to par. 1-35) at motor standstill.
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand on] after selecting [1] or [2]. See also the section
Automatic Motor Adaptation. After a normal sequence, the display will read: "Press [OK] to finish
AMA". After pressing the [OK] key the frequency converter is ready for operation.
[0] * OFF
[1] Enable complete AMA Performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage reactance X1,
the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main reactance Xh.
FC 301: The complete AMA does not include Xh measurement for FC 301. Instead, the Xh value is
determined from the motor database. Par. 1-35 may be adjusted to obtain optimal start perform-
ance.
[2] Enable reduced AMA Performs a reduced AMA of the stator resistance Rs in the system only. Select this option if an LC
filter is used between the drive and the motor.
Note:
• For the best adaptation of the frequency converter, run AMA on a cold motor.
• AMA cannot be performed while the motor is running.
• AMA cannot be performed on permanent magnet motors.
NB!
It is important to set motor par. 1-2* correctly, since these form part of the AMA algorithm. An AMA must be performed to achieve
optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to 10 min, depending on the power rating of the motor.
NB!
Avoid generating external torque during AMA.
NB!
If one of the settings in par. 1-2* is changed, par. 1-30 to par. 1-39, the advanced motor parameters, will return to default setting.

3-02 Minimum Reference

Range: Function:
0 Referen- [-999999.999 - par. 3-03 Referen- Enter the Minimum Reference. The Minimum Reference is the lowest value obtainable by summing
ceFeedback-ceFeedbackUnit] all references.
Unit* Minimum Reference is active only when par. 3-00 Reference Range is set to Min.- Max. [0].
The Minimum Reference unit matches:
• The choice of configuration in par. 1-00 Configuration Mode Configuration Mode: for Speed
closed loop [1], RPM; for Torque [2], Nm.
• The unit selected in par. 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit.
3-03 Maximum Reference

Range: Function:
4
1500.000 [par. 3-02 - 999999.999 Referen- Enter the Maximum Reference. The Maximum Reference is the highest value obtainable by summing
Reference- ceFeedbackUnit] all references.
FeedbackU- The Maximum Reference unit matches:
nit* • The choice of configuration in par. 1-00 Configuration Mode: for Speed closed loop [1],
RPM; for Torque [2], Nm.
• The unit selected in par. 3-0.
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time

Range: Function:
3.00 s* [0.01 - 3600.00 s] Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration time from 0 RPM to the synchronous motor speed
nS. Choose a ramp-up time such that the output current does not exceed the current limit in par.
4-18 Current Limit during ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 sec. in speed mode. See
ramp-down time in par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.
tacc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 41 =
ref RPM
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

Range: Function:
3.00 s* [0.01 - 3600.00 s] Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the deceleration time from the synchronous motor speed ns to 0
RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that no over-voltage arises in the inverter due to regenerative
operation of the motor, and such that the generated current does not exceed the current limit set
in par. 4-18 Current Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-up time
in par. 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 42 =
ref RPM

4.3 Basic setup parameters

0-02 Motor Speed Unit
Option: Function:
The display showing depends on settings in par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and par. 0-03 Regional
Settings. The default setting of par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and par. 0-03 Regional Settings depends
on which region of the world the frequency converter is supplied to, but can be re-programmed as
required.
4 NB!
Changing the Motor Speed Unit will reset certain parameters to their initial value.
It is recommended to select the motor speed unit first, before modifying other
parameters.
[0] RPM Selects display of motor speed variables and parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of motor speed (RPM).
[1] * Hz Selects display of motor speed variables and parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of output frequency to the motor (Hz).
0-50 LCP Copy

Option: Function:
[0] * No copy
[1] All to LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the frequency converter memory to the LCP memory.
[2] All from LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the LCP memory to the frequency converter memory.
[3] Size indep. from LCP copy only the parameters that are independent of the motor size. The latter selection can be used
to programme several frequency converters with the same function without disturbing motor data.
[4] File from MCO to LCP
[5] File from LCP to MCO
1-03 Torque Characteristics

Option: Function:
Select the torque characteristic required.
VT and AEO are both energy saving operations.
[0] * Constant torque Motor shaft output provides constant torque under variable speed control.
[1] Variable torque Motor shaft output provides variable torque under variable speed control. Set the variable torque
level in par. 14-40 VT Level.
[2] Auto Energy Optim. Automatically optimises energy consumption by minimising magnetisation and frequency via par.
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation and par. 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency.
1-04 Overload Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * High torque Allows up to 160% over torque.
[1] Normal torque For oversized motor - allows up to 110% over torque.

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

Option: Function:
The frequency converter determines the motor temperature for motor protection in two different
ways:
• Via a thermistor sensor connected to one of the analog or digital inputs (par. 1-93 Ther-
mistor Source).
• Via calculation (ETR = Electronic Terminal Relay) of the thermal load, based on the actual
load and time. The calculated thermal load is compared with the rated motor current
IM,N and the rated motor frequency fM,N. The calculations estimate the need for a lower
load at lower speed due to less cooling from the fan incorporated in the motor.
[0] * No protection Continuously overloaded motor, when no warning or trip of the frequency converter is required. 4
[1] Thermistor warning Activates a warning when the connected thermistor or KTY-sensor in the motor reacts in the event
of motor over-temperature.
[2] Thermistor trip Stops (trips) frequency converter when connected thermistor in motor reacts in the event of motor
over-temperature.
The thermistor cut-out value must be > 3 kΩ.
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the motor for winding protection.
[3] ETR warning 1 Please see detailed description below
[4] ETR trip 1
[5] ETR warning 2
[6] ETR trip 2
[7] ETR warning 3
[8] ETR trip 3
[9] ETR warning 4
[10] ETR trip 4
Motor protection can be implemented using a range of techniques: PTC or KTY sensor (see also section KTY Sensor Connection) in motor windings;
mechanical thermal switch (Klixon type); or Electronic Thermal Relay (ETR).
Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor temperature is too high
Parameter set-up:
Set par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to Thermistor Trip [2]
Set par. 1-93 Thermistor Source to Digital Input [6]

4 Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Set par. 1-93 Thermistor Source to Digital Input [6]
Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Set par. 1-93 Thermistor Source to Analog Input 54 [2]
Input Supply Voltage Threshold

Digital/analog Volt Cut-out Values
Digital 24 V < 6.6 kΩ - > 10.8 kΩ
Digital 10 V < 800Ω - > 2.7 kΩ
Analog 10 V < 3.0 kΩ - > 3.0 kΩ

NB!
Check that the chosen supply voltage follows the specification of the used thermistor element.
Select ETR Warning 1-4, to activate a warning on the display when the motor is overloaded.
Select ETR Trip 1-4 to trip the frequency converter when the motor is overloaded.
Programme a warning signal via one of the digital outputs. The signal appears in the event of a warning and if the frequency converter trips (thermal
warning).
ETR (Electronic Terminal Relay) functions 1-4 will calculate the load when the set-up where they were selected is active. For example ETR starts calculating
when setup 3 is selected. For the North American market: The ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with NEC.
1-93 Thermistor Source

Option: Function:
Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC sensor) should be connected. An analog input option
[1] or [2] cannot be selected if the analog input is already in use as a reference source (selected in
par. 3-15 Reference 1 Source, par. 3-16 Reference 2 Source or par. 3-17 Reference 3 Source).
When using MCB112, choice [0] None must always be selected.
[0] * None
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Digital input 18
NB!
NB!
Digital inputs should be set to “No operation” - see par. 5-1*.
2-10 Brake Function

Option: Function:
[0] * Off No brake resistor is installed.

[1] Resistor brake A brake resistor is incorporated in the system, for dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat. Con-
necting a brake resistor allows a higher DC link voltage during braking (generating operation). The
Resistor brake function is only active in frequency converters with an integral dynamic brake.
[2] AC brake Is selected to improve braking without using a brake resistor. This parameter controls an overmag-
netization of the motor when running with a generatoric load. This function can improve the OVC-
function. Increasing the electrical losses in the motor allows the OVC function to increase the braking
torque without exceeding the over voltage limit. Please note that AC brake is not as effective as
dynamic breaking with resistor.
AC brake is for VVC+ and flux mode in both open and closed loop.
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)

4 Range: Function:
50. Ohm* [5. - 32000. Ohm] Set the brake resistor value in Ohms. This value is used for monitoring the power to the brake
resistor in par. 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring. This parameter is only active in frequency converters
with an integral dynamic brake.
If the selection is xxxx use this parameter. If the selection is xxx.xx, use par. 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp
Time.
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Range: Function:
5.000 kW* [0.001 - 500.000 kW] Set the monitoring limit of the brake power transmitted to the resistor.
The monitoring limit is a product of the maximum duty cycle (120 sec.) and the maximum power
of the brake resistor at that duty cycle. See the formula below.
For 200 - 240 V units: 3902 × dutytime

Presistor =
R × 120
For 380 - 480 V units 7782 × dutytime
Presistor =
R × 120
Presistor =
R × 120
Presistor =
R × 120
This parameter is only active in frequency converters with an integral dynamic brake.
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring

Option: Function:
This parameter enables monitoring of the power to the brake resistor. The power is calculated on
the basis of the resistance (par. 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)), the DC link voltage, and the resistor
duty time.
[0] * Off No brake power monitoring required.
[1] Warning Activates a warning on the display when the power transmitted over 120 s exceeds 100% of the
monitoring limit (par. 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ).
The warning disappears when the transmitted power falls below 80% of the monitoring limit.
[2] Trip Trips frequency converter and displays an alarm when the calculated power exceeds 100% of the
monitoring limit.
[3] Warning and trip
If power monitoring is set to Off [0] or Warning [1], the brake function remains active, even if the monitoring limit is exceeded. This may lead to thermal
overload of the resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a relay/digital outputs. The measuring accuracy of the power monitoring depends
on the accuracy of the resistance of the resistor (better than ± 20%).

2-15 Brake Check

Option: Function:
Select type of test and monitoring function to check the connection to the brake resistor, or whether
a brake resistor is present, and then display a warning or an alarm in the event of a fault.
NB!
The brake resistor disconnection function is tested during power-up. However the
brake IGBT test is performed when there is no braking. A warning or trip discon-
nects the brake function.
The testing sequence is as follows:
1. The DC link ripple amplitude is measured for 300 ms without braking. 4

2. The DC link ripple amplitude is measured for 300 ms with the brake turned on.
3. If the DC link ripple amplitude while braking is lower than the DC link ripple amplitude
before braking + 1 %: Brake check has failed by returning a warning or alarm.
4. If the DC link ripple amplitude while braking is higher than the DC link ripple amplitude
before braking + 1 %: Brake check is OK.
[0] * Off Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short-circuit during operation. If a short-circuit occurs,
warning 25 appears.
[1] Warning Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short-circuit, and runs a test for brake resistor dis-
connection during power-up.
[2] Trip Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter cuts out while displaying an alarm (trip locked).
[3] Stop and trip Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock
alarm is displayed (e.g. warning 25, 27 or 28).
[4] AC brake Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter performs a controlled ramp down. This option is
available for FC 302 only.
NB!
NB!: Remove a warning arising in connection with Off [0] or Warning [1] by cycling the mains supply. The fault must be corrected first.
For Off [0] or Warning [1], the frequency converter keeps running even if a fault is located.
4.3.1 2-2* Mechanical Brake
Parameters for controlling operation of an electro-magnetic (mechanical) brake, typically required in hoisting applications.
To control a mechanical brake, a relay output (relay 01 or relay 02) or a programmed digital output (terminal 27 or 29) is required. Normally this output
must be closed during periods when the frequency converter is unable to ‘hold’ the motor, e.g. due to an excessive load. Select Mechanical Brake
Control [32] for applications with an electro-magnetic brake in par. 5-40 Function Relay, par. 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output, or par. 5-31 Terminal 29
Digital Output. When selecting Mechanical brake control [32], the mechanical brake is closed from start up until the output current is above the level
selected in par. 2-20 Release Brake Current. During stop, the mechanical brake activates when the speed falls below the level specified in par.
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]. If the frequency converter enters an alarm condition or an over-current or over-voltage situation, the mechanical brake
immediately cuts in. This is also the case during safe stop.

NB!
Protection mode and trip delay features (par. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit and par. 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault) may delay
the activation of the mechanical brake in an alarm condition. These features must be disabled in hoisting applications.
2-20 Release Brake Current

Range: Function:
par. 16-37 [0.00 - par. 16-37 A] Set the motor current for release of the mechanical brake, when a start condition is present. The
A* upper limit is specified in par. 16-37 Inv. Max. Current.
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [0 - 30000 RPM] Set the motor speed for activation of the mechanical brake, when a stop condition is present. The
upper speed limit is specified in par. 4-53 Warning Speed High.
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 Hz* [0.0 - 5000.0 Hz] Set the motor frequency for activation of the mechanical brake, when a stop condition is present.
2-23 Activate Brake Delay

Range: Function:
0.0 s* [0.0 - 5.0 s] Enter the brake delay time of the coast after ramp-down time. The shaft is held at zero speed with
full holding torque. Ensure that the mechanical brake has locked the load before the motor enters
coast mode. See Mechanical Brake Control section in the Design Guide.
2-24 Stop Delay

Range: Function:
0.0 s* [0.0 - 5.0 s] Set the time interval from the moment when the motor is stopped until the brake closes. This pa-
rameter is a part of the stopping function.

2-25 Brake Release Time

Range: Function:
0.20 s* [0.00 - 5.00 s] This value defines the time it takes for the mechanical brake to open/ close. This parameter must
act as a time-out when brake feedback is activated.
2-26 Torque Ref

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0 - 0 %] The value defines the torque applied against the closed mechanical brake, before release
2-27 Torque Ramp Time

Range:
0.2 s* [0.0 - 5.0 s]
Function:
The value defines the duration of the torque ramp in clockwise direction.
4
2-28 Gain Boost Factor
Range: Function:
1.00 N/A* [1.00 - 4.00 N/A] Only active in flux closed loop. The function ensures a smooth transition from torque control mode
to speed control mode when the motor takes over the load from the brake.
Illustration 4.1: Brake release sequence for hoist mechanical brake control
I) Activate brake delay: The frequency converter starts again from the mechanical brake engaged position.
II) Stop delay: When the time between successive starts is shorter than the setting in par. 2-24 Stop Delay, the frequency converter starts without
applying the mechanical brake (e.g. reversing).
3-10 Preset Reference

Array [8]
Range: 0-7
Range: Function:
0.00 %* [-100.00 - 100.00 %] Enter up to eight different preset references (0-7) in this parameter, using array programming. The
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the value RefMAX (par. 3-03 Maximum Reference) If a
RefMIN different from 0 (par. 3-02 Minimum Reference) is programmed, the preset reference is
calculated as a percentage of the full reference range, i.e. on the basis of the difference between
RefMAX and RefMIN. Afterwards, the value is added to RefMIN. When using preset references, select
Preset ref. bit 0 / 1 / 2 [16], [17] or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
5.1*.

Preset ref. bit 2 1 0

Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
0 Hz* [0.0 - par. 4-14 Hz] The jog speed is a fixed output speed at which the frequency converter is running when the jog
function is activated.
See also par. 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
3-15 Reference Resource 1

Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the first reference signal. par. 3-15 Reference Resource
1, par. 3-16 Reference Resource 2 and par. 3-17 Reference Resource 3 define up to three different
reference signals. The sum of these reference signals defines the actual reference.
[0] No function
[1] * Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Frequency input 29
[11] Local bus reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input X30-11 (OPCGPIO - General Purpose I/O Option Module)
[22] Analog input X30-12 (OPCGPIO - General Purpose I/O Option Module)

Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the second reference signal. par. 3-15 Reference Resource
[0] No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54

[11] Local bus reference
[20] * Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input X30-11

Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the third reference signal. par. 3-15 Reference Resource
4
[0] No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[11] * Local bus reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
5-00 Digital I/O Mode

Option: Function:
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or
NPN systems.
[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses (↕). PNP systems are pulled down to GND.
[1] NPN Action on negative directional pulses (↕). NPN systems are pulled up to + 24 V, internally in the
NB!
Once this parameter has been changed, it must be activated by performing a power cycle.
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.
[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.
Please not that this parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.


4.3.2 5-1* Digital Inputs
Parameters for configuring the input functions for the input terminals.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to the following functions:
Digital input function Select Terminal

No operation [0] All *term 32, 33
Reset [1] All
Coast inverse [2] All *term 27
Coast and reset inverse [3] All
Quick stop inverse [4] All
4
DC-brake inverse [5] All
Stop inverse [6] All
Start [8] All *term 18
Latched start [9] All
Reversing [10] All *term 19
Start reversing [11] All
Enable start forward [12] All
Enable start reverse [13] All
Jog [14] All *term 29
Preset reference on [15] All
Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Freeze reference [19] All
Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
Speed down [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
Precise stop inverse [26] 18, 19
Precises start, stop [27] 18, 19
Catch up [28] All
Slow down [29] All
Counter input [30] 29, 33
Pulse input [32] 29, 33
Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Ramp bit 1 [35] All
Mains failure inverse [36] All
Latched precise start [40] 18, 19
Latched precise stop inverse [41] 18, 19
DigiPot Increase [55] All
DigiPot Decrease [56] All
DigiPot Clear [57] All
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
Reset Counter A [62] All
Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
Reset Counter B [65] All
Mech. Brake Feedb. [70] All
Mech. Brake Feedb. Inv. [71] All
PTC Card 1 [80] All
FC 300 standard terminals are 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33. MCB 101 terminals are X30/2, X30/3 and X30/4.
Terminal 29 functions as an output only in FC 302.
Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter.
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:
[0] No operation No reaction to signals transmitted to the terminal.
[1] Reset Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/ALARM. Not all alarms can be reset.
[2] Coast inverse (Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The frequency converter leaves the
motor in free mode. Logic ‘0’ => coasting stop.
[3] Coast and reset inverse Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free mode and resets frequency con-
verter. Logic ‘0’ => coasting stop and reset.
[4] Quick stop inverse Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in accordance with quick-stop ramp time set in par.
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic ‘0’ => Quick-stop.

[5] DC-brake inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops motor by energizing it with a DC current for a certain time
period. See par. 2-01 DC Brake Current to par. 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]. The function is
only active when the value in par. 2-02 DC Braking Time is different from 0. Logic ’0’ => DC braking.
[6] Stop inverse Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop function when the selected terminal goes from logical level
‘1’ to ‘0’. The stop is performed according to the selected ramp time (par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down
Time, par. 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp down Time, par. 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time, par. 3-72 Ramp 4
Ramp Down Time).
NB!
When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and has received a stop
command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure that the frequency converter stops,
configure a digital output to Torque limit & stop [27] and connect this digital
output to a digital input that is configured as coast. 4
[8] Start (Default Digital input 18): Select start for a start/stop command. Logic ‘1’ = start, logic ‘0’ = stop.
[9] Latched start The motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min. 2 ms. The motor stops when Stop inverse is activated.
[10] Reversing (Default Digital input 19). Change the direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic ‘1’ to reverse.
The reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation. It does not activate the start function.
Select both directions in par. 4-10 Motor Speed Direction. The function is not active in process closed
loop.
[11] Start reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at the same
time.
[12] Enable start forward Disengages the counterclockwise movement and allows for the clockwise direction.
[13] Enable start reverse Disengages the clockwise movement and allows for the counterclockwise direction.
[14] Jog (Default Digital input 29): Use to activate jog speed. See par. 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
[15] Preset reference on Shifts between external reference and preset reference. It is assumed that External/preset [1] has
been selected in par. 3-04 Reference Function. Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1' = one
of the eight preset references is active.
[16] Preset ref bit 0 Preset ref. bit 0,1, and 2 enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according to
the table below.
[17] Preset ref bit 1 Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
[18] Preset ref bit 2 Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0

Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1

[19] Freeze ref Freezes the actual reference, which is now the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Speed
down to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp up Time and par. 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp down Time) in the range 0 - par.
3-03 Maximum Reference.
[20] Freeze output Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is now the point of enable/condition for Speed up
and Speed down to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2
(par. 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp up Time and par. 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp down Time) in the range 0 - par.
1-23 Motor Frequency.
NB!
When Freeze output is active, the frequency converter cannot be stopped via a
low ‘start [8]’ signal. Stop the frequency converter via a terminal programmed
4 for Coasting inverse [2] or Coast and reset, inverse.
[21] Speed up Select Speed up and Speed down if digital control of the up/down speed is desired (motor poten-
tiometer). Activate this function by selecting either Freeze reference or Freeze output. When Speed
up/ down is activated for less than 400 msec. the resulting reference will be increased/ decreased
by 0.1 %. If Speed up/ down is activated for more than 400 msec. the resulting reference will follow
the setting in ramping up/ down parameter 3-x1/ 3-x2.
Shut down Catch up

Unchanged speed 0 0
Reduced by %-value 1 0
Increased by %-value 0 1
Reduced by %-value 1 1
[22] Speed down Same as Speed up [21].
[23] Set-up select bit 0 Select Set-up select bit 0 or Select Set-up select bit 1 to select one of the four set-ups. Set par.
0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.
[24] Set-up select bit 1 (Default Digital input 32): Same as Set-up select bit 0 [23].
[26] Precise stop inv. Prolongs stop signal to give a precise stop independent of speed.
Sends an inverted stop signal when the precise stop function is activated in par. 1-83 Precise Stop
Function.
Precise stop inverse function is available for terminals 18 or 19.
[27] Precise start, stop Use when Precise ramp stop [0] is selected in par 1-83.
[28] Catch up Increases reference value by percentage (relative) set in par. 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
[29] Slow down Reduces reference value by percentage (relative) set in par. 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
[30] Counter input Precise stop function in par. 1-83 Precise Stop Function acts as Counter stop or speed compensated
counter stop with or without reset. The counter value must be set in par. 1-84 Precise Stop Counter
Value.
[32] Pulse input Use pulse sequence as either reference or feedback. Scaling is done in par. group 5-5*.
[34] Ramp bit 0 Enables a choice between one of the 4 ramps available, according to the table below.
[35] Ramp bit 1 Same as Ramp bit 0.

Preset ramp bit 1 0

Ramp 1 0 0
Ramp 2 0 1
Ramp 3 1 0
Ramp 4 1 1
[36] Mains failure inverse Activates par. 14-10 Mains Failure. Mains failure inverse is active in the Logic .0. situation.
[41] Latched Precise Stop inverse Sends a latched stop signal when the precise stop function is activated in par. 1-83 Precise Stop
Function. The Latched Precise stop inverse function is available for terminals 18 or 19.
[55] DigiPot Increase INCREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer function described in parameter group 3-9*
[56] DigiPot Decrease DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer function described in parameter group 3-9*
[57] DigiPot Clear Clears the Digital Potentiometer reference described in parameter group 3-9* 4
[60] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter.
[61] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter.
[62] Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.
[63] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter.
[64] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter.
[65] Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.
[70] Mech. Brake Feedback Brake feedback for hoisting applications
[71] Mech. Brake Feedback inv. Inverted brake feedback for hoisting applications
[80] PTC Card 1 All Digital Inputs can be set to PTC Card 1 [80]. However, only one Digital Input must be set to this
choice.
4.3.3 5-3* Digital Outputs
Parameters for configuring the output functions for the output terminals. The 2 solid-state digital outputs are common for terminals 27 and 29. Set the
I/O function for terminal 27 in par. 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O function for terminal 29 in par. 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. These parameters
cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
[0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay outputs
[1] Control ready The control board receives supply voltage.
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for operation and applies a supply signal on the control board.
[3] Drive ready / remote control The frequency converter is ready for operation and is in Auto On mode.
[4] Enable / no warning Ready for operation. No start or stop command is been given (start/disable). There are no warnings.
[5] VLT running Motor is running.
[6] Running / no warning Output speed is higher than the speed set in par. 1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]. The
motor is running and there are no warnings.
[7] Run in range / no warning Motor is running within the programmed current and speed ranges set in par. 4-50 Warning Current
Low to par. 4-53 Warning Speed High. There are no warnings.
[8] Run on reference / no warning Motor runs at reference speed.
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. There are no warnings.
[10] Alarm or warning An alarm or a warning activates the output.
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in par. 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode or par. 1-17 has been exceeded.
[12] Out of current range The motor current is outside the range set in par. 4-18 Current Limit.
[13] Below current, low Motor current is lower than set in par. 4-50 Warning Current Low.
[14] Above current, high Motor current is higher than set in par. 4-51 Warning Current High.
[15] Out of range Output frequency is outside the frequency range set in par. 4-50 Warning Current Low and par.
4-51 Warning Current High.
[16] Below speed, low Output speed is lower than the setting in par. 4-52 Warning Speed Low.
[17] Above speed, high Output speed is higher than the setting in par. 4-53 Warning Speed High.

[18] Out of feedback range Feedback is outside the range set in par. 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and par. 4-57 Warning Feed-
back High.
[19] Below feedback low Feedback is below the limit set in par. 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
[20] Above feedback high Feedback is above the limit set in par. 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[21] Thermal warning The thermal warning turns on when the temperature exceeds the limit in the motor, the frequency
converter, the brake resistor, or the thermistor.
[22] Ready, no thermal warning Frequency converter is ready for operation and there is no over-temperature warning.
[23] Remote, ready, no thermal warning Frequency converter is ready for operation and is in Auto On mode. There is no over-temperature
warning.
[24] Ready, no over-/ under voltage Frequency converter is ready for operation and the mains voltage is within the specified voltage
4 range (see General Specifications section).
[25] Reverse Reversing. Logic ‘1’ when CW rotation of the motor. Logic ‘0’ when CCW rotation of the motor. If
the motor is not rotating the output will follow the reference.
[26] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out) via the serial communication port.
[27] Torque limit and stop Use in performing a coasting stop and in torque limit condition. If the frequency converter has
received a stop signal and is at the torque limit, the signal is Logic ‘0’.
[28] Brake, no brake warning Brake is active and there are no warnings.
[29] Brake ready, no fault Brake is ready for operation and there are no faults.
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) Output is Logic ‘1’ when the brake IGBT is short-circuited. Use this function to protect the frequency
converter if there is a fault on the brake modules. Use the output/relay to cut out the main voltage
from the frequency converter.
[31] Relay 123 Relay is activated when Control Word [0] is selected in parameter group 8-**.
[32] Mechanical brake control Enables control of an external mechanical brake, see description in the section Control of Mechanical
Brake, and par. group 2-2*
[33] Safe stop activated (FC 302 only) Indicates that the safe stop on terminal 37 has been activated.
[40] Out of ref range
[41] Below reference low
[42] Above reference high
[45] Bus Ctrl Controls output via bus. The state of the output is set in par. 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control. The
output state is retained in the event of bus time-out.
[46] Bus Ctrl On at timeout Controls output via bus. The state of the output is set in par. 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control. In
the event of bus time-out the output state is set high (On).
[47] Bus Ctrl Off at timeout Controls output via bus. The state of the output is set in par. 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control. In
the event of bus time-out the output state is set low (Off).
[51] MCO controlled
[55] Pulse output
[60] Comparator 0 See par. group 13-1*. If Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise, it
will be low.
will be low.
will be low.
will be low.
will be low.
will be low.
[70] Logic Rule 0 See par. group 13-4*. If Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will go high. Otherwise, it
will be low.

will be low.
will be low.
will be low.
will be low.
will be low.
[80] SL Digital Output A See par. 13-52 SL Controller Action. The output will go high whenever the Smart Logic Action [38]
Set dig. out. A high is executed. The output will go low whenever the Smart Logic Action [32] Set
4
dig. out. A low is executed.
[81] SL Digital Output B See par. 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the Smart Logic Action [39]
Set dig. out. A high is executed. The input will go low whenever the Smart Logic Action [33] Set
[82] SL Digital Output C See par. 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the Smart Logic Action [40]
[83] SL Digital Output D See par. 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the Smart Logic Action [41]
[84] SL Digital Output E See par. 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the Smart Logic Action [42]
[85] SL Digital Output F See par. 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input will go high whenever the Smart Logic Action [43]
[120] Local reference active Output is high when par. 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local or when par. 3-13 Reference Site = [0]
Linked to hand auto at the same time as the LCP is in Hand on mode.
[121] Remote reference active Output is high when par. 3-13 Reference Site = Remote [1] or Linked to hand/auto [0] while the
LCP is in [Auto on] mode.
[122] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is present.
[123] Start command active Output is high when there is an active Start command (i.e. via digital input bus connection or [Hand
on] or [Auto on]), and no Stop or Start command is active.
[124] Running reverse Output is high when the frequency converter is running counter clockwise (the logical product of
the status bits ‘running’ AND ‘reverse’).
[125] Drive in hand mode Output is high when the frequency converter is in Hand on mode (as indicated by the LED light
above [Hand on]).
[126] Drive in auto mode Output is high when the frequency converter is in Hand on mode (as indicated by the LED light
above [Auto on]).
5-40 Function Relay

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5 [4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Control ready
[2] Drive ready
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[4] Enable / no warning
[5] VLT running

[6] Running / no warning
[7] Run in range/no warn
[8] Run on ref/no warn
[9] Alarm
[10] Alarm or warning
[11] At torque limit
[12] Out of current range
[13] Below current, low
[14] Above current, high
4 [15]
[16]
Out of speed range
Below speed, low
[17] Above speed, high
[18] Out of feedb. range
[19] Below feedback, low
[20] Above feedback, high
[21] Thermal warning
[22] Ready,no thermal W
[23] Remote,ready,no TW
[24] Ready, Voltage OK
[25] Reverse
[26] Bus OK
[27] Torque limit & stop
[28] Brake, no brake war
[29] Brake ready, no fault
[30] Brake fault (IGBT)
[31] Relay 123
[32] Mech brake ctrl
[33] Safe stop active
[36] Control word bit 11
[37] Control word bit 12
[38] Motor feedback error
[39] Tracking error
[40] Out of ref range
[41] Below reference, low
[42] Above ref, high
[43] Extended PID Limit
[45] Bus ctrl.
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout
[51] MCO controlled
[60] Comparator 0
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3
[64] Comparator 4
[65] Comparator 5
[70] Logic rule 0

[71] Logic rule 1
[72] Logic rule 2
[73] Logic rule 3
[74] Logic rule 4
[75] Logic rule 5
[80] SL digital output A
[81] SL digital output B
[82] SL digital output C
[83] SL digital output D
[84]
[85]
SL digital output E
SL digital output F
4
[120] Local ref active
[121] Remote ref active
[122] No alarm
[123] Start command activ
[124] Running reverse
[125] Drive in hand mode
[126] Drive in auto mode
14-22 Operation Mode

Option: Function:
Use this parameter to specify normal operation; to perform tests; or to initialise all parameters
except par. 15-03 Power Up's, par. 15-04 Over Temp's and par. 15-05 Over Volt's. This function is
active only when the power is cycled to the frequency converter.
Select Normal operation [0] for normal operation of the frequency converter with the motor in the
selected application.
Select Control card test [1] to test the analog and digital inputs and outputs and the +10 V control
voltage. The test requires a test connector with internal connections. Use the following procedure
for the control card test:
1. Select Control card test [1].
2. Disconnect the mains supply and wait for the light in the display to go out.
3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) = ‘ON’ / I.
4. Insert the test plug (see below).
5. Connect to mains supply.
6. Carry out various tests.
7. The results are displayed on the LCP and the frequency converter moves into an infinite
loop.
8. par. 14-22 Operation Mode is automatically set to Normal operation. Carry out a power
cycle to start up in Normal operation after a control card test.
If the test is OK:

LCP read-out: Control Card OK.
Disconnect the mains supply and remove the test plug. The green LED on the Control Card will light
up.
If the test fails:

LCP read-out: Control Card I/O failure.
Replace the frequency converter or Control card. The red LED on the Control Card is turned on. Test
plugs (connect the following terminals to each other): 18 - 27 - 32; 19 - 29 - 33; 42 - 53 - 54

Select Initialization [2] to reset all parameter values to default settings, except for par. 15-03 Power
Up's, par. 15-04 Over Temp's, and par. 15-05 Over Volt's. The frequency converter will reset during
the next power-up.
par. 14-22 Operation Mode will also revert to the default setting Normal operation [0].
[0] * Normal operation
[1] Control card test
[2] Initialisation
[3] Boot mode
14-50 RFI Filter

Option: Function:
[0] Off Select Off [0] only if the frequency converter is fed by an isolated mains source, i.e. from a special
IT mains source.
In this mode, the internal RFI filter capacitors between chassis and the mains RFI filter circuit are
cut-out to avoid damage of the intermediate circuit and to reduce the ground capacity currents
according to IEC 61800-3.
[1] * On Select On [1] to ensure that the frequency converter complies with EMC standards.
15-43 Software Version

Range: Function:
0 N/A* [0 - 0 N/A] View the combined SW version (or ‘package version’) consisting of power SW and control SW.

4.4 Parameter Lists

Changes during operation
”TRUE” means that the parameter can be changed while the frequency converter is in operation and “FALSE” means that the it must be stopped before
a change can be made.
4-Set-up
'All set-up': the parameters can be set individually in each of the four set-ups, i.e. one single parameter can have four different data values.
’1 set-up’: data value will be the same in all set-ups.
Conversion index 4
This number refers to a conversion figure used when writing or reading to and from the frequency converter.
Conv. index 100 67 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

Conv. factor 1 1/60 1000000 100000 10000 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Data type Description Type

2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible String VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD
See the frequency converter Design Guide for further information about data types 33, 35 and 54.
Parameters for the frequency converter are grouped into various parameter groups for easy selection of the correct parameters for optimized operation
of the frequency converter.
0-xx Operation and Display parameters for basic frequency converter settings
1-xx Load and Motor parameters, includes all load and motor related parameters
2-xx Brake parameters
3-xx References and ramping parameters, includes DigiPot function
4-xx Limits Warnings, setting of limits and warning parameters
5-xx Digital inputs and outputs, includes relay controls
6-xx Analog inputs and outputs
7-xx Controls, setting parameters for speed and process controls
8-xx Communication and option parameters, setting of FC RS485 and FC USB port parameters.
9-xx Profibus parameters
10-xx DeviceNet and CAN Fieldbus parameters
13-xx Smart Logic Control parameters
14-xx Special function parameters

15-xx Drive information parameters
16-xx Read out parameters
17-xx Encoder Option parameters
32-xx MCO 305 Basic parameters
33-xx MCO 305 Advanced parameters
4
34-xx MCO Data Readout parameters

4.4.1 0-** Operation/Display
Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change during op- Conver- Type
only eration sion index
0-0* Basic Settings
Instructions
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

0-02 Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand) [1] Forced stop, ref=old All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1617 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1602 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu SR 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout

0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout 0.00 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-32 Max Value of User-defined Readout 100.00 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

0-65 Quick Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-67 Bus Password Access 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4 How to Programme
65
4
4
4.4.2 1-** Load/Motor
66
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-01 Motor Control Principle null All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source [1] 24V encoder All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-03 Torque Characteristics [0] Constant torque All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-04 Overload Mode [0] High torque All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-05 Local Mode Configuration [2] As mode par 1-00 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-1* Motor Selection
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4 How to Programme
1-2* Motor Data

1-20 Motor Power [kW] SR All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed SR All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque SR All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) SR All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) SR All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) SR All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM SR All set-ups x FALSE 0 Uint16
1-41 Motor Angle Offset 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-53 Model Shift Frequency SR All set-ups x FALSE -1 Uint16
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

Instructions
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Instructions
1-62 Slip Compensation SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16

1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Dampening 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed 100 % All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint8
1-67 Load Type [0] Passive load All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-68 Minimum Inertia SR All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-69 Maximum Inertia SR All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-71 Start Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-72 Start Function [2] Coast/delay time All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-73 Flying Start [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-83 Precise Stop Function [0] Precise ramp stop All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value 100000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
1-85 Precise Stop Speed Compensation Delay 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [0] No protection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
1-93 Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-95 KTY Sensor Type [0] KTY Sensor 1 All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-97 KTY Threshold level 80 °C 1 set-up x TRUE 100 Int16

4 How to Programme
67
4
4
4.4.3 2-** Brakes
68
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4 How to Programme
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-2* Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-23 Activate Brake Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-24 Stop Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-25 Brake Release Time 0.20 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-26 Torque Ref 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
2-27 Torque Ramp Time 0.2 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-28 Gain Boost Factor 1.00 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16

Instructions
4.4.4 3-** Reference / Ramps
3-0* Reference Limits
Instructions
3-00 Reference Range null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-02 Minimum Reference 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-13 Reference Site [0] Linked to Hand / Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference Resource 1 null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-5* Ramp 2
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32

4 How to Programme
69
4
4
70
3-6* Ramp 3
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-7* Ramp 4
4 How to Programme

3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time SR 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay SR All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

Instructions
4.4.5 4-** Limits / Warnings
4-1* Motor Limits
Instructions
4-10 Motor Speed Direction null All set-ups FALSE - Uint8

4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency 132.0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-2* Limit Factors
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-3* Motor Fb Monitor
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function [2] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout 0.05 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32

4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-53 Warning Speed High outputSpeedHighLimit (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-56 Warning Feedback Low -999999.999 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-57 Warning Feedback High 999999.999 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function [1] Trip 100 ms All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] SR All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] SR All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

4 How to Programme
71
4
4
4.4.6 5-** Digital In/Out
72
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input null All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
4 How to Programme
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop [1] Safe Stop Alarm 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output null All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16

Instructions
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
Instructions
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value SR All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups x FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable null All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 SR All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-7* 24V Encoder Input
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses per Revolution 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups x TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up x TRUE -2 Uint16

4 How to Programme
73
4
4
4.4.7 6-** Analog In/Out
74
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 1
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4 How to Programme
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-2* Analog Input 2
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-3* Analog Input 3
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-4* Analog Input 4
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-5* Analog Output 1
6-50 Terminal 42 Output null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2

6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-73 Terminal X45/1 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-74 Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-83 Terminal X45/3 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-84 Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
Instructions
4.4.8 7-** Controllers
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
Instructions
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source null All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain SR All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time SR All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time SR All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time 10.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 1.0000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
7-1* Torque PI Ctrl.
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 10000.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

4 How to Programme
75
4
4
4.4.9 8-** Comm. and Options
76
8-0* General Settings
8-01 Control Site [0] Digital and ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Word Source null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 1.0 s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Word Timeout Function [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
4 How to Programme
8-10 Control Word Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [1] Profile Default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW [1] Profile default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits [0] Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay SR 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay SR 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
8-40 Telegram selection [1] Standard telegram 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83 Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-9* Bus Jog

8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 200 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Instructions
4.4.10 9-** Profibus
9-00 Setpoint 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-07 Actual Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Instructions
9-15 PCD Write Configuration SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16

9-16 PCD Read Configuration SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-22 Telegram Selection [108] PPO 8 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
9-28 Process Control [1] Enable cyclic master 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
9-31 Safe Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 Profibus Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-63 Actual Baud Rate [255] No baudrate found All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-65 Profile Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[2]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2

9-68 Status Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-71 Profibus Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-93 Changed parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-94 Changed parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-99 Profibus Revision Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

4 How to Programme
77
4
4
4.4.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus
78
10-0* Common Settings
10-00 CAN Protocol null 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
10-01 Baud Rate Select null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-02 MAC ID SR 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-1* DeviceNet
10-10 Process Data Type Selection null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 How to Programme
10-11 Process Data Config Write SR All set-ups TRUE - Uint16

10-12 Process Data Config Read SR All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-13 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-14 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-15 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-2* COS Filters
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-3* Parameter Access
10-30 Array Index 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-31 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-32 Devicenet Revision SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-33 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
10-34 DeviceNet Product Code SR 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
10-39 Devicenet F Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
10-5* CANopen
10-50 Process Data Config Write. SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-51 Process Data Config Read. SR 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16

Instructions
4.4.12 13-** Smart Logic
13-0* SLC Settings
Instructions
13-00 SL Controller Mode null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

13-01 Start Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value SR 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer SR 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

13-52 SL Controller Action null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 How to Programme
79
4
4
4.4.13 14-** Special Functions
80
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern [1] SFAVM All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 How to Programme
14-2* Trip Reset

14-20 Reset Mode [0] Manual reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting null 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Cont, Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-31 Current Lim Contr, Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation SR All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 10 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi SR All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up x FALSE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 2.0 uF 1 set-up FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter 7.000 mH 1 set-up FALSE -6 Uint16
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units SR 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
14-7* Compatibility

14-72 VLT Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-73 VLT Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-74 VLT Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-8* Options
14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC [1] Yes 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
Instructions
4.4.14 15-** Drive Information
15-0* Operating Data
Instructions
15-00 Operating Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32

15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval SR 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32

15-3* Fault Log
15-30 Fault Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-31 Fault Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Fault Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]

15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
4 How to Programme
81
4
4
82
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
4 How to Programme
15-75 Slot C0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]

15-76 Option in Slot C1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-98 Drive Identification 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

Instructions
4.4.15 16-** Data Readouts
16-0* General Status
Instructions
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2

16-01 Reference [Unit] 0.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0.0 % All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-09 Custom Readout 0.00 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0.00 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0.00 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0.0 V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0.0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor Current 0.00 A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0.0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-19 KTY sensor temperature 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Int16
16-20 Motor Angle 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current SR All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0.0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16

16-51 Pulse Reference 0.0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-52 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0.00 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
4 How to Programme
83
4
4
84
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
4 How to Programme
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

Instructions
4.4.16 17-** Motor Feedb.Option
17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
Instructions
17-10 Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-11 Resolution (PPR) 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface
17-20 Protocol Selection [0] None All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev) SR All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-24 SSI Data Length 13 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
17-25 Clock Rate SR All set-ups FALSE 3 Uint16
17-26 SSI Data Format [0] Gray code All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-5* Resolver Interface
17-50 Poles 2 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
17-51 Input Voltage 7.0 V 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-52 Input Frequency 10.0 kHz 1 set-up FALSE 2 Uint8
17-53 Transformation Ratio 0.5 N/A 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-59 Resolver Interface [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-6* Monitoring and App.
17-60 Feedback Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

4 How to Programme
85
4
4
4.4.17 32-** MCO Basic Settings
86
32-0* Encoder 2
32-00 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-01 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-02 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-03 Absolute Resolution 8192 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-05 Absolute Encoder Data Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-06 Absolute Encoder Clock Frequency 262.000 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-07 Absolute Encoder Clock Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-08 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4 How to Programme
32-09 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

32-10 Rotational Direction [1] No action 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-11 User Unit Denominator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-12 User Unit Numerator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-3* Encoder 1
32-30 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-31 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-32 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-33 Absolute Resolution 8192 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-35 Absolute Encoder Data Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-36 Absolute Encoder Clock Frequency 262.000 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-37 Absolute Encoder Clock Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-38 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-39 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-40 Encoder Termination [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-5* Feedback Source
32-50 Source Slave [2] Encoder 2 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-6* PID Controller
32-60 Proportional factor 30 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-61 Derivative factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-62 Integral factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-63 Limit Value for Integral Sum 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-64 PID Bandwidth 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-65 Velocity Feed-Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-66 Acceleration Feed-Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error 20000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-68 Reverse Behavior for Slave [0] Reversing allowed 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

32-69 Sampling Time for PID Control 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
32-70 Scan Time for Profile Generator 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
32-71 Size of the Control Window (Activation) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-72 Size of the Control Window (Deactiv.) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-8* Velocity & Accel.
32-80 Maximum Velocity (Encoder) 1500 RPM 2 set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
32-81 Shortest Ramp 1.000 s 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-82 Ramp Type [0] Linear 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-83 Velocity Resolution 100 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-84 Default Velocity 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-85 Default Acceleration 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Instructions
4.4.18 33-** MCO Adv. Settings
33-0* Home Motion
Instructions
33-00 Force HOME [0] Home not forced 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-01 Zero Point Offset from Home Pos. 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-02 Ramp for Home Motion 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-03 Velocity of Home Motion 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-04 Behaviour during HomeMotion [0] Revers and index 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-1* Synchronization
33-10 Synchronization Factor Master (M:S) 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-11 Synchronization Factor Slave (M:S) 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-12 Position Offset for Synchronization 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-13 Accuracy Window for Position Sync. 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-14 Relative Slave Velocity Limit 0% 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-15 Marker Number for Master 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-16 Marker Number for Slave 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-17 Master Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-18 Slave Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-19 Master Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-20 Slave Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-21 Master Marker Tolerance Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

33-22 Slave Marker Tolerance Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-23 Start Behaviour for Marker Sync [0] Start Function 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
33-24 Marker Number for Fault 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-25 Marker Number for Ready 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-26 Velocity Filter 0 us 2 set-ups TRUE -6 Int32
33-27 Offset Filter Time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
33-28 Marker Filter Configuration [0] Marker filter 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-29 Filter Time for Marker Filter 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
33-30 Maximum Marker Correction 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-31 Synchronisation Type [0] Standard 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-4* Limit Handling
33-40 Behaviour atEnd Limit Switch [0] Call error handler 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-41 Negative Software End Limit -500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-42 Positive Software End Limit 500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32

33-43 Negative Software End Limit Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-44 Positive Software End Limit Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-45 Time in Target Window 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
33-46 Target Window LimitValue 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-47 Size of Target Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4 How to Programme
87
4
4
88
33-5* I/O Configuration
33-50 Terminal X57/1 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 How to Programme
33-60 Terminal X59/1 and X59/2 Mode [1] Output 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
33-63 Terminal X59/1 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-8* Global Parameters
33-80 Activated Program Number -1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
33-81 Power-up State [1] Motor on 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-82 Drive Status Monitoring [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-83 Behaviour afterError [0] Coast 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-84 Behaviour afterEsc. [0] Controlled stop 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-85 MCO Supplied by External 24VDC [0] No 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

Instructions
4.4.19 34-** MCO Data Readouts
34-0* PCD Write Par.
Instructions
34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

34-2* PCD Read Par.
34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-4* Inputs & Outputs
34-40 Digital Inputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-41 Digital Outputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-5* Process Data
34-50 Actual Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-51 Commanded Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-52 Actual Master Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-53 Slave Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-54 Master Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-55 Curve Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-56 Track Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32

34-57 Synchronizing Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-58 Actual Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-59 Actual Master Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-60 Synchronizing Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-61 Axis Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-62 Program Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-7* Diagnosis readouts
34-70 MCO Alarm Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
34-71 MCO Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
4 How to Programme
89
4
5 General Specifications Instructions

Instructions 5 General Specifications
5 General Specifications
Mains supply (L1, L2, L3):

Supply voltage 200-240 V ±10%
Supply voltage FC 301: 380-480 V / FC 302: 380-500 V ±10%
Supply voltage FC 302: 525-690 V ±10%
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz
Max. imbalance temporary between mains phases 3.0 % of rated supply voltage
True Power Factor (λ) ≥ 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor (cos ϕ) near unity (> 0.98)
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≤ 7.5 kW maximum 2 times/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) 11-75 kW maximum 1 time/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ 90 kW maximum 1 time/2 min.
Environment according to EN60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2 5
The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240/500/600/ 690 V maximum.
Motor output (U, V, W):

Output voltage 0 - 100% of supply voltage
Output frequency (0.25-75 kW) FC 301: 0.2 - 1000 Hz / FC 302: 0 - 1000 Hz
Output frequency (90-1000 kW) 0 - 800* Hz
Output frequency in Flux Mode (FC 302 only) 0 - 300 Hz
Switching on output Unlimited
Ramp times 0.01 - 3600 sec.
* Voltage and power dependent
Torque characteristics:
Starting torque (Constant torque) maximum 160% for 60 sec.*
Starting torque maximum 180% up to 0.5 sec.*
Overload torque (Constant torque) maximum 160% for 60 sec.*
Starting torque (Variable torque) maximum 110% for 60 sec.*
Overload torque (Variable torque) maximum 110% for 60 sec.
*Percentage relates to the nominal torque.
Digital inputs:
Programmable digital inputs FC 301: 4 (5) / FC 302: 4 (6)
Terminal number 18, 19, 271), 291), 32, 33,
Logic PNP or NPN
Voltage level 0 - 24 V DC
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP < 5 V DC
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP > 10 V DC
Voltage level, logic '0' NPN2) > 19 V DC
Voltage level, logic '1' NPN2) < 14 V DC
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Pulse frequency range 0 - 110 kHz
(Duty cycle) Min. pulse width 4.5 ms
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ

Safe stop Terminal 373) (Terminal 37 is fixed PNP logic):

Voltage level 0 - 24 V DC
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP < 4 V DC
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP >20 V DC
Nominal input current at 24 V 50 mA rms
Nominal input current at 20 V 60 mA rms
Input capacitance 400 nF
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.
2) Except safe stop input Terminal 37.

3) Terminal 37 is only available in FC 302 and FC 301 A1 with Safe Stop. It can only be used as safe stop input. Terminal 37 is suitable for category 3
installations according to EN 954-1 (safe stop according to category 0 EN 60204-1) as required by the EU Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. Terminal 37
and the Safe Stop function are designed in conformance with EN 60204-1, EN 50178, EN 61800-2, EN 61800-3, and EN 954-1. For correct and safe use
5 of the Safe Stop function follow the related information and instructions in the Design Guide.
4) FC 302 only.
Analog inputs:
Number of analog inputs 2
Terminal number 53, 54
Modes Voltage or current
Mode select Switch S201 and switch S202
Voltage mode Switch S201/switch S202 = OFF (U)
Voltage level FC 301: 0 to + 10/ FC 302: -10 to +10 V (scaleable)
Max. voltage ± 20 V
Current mode Switch S201/switch S202 = ON (I)
Current level 0/4 to 20 mA (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 200 Ω
Max. current 30 mA
Resolution for analog inputs 10 bit (+ sign)
Accuracy of analog inputs Max. error 0.5% of full scale
Bandwidth FC 301: 20 Hz/ FC 302: 100 Hz
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Pulse/encoder inputs:
Programmable pulse/encoder inputs 2/1
Terminal number pulse/encoder 291), 332) / 323), 333)
Max. frequency at terminal 29, 32, 33 110 kHz (Push-pull driven)
Max. frequency at terminal 29, 32, 33 5 kHz (open collector)
Min. frequency at terminal 29, 32, 33 4 Hz
Voltage level see section on Digital input
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Pulse input accuracy (0.1 - 1 kHz) Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Encoder input accuracy (1 - 110 kHz) Max. error: 0.05 % of full scale
The pulse and encoder inputs (terminals 29, 32, 33) are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) FC 302 only
2) Pulse inputs are 29 and 33
3) Encoder inputs: 32 = A, and 33 = B
5
Digital output:
Programmable digital/pulse outputs 2
Terminal number 27, 29 1)
Voltage level at digital/frequency output 0 - 24 V

Max. output current (sink or source) 40 mA
Max. load at frequency output 1 kΩ
Max. capacitive load at frequency output 10 nF
Minimum output frequency at frequency output 0 Hz
Maximum output frequency at frequency output 32 kHz
Accuracy of frequency output Max. error: 0.1 % of full scale
Resolution of frequency outputs 12 bit
1) Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input.
The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Analog output:
Number of programmable analog outputs 1
Terminal number 42
Current range at analog output 0/4 - 20 mA
Max. load GND - analog output 500 Ω
Accuracy on analog output Max. error: 0.5 % of full scale
Resolution on analog output 12 bit
The analogue output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, 24 V DC output:

Terminal number 12, 13
Output voltage 24 V +1, -3 V
Max. load FC 301: 130 mA/ FC 302: 200 mA
The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the analog and digital inputs and outputs.
Control card, 10 V DC output:

Terminal number 50
Output voltage 10.5 V ±0.5 V
Max. load 15 mA
The 10 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, RS 485 serial communication:

Terminal number 68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)
Terminal number 61 Common for terminals 68 and 69
The RS 485 serial communication circuit is functionally separated from other central circuits and galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV).

Control card, USB serial communication:

USB standard 1.1 (Full speed)
USB plug USB type B “device” plug
Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/device USB cable.

The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB ground connection is not galvanically isolated from protection earth. Use only an isolated laptop as PC connection to the USB connector on
the frequency converter.
Relay outputs:
Programmable relay outputs FC 301 ≤ 7.5 kW: 1 / FC 302 all kW: 2
Relay 01 Terminal number 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (Resistive load) 60 V DC, 1A
5
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1A
Relay 02 (FC 302 only) Terminal number 4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load)2)3) Overvoltage cat. II 400 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) 80 V DC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1A
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 50 V DC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Min. terminal load on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO), 4-6 (NC), 4-5 (NO) 24 V DC 10 mA, 24 V AC 20 mA
Environment according to EN 60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
1) IEC 60947 part 4 and 5

The relay contacts are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuit by reinforced isolation (PELV).
2) Overvoltage Category II
3) UL applications 300 V AC 2A
Cable lengths and cross sections for control cables*:

Max. motor cable length, screened FC 301: 50 m / FC 301 (A1): 25 m/ FC 302: 150 m
Max. motor cable length, unscreened FC 301: 75 m / FC 301 (A1): 50 m/ FC 302: 300 m
Maximum cross section to control terminals, flexible/ rigid wire without cable end sleeves 1.5 mm2/16 AWG
Maximum cross section to control terminals, flexible wire with cable end sleeves 1 mm2/18 AWG
Maximum cross section to control terminals, flexible wire with cable end sleeves with collar 0.5 mm2/20 AWG
Minimum cross section to control terminals 0.25 mm2/ 24 AWG
* Power cables, see tables in section “Electrical Data” of the Design Guide

For more information, see section Electrical Data in the VLT AutomationDrive Design Guide, MG.33.BX.YY.
Control card performance:

Scan interval FC 301: 5 ms / FC 302: 1 ms
Control characteristics:
Resolution of output frequency at 0 - 1000 Hz +/- 0.003 Hz
Repeat accuracy of Precise start/stop (terminals 18, 19) ≤± 0.1 msec
System response time (terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33) ≤ 2 ms
Speed control range (open loop) 1:100 of synchronous speed
Speed control range (closed loop) 1:1000 of synchronous speed
Speed accuracy (open loop) 30 - 4000 rpm: error ±8 rpm
Speed accuracy (closed loop), depending on resolution of feedback device 0 - 6000 rpm: error ±0.15 rpm
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor
Surroundings:
5
Enclosure IP 201)/ Type 1, IP 212)/ Type 1, IP 55/ Type 12, IP 66
Vibration test 1.0 g
Max. relative humidity 5% - 93%(IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 60068-2-43) H2S test class Kd
Ambient temperature3) Max. 50 °C (24-hour average maximum 45 °C)
1) Only for ≤ 3.7 kW (200 - 240 V), ≤ 7.5 kW (400 - 480/ 500 V)
2) As enclosure kit for ≤ 3.7 kW (200 - 240 V), ≤ 7.5 kW (400 - 480/ 500 V)
3) Derating for high ambient temperature, see special conditions in the Design Guide
Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation 0 °C

Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance - 10 °C
Temperature during storage/transport -25 - +65/70 °C
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating 1000 m
Derating for high altitude, see special conditions in the Design Guide
EMC standards, Emission EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-3/4, EN 55011

EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-1/2,
EMC standards, Immunity EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6
See section on special conditions in the AF-650 GP Design Guide.
Protection and Features:
• Electronic thermal motor protection against overload.
• Temperature monitoring of the heatsink ensures that the frequency converter trips if the temperature reaches a predefined level. An overload
temperature cannot be reset until the temperature of the heatsink is below the values stated in the tables on the following pages (Guideline -
these temperatures may vary for different power sizes, frame sizes, enclosure ratings etc.).
• The frequency converter is protected against short-circuits on motor terminals U, V, W.
• If a mains phase is missing, the frequency converter trips or issues a warning (depending on the load).
• Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the frequency converter trips if the intermediate circuit voltage is too low or too high.
• The frequency converter constantly checks for critical levels of internal temperature, load current, high voltage on the intermediate circuit and
low motor speeds. As a response to a critical level, the frequency converter can adjust the switching frequency and/ or change the switching
pattern in order to ensure the performance of the drive.

6 Troubleshooting Instructions

Instructions 6 Troubleshooting
6 Troubleshooting
6.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages
A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant LED on the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a code on the display.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer present. Under certain circumstances operation of the motor may still be continued. Warning messages
may be critical, but are not necessarily so.
In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter will have tripped. Alarms must be reset to restart operation once their cause has been rectified.
This may be done in three ways:

1. By using the [RESET] control button on the LCP control panel.
2. Via a digital input with the “Reset” function.
3. Via serial communication/optional fieldbus.
6
NB!
After a manual reset using the [RESET] button on the LCP, the [AUTO ON] button must be pressed to restart the motor.
If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked (see also table on following page).
Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection, meaning that the mains supply must be switched off before the alarm can be reset. After being
switched back on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and may be reset as described above once the cause has been rectified.
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the automatic reset function in par. 14-20 Reset Mode (Warning: automatic wake-up is possible!)
If a warning and alarm is marked against a code in the table on the following page, this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm, or else that
you can specify whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be displayed for a given fault.
This is possible, for instance, in par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on coasting, and the alarm and warning
flash. Once the problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues flashing until the frequency converter is reset.

No. Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

Reference
1 10 Volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) par. 6-01 Live Zero Time-
out Function
3 No motor (X) par. 1-80 Function at
Stop
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) par. 14-12 Function at
Mains Imbalance
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC over-voltage X X
8 DC under voltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR over temperature (X) (X) par. 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
11 Motor thermistor over temperature (X) (X) par. 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
12 Torque limit X X
13 Over Current X X X
14 Earth Fault X X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short Circuit X X
17 Control word time-out (X) (X) par. 8-04 Control Word
6 22
23
Hoist Mech. Brake
Internal Fan Fault X
Timeout Function
24 External Fan Fault X par. 14-53 Fan Monitor

25 Brake resistor short-circuited X
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) par. 2-13 Brake Power
Monitoring
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) par. 2-15 Brake Check
29 Heatsink temp X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) par. 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) par. 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) par. 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
33 Inrush Fault X X
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X
36 Mains failure X X
38 Internal Fault X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) par. 5-00 Digital I/O
Mode, par. 5-01 Terminal
27 Mode
41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) par. 5-00 Digital I/O
Mode, par. 5-02 Terminal
29 Mode
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/6 (X) par. 5-32 Term X30/6
Digi Out (MCB 101)
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/7 (X) par. 5-33 Term X30/7
Digi Out (MCB 101)
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
Table 6.1: Alarm/Warning code list

No. Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

Reference
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA parameter out of range X
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA time-out X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
61 Tracking Error (X) (X) par. 4-30 Motor Feed-
back Loss Function
62 Output Frequency at Maximum Limit X
63 Mechanical Brake Low (X) par. 2-20 Release Brake

Current
64 Voltage Limit X
65 Control Board Over-temperature X X X

66 Heat sink Temperature Low X
67 Option Configuration has Changed X
68 Safe Stop (X) (X)1) par. 5-19 Terminal 37
Safe Stop
69 Pwr. Card Temp X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X X1) par. 5-19 Terminal 37
6
Safe Stop
72 Dangerous Failure X1) par. 5-19 Terminal 37
Safe Stop
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart
77 Reduced power mode X par. 14-59 Actual Num-
ber of Inverter Units
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive Initialized to Default Value X
81 CSIV corrupt
82 CSIV parameter error
85 Profibus/Profisafe Error
90 Encoder Loss (X) (X) par. 17-61 Feedback
Signal Monitoring
91 Analogue input 54 wrong settings X S202
100-199 See Operating Instructions for MCO 305
243 Brake IGBT X X
244 Heatsink temp X X X
245 Heatsink sensor X X
246 Pwr.card supply X X
247 Pwr.card temp X X
248 Illegal PS config X X
250 New spare part X par. 14-23 Typecode
Setting
251 New Type Code X X
Table 6.2: Alarm/Warning code list
(X) Dependent on parameter

1) Can not be Auto reset via par. 14-20 Reset Mode
A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip will coast the motor and can be reset by pressing the reset button or make a reset by a digital
input (Par. 5-1* [1]). The origin event that caused an alarm cannot damage the frequency converter or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an
action when an alarm occurs, which may cause damage to frequency converter or connected parts. A Trip Lock situation can only be reset by a power
cycling.
LED indication
Warning yellow
Alarm flashing red
Trip locked yellow and red

Alarm Word Extended Status Word

Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Alarm Word 2 Warning Word Warning Extended
Word 2 Status Word
0 00000001 1 Brake Check ServiceTrip, Read/ Brake Check Ramping
Write
1 00000002 2 Pwr. Card Temp ServiceTrip, (re- Pwr. Card Temp AMA Running
served)
2 00000004 4 Earth Fault ServiceTrip, Type- Earth Fault Start CW/CCW
code/Sparepart
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.Card Temp ServiceTrip, (re- Ctrl.Card Temp Slow Down
served)
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO ServiceTrip, (re- Ctrl. Word TO Catch Up
served)
5 00000020 32 Over Current Over Current Feedback High
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit Torque Limit Feedback Low
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over Motor Th Over Output Current High
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Over Motor ETR Over Output Current Low
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Inverter Overld. Output Freq High
10 00000400 1024 DC under Volt DC under Volt Output Freq Low
11 00000800 2048 DC over Volt DC over Volt Brake Check OK
12 00001000 4096 Short Circuit DC Voltage Low Braking Max
13 00002000 8192 Inrush Fault DC Voltage High Braking
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. Loss Mains ph. Loss Out of Speed Range
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK No Motor OVC Active
6 16
17
18
00010000
00020000
00040000
65536
131072
262144
Live Zero Error
Internal Fault
Brake Overload
KTY error
Fans error
Live Zero Error
10V Low
Brake Overload
KTY Warn
Fans Warn
AC Brake
Password Timelock
Password Protection
19 00080000 524288 U phase Loss ECB error Brake Resistor ECB Warn
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss Brake IGBT
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss Speed Limit
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus Fault Fieldbus Fault Unused
23 00800000 8388608 24 V Supply Low 24V Supply Low Unused
24 01000000 16777216 Mains Failure Mains Failure Unused
25 02000000 33554432 1.8V Supply Low Current Limit Unused
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor Low Temp Unused
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT Voltage Limit Unused
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change Encoder loss Unused
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialized Output freq. lim. Unused
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop (A68) PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop (W68) PTC 1 Safe Unused
(A71) Stop (W71)
31 80000000 2147483648 Mech. brake low Dangerous Failure Extended Status Word Unused
(A72)
Table 6.3: Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for diagnose. See alsopar. 16-94 Ext.
Status Word.
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low: WARNING 6, DC link voltage low

The 10 V voltage from terminal 50 on the control card is below 10 V. The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is below the undervoltage limit of
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V supply is over- the control system. The frequency converter is still active.
loaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω. WARNING/ALARM 7, DC over voltage:
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error: If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the frequency con-
The signal on terminal 53 or 54 is less than 50% of the value set in par. verter trips after a time.
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage, par. 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, par.
Possible corrections:
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage, or par. 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current Connect a brake resistor
respectively.
Extend the ramp time
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor:
Activate functions in par. 2-10 Brake Function
No motor has been connected to the output of the frequency converter.
Increase par. 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss:
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains voltage imbalance is
too high.
This message also appears in case of a fault in the input rectifier on the
Check the supply voltage and supply currents to the frequency converter.
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high:

The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the overvoltage limit
of the control system. The frequency converter is still active.

ALARM 14, Earth fault:

Alarm/warning limits:
3 x 200 - 240 3 x 380 - 500 3 x 525 - 600 V There is a discharge from the output phases to earth, either in the cable
V V between the frequency converter and the motor or in the motor itself.
[VDC] [VDC] [VDC]
Undervoltage 185 373 532 Turn off the frequency converter and remove the earth fault.
Voltage warning low 205 410 585
ALARM 15, Incomplete hardware:
Voltage warning 390/405 810/840 943/965
high (w/o brake - w/ A fitted option is not handled by the present control board (hardware or
brake) software).
Overvoltage 410 855 975
ALARM 16, Short-circuit
The voltages stated are the intermediate circuit voltage of the fre-
quency converter with a tolerance of ± 5 %. The corresponding There is short-circuiting in the motor or on the motor terminals.
mains voltage is the intermediate circuit voltage (DC-link) divided Turn off the frequency converter and remove the short-circuit.
by 1.35
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout:
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage:
The warning will only be active when par. 8-04 Control Word Timeout
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops below the “voltage warning
low” limit (see table above), the frequency converter checks if 24 V back-
Function is NOT set to OFF.
If par. 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to Stop and Trip, a
up supply is connected.
warning appears and the frequency converter ramps down until it trips,
If no 24 V backup supply is connected, the frequency converter trips after
while giving an alarm.
a given time depending on the unit.
To check whether the supply voltage matches the frequency converter,
par. 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time could possibly be increased. 6
see General Specifications. WARNING 23, Internal fan fault:
The fan warning function is an extra protection function that checks if the
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overloaded:
fan is running / mounted. The fan warning can be disabled in par.
The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an overload (too
14-53 Fan Monitor (set to [0] Disabled).
high current for too long). The counter for electronic, thermal inverter
protection gives a warning at 98% and trips at 100%, while giving an WARNING 24, External fan fault:
alarm. You cannot reset the frequency converter until the counter is be- The fan warning function is an extra protection function that checks if the
low 90%. fan is running / mounted. The fan warning can be disabled in par.
The fault is that the frequency converter is overloaded by more than 14-53 Fan Monitor (set to [0] Disabled).
100% for too long. WARNING 25, Brake resistor short-circuited:
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor ETR over temperature: The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If it short-circuits, the
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the motor is too hot. brake function is disconnected and the warning appears. The frequency
You can choose if you want the frequency converter to give a warning or converter still works, but without the brake function. Turn off the fre-
an alarm when the counter reaches 100% in par. 1-90 Motor Thermal quency converter and replace the brake resistor (see par. 2-15 Brake
Protection. The fault is that the motor is overloaded by more than 100% Check).
for too long. Check that the motor par. 1-24 Motor Current is set correctly. ALARM/WARNING 26, Brake resistor power limit:
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp: The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as a percentage,
The thermistor or the thermistor connection is disconnected. You can as a mean value over the last 120 s, on the basis of the resistance value
choose if you want the frequency converter to give a warning or an alarm of the brake resistor (par. 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)) and the intermedi-
when the counter reaches 100% in par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. ate circuit voltage. The warning is active when the dissipated braking
Check that the thermistor is connected correctly between terminal 53 or power is higher than 90%. If Trip [2] has been selected in par.
54 (analog voltage input) and terminal 50 (+ 10 V supply), or between 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring, the frequency converter cuts out and is-
terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only) and terminal 50. If aKTY sen- sues this alarm, when the dissipated braking power is higher than 100%.
soris used, check for correct connection between terminal 54 and 55. ALARM/ WARNING 27, Brake chopper fault:
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit: The brake transistor is monitored during operation and if it short-circuits,
The torque is higher than the value in par. 4-16 Torque Limit Motor the brake function disconnects and the warning comes up. The frequency
Mode (in motor operation) or the torque is higher than the value in par. converter is still able to run, but since the brake transistor has short-
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode (in regenerative operation). circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake resistor, even if it
is inactive.
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over Current:
Turn off the frequency converter and remove the brake resistor.
The inverter peak current limit (approx. 200% of the rated current) is
This alarm/ warning could also occur should the brake resistor overheat.
exceeded. The warning will last approx. 8-12 sec., then the frequency
Terminal 104 to 106 are available as brake resistor. Klixon inputs, see
converter trips and issues an alarm. Turn off the frequency converter and
section Brake Resistor Temperature Switch.
check if the motor shaft can be turned and if the motor size matches the
Warning: There is a risk of substantial power being
If extended mechanical brake control is selected, trip can be reset exter-
transmitted to the brake resistor if the brake transistor
nally.
is short-circuited.

ALARM/WARNING 28, Brake check failed: 1536 An exception in the Application Orientated Control is
registered. Debug information written in LCP
Brake resistor fault: the brake resistor is not connected/working. 1792 DSP watchdog is active. Debugging of power part data
Motor Orientated Control data not transferred correctly
ALARM 29, Drive over temperature:
2049 Power data restarted
If the enclosure is IP 20 or IP 21/Type 1, the cut-out temperature of the 2315 Missing SW version from power unit
heat-sink is 95 oC +5 oC. The temperature fault cannot be reset, until the 2816 Stack overflow Control board module
2817 Scheduler slow tasks
temperature of the heatsink is below 70 oC +5 oC. 2818 Fast tasks
2819 Parameter thread
The fault could be: 2820 LCP stack overflow
- Ambient temperature too high
- Too long motor cable 2821 Serial port overflow

2822 USB port overflow
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing:
3072-512 Parameter value is outside its limits. Perform a initiali-
Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the the motor is 2 zation. Parameter number causing the alarm: Subtract
missing. the code from 3072. Ex Error code 3238: 3238-3072 =
166 is outside the limit
Turn off the frequency converter and check motor phase U. 5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with Control
board hardware
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing: 5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with Control
Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the motor is missing. board hardware
5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with Control
Turn off the frequency converter and check motor phase V.
board hardware
6 ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing:
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the motor is miss-
5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with Control
board hardware
5376-623 Out of memory
ing. 1
Turn off the frequency converter and check motor phase W.
WARNING 40, Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27
ALARM 33, Inrush fault:
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove short-circuit connec-
Too many power ups have occured within a short time period. See the
tion. Check par. 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and par. 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
chapter General Specifications for the allowed number of power ups with-
in one minute. WARNING 41, Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29:
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove short-circuit connec-
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault:
tion. Check par. 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and par. 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
The fieldbus on the communication option card is not working correctly.
Please check parameters associated with the module and make sure WARNING 42, Overload of Digital Output On X30/6 :
module is properly inserted in Slot A of the drive. Check the load connected to X30/6 or remove short-circuit connection.
Check par. 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101).
WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure:
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to the frequency WARNING 42, Overload of Digital Output On X30/7 :
converter is lost and par. 14-10 Mains Failure is NOT set to OFF. Possible Check the load connected to X30/7 or remove short-circuit connection.
correction: check the fuses to the frequency converter Check par. 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101).
ALARM 38, Internal fault: WARNING 47, 24 V supply low:
By this alarm it may be necessary to contact your Danfoss supplier. Some The external 24 V DC backup power supply may be overloaded, otherwise
typical alarm messages: Contact your Danfoss supplier.
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low:

0 The serial port cannot be initialized. Serious hardware Contact your Danfoss supplier.
failure
256 The power EEPROM data is defect or too old WARNING 49, Speed limit:
512 The control board EEPROM data is defect or too old
The speed is not within the specified range in par. 4-11 Motor Speed Low
513 Communication time out Reading EEPROM data
514 Communication time out Reading EEPROM data Limit [RPM] and par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
515 The Application Orientated Control cannot recognize the
EEPROM data ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed:
516 Cannot write write to the EEPROM because a write com- Contact your Danfoss supplier.
mand is on progress
517 The write command is under time out ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom:
518 Failure in the EEPROM
The setting of motor voltage, motor current, and motor power is pre-
519 Missing or invalid BarCode data in EEPROM 1024 – 1279
CAN telegram cannot be sent. (1027 indicate a possible sumably wrong. Check the settings.
hardware failure)
1281 Digital Signal Processor flash time-out ALARM 52, AMA low Inom:
1282 Power micro software version mismatch The motor current is too low. Check the settings.
1283 Power EEPROM data version mismatch
1284 Cannot read Digital Signal Processor software version ALARM 53, AMA motor too big:
1299 Option SW in slot A is too old
The motor is too big for the AMA to be carried out.
1300 Option SW in slot B is too old
1311 Option SW in slot C0 is too old ALARM 54, AMA motor too small:
1312 Option SW in slot C1 is too old
1315 Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed) The motor is too small for the AMA to be carried out.
1316 Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed)
1317 Option SW in slot C0 is not supported (not allowed)
1318 Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not allowed)

ALARM 55, AMA par. out of range: tivated. When that happens, a reset signal must be is be sent (via Bus,
The motor parameter values found from the motor are outside acceptable Digital I/O, or by pressing [RESET]).
range. WARNING 71, PTC 1 Safe Stop:
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user: Safe Stop has been activated from the MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card
The AMA has been interrupted by the user. (motor too warm). Normal operation can be resumed when the MCB 112
ALARM 57, AMA timeout: applies 24 V DC to T-37 again (when the motor temperature reaches an
acceptable level) and when the Digital Input from the MCB 112 is deac-
Try to start the AMA again a number of times, until the AMA is carried
out. Please note that repeated runs may heat the motor to a level where tivated. Warning: Automatic Restart.
the resistance Rs and Rr are increased. In most cases, however, this is ALARM 72, Dangerous Failure:
not critical. Safe Stop with Trip Lock. Unexpected signal levels on Safe Stop and Dig-
ital Input from the MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card.
ALARM 58, AMA internal fault:
Contact your Danfoss supplier. ALARM 80, Drive Initialised to Default Value:
WARNING 59, Current limit: Parameter settings are initialised to default setting after a manual (three-
The current is higher than the value in par. 4-18 Current Limit. finger) reset.
ALARM 90, Encoder loss:

WARNING 61, Tracking Error:
An error between calculated speed and speed measurement from feed- Check the connection to encoder option and eventually replace the MCB
6
back device. The function Warning/Alarm/Disabling setting is in par. 102.
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function. Accepted error setting in par. ALARM 91, Analogue Input 54 Wrong Settings:
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error and the allowed time the error occur Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input) when a KTY
setting in par. 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout. During a commission- sensor is connected to analogue input terminal 54.
ing procedure the function may be effective. ALARM 250, New Spare Part:
WARNING 62, Output Frequency at Maximum Limit: The power or Switch Mode Power Supply has been exchanged. The fre-
The output frequency is higher than the value set in par. 4-19 Max Output quency converter type code must be restored in the EEPROM. Select the
Frequency correct type code in par. 14-23 Typecode Setting according to the label
ALARM 63, Mechanical Brake Low: on unit. Remember to select ‘Save to EEPROM’ to complete.
The actual motor current has not exceeded the “release brake” current ALARM 251, New Type Code:
within the “Start delay” time window. The Frequency Converter has got a new type code.
WARNING 64, Voltage Limit:

The load and speed combination demands a motor voltage higher than
the actual DC link voltage.
WARNING/ALARM/TRIP 65, Control Card Over Temperature:

Control card over temperature: The cut-out temperature of the control
card is 80° C.
WARNING 66, Heatsink Temperature Low:

The heat sink temperature is measured as 0° C. This could indicate that
the temperature sensor is defect and thus the fan speed is increased to
the maximum in case the power part or control card is very hot.
ALARM 67, Option Configuration has Changed:

One or more options has either been added or removed since the last
power down.
ALARM 68, Safe Stop:

Safe Stop has been activated. To resume normal operation, apply 24 V
DC to T-37, then send a reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or by pressing
[RESET]).
WARNING 68, Safe Stop:

Safe Stop has been activated. Normal operation is resumed when Safe
Stop is disabled. Warning: Automatic Restart!
ALARM 70, Illegal FC Configuration:

Actual combination of control board and power board is illegal.
ALARM 71, PTC 1 Safe Stop:

Safe Stop has been activated from the MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card
(motor too warm). Normal operation can be resumed when the MCB 112
applies 24 V DC to T-37 again (when the motor temperature reaches an
acceptable level) and when the Digital Input from the MCB 112 is deac-

Index Instructions
Index
1
101 38
102 37
A
Abbreviations 5
Access To Control Terminals 26
Activate Brake Delay 2-23 50
[Activate Brake Speed Hz] 2-22 50
[Activate Brake Speed Rpm] 2-21 50
Alarm Messages 97
Ama 33
Analog Inputs 92
Analog Output 93
Approvals 4
Automatic Motor Adaptation (ama) 33, 42
B
Brake Check 2-15 49
Brake Control 101
Brake Function 2-10 47
Brake Power Limit (kw) 2-12 48
Brake Power Monitoring 2-13 48
Brake Release Time 2-25 51
Brake Resistor (ohm) 2-11 48
C
Cable Lengths And Cross Sections 94
Cable Lengths And Cross Sections-continued 95
Catch Up 56
Checklist 11
Communication Option 102
Connection To Mains 17
Control Cables 31
Control Cables 30
Control Card Performance 95
Control Card, +10 V Dc Output 93
Control Card, 24 V Dc Output 93
Control Card, Rs 485 Serial Communication 93
Control Card, Usb Serial Communication 94
Control Characteristics 95
Control Terminals 27
Cooling 45
Cooling Conditions 14
D
Dc Backup 3
Dc Link 100
Decoupling Plate 20
Default Settings 63
Devicenet 3
Digital I/o Mode 5-00 53
Digital Inputs: 91
Digital Output 93
Disposal Instruction 5
E
Electrical Installation 27, 30
Electrical Terminals 30
Electronic Terminal Relay 47
Etr 101

Instructions Index
F
Function Relay 5-40 59
Fuses 23
G
Gain Boost Factor 2-28 51
General Warning 8
Graphical Display 37
I
Intermediate Circuit 100
Ip21 / Type 1 3
J
[Jog Speed Hz] 3-11 52
K
Kty Sensor 101
L
Language 0-01 40
Language Package 1 40
Lcp Copy 0-50 44
Leakage Current 8
Leds 37, 38
Local Control Panel 38
M
Main Reactance 42
Mains Supply (l1, L2, L3) 91
Maximum Reference 3-03 43
Mct 10 3
Mechanical Brake Control 35
Mechanical Dimensions 11
Mechanical Mounting 14
Minimum Reference 3-02 43
Motor Connection 20
Motor Current 1-24 41
Motor Frequency 1-23 41
Motor Name Plate 33
Motor Nominal Speed 1-25 41
Motor Output 91
[Motor Power Kw] 1-20 40
Motor Protection 45, 95
Motor Speed Unit 0-02 44
Motor Thermal Protection 35, 45
Motor Voltage 1-22 41
N
Name Plate Data 33
Non Ul Compliance 23
Numerical Display 38
O
Operation Mode 14-22 61
Output Performance (u, V, W) 91
Overload Mode 1-04 44

Index Instructions
P
Panel Through Mounting 15
Parallel Connection Of Motors 35
Potentiometer Reference 29
Preset Reference 3-10 51
Profibus 3
Protection 23
Protection And Features 95
Pulse Start/stop 28
Pulse/encoder Inputs 93
R
Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 3-42 43
Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time 3-41 43
Reference Resource 1 3-15 52
Relay Outputs 57
Relay Outputs 94
Release Brake Current 2-20 50
Removal Of Knockouts For Extra Cables 16
Repair Work 8
Residual Current Device 8
Rfi Filter 14-50 62
S
Safe Stop 8
Safety Precautions 7
Screened/armoured 31
Serial Communication 93
Shaft Performance Levels. 3
Side-by-side Installation 14
Sine-wave Filter 23
Software Version 15-43 62
Speed Up/down 29
Start/stop 28
Stator Leakage Reactance 42
Status Messages 37
Stop Delay 2-24 50
Surroundings 95
Switches S201, S202, And S801 32
Symbols 4
T
Terminal 27 Mode 5-01 53
Terminal 29 Mode 5-02 53
Thermistor 45
Thermistor Source 1-93 47
Torque Characteristics 91
Torque Characteristics 1-03 44
Torque Ramp Time 2-27 51
Torque Ref 2-26 51
U
Unintended Start 8
V
Voltage Level 91
Voltage Reference Via A Potentiometer 29
W
Warnings 97

Instruction manual
Designation: Centrifuge with self-cleaning bowl
Type: VSE 40-02-007
No. 2063-9001-420 | Edition 0815

2 2063-9001-420 / 0815
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL


tions for improving the documentation. These can be sent
to:

Werner-Habig-Straße 1, 59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax: +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com

2063-9001-420 / 0815 3

Type Serial-No.
Year of manufacture
-1
Max. permitted rated bowl speed in min
3
Max. permitted density of feed product in kg/dm
3
Heavy liquid kg/dm
3 Solids kg/dm
3
min./max. Throughput m /h
min./max. Temperature of feed product in °C
min./max. Housing pressure range in bar
This nameplate must be filled in by the user.

Please transfer the data from the nameplate on the separator.

4 2063-9001-420 / 0815
For your safety

• Take special care when carrying out steps marked with this sym-
bol –
otherwise there will be a hazard to life and limb!
• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.

This avoids damage or destruction of the separator and other equip-
ment.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation to improve understanding of the separator or of the installation
components and the processes.
• Observe accident prevention regulations!

Local safety and accident prevention regulations apply to operation of
the separator under all circumstances. The owner/operator must en-
sure compliance with these regulations.
• When electrical machines are operated, some components carry

a hazardous voltage.
Take adequate preventive measures according to national regulations
(in Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE
(Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical
Engineering) or those of the local energy supply company) before
starting work on electrical components.
Ignoring preventive measures can result in severe personal injury or
material damage.
Any work on electrical equipment may only be carried out by an au-
thorized professional electrician.
• Only qualified or authorized specialist staff may operate, maintain

and repair the separator.
The corresponding training sessions are held on the manufacturer's
premises or are conducted by the manufacturer on the customer's
premises.
• Refer to the instruction manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance tasks which extend beyond the scope de-
scribed in these instructions may not be carried out.
• Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process

and operating parameters.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 5
• Service the separator

as specified in this manual.
• Carry out safety checks on the separator,

as described in the chapter "Safety precautions" in this manual.
• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

In any event, liability for the function of the machine passes to the
owner or operator, irrespective of existing warranty and guarantee pe-
riods, insofar as the machine is incorrectly maintained or repaired by
persons other than GEA Westfalia Separator Service staff or if the ma-
chine is handled in a manner not in accordance with the intended use.
GEA Westfalia Separator Group shall not be liable for damage which
occurs as a result of non-compliance with the above. Warranty and li-
ability conditions in GEA Westfalia Separator Group's Terms and Con-
ditions of Sale and Delivery are not extended by the notes above.

6 2063-9001-420 / 0815
1 Reliability 9
1.1 Intended use .......................................................................................... 10

1.2 Non-compliance with intended use ........................................................ 11
1.3 Safety marking ....................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meanings ..................................................... 13
1.4 Operating principles ............................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.1 Requirements on operating and repair staff .......................................... 18
1.5.2 Requirements to be met by spare parts ................................................ 19
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 23
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency Stop” ........................................................ 27
1.5.8 If power is interrupted during operation ................................................. 28
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 29
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 Product hazards ..................................................................................... 36
1.9 Hazards caused by cleaning liquid ........................................................ 36
2 Description of the machine 37
2.1 Dimensional drawing of the separator ................................................... 38

2.2 General .................................................................................................. 38
2.3 Separator ............................................................................................... 39
2.4 Main parts of the separator .................................................................... 40
2.4.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 42
2.4.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 43
2.4.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 44
2.4.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 47
2.4.5 Solenoid valve block .............................................................................. 48
2.5 Water pressure reducer (with pressure gauge) (option) ........................ 50
2.6 Regulating ring ....................................................................................... 51
2.6.1 Determining the regulating ring by experiment ...................................... 52
2.7 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 54
2.7.1 Vibration monitoring (option).................................................................. 54
2.7.2 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 55
2.8 Standard tools ........................................................................................ 56
2.9 Special tools .......................................................................................... 58
2.9.1 Using load-carrying equipment safely ................................................... 60
2.9.2 Using lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts as load handling devices ........ 60
2.11 Screw torques ........................................................................................ 65
2.11.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm).................................................. 65
2.11.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ....................................... 66
3 Operation 67
3.1 Technical Information ............................................................................ 68

3.1.1 Separation.............................................................................................. 68
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68

2063-9001-420 / 0815 7
3.2 Before starting-up .................................................................................. 70

3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting up the separator ....................................................................... 73
3.4 Monitoring operation .............................................................................. 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 75
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 75
3.6 Bowl ejection .......................................................................................... 76
3.7 Performing CIP (cleaning-in-place) ....................................................... 77
3.7.1 CIP cleaning program sequence (example) .......................................... 78
3.8 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 79
3.8.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.9 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.9.1 Faults on the separator .......................................................................... 82
3.9.2 Faults on the bowl .................................................................................. 84
4 Installation - maintenance - repair 91
4.1 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 92

4.1.1 Transporting the separator .................................................................... 93
4.1.2 Before installing the separator ............................................................... 94
4.1.3 Setting up the separator ........................................................................ 94
4.1.4 Motor ...................................................................................................... 96
4.1.5 Direction of rotation of the bowl ............................................................. 99
4.1.6 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 100
4.2 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 101
4.2.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 102
4.2.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 113
4.2.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 115
4.2.4 Lubrication instructions ........................................................................ 118
4.2.5 Lubricating oil table .............................................................................. 120
4.2.6 Notes on the lubricating oil table for separators from
GEA Westfalia Separator Group ......................................................... 121
4.3 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 122
4.3.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 124
4.3.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 144
4.3.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 145
4.3.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 146
4.3.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 146
4.3.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 147
4.3.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 149
4.3.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top) ......................................... 165
4.3.9 Replacing the polyamide gasket (annular piston)................................ 167
4.3.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 174
4.4 Assembling the hood ........................................................................... 175
4.4.1 Mounting the hood ............................................................................... 177
4.7 Final inspection after repairing the separator ...................................... 218
4.8 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 218
4.8.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 218
4.8.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 219
4.9 Storage ................................................................................................ 220
4.9.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 220
4.9.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 220
4.9.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 221
4.10 Before restarting .................................................................................. 221
4.11 Disposal ............................................................................................... 222
4.11.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 222

8 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.11.2 Cleaning fluids ..................................................................................... 223

4.11.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 223
5 Spare parts 225
5.1 Requirements to be met by spare parts .............................................. 226

5.2 Instructions for ordering spare parts .................................................... 226

2063-9001-420 / 0815 9
1 Reliability
1.1 Intended use .......................................................................................... 10

1.2 Non-compliance with intended use ........................................................ 11
1.3 Safety marking ....................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meanings ..................................................... 13
1.4 Operating principles ............................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.1 Requirements on operating and repair staff .......................................... 18
1.5.2 Requirements to be met by spare parts ................................................ 19
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 23
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency Stop” ........................................................ 27
1.5.8 If power is interrupted during operation ................................................. 28
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 29
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 Product hazards ..................................................................................... 36
1.9 Hazards caused by cleaning liquid ........................................................ 36

10 2063-9001-420 / 0815
1.1 Intended use

Centrifugal separators – called "separators" for short – are used
• to separate liquid mixtures which consist of two liquids, with solids contained
in the liquids being separated off at the same time.
• to separate (clarify) solids from a liquid.
The separator is designed

• for a very high bowl speed.
Permitted speed depends on the chemical and physical properties of the
product:
– temperature
– density of the liquid and solid components.
• for products which do not contain any corrosive and erosive components.
The aggressivity of the product affects the careful choice of material for the
bowl.
Only products which comply with the details given on the nameplate of the
separator may be processed!
• in accordance with the method of use of the separator agreed with GEA
Westfalia Separator Group. Refer to the data sheet and contractual agree-
ments.
• to suit the permitted consumables (cleaning agents, lubricants, operating liq-
uids etc.) which are quoted in the documentation or on the operating data
sheet.
Intended use includes

• following these safety instructions, the separator manual and safety marking
on the separator.
• compliance with the data quoted on the nameplate, e.g. maximum permitted
bowl speed.
For more information about the intended use of the separator, such as
– agreed spheres,
– product density,
– throughputs,
– temperatures,
– pressures etc.,
see the documentation or the operating data sheet associated with the docu-
mentation.
The owner/operator must inform operating staff of the conditions for intended
use of the separator contractually agreed with GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
Any operating mode deviating from this is not intended use and may lead
to severe material damage and personal injury!

2063-9001-420 / 0815 11
1.2 Non-compliance with intended use

Any use other than the intended use is considered not in accordance with
purpose!
The separator may not be operated by:

• people who have not read and understood these essential safety instructions.
• people who have not read and understood the separator manual.
• people who have not been briefed on operation in accordance with intended
purpose.
• people who have not been adequately trained.
• people who have not reached the minimum age of 18.
The separator may not be operated

• if the product fed in does not comply with the details on the nameplate.
– product has too high a density
– solids have too high a density
– product has too high a temperature
• if the max. permitted bowl speed is exceeded as a result of electrical or elec-
tronic manipulation at the drive.
• when assembly is incomplete, e.g.:
– required monitoring devices are not activated or have been disabled.
– required protective or safety covers have not been installed.
• by people who have not been adequately trained.
• if the separator is being operated with spare parts which do not originate from
GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
Use not in accordance with purpose can lead to severe material damage
and personal injury!

12 2063-9001-420 / 0815
1.3 Safety marking

On all separators, safety markings (adhesive/metal labels) are applied in clearly
visible locations on the hood and on the frame of the separator in question.
All the safety markings on the separator, control unit and parts of the system
must always be in perfect condition:
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
Fig. 1 Example labelling of a separator
1 Warning symbol (safety sticker)

2 Oil quality
3 Labels
4 Nameplate
5 Company label
The texts and the part numbers of the safety labels vary depending on the lan-
guage version ordered by the customer.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 13
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meanings

The following safety markings are attached to the separator as adhesive labels:
Fig. 2
Refer to machine documenta-

tion!
• Any person who is assigned the task
of installing, operating, maintaining
and repairing the machine must
have read and understood the doc-
umentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete, kept near to the machine and
be readily accessible to operating
personnel. It must be available to
operators at all times!
Fig. 3
Release before starting work!

Danger of injury from electrical voltage
and unintentional start-up of the sepa-
rator!
Before working on the separator

and electrical plant components:
• ensure that the separator is at a
standstill.
via the main switch.
• Secure the plant against unintended
Fig. 4 restarting with locking devices.

14 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Danger to life and limb from ro-

tating machine parts!
• Do not loosen any part and do not
carry out any maintenance or re-
pair work on the separator before
the bowl has come to a standstill.
Methods of checking standstill are
described in the machine documen-
tation.
Fig. 5
Warning of unusual noises or

vibrations!
If unusual noises or vibrations occur
• shut down the separator with filled

on the separator:
bowl immediately using "Emergency
• Never initiate a bowl ejection!

Stop".
• Evacuate the room.

• Do not enter the room again until the
separator has come to a standstill.
Fig. 6
Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency convert-
er, do not exceed permitted bowl
speed (see nameplate)!
Note:
This adhesive label is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 7
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the separator and

parts of the system may be hot!
Note:
This adhesive label is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 8

2063-9001-420 / 0815 15
Hazard due to electrical voltage!

Ignoring preventive measures can
result in personal injury/material dam-
age.
Before any work on electrical parts

of the separator/system:
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
Parts marked in this way may be live even when the main switch is off!
• Secure the system against being switched back on unintentionally using a

locking device.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to national regulations (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/Association of German Electrical Engineering or of
the local energy supply company)).
• The work to be carried out may only be carried out by competent people
(qualified specialist staff).
Warning symbols with warning text

Warning symbols may have meaningful additions as shown in the two examples
which follow.
– With warning text (with ... switched off. . .),
– with signal word (WARNING!) and warning text.
Bei ausgeschaltetem Sous tension même

Hazard due to external voltage!
Hauptschalter en position d’arrêt de
unter Spannung! l’interrupteur principal !
Voltage also present Con el interruptor

Live even when main switch is off!
when main principal desconectado se
switch is turned off! encuentra bajo tensión!
CAUTION:
Circuits marked in this way are live
even when the main switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1

16 2063-9001-420 / 0815
ACHTUNG! Hazard due to external voltage!

Auch bei ausgeschaltetem
Hauptschalter können
orangefarbige Leitungen
unter Spannung stehen.
NOTICE!
ATTENTION!
Even when the main switch is off, or-
Also in case of switched off ange cables may be live.
main isolator orange coloured cores
can be under voltage.
ATTENTION!
Lorsque le commutateur principal
est éteint les files orange CAUTION:
peuvent être sous tension. Circuits marked in this way are live
even when the main switch is off!
Fig. 11 Example 2
Note:
Orange cables are installed as standard at GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
Cables in other colours may be installed on a customer-specific basis!
Equipotential bonding (protec-

tive earth connection)
Protective earthing is a measure which
in the event of a fault, routes a haz-
ardous contact voltage to earth.
Fig. 12

2063-9001-420 / 0815 17
1.4 Operating principles

Separators are used to separate liquid mixtures or to separate solids from liq-
uids or liquid mixtures.
High centrifugal forces are produced in

the rotating bowl of the separator.
Fig. 13
Under the influence of centrifugal forces, the liquid mixture and/or the solids par-
ticles are separated within a very short space of time.
The higher-density components are displaced to the periphery of the bowl,
whilst the lower-density components are displaced towards the centre of the
bowl.
The high centrifugal force is produced by very high bowl speeds. On the one
hand, high bowl speeds signify high efficiency, while on the other hand, they
signify high material stressing of the separator.

18 2063-9001-420 / 0815
1.5 Operations on the separator
The separator works safely and relia-

bly, provided that it is operated and
maintained in accordance with our
operating instructions.
Fig. 14
The information below relates to:

• Assembly
• Electrical installation
• Before start-up
• Start-up
• Shut-down
• Maintenance and repair
1.5.1 Requirements on operating and repair staff

The operation, maintenance or repair of the separator or the separator system
require specialist knowledge!
CAUTION!
Operation, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
staff can lead both to faulty operation and to assembly and handling
faults, causing extremely serious personal injury and material damage.
GEA Westfalia Separator Group accepts no liability for damages caused

by unqualified or unauthorized staff!
• with a minimum age of 18 years.

For operating, maintenance and repair work, use only staff
• who provide evidence of familiarity with the state of the art as a result of brief-
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and for checking it if re-
ings and training.
quired.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized professional
electrician!
• is responsible for staff having the required skills and knowledge.

The owner/operator of the separator or separator system
• is responsible for briefing and training staff.

• must ensure that staff have read and understood the manuals required for
their work.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 19
GEA Westfalia Separator Group provides an extensive range of training and in-
service training courses. For more information, talk to GEA Westfalia Separator
Group or to an authorized agent.
1.5.2 Requirements to be met by spare parts
• Use only genuine spare parts from GEA

Westfalia Separator Group. The original
spare parts are listed in the spare parts cata-
logue.
The use of non-genuine spare parts leads to:
– safety risks,
– less durability of these parts,
– reduced availability of the separator,
Fig. 15
– increased maintenance requirement.
If a safety risk arises when non-genuine spare
parts are used, there may under certain circum-
stances be consequences under penal law for
thise involved. GEA Westfalia Separator Group
will not accept any liability or warranty in such
cases.
1.5.3 Assembly
• If the plant has several separators,

be careful not to interchange parts of
different bowls since each bowl has
been balanced individually.
The parts are marked with the serial-
number of the machine or with the
last three digits of the serial number.
Fig. 16
• Damaged parts must be replaced by

new or reconditioned parts immedi-
ately.
Fig. 17

20 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Some bowl parts may only be pre-

CAUTION:
assembled and balanced by spe-

cialists from GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator Group or in workshops au-
thorized by the company.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life and
limb.
Fig. 18
• To prevent imbalance, consult with

when replacing certain bowl parts
such as
– Lock ring
– Bowl top
– Distributor
– Bowl bottom
– Water chamber bottom
for example.
These parts
– are marked with a footnote in the
separator manual (see "Bowl"
Fig. 19 section).
– are marked with a 3 or a 4 in the
"ETS" column of the spare parts
list.
• Some bowl parts must be arranged

in fixed positions relative to one an-
• Locking devices and alignment

other.
marks must be in perfect condition.

The bowl may not be operated un-
less this is the case!
Fig. 20

2063-9001-420 / 0815 21
• Avoid crushing and shear when

transporting and assembling ma-
chine parts.
Fig. 21
• Assemble the bowl strictly in ac-

cordance with the assembly instruc-
• Before starting the bowl, be sure to

tions to avoid prohibited imbalance.
fit all parts.
Fig. 22
CAUTION:
A loose bowl lock ring can endan-
ger life!
• Tighten the bowl lock ring firmly: the

"0" marks on the bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
• Note the position of the marks!

line up.
Fig. 23
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life.
• Tighten the spindle screw to the

separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 24

22 2063-9001-420 / 0815
CAUTION:
A loose centripetal pump chamber
lock ring or lock cover can endan-
ger life!
• Likewise tighten the centripetal

pump chamber lock ring or lock cov-
er tightly (left-hand thread).
Fig. 25
• Carefully fasten hood (1), feed and

discharge housing (2) and centripe-
tal pump (3).
Fig. 26
• Ensure that the machine is fully as-

sembled and installed.
Fig. 27

2063-9001-420 / 0815 23
1.5.4 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized profes-
sional electrician!
• Local regulations for electrical instal-
lations and equipment must be ob-
served.
• Pay particular attention to the instal-
lation guidelines from GEA Westfalia
Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 28
• Install equipotential bonding.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC,
– Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004/108/EC,
– Guidelines from classification bodies.
1.5.5 Before start-up
• Check whether the bowl lock ring

has been firmly tightened.
• The "O" marks on the bowl bottom
or bowl top and on the lock ring
must be aligned.
Fig. 29
• The bowl must rotate in a clockwise

direction (see arrow indicating direc-
tion of rotation on frame or solids
catcher).
Fig. 30

24 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• The separator may only be operated

with protection devices conforming
to EN 294.
• Equip solid and liquid discharges
accordingly if appropriate.
Fig. 31
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 32
• Check that the supervisory equip-

ment is operational and the correct
limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the name-
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 33
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
• Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately by new or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 34

2063-9001-420 / 0815 25
1.5.6 Start-up
• Refer to the "Operation" section.

• Refer to the specifications on the
nameplate. The values for
– Bowl speed,
– density of the heavy liquid,
– density of solids (centrifugally dry)
are maximum values and must not
be exceeded.
Fig. 35
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 36

operation:
• Never manipulate the frequency
converter to exceed the permitted
bowl speed (see nameplate).
• The separator may only be operated
with an independent device for
speed limiting.
Fig. 37

26 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• The separator must not be used in
areas where explosion protection is
required.
Fig. 38
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Use safety equipment, e.g.:
– safety clothing
– eye protection
– face mask
Fig. 39

on the separator:
• Never initiate a bowl ejection!

Stop".

Fig. 40
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– hood,
– solids catcher,
o
reach temperatures above 80 C
o
(176 F).
Fig. 41

2063-9001-420 / 0815 27
• The bowl is not allowed to run for

more than 15 to 30 minutes without
a supply of liquid, otherwise prohib-
ited heating of the bowl material may
result.
Fig. 42
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency Stop”
• To shut down the separator, please

follow the instructions in the "Opera-
tion" section in this manual or in the
instructions for starting up and shut-
ting down.
Fig. 43

28 2063-9001-420 / 0815
1.5.8 If power is interrupted during operation

If power is interrupted for longer than a second during operation, the control unit
shuts down automatically and the separation process is cancelled.
Important:
– no bowl ejection is performed. Product and solids remain in the bowl!
– The separator motor and the product feed pump are switched off.
– The control unit switches back on automatically when power is restored.
Once power is restored

• Switch on the separator motor and the product feed pump.
A closing water pulse following separator start-up automatically performs a to-
tal ejection.

on the separator:

Stop".

Fig. 44

2063-9001-420 / 0815 29
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair

Unfavourable operating conditions may require shorter maintenance intervals.
The factors listed below are unfavourable because they either attack the sepa-
rator material directly or impair the lubrication/cooling system.
• aggressive product (chemical or physical)
• high product temperature
• product with grease decaying properties
• environment: temperature, dust and vapours
Especially highly stressed parts of the

separator such as
– Bowl lock ring
– Bowl bottom,
– bowl top and
– other bowl parts with a large ex-
ternal diameter,
need to be checked regularly to ensure
safe and effective operation.
Fig. 45
Timely maintenance of the separator and replacement of worn or damaged ma-

chine parts is essential for safe operation of the separator.
Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator Group, oth-
erwise risks to safety may result (see section 1.5.2).
Perform the required cleaning tasks conscientiously.

Solids deposits on one side of the bowl cause severe imbalance!
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by the customer to the
extent as described in this instruction manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in this manual may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or by "central repair shops" authorized by
the manufacturer.
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator inspect-
ed by our service engineers at regular intervals. Such inspections will help to
maintain operating safety and avoid unexpected interruptions in production.

30 2063-9001-420 / 0815

• ensure that the separator is at a
standstill.
restarting with locking devices.
Fig. 46
• Do not loosen any part and do not

carry out any maintenance or re-
pair work on the separator before
the bowl has come to a standstill.
The standstill check is described in
the "Bowl" section.
Fig. 47
• Do not climb onto or stand on the

machine or parts of the machine.
• Make provision for and use a sturdy
working platform.
Fig. 48
• Place dismantled machine parts on

a suitable base, e.g. rubber mat.
• Use suitable aids to stop machine
parts overturning and rolling away.
Fig. 49

2063-9001-420 / 0815 31
• Do not heat bowl parts with the

naked flame.
• Bowl parts must never be welded.
This also applies to the hood and
solids catcher parts of steam-
sterilizable separators.
• Even during cleaning, bowl parts
may only be heated to a maximum
of 100 °C (212 °F).
Fig. 50
• Load-carrying equipment such as

lifting devices for
– bowl or distributor,
– chains etc.
may only be used in accordance
with purpose, or in other words, for
work routines as described in this
instruction manual.
• Do not use damaged or incomplete
load carrying equipment.
Fig. 51
• All load-carrying equipment must be checked for damage and completeness

at least once a year.
• When using load-carrying equipment and hoists, the statutory regulations and
safety regulations should also be observed.
• Never step under suspended loads.

CAUTION: Danger to life when transporting heavy parts!
• Special tools (e.g. compressing equipment, assembly jigs, pin spanners) may
only be used in accordance with purpose, in other words for work routines as
described in this instruction manual.
• Before using standard tools and the special tools supplied, check them for
damage and completeness.
Make sure
– that all moving parts are correctly aligned and have not seized,
– that no parts are broken and that there is no other damage which might af-
fect operation of the tool.
• Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them the next time.
– Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator Group, other-
wise the safety of the tool may be impaired.
• Keep tools clean and store them in a dry, safe place.
Tools which are properly maintained and cleaned complete work more accu-
rately and are more easily controlled.

32 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Collect dripping oil to prevent risk of

slipping or infection of the product.
• When handling waste oils note:
– They can be injurious to health,
depending on their chemical com-
position.
– Waste oil must be disposed of in
accordance with local regulations.
Fig. 52

2063-9001-420 / 0815 33
1.6 Corrosion
Corrosion can also affect bowl parts made of stainless steel. This corrosion can
be flat-spread or pit- or crack-shaped and merits special attention.
Corrosion on stainless steel bowl material should be examined thoroughly and
documented.
Flat-spread corrosion can usually be measured (reduction in wall thickness).
It is virtually impossible to measure pitting or crack-like corrosion using non-
destructive techniques. At the initial stage pitting corrosion is generally caused
by chloride ions.
Depending on the stressing of the part, pitting corrosion can result in crack for-
mation.
Possible formation of pitting corrosion.
Fig. 53
Such pittings can only be investigated by a materials expert.
If crack-type corrosion attacks load-bearing bowl parts, with or without

superposed flat-spread corrosion and pitting, the machine must be shut
down immediately.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-
nation.
Pittings
Such pittings should be investigated by
a materials expert.
Pitting which is dense or forms a linear
pattern may indicate cracking beneath
the surface.
Fig. 54

34 2063-9001-420 / 0815
1.7 Erosion
Erosion is caused by solid particles in the process liquid.
These solid particles grind marks into the surfaces with which they come into
contact.
The following factors favour the occurrence of erosion:
• hard solids particles
• high throughput capacities
The first signs of erosion should be carefully observed and documented. Ero-
sion can deepen rapidly, thereby weakening the high-stressed bowl material.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation. Information on the nature of the damage can be provided in the form of
photos, plaster casts or lead molds.
Fig. 55
The surfaces most susceptible to erosion are:

1) the bottom of the distributor in the area of the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal pump (cavitation),
3) all areas around the solids discharge openings,
4) the nozzles.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 35
Signs of erosion which you should

immediately report to your nearest
• The bottom of the erosion mark has

Westfalia Separator representative:
a radius smaller than 1 mm (large
• The depth of the erosion mark ex-

notch effect).
ceeds 1 mm (0.04 inch) at its deep-

est point.
Fig. 56

36 2063-9001-420 / 0815
1.8 Product hazards

In the case of products which have to be allocated to a specific hazard class,
adhere to the corresponding local safety precautions when handling these prod-
ucts.
The local standard oprating procedures must be observed and the required per-
sonal protective gear must be worn.
In the event of accidents, keep to the local rules of conduct when handling
products of the respective hazard class and take appropriate first-aid measures
when injury is involved.
Following accidents, notify in-house or local emergency services immediately so
that appropriate action can be taken. The emergency services comprise, for ex-
ample, fire brigade, paramedics, security and other emergency facilities.
1.9 Hazards caused by cleaning liquid

For CIP (cleaning-in-place), only chemicals may be used that have been rec-
ommended by GEA Westfalia Separator.
The cleaning media are acids and caustics which can cause severe personal in-
jury when used without due care.
Cleaning may under certain circumstances be carried out at high temperatures.
The surfaces of the centrifuge, especially the hood and pipes, get hot.
The local standard operating procedures must be observed and the required
personal protective gear must be worn, such as:
• Face protection and protective goggles
• Protective suit
• Protective gloves
• Protective boots or safety shoes
• Apron
The prevailing local rules of conduct pertaining to handling acids and caustics
with a view to preventing accidents must be complied with.
Carry out first-aid measures when injury is involved.
Following accidents, notify in-house or local emergency services immediately so
that appropriate action can be taken. The emergency services comprise, for ex-
ample, fire brigade, paramedics, security and other emergency facilities.
Chemicals and incorrect concentrations of chemicals not specified and ap-
proved by GEA Westfalia Separator can cause damage through corrosion.
The corrosion can occur both on bowl parts as well as on the hood and the con-
centrate collector.
Inadequate flushing can also lead to chemical residues entering the product
rendering it useless.
The bowl gaskets can swell as a result of inadequate flushing.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 37
2 Description of the machine
2.1 Dimensional drawing of the separator ................................................... 38

2.2 General .................................................................................................. 38
2.3 Separator ............................................................................................... 39
2.4 Main parts of the separator .................................................................... 40
2.4.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 42
2.4.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 43
2.4.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 44
2.4.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 47
2.5 Water pressure reducer (with pressure gauge) (option) ........................ 50
2.6 Regulating ring ....................................................................................... 51
2.6.1 Determining the regulating ring by experiment ...................................... 52
2.7 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 54
2.7.1 Vibration monitoring (option).................................................................. 54
2.7.2 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 55
2.8 Standard tools ........................................................................................ 56
2.9 Special tools .......................................................................................... 58
2.9.1 Using load-carrying equipment safely ................................................... 60
2.9.2 Using lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts as load handling devices ........ 60
2.11 Screw torques ........................................................................................ 65
2.11.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm).................................................. 65
2.11.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ....................................... 66

38 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.1 Dimensional drawing of the separator

• Note project-specific dimensional drawing.
• Follow installation guidelines.
2.2 General
The machine described in this manual is a high-speed centrifugal separator with
self-cleaning bowl.
"Separation" means the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liq-
uids, with simultaneous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
"Clarification" is the removal of solids from a liquid.
Prerequisite for centrifugal treatment technology (separation) is that the compo-
nents of the product
– can be separated mechanically,
– have different densities and
– do not emulsify.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 39
2.3 Separator
• is equipped with a self-cleaning disk bowl,

The separator
• is used for purification,

• operates with regulating rings (see Section 2.6)
Operating principles of the separator
Fig. 57
1 Product feed 6 Solids holding space

2 Product discharge 7 Dirty water discharge
3 Regulating ring 8 Operating water discharge
4 Centripetal pump 9 Solids discharge
5 Separating disk 10 Operating water feed
The product is fed in through a closed line system (1).

The clarified product is discharged (2) under pressure by centripetal pump (4).

40 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.4 Main parts of the separator
Fig. 58
Item Designation Function

• connects centripetal pump and hood.
• receives the product supply line.
1 Handle connection
piece
2 Centripetal pump See section 2.4.1
• covers the rotating bowl.

• holds the feed and discharges..
3 Hood
5 Bowl See section 2.4.2

Bowl hydraulics See section 2.4.3
• contains the drive parts.

• supports motor, bowl and hood.
6 Frame
7 Sight glass enables the oil level to be checked.
8 Sight glass for checking the drive belt.
9 Brake (optional) • The run-down time of the bowl can be short-

ened by applying the brake (e.g. for servicing
and maintenance work). See section 2.10.
• is not necessary in the case of a normal sepa-

Applying the brake
• is ineffective if a drive belt is torn, defective or

rator shut-down (section 3.8).
has come off!

Observe the run-down time of 120 minutes
before dismantling the separator! See section
3.8.)

2063-9001-420 / 0815 41

10 Solenoid valve block See section 2.4.5
11 Drive See section 2.4.4
12 Motor • accelerates the separator to the required
• is protected against overload during operation.

speed.

42 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.4.1 Centripetal pump
Fig. 59
1 Centripetal pump • discharges the separated liquid under pres-
• is permanently connected to the hood (2) of

sure.
the separator.
• The disk equipped with channels is

immersed in the liquid rotating with
the bowl.
• The liquid phase
– is pared off by the centripetal
pump and
– flows through its spiral channels
from the outside inward.
The kinetic energy is converted into
pressure energy which enables dis-
charging the liquid under pressure.
Fig. 60
Note: To avoid cavitation and noise, it is recommended to slightly throttle the centripe-
tal pump depending on the centripetal pump design and the throughput capaci-
ty. For centripetal pump backpressure, see operating data sheet.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 43
2.4.2 Bowl
Fig. 61

1 Bowl generates high centrifugal forces by means of
rotation to effect separation and clarification.
2 Distributor accelerates the product fed in through feed A to
the rotational velocity of the bowl and then feeds
it to the disk stack.
3 Disk stack • separates a liquid mixture composed of a light

and a heavy phase, e.g. oil-and-water, into its
• consists of a large number of conical disks

component parts.
placed one above the other.

Each disk is provided with spacers so that pre-
cisely defined narrow interspaces are produced
between the individual disks.
The smooth disk surfaces help the solids to slide
down and hence also the self-cleaning effect of
the disks.
Separating space The entire separating space consists of a large
number of parallel individual spaces of low
height. This results in very small radial sedimen-
tation paths for the product.
Solids collect at the upper wall of each disk interspace

and slide down into the solids holding space.
4 Solids holding space collects the solids separated in the disk stack.

44 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.4.3 Bowl hydraulics
A B
Fig. 62
A Separation – bowl closed

B Ejection – bowl open
1 Operating liquid In the rotating bowl the incoming, rotating oper-

(mostly water) ating liquid generates a high centrifugal pres-
sure. This pressure is utilised to actuate the
annular piston and sliding piston that closes and
opens the bowl.
• is inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
2 Annular piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
• is inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
3 Sliding piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,

2063-9001-420 / 0815 45
Closing the bowl (separation)
A B
Fig. 63

After starting the separator the solenoid valve for operating liquid is actuated
with the aid of the control unit and the bowl is closed as follows:
1 Operating liquid • flows into the injection chamber (4) of bowl
• from there through feed holes into closing

bottom (5) and
chamber (6).
This closes the bowl.
2 Annular piston • goes into closed position.
3 Sliding piston • is raised due to the hydrostatic pressure in
• is pressed against the gasket (7) of the bowl

closing chamber (6).
top due to the hydrostatic pressure in the clos-
• hence closes the bowl.

ing chamber and

46 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Opening the bowl (ejection)
A B
Fig. 64

The solenoid valve for operating liquid is opened with the aid of the control unit
and the ejection cycle is triggered as follows:
• flows first into injection chamber (4) and

• from there into opening chamber (8).
1 Operating liquid
• rises and
• empties closing chamber (6).
2 Annular piston
• moves downwards and

• opens the ejection ports in bowl bottom (5) for
3 Sliding piston
the separated solids (9).

2063-9001-420 / 0815 47
2.4.4 Drive
Fig. 65

1 Drive motor drives the separator.
Power is transmitted to the motor belt pulley by
the centrifugal clutch and to the bowl spindle by
the drive belt.
2 Centrifugal clutch • transmits power between motor, drive belt and
• accelerates the bowl gradually to rated

spindle.
• eliminates premature wear on the drive belt

speed.
and motor.
Important!
– The new clutch shoes entrain better after sev-
eral starts.
– Smoke emission from the centrifugal clutch is
normal during first starts and disappears after
a short operating time.
– Wear on the clutch shoes depends on the
number of starts and on ejection frequency
(see section 4.2.1).
3 Drive belt transmits the drive power of drive motor (1) to

bowl spindle (4).
Check regularly that the drive belt is correctly
located and in good condition. The checking and
changing intervals can be found in the mainte-
nance schedule (see 4.2.1).
4 Bowl spindle supports the bowl.

48 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.4.5 Solenoid valve block

The solenoid valve block for operating, filling and displacement water consists of
two 2/2-way solenoid valves with servo control. They are equipped with a man-
ual override for testing purposes.
Fig. 66
10 Pressure controller 90 Diaphragm

20 Ball valve 100 Solenoid core
30 Pressure gauge 110 Coupler socket
40 Filter insert 130 Hose
70 Solenoid coil
80 Housing A Manual override
Manual override A
NOTICE: The manual override can

be adjusted only using a screwdriv-
er!
1 closed
2 open
Fig. 67

2063-9001-420 / 0815 49
Adjusting the pressure setpoint

- pressure controller (10)
• Correct the pressure setpoint by

If necessary:
turning the setpoint screw (1) (SW

7).
Pressure setpoint correction

• Open the manual override of the
operating water solenoid valve (see
Fig. 67).
• Increase the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too low:
– Turn adjusting screw clockwise.
• Decrease the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too high:
– Turn adjusting screw counter-

clockwise.
The adjusted pressure setpoint is indi-

cated on pressure gauge (30).
SW = jaw span
Fig. 68

50 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.5 Water pressure reducer (with pressure gauge) (option)
Fig. 69
1 Safety screw 3 Strainer

2 Adjustment handle 4 Strainer plug
A pressure reducer is fitted in the feed line for operating water. The operating
pressure must be set to 2 bar. Proceed as follows:
• Loosen the safety screw (1) in the adjusting handle (2).
• Slacken the setpoint spring by turning the adjusting handle counterclockwise.
• Open the drainage point behind the pressure reducer a little way.
• Slowly open the feed pressure line.
• Turn the adjusting handle clockwise until the pressure gauge indicates the
required operating pressure.
• Lock the adjusting handle by means of the safety screw to prevent uninten-
tional adjustment.
Note: In the case of full drainage, the operating pressure must be maintained.
• After unscrewing the strainer plug (4), remove and clean strainer (3). Do this
from time to time depending on the degree of contamination of the water.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 51
2.6 Regulating ring

Perfect separation of a liquid mixture is possible only if the bowl is correctly set
to suit the difference in densities between the light liquid (e.g. oil) and the heavy
liquid (e.g. water).
To this end, the regulating ring with the

internal diameter which corresponds to
the difference in densities between the
two liquid components needs to be
selected from the set of regulating
rings (with various internal diameters)
supplied, and inserted in the bowl.
Fig. 70 Example of a regulating ring
The internal diameter of the regulating ring to be selected can be determined by
• narrow regulating ring if the light liquid has a high density,

experiment. The general rule of thumb is:
• wide regulating ring if the light liquid has a low density.

52 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.6.1 Determining the regulating ring by experiment

(Explained using cleaning oil as an example)
The next smallest regulating ring is always chosen to avoid emulsification.
When the regulating ring is too wide
– the water discharging through the water outlet will contain oil.
When the regulating ring is too narrow
– emulsification will occur or
– the oil discharging through the clean oil outlet will contain water.
The water may appear milky or contaminated. The colouring comes from the
washing of the oil.
A separation zone between the light and the heavy liquid forms in the bowl, the
centre of which is the separation line.
After the bowl has been opened, the position of the separation zone can be
seen by the separation line between water and oil which is almost always visible
the underside of the separation disk.
Correctly selected regulating ring

• The separation line between water
and oil runs along the periphery of
variable the disks.
Effect:
– the discharged pure oil is free of
water.
– the discharged water is free of oil.
Fig. 71
Regulating ring too wide

• The separation line between water
and oil runs
too wide – way outside the disks and
– too close to the periphery of the
separating disk.
Effect:
– the discharged pure oil is free of
water.
– the discharged water contains oil or
– oil breaks the water seal.
Fig. 72

2063-9001-420 / 0815 53
Regulating ring too narrow

• The separation line between the
too narrow liquid components runs further in in-
stead of at the periphery of the
disks.
Effect:
– the discharged pure oil contains
water.
– the discharged water contains no oil.
Fig. 73

54 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.7 Supervisory equipment

The separating process of the separator plant is monitored and controlled by an
automatic control system. Further details are given in the control system manu-
al.
2.7.1 Vibration monitoring (option)

The separator is protected against inadmissibly high vibrations by means of an
electronic vibration monitoring system.
Fig. 74 Installation example

• is installed at the upper part of the frame.
• converts the separator vibrations into electric
1 Vibration pickup
signals.
2 Terminal box • is mounted at the lower section of the frame.
Vibration monitoring • is installed in the control cabinet.
• Evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
3
unit
tion pickup.
The evaluation of the signal – depending on the version – takes place
in the control cabinet, on the control unit or directly on the vibration
pickup.
When the limit value or values are exceeded, an alarm and follow-up
measures are triggered and the separator motor switches off automati-
cally.
The operating status can be read off on the control unit.
NOTICE!
• Instruction manual of the vibration monitoring system

Pay attention to the following instructions and plans:
• Control unit manual

• Terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the control cabinet
• Circuit diagram

2063-9001-420 / 0815 55
2.7.2 Speed monitoring

The speed monitoring device
• serves to indicate the bowl speed.
Speed variations up to 5 % are admissible.
• monitors the drop in speed and exceeding the speed and starting time.
Fig. 75
1 Spindle • rotates and generates speed pulses at the

proximity switch (2).
2 Proximity switch • transmits the pulses triggered from the spindle

to the control unit (3).
NOTICE!
Align the proximity switch as illustrated.
The distance X between spindle and proximity
switch must be 3.5 mm.
• evaluates the speed pulses.

• triggers an alarm if the bowl speed is too low
3 Control unit
• initiates a shut-down process if the bowl speed

or too high.
• indicates the current bowl speed and

is too low or too high.
• permits setting of limit values.
NOTICE!
Pay attention to the terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the
control cabinet and refer to the instruction manual of the control unit.

56 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.8 Standard tools

are commercially available tools to be supplied by the customer.
Fig. 76

2063-9001-420 / 0815 57
Item Designation
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (0 - 100 Nm)
with inserts and extension
3 Calliper gauge
4 Electric oil heater for ball bearings
5 Ratchet
with inserts and extension
6 Standard hammer and mallet
7 Inner snap pliers with offset jaws
(Ø 40 mm)
8 Outer snap pliers (Ø 35 mm)
9 Hand-held speedometer
10 Wrench, adjustable
11 Brushes
12 Pulling device (400 x 300 mm (H x W))
13 Open-ended wrench (jaw spans: 19, 32, 65 mm)
14 Hardwood blocks
15 Drill
16 Drill bit (Ø 2 mm)
17 Wood screws (max. Ø 4 mm x 70 mm length)
18 Hex head screws (M 10 x 80)
19 Chain suspension

58 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.9 Special tools
Fig. 77

2063-9001-420 / 0815 59
• Special tools are provided by the manufacturer.

• The packing list supplied with the separator applies to the delivery of
special tools.
Item Designation
10 Wrench (spindle screw)

20 Striking pin
30 Socket wrench (centripetal pump)
40 Annular wrench (centripetal pump chamber cover)
100 Hexagon nut M 16 (centrifugal clutch)
200 Lubricating grease
310 Hex head screw M 16 x 300 (centrifugal clutch)
320 Hex head screw M 30 x 240 (centrifugal clutch)
340 Threaded pin M 16 x 50 (centrifugal clutch)
400 Clamp bolt, compl. (centrifugal clutch)
500 Disk (centrifugal clutch)
600 Compressing device, complete (disk stack compressing device)
610 Assembling device complete (Sliding piston / closing chamber bottom
/ annular piston)
620 Mounting ring, compl.
630 Ring spanner, complete (bowl lock ring)
640 Eye bolt, complete (bowl)
650 Complete assembling device (closing chamber bottom / annular pis-
ton)
660 Double nipple (transport of separator)

670 Ring nut M 12 (Transport of the separator)
680 Eye bolt M 8 (distributor)

60 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.9.1 Using load-carrying equipment safely

• Use only load-carrying equipment with a factory nameplate.
The factory nameplate on the load-

carrying equipment includes the follow-
ing data:
– CE mark
– Manufacturer
– Year of manufacture
– Part number
– Intended use
– maximum load
– inherent weight
Fig. 78 Example of a nameplate
• Use load-carrying equipment only as described in this instruction manual.

• Observe the permitted loading limit.
• Check the load-carrying equipment for visible damage before each use.
– Use only load-carrying equipment in perfect condition.
– Do not carry out repairs.
– Send damaged load-carrying equipment to the manufacturer.
• Always screw in threaded rods as far as they will go.
• Tighten all nuts fully.
• Tighten all bolts fully.
• Do not walk under suspended loads.
• Have all load-carrying equipment inspected by a qualified person at least
once a year.
2.9.2 Using lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts as load handling devices
Incorrect use of lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts during transport can lead to
serious accidents, e.g. due to overload.
CAUTION: Deformed lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts due to overload!
Danger to life and limb through falling loads when lifting eye bolts or lift-
ing eye nuts break.
Observe the following points to avoid accidents:
• the pertinent standards and guidelines of the national associations in the
country of origin on the operation of load-carrying equipment in lifting mode.
• Only trained specialists are authorized to mount lifting eye bolts or lifting eye
nuts.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 61
• Mount lifting eye bolts or lifting eye
• Screw in lifting eye bolts or lifting

nuts only as illustrated.
eye nuts completely.

• Attach load handling devices as
vertically as possible, e.g. chains.
– Pull max. 45° diagonally.
– Modes of assembly other than
those shown are not admissible,
e.g. lateral pull.
Fig. 79

62 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.10 Technical specifications

The order-specific process data are given on the operating data sheet in-
cluded in the documentation.
Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 4 dm
speed 8 200 rpm

– for product densities up to
3 o (see nameplate)
0.991 kg/dm (at 15 C) and
– for densities of the discharged solids up to
3
1.4 kg/dm
Ask the factory for the speed for higher densities
Starting time approx. 3 – 6 min

Run-down time
60 min
(without braking, with drive belts)
Run-down time (with braking) approx. 7 min
Run-down time (without drive belt, i.e. with
120 min
torn, detached or defective drive belt)
Centripetal pump
Pressure head 2 – 3 bar
Operating water
Quantity min. 3 000 l/h

Pressure (with open valve) 2 – 3 bar
Standard operating-water parameters:
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l
Particle size max. 50 µm
Hardness:
o o
– up to 55 C separating temperature < 12 dH
o o
– above 55 C separating temperature < 6 dH
The different hardness values are linked by the following relationships:
1° dH = 1.79° fH = 1.25° eH = 17.9 ppm CaCO3
Chloride ions < 100 mg/l
pH 6.5 - 7.5

2063-9001-420 / 0815 63
Motor
Rating 50 Hz 15 – 18.5 kW
60 Hz 15 – 18.5 kW
speed 50 Hz 3 000 rpm
60 Hz 3 600 rpm
Design IM V1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 3.7 l
Oil quality see section 4.2.3
Product feed pump
Pump unit (gear pump or screw pump)

Depending on design of sys-
Output
tem
Suction head max. 0.4 bar
Pressure head 2 bar
Solenoid valve block
Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block!

Operating principles 2/2-way
NC
Material: Seal EPDM
Housing CuZn
Solenoid
Coil size 32 mm
valves:
Nominal diameter
13 mm
(DN)
Operating voltage 24 V DC
Rating 8 W (per solenoid valve)
Coupler socket with built-in electronics, 24 V DC, LED
and free-wheeling diode with fitted
cable (1.5 m long)
Pressure: Medium 0 to 10 bar
Control range 1 to 6 bar
Pressure setpoint 2 bar
with open operating water solenoid
valve
Temperature: Medium -10 to +80 °C (14 – 176 °F)

64 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Weights
Separator (with motor, without bowl) 860 kg
Bowl 190 kg
Motor 107 kg

2063-9001-420 / 0815 65
2.11 Screw torques

The torques apply to:
• metric bolts with a standard thread.
– hex head bolts to DIN EN ISO 4014
– hex socket bolts to DIN EN ISO 4762
• clearance holes to DIN EN 20273 (average).
• the lubrication state "greased" (friction value = 0.10).
• Torque wrench with scatter of ± 10 %.
• the material combination steel - steel or stainless steel.
NOTICE: Severe damage to or destruction of the separator due to incor-
• Select the correct torques for screwed connections.

rect torques!
Screws whose torque deviates from the following table are marked with the
required torque in the manual.
2.11.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm)
Extract from company standard WSN 19-0019-00

A2–70
Strength class 8.8 10.9 12.9
A4–70
Yield strength/ 640/ 450/
2 940 1100
Proof stress [N/mm ] 660 250
Thread di-
Pitch Torques [Nm]
ameter
0.70 M4 2.6 3.9 4.5 1.9 M4
0.80 M5 5.2 7.6 8.9 3.6 M5
1.00 M6 9.0 13.2 15.4 6.3 M6
1.25 M8 21.6 31.8 37.2 15.2 M8
1.50 M 10 43.0 63.0 73.0 30.0 M 10
1.75 M 12 73.0 108.0 126.0 52.0 M 12
2.00 M 16 180.0 264.0 309.0 126.0 M 16
2.50 M 20 363.0 517.0 605.0 248.0 M 20
3.00 M 24 625.0 890.0 1041.0 237.0 M 24
3.50 M 30 1246.0 1795.0 2077.0 472.0 M 30
4.00 M 36 2164.0 3082.0 3607.0 - M 36

66 2063-9001-420 / 0815
2.11.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb)

To convert the torques (Ma) from "Nm" into "inlb", use the formula below:
Mainlb = MaNm x 8.85
Example:
Mainlb = Unknown (screw torque in “inch-pound“)

MaNm = 50 (screw torque in "Newton metres")
Mainlb = 50 Nm x 8.85
Mainlb = 442.5 inlb
Extract from company standard WSN 19-0019-00

A2–70
Strength class 8.8 10.9 12.9
A4–70
Yield strength/ 640/ 450/
2 940 1100
Proof stress [N/mm ] 660 250
Thread di-
Pitch Torques [inlb]
ameter
0.70 M4 23.0 34.5 39.8 16.8 M4
0.80 M5 46.0 67.3 78.8 31.9 M5
1.00 M6 79.7 116.8 136.3 55.8 M6
1.25 M8 191.2 281.5 329.3 134.5 M8
1.50 M 10 380.6 557.6 646.1 265.5 M 10
1.75 M 12 646.1 955.9 1115.2 460.3 M 12
2.00 M 16 1593.2 2336.7 2735.0 1115.2 M 16
2.50 M 20 3212.9 4576.0 5354.9 2195.0 M 20
3.00 M 24 5531.9 7877.4 9213.9 2097.7 M 24
3.50 M 30 11028.3 15887.5 18383.5 4177.7 M 30
4.00 M 36 19153.6 27278.8 31925.6 - M 36

2063-9001-420 / 0815 67
3 Operation
3.1 Technical Information ............................................................................ 68

3.1.1 Separation.............................................................................................. 68
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68
3.2 Before starting-up .................................................................................. 70
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting up the separator ....................................................................... 73
3.4 Monitoring operation .............................................................................. 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 75
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 75
3.6 Bowl ejection .......................................................................................... 76
3.7 Performing CIP (cleaning-in-place) ....................................................... 77
3.7.1 CIP cleaning program sequence (example) .......................................... 78
3.8 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 79
3.8.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.9 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.9.1 Faults on the separator .......................................................................... 82
3.9.2 Faults on the bowl .................................................................................. 84

68 2063-9001-420 / 0815
3.1 Technical Information

Pay attention to the sections below.
3.1.1 Separation
The highest degree of separation efficiency is obtained when the product to be
separated demonstrates the lowest possible viscosity.
The separator operates economically with the separating temperatures and ca-
pacities specified by us. Refer to the data sheet and contractual agreements.
Procedure:
• Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
• Set the separating time on the control unit.
• Start the separator (see 3.2).
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection

The bowl is ejected automatically at full speed during the program sequence.
The ejection time is determined by the preset separating time.
For determining the separating time see 3.5.
Sequence of an ejection (example)
1. Separating time has elapsed.

2. Product feed valve is closed.
3. Displacement water displaces the fuel oil to the clean oil side.
4. Operating water opens and closes the bowl hydraulically at full bowl
speed.
5. Waiting time for speed recovery.
6. Filling water supply
7. Product valve is opened.
8. Separating time resumes.
Displacement (optional)
• When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
reduced to a minimum by displacing the feed liquid with water before sludge
ejection takes place (especially important when processing valuable feed liq-
uid).
• The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
control unit manual).
• If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
• If the displacement time is too short , part of the product remains in the bowl
and is lost during desludging.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 69
Flush ejection
If the solids cant be completely ejected,
– due to an excessively long dwell time in the bowl or
– are stuck to firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
• either the separating time must be shortened or
• a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
with water or product and emptying it again.
Program control
• "Displacement", "ejection", "filling" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined
intervals are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
• The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
• Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.

70 2063-9001-420 / 0815
3.2 Before starting-up
Note:
• safety precautions in section 1
• instruction manual of the respective control unit
• instructions entitled "Settings and faults"
• instruction manuals for other supplementary equipment
• process-related deviations are possible
(follow order-specific operating data sheet!)
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair
CAUTION: Danger to operating safety of the separator as a result of long

standstill or storage times!
– Observe the recommended maintenance intervals.
• check all bowl parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule and re-
If the bowl has been out of commission for longer than 6 months,
place when necessary.

– See table "Maintenance after 4000 operating hours – after no more than
6 months".
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule and
If the separator has been out of commission for longer than 12 months
replace when necessary.

1 year".
• replace all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

1 year".
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.2.3.
• the bowl height is correct (see 4.6.1).
• the brake housing is correctly mounted.
• the brake is released by turning the handle to the right.
• the bowl can be rotated by hand.
• the machine has been assembled in accordance with the specification.
– Tighten the bowl lock ring securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the spindle screw to the separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is mounted correctly (see 4.4).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.4).

2063-9001-420 / 0815 71
• the hoses and hose pipes are not damaged and connected (see 4.2.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.4).
• the monitoring equipment is complete as well as mechanically and electrically
functional.
• the product and supply lines are operational.
– Pay attention to air and water pressures (see order-specific operating data
sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (optional).
– Pay attention to volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific op-
erating data sheet).
• Ensure that installation components such as valves, water pressure reducer,
maintenance unit, etc. are operational.
• the motor is connected correctly (see 4.1.4).
• the motor is mounted correctly.
Important!
• Check the remaining unit components such as hose pipes, sight glasses, etc.
for signs of ageing and mechanical damage.
• Replace damaged installation components with new parts immediately.

72 2063-9001-420 / 0815
3.2.2 Before every start-up
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.2.3.
• the brake housing is correctly mounted.
• the brake is released by turning the handle to the right.
• the machine has been assembled in accordance with the specification.
– Tighten the bowl lock ring securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the spindle screw to the separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is mounted correctly (see 4.4).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.4).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.2.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.4).
• the monitoring equipment is complete as well as mechanically and electrically
functional.
• the product and supply lines are operational.
– Pay attention to air and water pressures (see order-specific operating data
sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (optional).
– Pay attention to volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific op-
erating data sheet).
• Ensure that installation components such as valves, water pressure reducer,
maintenance unit, etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining unit components such as hose pipes, sight glasses, etc.
for signs of ageing and mechanical damage.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 73
3.3 Starting up the separator

• See section 3.2.1 or 3.2.2.
• Switch on the control unit.
• Switch on the separator motor.
Compare the current and starting time with the diagram (chapter 4.1.4) until
the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.
NOTICE! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work on
• Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.

the separator –
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when viewed from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct if the drive belt is turning
clockwise (observe through the sight
glass in the frame).
If the direction of rotation is incorrect,
have an authorized specialist switch
the motor connections.
Fig. 80
• Switch on the product feed pump (option).

– Ensure that the product feed valves to the suction and pressure side are
open!
NOTICE! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work to
• Check the direction of rotation of the product feed pump.

the product supply pump –
The direction of rotation of the product supply pump is correct if the fan wheel
of the pump motor is turning clockwise.
• Open the product discharge valve in the product discharge line (option).
• Start the program.
• After the product feed valve has automatically opened.

– Set the backpressure in the product discharge line to approximately 1.5 bar
(see order-specific operating data sheet).
– Set the desired throughput quantity whilst maintaining backpressure in the
product discharge line within the range specified.
• Check solids discharge and frame drain; no product may flow here during the
NOTICE!
separating process!

74 2063-9001-420 / 0815
3.4 Monitoring operation

The machine is monitored largely by the separator control.
Operations to be carried out regularly:

• When performing the daily inspection, especially in the first 1,500 operating
hours, note the following points in particular:
– Oil level
– Temperatures
– Pressures
– leakages
– Vibrations
– current consumption
– Starting time
– Hoses and hose pipes
– pipework connections
• Observe the maintenance schedule (see 4.2.1)!
• Servicing
We recommend having your separator inspected once annually by our spe-
cialists. These inspections help
– maintain the operating reliability of the machine and
– avoid unplanned downtime.
Important!
• Regularly check installation components such as hose pipes and sight glass-
es for signs of ageing and mechanical damage.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 75
3.5 Setting the separation time

When using time-dependent automatic control programs, accurate setting of the
separation time (time between ejection cycles) is only possible if the throughput
capacity and solids loading in the feed remain constant. If this is not the case, it
may be necessary to correct the settings during operation.
• the preselected operating mode (partial or total ejection mode),

The separating time depends on
• the solids loading in the feed,

• the consistency of the solids,
• the effective solids space volume in the bowl,
• the throughput capacity of the separator.
Given constant conditions, the separating time can be determined by calcula-
tion.
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation

Example for calculating separating time:
(1)
Assuming: Solid content p = 0.05 %
Solids holding space volume V = 1.5 l
Solids holding space given 75 % utilisation V' = 1.13 l

(1)
Throughput capacity Vo = 2 000 l/h
Wanted: Separating time t = ? min
The separating time to be set is calculated as follows:
V’ 1.13
t = ——— • 60 • 100 = —————— • 6 000 = 67.8 min = 1.1 h
V° • p 2 000 • 0.05
(1)
Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from
the order specification.

76 2063-9001-420 / 0815
3.6 Bowl ejection
Automatic operation
• Initiate ejection program by pressing the “Process START” key:

– Product feed is closed (process-dependent).
– Displacement (process-dependent)
– Bowl ejection
– Speed recovery (process-dependent)
– Filling water (process-dependent)
• The product valve opens again.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut-down)
• Close the product feed line.

– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Bowl ejection:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for
approx. 2 – 3 secs.
• Speed recovery
– Wait for approx. 20 – 30 seconds.
• New separating operation
– Open the product feed valve manually.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 77
3.7 Performing CIP (cleaning-in-place)

CIP can be performed at operating speed under certain conditions, e.g. for hy-
gienic reasons.
The plant operator makes the decision on this. During the CIP cycle, cleaning
liquids are circulated through the centrifuge and pipelines. The process control
is manual or automatic.
Pay attention to the points below during CIP.
• Make sure that no CIP liquid enters the product.
• Do not exceed maximum admissible pressures, e.g. for sight glasses or com-
pensators in the CIP circuit.
• Note the max. pressure specification on the fittings.
• Do not integrate sight glass units installed in the piping system in CIP circuits
or expose them to pressure.
• Carry out regular checks for damage and wear on sight glasses in product
lines through which CIP liquid is fed.
• Use only cleaning agents recommended by GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Adhere to the concentrations recommended by the cleaning agent manufac-
turer and GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Do not use detergents containing chlorine because chlorine attacks bowl
parts made of stainless steel.
• Collect discharging cleaning agents and dispose of them in a proper manner.
• Comply with the local regulations on handling acids and lyes.
CAUTION: Danger of acid and alkali burns!

• Danger of chemical burns when handling chemical cleaning fluids and danger
of burns by hot water.
• Wear acid-resistant safety gear, e.g. safety goggles, safety gloves, protective
overalls or protective suits.
• Take special care.
• Observe the plant operator's SOPs on handling acids and lyes as well as
local disposal regulations.
• Comply with applicable environmental protection legislation.
• Drain residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines into suitable vessels and
dispose of them properly.
• Observe regulations on product contact.
If hood chamber, concentrate catcher and bowl outer surfaces are to be cleaned
by overflowing cleaning liquid.
• Throttle the valve in the discharge line or, in the case of separators equipped
with double centripetal pumps, throttle at least one phase. This forces liquid
overflow.
The cleaning effect depends on the factors below.
– Product
– Cleaning agents and their concentration
– The duration and temperature of CIP.

78 2063-9001-420 / 0815
IMPORTANT:
• For optimum cleaning results, close cooperation is required between the plant
operator, the cleaning agent manufacturer and GEA Westfalia Separator.
• The plant operator must check the effectiveness of the cleaning process,
even if cleaning agents and cleaning process were recommended by GEA
• The plant operator must adapt the cleaning process to the special conditions
of the product.
3.7.1 CIP cleaning program sequence (example)
Program sequence Duration of the

in d ivid u al p ro g ram
steps
1. Pre-flushing
Temperature: 70 – 80 °C (product -specific)
3
Feed rate minimum 10 m /h
Flushing out the water-soluble dirt with hot 5 min
water
Bowl overflow 10 sec.
Total ejection approx. 30 secs
2. Flushing with caustic solution
3
2% caustic soda (NaOH)
(chloride-free caustic soda)
Dislodging the residual dirt 30 min
Displacing the hot water
3. Intermediate flushing
3
Displacement of the caustic with hot water 30 min
4. Neutralising
3
Neutralisation with 0.5 % acid solution 20 – 30 min
4. Post-flushing
3
Displacement of the acid solution with cold 5 min
water

2063-9001-420 / 0815 79
3.8 Shutting down the separator
Automatic operation
• End the separation program with the key “Process STOP”.

– Two total ejections are performed automatically.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut-down)
• Close the product feed line.

– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Bowl ejection:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for
approx. 2 – 3 secs.
• Switch off product feed pump (optional).

• Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tional).
• switch off the separator motor.
• Close the discharges.
• Close the supply lines such as heating steam, water, compressed air lines
etc. using manual valves.
• Do not loosen any part before the bowl has come to a standstill.
CAUTION: Danger to life due to high-speed rotating parts!
– The run-down time of the bowl is 60 minutes after switching off the motor
(without braking).
– Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.
Standstill of the drive belt

• Shine a torch through the sight glass
• Carry out a visual check to ensure

in the frame,
that the drive belt is no longer mov-

ing.
Fig. 81
• Unscrew the sight glass,

If the sight glass in the frame is not clear:
• shine a torch through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Only carry out a visual check to ensure that the drive belt is no longer moving.
CAUTION: Danger of injury from rotating drive belt!
– Do not touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.

80 2063-9001-420 / 0815
If a drive belt is torn, defective or has come off:
• Observe the run-down 120 minutes before dismantling the separator!

• Applying the brake is ineffective!
CAUTION: Danger of injury from

electrical voltage and unintentional
start-up of the separator!

restarting with locking devices.
Fig. 82
CAUTION: Danger of injury due to very hot separator parts!

When carrying out maintenance work, there is a danger of injury from hot sepa-
o
rator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F)).
3.8.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off"

In a hazardous situation (unusual noises or vibrations) or if the separator or
parts of the installation are damaged (e.g. burst hose pipe), operators may trig-
ger a manual quick shut-down of the installation.
Depending on the design, the switch cabinet is equipped with
– a main switch (yellow and red) with an integrated emergency stop function
and additional connection for an external Emergency Stop switch (Example
1),
– an emergency stop switch (yellow and red), a main switch (grey and black)
and an additional connection for an external Emergency Stop switch (Ex-
ample 2) or
– an emergency stop switch (yellow and red), a main switch (grey and black)
and an additional connection, via an approved emergency stop relay, for
several external Emergency Stop switches (Example 2).
Main switch (yellow and red) with

integrated Emergency Stop function
• Press the main switch with emer-
gency stop function.
– The complete control unit is de-
energised.
– No bowl ejection is performed.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 83 Example 1

2063-9001-420 / 0815 81
Emergency Stop switch (yellow and

red) and main switch (grey and
black)
• Press the Emergency Stop switch.
– The complete drives of the control
unit are de-energised.
– The separator is shut down in a
controlled manner with two total
ejections.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 84 Example 2

82 2063-9001-420 / 0815
3.9 Trouble shooting

The tables below are designed to help with troubleshooting.
If any assembly work is necessary, use the "Maintenance and repair" section to
help.
3.9.1 Faults on the separator
Fault Possible cause Action

The bowl does not come up Brake is applied. • Release the brake by turning the
• Clean the belt surface of the spindle

to rated speed or takes too handle clockwise.
long to do so. Product has dripped down along the
• Replace the drive belt.

spindle onto the drive belt; drive belt is and flat belt pulley.
slipping on the bowl spindle.
Motor is incorrectly connected. • Check connection.
Too few clutch shoes have been fitted. • Increase the number of clutch
shoes.
• Make sure that the
clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
Drive belt has become stretched and • Replace the drive belt.
is slipping on the bowl spindle.
Drive belt has not been correctly fitted. • Check the position of the drive belt
on centrifugal clutch and bowl spin-
•
dle.
Liquid or dirt has accumulated in the Check the operating water dis-
upper section of the frame, thereby charge: The liquid must flow off
• Clean the inside of the upper part of

braking the bowl. freely.
• Wipe dry the friction surfaces.

the frame.
• NOTICE: (Do not use

Bowl speed drops during Friction surfaces of clutch shoes are
operation. oily.
benzene, trichloroeth-
ylene or other solvents!)
Drive belt has become stretched and • Replace the drive belt.
is slipping on the bowl spindle.
Motor speed drops during operation. • Check motor and line voltage.
• Reduce the number of clutch shoes.
• Make sure that the
The bowl comes up to rated Too many clutch shoes have been
speed too quickly (in less fitted.
than 1.5 minutes). This clutch shoes are
makes the start-up current of evenly spaced.
the motor prohibitively high
(Imax >2 x IN).

2063-9001-420 / 0815 83

Uneven run of the separator Bowl is out of balance for the following For items 1 - 4:
reasons. • Stop the separator.
• Apply brake.
• Close product feed and discharge.
• The bowl may not be

CAUTION:
emptied as otherwise the

vibrations occurring during
run-down would intensify.
If the bowl leaks,
• Open the water feed completely.
1. The separated dirt has deposited • Clean bowl.
unevenly in the bowl.
2. Bowl is not properly assembled or, • Assemble bowl properly.
if plant has several separators,
parts of different bowls may have
been interchanged.
3. The pressure in the disk stack has
slackened:
– The bowl lock ring is not screwed CAUTION: A loose bowl
on as far as the "0" mark. lock ring can endanger
• The "O" marks of

life!
the bowl bottom

and the lock ring
must be aligned.
– Too few disks are fitted. • Check number of disks, put in an
• Send the bowl to the factory for

extra disk if necessary.
4. Bowl parts are damaged.
repair.
CAUTION: Do not make
your own repairs!
Do not weld or solder as this
would weaken the bowl!
Roller bearings are worn. • Replace damaged roller bearings.
NOTICE!
Only use the roller bearings
specified in the parts list.

84 2063-9001-420 / 0815
3.9.2 Faults on the bowl
Fig. 85 Bowl and operating water feeding device
1 Gasket (bowl top) 13 Operating water feeding system

2 Gasket (bowl top) 14 Injection chamber
3 Gasket (sliding piston) 15 Closing chamber bottom
4 Guide strip (sliding piston) 16 Bowl bottom
5 Gasket (annular piston) 17 Discharge hole
6 Gasket (closing chamber bottom) 18 Annular piston
8 Guide strip (closing chamber bottom) 20 Sliding piston
9 Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 21 Bowl top
10 Piston slide ring (bowl bottom) 22 Solenoid valve block
11 Gasket (bowl bottom) 23 Solenoid valve for operating water
12 Gaskets (water chamber bottom) 24 Solenoid valve for filling and displacement wa-
ter
25 Filling and displacement water line
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off cock
28 Operating water line

2063-9001-420 / 0815 85
The bowl does not close. Operating water

Control unit is defective or • Check control unit.
• Check program parameters and
NOTICE: Control unit is not correctly set.
– Product flows out of the
reset if necessary.
solids discharge.
• Set 2 seconds (see also control unit
(See control unit manual.)
– Current consumption too
Closing water pulse too short.
high.
• Close shut-off cock (27).
documentation).
• Clean strainer (26) (see 4.3.4).

Strainer (26) in the operating, filling
and displacement water line is dirty.
The feed capacity of the operating • Check line pressure, increase if
water is too low. necessary.
Operating water data:

– Pressure 2 – 3 bar (with open
valve)
(gauge the capacity by litres) ≅ 1.0 l

– Volume stream min. 3 000 l/h
The operating water line (28) has be- • Clean or replace the operating water
in 3 sec
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line (28).

tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
• Check solenoid valve (23) and re-

ber.
The operating water solenoid valve
(23) does not open properly. place if necessary.
Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• Dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled.
or
• Thoroughly clean all holes.

sections 4.3.1 and 4.3.2).
– Thoroughly check drain hole (17)
Gaskets, guide strips and piston guide • replace all gaskets.

and clean if necessary.
ring are damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"

(see spare parts list).
• Change polyamide gasket (5) only if

Important: Time-consuming fitting!
Sealing surface of sliding piston (20) is • Slightly machine sealing rim of slid-
it is damaged (see section 4.3.9)!
damaged. ing piston – max. 1 mm! Re-
• send in the sliding piston for repair.

machine (see section 4.3.10) oder

86 2063-9001-420 / 0815

ter
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off cock

2063-9001-420 / 0815 87
The bowl does not open at all Operating water

or not completely. Control unit is defective or • Check control unit.
Control unit is not correctly set. • Check program parameters and
reset if necessary.
• Set 3 – 4 seconds (see also control

(See control unit manual.)
Time for opening water too short.
• Close shut-off cock (27).

unit documentation).
• Clean strainer (26) (see 4.3.4).

Strainer (26) in the operating, filling
and displacement water line is dirty.
The feed capacity of the operating • Check line pressure, increase if
water is too low. necessary.

valve)

The operating water line (28) has be- • Clean or replace the operating water
in 3 sec
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line (28).

tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
• Check solenoid valve (23) and re-

ber.
The operating water solenoid valve
(23) does not open properly. place if necessary.
Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• Dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled.
or
• Thoroughly clean all holes.

sections 4.3.1 and 4.3.2).
– Thoroughly check and clean drain
Gaskets, guide strips and piston guide • replace all gaskets.

hole 19.
ring are damaged. Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"

(see spare parts list).
• Change polyamide gasket (5) only

when it is damaged (see section
• Thoroughly check polyamide gasket

4.3.9)!
(5) for tight fit in its groove.

88 2063-9001-420 / 0815

ter
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off cock

2063-9001-420 / 0815 89

The bowl does not empty The feed capacity of the operating • Check line pressure, increase if
completely. Solids remain in water is too low. necessary.
the bowl.
valve)

The separating time has been set too • Shorten the separating time (see
in 3 sec
long with the result that the solids con- section 3.5).
• Correct the closing water pulse (see

tent is too high.
The bowl opens during sepa- Closing water pulse is too short.
ration. – Closing water evaporates. control documentation).
Closing water pulse is too long.
– Closing water pulse opens the bowl.
3.9.3 Solenoid valve block
In case of electrical faults
• Switch off and lock the main switch to prevent it being switched back on.
CAUTION: Danger due to electrical current!
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.

When carrying out maintenance work, there is a risk of injury from hot separator
o
parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F)).
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block.
NOTICE:
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve block only by authorised specialists

and with suitable tools!
Soenoid valve does not func- Control unit defective. • Inform GEA Westfalia Separator
tion.
• Replace wire.
service.
Faulty wire in connecting terminal.
Connecting terminal loose on terminal • Tighten screw of connecting termi-

strip.
• Clean contact or replace it.
nal.
Poor contact to connecting terminal.
Coupler socket loose or leaky. • Tighten coupler socket.
Solenoid coil defective. • Replace magnetic head.
Diaphragm defective. • Replace diaphragm.
• Close the shut-off valve.

• Clean strainer (see 4.3.4).
Strainer in the operating, filling and
displacement water line is dirty.

90 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notes
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2063-9001-420 / 0815 91
4 Installation - maintenance - repair
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 92

4.1.1 Transport of the separator ..................................................................... 93
4.1.2 before installing the separator ............................................................... 94
4.1.3 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 94
4.1.4 Motor ...................................................................................................... 96
4.1.5 Direction of rotation of the bowl ............................................................. 99
4.1.6 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 100
4.2 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 101
4.2.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 102
4.2.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 113
4.2.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 115
4.2.4 Lubrication procedure .......................................................................... 118
4.2.5 Lubricating oil table .............................................................................. 120
4.2.6 Notes on the lubricating oil table for separators of
GEA Westfalia Separator Group ......................................................... 121
4.3 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 122
4.3.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 124
4.3.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 144
4.3.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 145
4.3.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 146
4.3.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 146
4.3.6 Important instructions on assembling the bowl.................................... 147
4.3.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 149
4.3.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top) ......................................... 165
4.3.9 Replacing the polyamide gasket (annular piston)................................ 167
4.3.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 174
4.4 Assembling the hood ........................................................................... 175
4.4.1 Mounting the hood ............................................................................... 177
4.7 Final inspection after repairing the separator ...................................... 218
4.8 Prior to a long-term standstill of the separator..................................... 218
4.8.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 218
4.8.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 219
4.9 Storage ................................................................................................ 220
4.9.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 220
4.9.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 220
4.9.3 Control unit........................................................................................... 221
4.10 Before putting back into operation ....................................................... 221
4.11 Disposal ............................................................................................... 222
4.11.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 222
4.11.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 223
4.11.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 223

92 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.1 Installing the separator

• Note project-specific dimensional drawing.
• Follow installation guidelines.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 93
4.1.1 Transporting the separator
CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

– Use suitably rated, intact hoists for transport and installation.
CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

– Never step under suspended loads.
• Use tools only for the intended purpose!

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using intact tools!
– For special tools, see sections 2.9, 2.9.1 and 2.9.2.

– For standard tools, see section 2.8.
NOTICE: Remove the bowl from the frame before transporting the separator!
• Remove hood and bowl (see section 4.3.1) and place it on an even, non-slip
surface.
• Ensure that
– two eye bolts (1) (M 16) are
screwed into the upper section of
the frame.
– two eye bolts (2) (M 16) with fitted
washers (3) are screwed into the
intermediate flange/holes in the
frame.
Fig. 88

94 2063-9001-420 / 0815
CAUTION! Do not suspend the ma-

chine from the eye bolt on the mo-
tor.
NOTICE: Do not damage any machine

components when fastening the ropes!
• Wind the transport ropes – as illus-

trated –
– into the four eye bolts and
– Hang on to the load hood of the
hoist.
NOTICE: Prevent the ropes from slip-
• Wind one rope round the load hook

ping!
twice (see detail).
• When lowering the machine, make

sure it touches down gently.
Fig. 89
After transporting the separator:

• Remove lifting gear and ropes.
• Install bowl (see section 4.3.7).
• Install the hood (see section 4.4 and 4.4.1).
4.1.2 Before installing the separator

• Ensure that
– adequate space is available for operating and dismantling the machine.
– the foundation has no connection with the foundations of other vibrating
units so as to avoid the transfer of vibrations.
4.1.3 Setting up the separator

Depending on local conditions, the foundation frame is fastened on a steel
foundation or concrete foundation. The required fastening materials are supplied
to suit the order.
CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

• Transport the foundation frame to the installation site with a suitable hoist and
load suspension devices. Refer to sections 2.9.1 and 2.9.2.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 95
• Align the foundation frame in accordance with the dimensioned drawing or in-
stallation diagram.
• Drill fastening holes in the foundation in accordance with the assembly dia-
gram or dimensioned diagram and the screws or anchor bolts supplied (if re-
quired).
Steel foundation
• Align separator (1) with feet (2) and

plates (3) on foundation (4).
• Tack plates (3) in position.
• Loosen hex head screws (5).
• Lift separator with feet (see section
4.1.1).
• Weld plates (3) to foundation (4).
• Position the separator on the plates
(3) and bolt tight using hex head
screws (5).
• Tighten hex head screws (6) firmly.
Fig. 90
Concrete foundation
• Screw four anchor bolts (2) into the
• Embed the foundation frame (1) in

foundation.
the floor and align it horizontally.

– The foundation frame must be ab-
• Fasten and tighten the foundation

solutely level!
Fig. 91
• Grout in the foundation frame up to A with grouting compound, e.g. cement

mortar.
– The four cams (4) must protrude 20 mm out of the foundation.
• Let the grouting compound set hard.
• Align separator (5) with feet (7) on the foundation frame (1).
• Screw in all hex head screws (6) firmly.
• Screw in all hex head screws (7) firmly.

96 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.1.4 Motor
Rated current %
Waiting
Separation Separation
Fig. 92 Start-up diagram (characteristic current and speed graphs) - example
Type at
De- of
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
sign protec-
rpm min s kW tion * rpm rpm
IP 55
see name- approx. 3 – 15 – 15 – IM ISO

3 3 000 3 600
plate 6 18.5 18.5 V1 class
F*
* WS standard
The separator is driven by a three-phase AC motor via a centrifugal clutch and
the drive belt.
The specified motor ratings are minimum values which are based on the in-
creased starting current. Since the power intake of the motor drops after start-
up, overloading of the motor during operation is not possible.
The starting time depends on the
– flywheel effect of the bowl,
– number of clutch shoes used,
– condition of the clutch shoes.
The starting current can peak at about 1.8-2 times the rated current (see start-
up diagram). This is to be considered when selecting switches, lead-in wires
and fuses.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 97
The motor
– can be started directly (WS standard) or via a motor control for star-delta
switching (Ex-zone).
– is protected against overheating by thermal overload releases or a PTC
thermistor temperature sensor as sole protection.
(In WS standard, the motor is protected against overheating by three PTC
thermistor temperature sensors in the coils).
– can be equipped with a frequency converter if requested by the customer.
When using thermal overload fuses, the motor has to be protected as follows:
– during operation by a fuse set to the rated current and
– during start-up by a second fuse set to 1.8-2 times the rated current.
The fuse set to the rated current must be bypassed during start-up.
Note:
• The temperature sensors must be connected to a commercially available
fuse.
• External voltages higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature sensors.
• When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.
Electrical connection
CAUTION: Danger to life and limb from electric current!

Potential residual voltage!
In the case of motors with space heaters, residual voltages are possible in
the motor terminal box even if the main switch is off!
• refer to the motor nameplate.

Prior to working on the motor:
• refer to the motor instruction manual.

• Refer to the frequency converter manual (if present).
• Take appropriate preventive measures according to national provisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
the local energy supply company).
• Any work on the motor may be carried out only by an authorised electri-
cian!
• Connect the motor.

Refer to the motor instruction manu-
al!
Fig. 93 Connection diagram
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta.

98 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Check motor is correctly switched (star or delta).

Refer to the motor instruction manual!
Star switching (example)
Fig. 94
Delta switching (example)
Fig. 95
• In the case of additional electrical components, PTC thermistors or space

NOTICE:
heaters, refer to the instruction manual for the motor in question.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 99
4.1.5 Direction of rotation of the bowl
Pre-condition:
– drive chamber is full of oil up to half
way up the sight glass.
• Switch on motor.
Fig. 96
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when viewed from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct if the drive belt is turning
clockwise (observe through the sight
glass in the frame).
If the direction of rotation is incorrect,
have an authorized specialist switch
the motor connections.
Fig. 97

operation:
CAUTION: Danger to life and limb

from electric current!
• Before carrying out work on the mo-

tor, bear in mind that there may still

be residual voltage!
• For this purpose,
– read the documentation provided
by the manufacturer of the fre-
Fig. 98 quency converter.
– have the appropriate measures
taken by specially trained staff.

100 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.1.6 Speed and starting time of the bowl
speed see nameplate

– for product densities up to
3
max. 0.991 kg/dm and
– for densities of discharged solids up to max. 1.4
3
kg/dm
Starting time approx. 3 – 6 min
Bowl speed was specified with regard for the operating safety of the separator.
• Check speed of spindle (= speed of

Before commissioning
bowl) with a hand-held speedometer

before fitting the bowl.
CAUTION!
The rotating spindle may cause
• Keep a safe distance away from the

injury.
• Do not wear long hair loose or wear

rotating spindle.
• Use a hairnet!
oversized loose clothing!
• NOTICE: Do not exceed maximum

running time for spindle which is
1 minute!
• Speed variations up to 5 % are ad-

missible.
Fig. 99
In case of frequency converter operation:

The frequency converter has a safe frequency limiter to prevent operation at
prohibitively high bowl speed.
• Operate the separator with fre-

CAUTION!
quency converter, speed monitor

and hardware-based speed cut-
out.
• Never manipulate the frequency
converter to exceed permitted
bowl speed (see nameplate)!
• From time to time, check whether
– bowl speed (see nameplate) and
– motor frequency (see nameplate
and frequency converter display!)
Fig. 100 match separator speed.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 101
4.2 Maintenance and lubrication
• Special care must be taken when performing maintenance and lubrication

work.
Conscientious servicing and lubrication improves the endurance and service
life of the separator.
• Follow manufacturers' servicing and lubrication instructions for auxiliary
equipment (motor, product pump, preheater, solenoid valve block etc.).
• Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by persons
– who provide evidence of familiarity with the state of the art as a result of
briefings and training.
– are adequately qualified for performing the work and for checking it if re-
quired.
• Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized professional electri-
cian!
• Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
The original spare parts are listed in the spare parts catalogue.

102 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.2.1 Maintenance schedule
NOTICE!
The following maintenance intervals are recommendations which apply only to
normal operating conditions.
Negative operating conditions (e.g. excessively high temperature, strong vibra-
tions, frequent starting and stopping of the separator, etc.) may necessitate
shorter maintenance intervals.
Start-up date
(to be filled in by user)
Maintenance whenever the separator is at standstill
Machine component Action

Upper section of frame • Clean the inside of the upper part of the frame and check for cavi-
tation, cracks or indentations.
Maintenance on each daily round

Drive chamber (lower section of • Check the oil level.
• Check pressures.
frame)
Display units (separator),
• Check temperatures.
process overview (control unit)
• Check flow.
Separator • Check for leaks.
• Check hoses and hose lines (see Section 4.2.2).
• Check pipe joints (e.g. flange or screwed connections, pipe clips).
• Check safety markings for damage and cleanliness.
• Check for smooth running.
• Shut down separator in case of unusual noises or vibrations (see
Check separator or
vibration monitoring equipment in
the control cabinet
• Check rated speed of the bowl.
section 3.8 – manual mode).
Control unit
• Check current consumption of the drive.
• Check the starting time of the bowl.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 103
Maintenance before each assembly

Standard tools, • Check tools for visible damage.
• Clean bowl and centripetal pump parts.

Special tools
Bowl and centripetal pump
• Check bowl and centripetal pump parts for wear, damage or corro-
sion.
– In case of wear, damage or corrosion of structural bowl parts,
• Grease support and contact surfaces (see section 4.2.4).

contact the manufacturer.
Bowl bottom • Clean and dry cone.

Drive chamber • Clean and dry drive chamber.
• Clean and dry cone.
• Check roller bearings.
Spindle
Separator • Check safety markings for damage and cleanliness.
Maintenance every 700 operating hours – at least after 1 month

Control cabinet • Clean filter of control cabinet fan with air.
– Replace filter if very dirty.
Maintenance every 2000 operating hours – after 3 months at the latest

Special tools
Separator motor • Check separator motor.
– Follow the instructions provided by the motor manufacturer.
• Re-lubricate motor bearings (if required).

– Follow the directions on the motor nameplate.

104 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Fig. 101 Set of spare parts "bowl/hood" (operation: 1 year or 8000 hours)

2063-9001-420 / 0815 105
Maintenance work
– after 4000 operating hours – after 6 months at the latest
– after 12,000 operating hours – after 1 ½ years at the latest

• Dismantle and clean bowl and centripetal pump parts.

Special tools
• Clean all holes, chambers and nozzles (if any) of the hydraulic sys-
tem.
sion.
– In case of wear, damage or corrosion to structural bowl parts (e.g.
bowl bottom, bowl top, bowl lock ring, sliding piston), contact the
• Grease thread and contact surfaces (see Section 4.2.4).

manufacturer.

Hood, bowl and centripetal pump • Use set of spare parts “bowl/hood” (operation: 1 year or 8,000
hours).
– See the adjacent figure.
Change polyamide gasket (100) only if it is damaged (see section
4.3.9)!
• Replace gaskets.
Sight glasses • Clean and dry sight glasses.
• Clean and dry cone.
• Check roller bearings.
Spindle
Upper section of frame • Clean the inside of the upper part of the frame and check for cavita-
• Clean strainer on solenoid valve block and operating liquid line on

tion, cracks or indentations.
Solenoid valve block,
Operating liquid feed
• Clean the sight glass(es) for observing the drive belt.
self-cleaning separator (see Section 4.3.4).
Lower section of frame
Hood • Clean the inside of the hood and check for cavitation, cracks or in-
• Check pressure gauge(s) for damage, display and functionality.

dentations.


• Check hoses and hose lines (see Section 4.2.2).

• Check pipe joints , e.g. flange or screwed connections, pipe clips.

Separator

• Clean the filter in the suction line of the product feed pump.
Product feed pump (option)

Control unit

106 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Fig. 103 "Drive" set of spare parts (operation: 1 year or 8000 hours)

2063-9001-420 / 0815 107
Maintenance work
– after 8000 operating hours – after 1 year at the latest
– after 24,000 operating hours – after 3 years at the latest

• Check tools for visible damage.
• Have the operating safety of the load-carrying equipment checked
Standard tools,
Special tools
by a competent person.
• Have the separator inspected once a year by a service profession-

Separator Recommended to assure correct functioning and operating safety:

al of GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
tem.
sion.
– In case of wear, damage or corrosion to structural bowl parts
(e.g. bowl bottom, bowl top, bowl lock ring, sliding piston), contact

the manufacturer.

hours).
4.3.9)!
• Replace gaskets, piston guide rings and guide strips.
• Change mineral or synthetic oil.
• Clean and dry drive chamber.
Drive chamber
Spindle • Clean and dry spindle cone.

Drive • Use set of spare parts "drive" (operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours).

• Replace spindle roller bearings.
• Use set of spare parts "drive" (operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
• Check roller bearings of centrifugal clutch and replace if necessary.

– See Fig. 105.
• Check or replace neck bearing springs (see section 4.5.7).

• Check bowl height (see Section 4.6.1).

Installed bowl and centripetal pump
• Check direction of rotation of bowl (see Section 4.1.5).
• Check speed of bowl (see Section 4.1.6).
Installed spindle
Solenoid valve block, • Clean strainer on solenoid valve block and operating liquid line on

108 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Maintenance work
– after 8000 operating hours – after 1 year at the latest

Hood • Clean the inside of the hood and check for cavitation, cracks or

indentations.


• Check hoses and hose pipes (see 4.2.2).


Separator

Vibration monitoring device (option) • Check the functionality of the vibration absorbers.
Speed monitoring device (option) • Check the functionality of the speed monitoring device.

Control unit

2063-9001-420 / 0815 109
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notes
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

110 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Fig. 105 "Drive" set of spare parts (operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).

2063-9001-420 / 0815 111
Maintenance work

• Check tools for visible damage.
• Have the operating safety of the load-carrying equipment checked
Standard tools,
Special tools
by a competent person.
• Have the separator inspected once a year by a service profession-

Separator Recommended to assure correct functioning and operating safety:

al of GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
tem.
sion.
– In case of wear, damage or corrosion to structural bowl parts
(e.g. bowl bottom, bowl top, bowl lock ring, sliding piston), contact

the manufacturer.

hours).
4.3.9)!
• Replace gaskets, piston guide rings and guide strips.
• Change mineral or synthetic oil.
• Clean and dry drive chamber.
Drive chamber
Spindle • Clean and dry spindle cone.

Drive • Use set of spare parts "drive" (operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).

• Replace spindle roller bearings.
• Replace spindle roller bearings of centrifugal clutch.
• Check or replace neck bearing springs (see section 4.5.7).
• Check bowl height (see Section 4.6.1).

Installed bowl and centripetal pump
• Check direction of rotation of bowl (see Section 4.1.5).
• Check speed of bowl (see Section 4.1.6).
Installed spindle
Solenoid valve block, • Clean strainer on solenoid valve block and operating liquid line on

112 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Maintenance work

Hood • Clean the inside of the hood and check for cavitation, cracks or

indentations.


• Check hoses and hose pipes (see 4.2.2).


Separator

Vibration monitoring device (option) • Check the functionality of the vibration absorbers.
Speed monitoring device (option) • Check the functionality of the speed monitoring device.

Control unit
Maintenance work after 48,000 operating hours – after 6 years at the latest

Separator • Replace machine feet.
• Have the separator serviced by a service specialist from GEA
Westfalia Separator Group.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 113
4.2.2 Hoses and hose pipes

Replace hose pipes when the following criteria are found during the inspection:
• damage to the outer layer as far as the inner (e.g. abrasions, cuts or cracks).
• leaks.
• damage to or deformation of the hose fitting (sealing function impaired).
– slight superficial damage is not a reason for replacement.
• hose escaping from the fitting.
• fitting corroded badly enough to reduce function and strength.
Protective sleeve for cables
• Fit protective sleeve (1) along the

NOTICE: Avoid abrasion!
full length of the cable harness (con-

tact points to the machine).
• Adapt the length of the protective
sleeve (1).
Fig. 106
Corrugated hose with braiding
NOTICE: Do not twist corrugated

hose!
• Fit corrugated hose without torsion.
Fig. 107
NOTICE: Do not over-bend corru-

gated hose!
• Fit corrugated hose as shown.
– Fit a pipe elbow to divert if neces-
sary.
Fig. 108

114 2063-9001-420 / 0815
NOTICE: Do not kink corrugated

hose!
– It is not permitted to kink corrugated
hose.
• Remove all corrugated hoses for
servicing work (before removing the
hood).
Fig. 109

2063-9001-420 / 0815 115
4.2.3 Lubrication
The spindle bearings are lubricated from a central oil bath.
Motor bearings
Follow the instructions of the motor manufacturer for lubricating motor bearings.
OIL QUALITY (mineral oil)

The "Separatoren-Schmieröl CLP 100" [CLP 100 separator lubrication oil] min-
eral gear oil tested by GEA Westfalia Separator meets the requirements and
should be used if at all possible.
Marking to DIN 51502

CLP
100
Designation according to ISO
CC 100
3498
Viscosity class SAE 30
o o 2
Viscosity (at 40 C/104 F) 100 ± 10 mm /s (cSt)
Part number 0015-0003-080 (2.5 litre)
Dispose of in accordance with the oil manufacturer's information.
Viscosity class SAE 30 extends over a wider viscosity range than quoted here.
However, only oils with the viscosity range quoted here may be used.
OIL QUALITY (synthetic oil)

The synthetic gear oil tested by GEA Westfalia Separator should be used as a
synthetic lubricating oil!
Viscosity class (ISO) VG 68

viscosity
o o 2
– at 40 C (104 F) 65 mm /s
o o 2
– at 100 C (212 F) 10.4 mm /s
Viscosity index (VI) 147
o o
Density (at 15 C/59 F) 0.857 g/ml
Based on polyalphaolefin
Part number 0015-0020-010 (1 litre)
Dispose of in accordance with the oil manufacturer's information.

116 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Oil quantity
NOTICE: Do not forget to top up in good time!
Topping up oil
Fill the drive chamber with oil before
the initial start-up of the separator.
• Unscrew the screw plug and
• pour in oil through the filling hole.
Amount: approx. 3.7 litres
Fig. 110
Oil level
• Check the oil level only and always

NOTICE:
• During operation, the oil level must

when the separator is at standstill!
never be allowed to drop below the

bottom third of the sight glass.
1 Maximum oil level

2 Minimum oil level
Fig. 111
Minimum oil level roughly up to the lower third of the sight glass
(with separator at a standstill)
Maximum oil level up to middle of sight glass
(with separator at a standstill)
Oil check
• Check the oil level every week!
• From time to time, undo oil drain screw and check whether the oil bath con-
tains water. An immediate oil change becomes necessary when the oil in the
sight glass shows a milky colouring (emulsification).
Oil change
• Oil change after approximately
– 4000 operating hours or 6 months at the latest (mineral oil).
– 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil).
• Clean sight glass.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 117
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notes
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

118 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.2.4 Lubrication instructions
Fig. 112 Lubrication plan

2063-9001-420 / 0815 119
Lubricant Lubrication frequency

Lubrica-
After Lubricant qty. Lubrication point
tion point
Designation Marking operating per year
hours
CLP
100
Lubricating oil DIN 51502 3

4 000 2x 3 700 cm Drive chamber
(mineral)
1
CC 100
ISO 3498
Lubricating oil Mobil SHC 626 3

8 000 1x 3 700 cm Drive chamber
(synthetic) ISO VG 68
2 Acc. to instructions of motor manufacturer Motor bearings
Gaskets, threaded and

contact surfaces of the
3 2x
bowl and of the centripe-
tal pump
4 1x Threads of fittings
Lubricating see when nec-
apply thin coat
grease spare parts list essary
- Threads of tools
Manually-operated parts
5 1x
such as locking brake
• Continuously monitor oil level at the sight glass.

• Manual lubrication
• Follow the lubricating oil table in section 4.2.5!

120 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.2.5 Lubricating oil table
Lubricating oil types suggested by selected companies

viscosity
Westfalia Separator Group Manufac- at 40 °C (104 °F)
Designation
turer 2
mm /s (cSt)
Lubricating oil table BLASIA 100
For separators operating onshore and on board ships
RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator Lubricating oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
viscosity 105
DISOLA M 3015
(Designation to DIN
MONTANOL HK 100 100

Oil filling
Kinematic
Symbol
51502)
viscosity ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100

Type
at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
(104 °F)
2
mm /s HYSPIN AWS 100
l
(cSt) 100
…SE 5 ALPHA ZN 100
MARINE HEAVY 99
GST OIL 100

100
NL Gear Compound 100
1
Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30 104
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
DISOLA M 3015
…SE 10 TURBINE T 100 95
EXX-MAR XP 110
…SC 18 NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
2.25
…DA 20 GULF HARMONY 100 95
…SE 20 VERITAS 30 110
CLP 90 to 110 0015-0003-080 HIDRAOIL HD 70 95

…DA 40 100 (2.5 l)
…SC 40
…SE 40 MOBILGARD 312 106
GADINIA 30 104
3.7
…SE 50 ROTELLA MX SAE 30 105
HYDRA WAY HMA 100

100
LOAD WAY EP 100
…DC 55
…SC 60
…SE 60 DORO AR SAE 30 119
TARO XD SAE 30 105
…SD 70
5.0
…SE 70
…DA 80
…SC 80
…SE 80

2063-9001-420 / 0815 121
4.2.6 Notes on the lubricating oil table for separators from GEA Westfalia Separator Group
For smooth operation of separators, it is essential to make the correct selection of a suitable lubricating
oil, as a good oil which meets the very stringent requirements reduces wear to a minimum and thus in-
creases the service life and operational reliability of the separator.
We recommend using the oils listed under "GEA Westfalia Separator Group" to lubricate our separators,
as these are under permanent quality control. We do not perform such checks on the oils suggested by
"selected companies".
GEA Westfalia Separator Group is unable to accept any warranty on performance.
Essentially only highly-refined solvent raffinates should be used.
The types of oil listed here meet the DIN requirements. Under unfavourable operating conditions, e.g.
high temperatures, the performance of the oils may not be adequate, meaning that higher-performance
oils, e.g. synthetic oils, will have to be used. You should therefore contact GEA Westfalia Separator
Group if necessary.
We prescribe the viscosity ranges listed in the lubricating oil table for the individual types of separator
and oil.
o
Separator operating temperature is generally above 80 C (176 oF). Many oils age very fast at such tem-
peratures, making a premature change necessary.
It should also be noted that lubricating oils with a viscosity below those quoted in the lubricating oil table
should never be used. The lower bearing capacity of the lubricating film means that oils with too low a
viscosity lead to mixed friction and increased wear. On the other hand, it is permitted to exceed the speci-
fied viscosity range slightly.
It should be noted that viscosity classes SAE 30, 40 and 50 (SAE = Society of Automotive Engineers) ex-
tend over relatively large viscosity ranges. However, the lower limits quoted in the table for the reduced
viscosity ranges for the individual separator models should not be undershot under any circumstances.

122 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.3 Bowl
Fig. 113 Exploded drawing of the bowl and the centripetal pump

2063-9001-420 / 0815 123
Item Designation Dimensions

20 (1) Bowl bottom, compl.
30 Gasket
40 Piston guide ring
45 Partial ejection ring
50 (2) Water chamber bottom
70 Gasket
80 Allen screw ISO 4762 - M 10 x 20 - 1.4571
90 Annular piston
100 Gasket
110 Gasket
120 Closing chamber bottom
130 Gasket
140 Gasket
160 Guide band
170 Allen screw ISO 4762 - M 12 x 40 - A4-80
180 Sliding piston
190 Gasket
200 Guide band
210 (1) Distributor
220 Disc stack, compl.
230 Separating disk
240 (1) Bowl top, complete
250 Gasket
260 Gasket
280 (2) *Lock ring
290 Threaded pin ISO 4026 - M 12 x 16 - 1.4571
300 Gasket
310 Gasket
320 Centripetal pump chamber cover
330 Regulating ring
340 Gasket
350 *Lock ring
370 Spindle screw
380 Gasket
500 Centripetal pump. complete
(1) NOTICE: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!

The complete bowl must be rebalanced in one of our authorized workshops or at the factory.
(2) NOTICE: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!
A vibration check must be carried out on the machine by a WS service specialist.

124 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.3.1 Dismantling the bowl

– The run-down time of the bowl is 60 minutes after switching off the motor
(without braking).


in the frame,

ing.
Fig. 114



When carrying out maintenance work, there is a danger of injury from hot sepa-
o
rator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F)).

In the case of motors with space heaters, residual voltages in the motor
terminal box are possible even if the main switch is off!


• refer to the frequency converter manual (option).
• take adequate preventive measures according to national provisions (in Ger-
many in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
cian!

2063-9001-420 / 0815 125
• Remove the bowl from the frame only in accordance with this section.
• Avoid damage to bowl parts during assembly and dismantling by

– exact positioning.
– not pulling at an angle!
– selecting the lower lifting speed of the hoist.
• Use suitably rated, intact hoists.




• Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.
• Handle all bowl parts gently and always set them down on a rubber mat or a
wooden pallet.
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance!
• do not interchange parts from different bowls.

In the case of a plant with several separators:
The bowl parts are marked with the serial number of the machine or the last
three digits of the serial number.
• Certain bowl parts (see section

CAUTION:
4.3) may be pre-assembled and

balanced only by specialists from
GEA Westfalia Separator or in
workshops authorized by the
company.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life and
limb.
Fig. 115

126 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Lifting off the hood
• Unscrew with wrench:

– Product feed line (1).
– Discharge line (2) for heavy liquid
• Discharge line (3) for light liquid
Fig. 116
• Unscrew handle connection piece

(1) by gently tapping with a mallet
• holding the centripetal pump steady

(left-hand thread), at the same time
with socket wrench (2).
Fig. 117

2063-9001-420 / 0815 127
• Remove handle connection piece

(1).
• take gasket (2) out of the handle

If necessary (see section 4.2.1):
connection piece.
Fig. 118
• Unscrew all hexagon nuts and

washers that connect the hood with
the frame.
Fig. 119
• Screw two eye bolts (1) (M 16) into

the connection piece.
• Hang the transport chain as illustrat-
ed into the ring nuts (1) and hang on
the load hook of the hoist.
CAUTION: Danger to life when

transporting heavy parts!
Fig. 120
NOTICE: Do not damage stud bolts for fastening the hood!

– Do not tilt the hood when lifting it off.
• Lift off the connection piece together with the hood with the hoist.

128 2063-9001-420 / 0815
CAUTION: Secure the complete

hood from rolling away and over-
turning using suitable aids!
• Turn the complete hood through 90
o
(opposite fitting position) with the aid

of the hoist.
Fig. 121
• Unscrew four hex head bolts (1) and lock washers (2) which connect the con-
nection piece (4) to the hood (3).
Note:
Hex head bolts (1) and lock washers (2) are sealed with semi-permanent liq-
uid sealant.
• Detach connection piece (4) with fitted gasket from the hood.

• Take gasket (1) out of the groove in
the hood.
Fig. 122

• remove gasket (1) from the upper
section of the frame.
Fig. 123

2063-9001-420 / 0815 129
• Remove sleeve (1) with fitted gas-

kets (2) and (3).
Fig. 124
Dismantling the centripetal pump
Required special tools

– Ring spanner
– Striking pin
• Undo the centripetal pump chamber

lock ring by striking the arm of the
ring spanner using a striking pin
(left-hand thread) and remove it.
Fig. 125
• Screw handle connection piece into

the centripetal pump (left-hand
thread).
• Lift off regulating ring, centripetal
pump chamber cover with inserted
gasket and centripetal pump simul-
taneously.
Fig. 126

130 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Dismantle the following parts if nec-

essary:
– Regulating ring (1),
– centripetal pump chamber cover
(3) with gasket (2) and
– centripetal pump (4).
Fig. 127
Lifting out the bowl
Required tools
– Socket wrench
– Ratchet (commercially available)
• Unscrew the spindle screw (with

fitted gasket) using tools (left-hand
thread) and remove it.
Fig. 128
Required special tools:

– Eye bolt (1)
• Unscrew hexagon nut (2).

• Screw eye bolt (1) into the bowl
bottom.
• Force the bowl off the spindle cone
with the open-ended wrench.
Fig. 129

2063-9001-420 / 0815 131

• Lift the bowl out of the frame by
• For further assembly, set the bowl

means of the hoist.
down on a smooth, skid-proof base .
Fig. 130
Compressing the disk stack
• Clean the threads in distributor (1)
• Grease the thread of bowl top (2)

with a brush.
Fig. 131

Compressing device:
– Bolt unit (1)
– Bell-shaped piece (2)
Fig. 132
The bolt unit (1) comprises ring nut, lever and bolt.
– The ring nut must always be screwed into the bolt and be secured with a
high-strength liquid sealant (e.g. Loctite 275).
– The lever must always have smooth contact surfaces (remove any burrs!).

132 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Grease the thread and contact sur-

face of the bell-shaped piece (2)
• Mount bell-shaped piece (2) on the

• Check "O" marks of the bell-shaped

bowl top.
piece and the bowl bottom.
• Screw on centripetal pump chamber

– The "0" marks must be aligned.
lock ring (3) as far as it will go (left-

hand thread).
Fig. 133
• Screw bolt unit (1) through the bell-

shaped piece and thread it into the
distributor as far as it will go using
an open-ended wrench.
Fig. 134
• Screw out three threaded pins from

the bowl lock ring.
Fig. 135

– Complete ring spanner (1)
• Loosen hexagon nuts (3) of hex

head bolts (2).
Fig. 136

2063-9001-420 / 0815 133
Important:
The "O" marks of the bowl lock ring
and of the bowl bottom must be visible.
– Do not cover them with ring span-
• The arrow and the “open” label of

ner (1)!
the ring spanner must face upwards.

– The bushes of ring spanner (1)
must engage in the bores of the
bowl lock ring.
Fig. 137
• Screw ring spanner (1) to the bowl lock ring.

• Screw in two hex head screws (2) of the ring spanner and firmly tighten.
• Screw on the lever until it is seated

on the bell-shaped piece.
CAUTION: The rotating lever may

cause injury!
– Be sure to work carefully in the area
around the lever.
• Hammer with the mallet forcefully
against the lever.
– Disk stack is compressed.
Fig. 138
CAUTION: The lever may cause

injury!
around the lever.
Important when striking open the
• Check the hex head screws (1) after

bowl lock ring:
a few blows.
– All hex head screws (1) must be
screwed tight.
Fig. 139
• Strike open the bowl lock ring using a striking pin(left-hand thread).
– The bowl lock ring is screwed out of the thread of the bowl bottom.

134 2063-9001-420 / 0815

NOTICE: Sensitive bowl parts!

– Do not damage the threads of the
bowl lock ring and the bowl bottom.
• Hold the bowl lock ring with the ring
spanner and lift it off using chains
and a hoist.
Fig. 140
Lifting off the bowl top

cause injury!
around the lever.
• Carefully loosen the bolt unit using
a mallet.
Fig. 141
• Remove bolt unit from distributor

using the wrench.
Fig. 142

2063-9001-420 / 0815 135
• Screw the bolt unit into the bell-
• Screw in the bolt unit until the start

shaped piece.
of the thread is visible (see detail).
Fig. 143
• Before lifting off the bowl top, check

that the threaded ring (1) is firmly
bolted to the bowl top (2).

– Lift off only the bowl top 2.
– Abort the transport immediately if
the bowl bottom (3) is lifted more
than 1 cm from the supporting sur-
face.
Fig. 144
• Carefully lift off bowl top (2) (with
fitted gaskets) with the aid of the fit-
ted tools and hoist, and set it down
on a rubber mat or wooden pallet.
• Carefully separate the bowl top from the bowl bottom by striking the rim of the
Note: If the bowl bottom (3) is raised by more than 1 cm from the supporting surface:
bowl bottom a few times with a rubber mallet.

If the bowl top cannot be separated from the bowl bottom as a result of heavy
• set down the bowl parts again,

soiling,
• force off the bowl top (2) as follows and lift it off (see Fig. 145 to Fig. 151).

136 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Lifting off a heavily soiled bowl top (see Fig. 145 to Fig. 151):
Additional special tool

– Disc (4)
Fig. 145
• Screw the bolt unit (1) into the dis-

tributor with a wrench as far as it will
go.
Fig. 146
• Turn lever (1) beneath the ring nut.

• Unscrew threaded ring (2).
Fig. 147

2063-9001-420 / 0815 137
• Raise bell-shaped piece (1).

• Slide disk (2) onto the bolt shoulder
(see detail).
Fig. 148
• Place bell-shaped piece (2) back on
• Check "O" marks on the bell-shaped

the bowl top.
piece and the bowl top.
• Screw in threaded ring (3) as far as

it will go (left-hand thread).
Fig. 149
• Unscrew the bolt unit counter-

clockwise out of the distributor com-
pletely down to end of thread.
– Bowl top is forced off.
Fig. 150

138 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Before lifting off the bowl top, check

that the threaded ring (1) is firmly
bolted to the bowl top (2).

– Lift off only the bowl top 2.
– Abort the transport immediately if
the distributor is also lifted together
with the disk stack.
Fig. 151
• Carefully lift off bowl top (2) with the aid of tools and hoist and set it down on a
rubber mat or wooden pallet.
• Remove tools from bowl top.
Removing the separating disk
• Take the separating disk off the

distributor neck.
Fig. 152
Removing the disk stack and the distributor
• Screw the bolt unit of the compress-

ing device into the distributor with
the open-ended wrench.
Fig. 153

2063-9001-420 / 0815 139

• Lift out and set down the distributor
together with the disk stack with the
• Remove the hoist and unscrew the

aid of the bolt unit and hoist.
bolt unit.
Fig. 154
Removing the sliding piston
• Insert spindle screw (1) into the hub.
Fig. 155
• Grease the thread of sliding piston
• Screw on bell-shaped piece (3) of

(1) (see section 4.2.4).
the compressing device onto the
• Screw bolt assembly (2) through the

sliding piston.
bell-shaped piece into the sliding

piston.
Fig. 156

140 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Force off sliding piston from the bowl

bottom by turning clockwise.
Fig. 157

• Remove the sliding piston (with fitted

gaskets) using bolt unit, bell-shaped

piece and hoist.
bolt unit.
Fig. 158
Removing the annular piston and closing chamber bottom
• Unscrew twelve Allen screws hold-

ing the bowl bottom and the closing
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 159

2063-9001-420 / 0815 141

– Compressing device:
Bolt unit (1)
Bell-shaped piece (2)
– Assembling device (3)
Fig. 160
• Insert bell-shaped piece (1) into the
• Fit assembling device (2) onto bell-

bowl bottom.
• Loosen three Allen screws (3) using

shaped piece (1).
the ratchet wrench (with extension
• Slip three disks (4) of the assem-

and socket).
bling device towards the periphery,
• Make sure that the disks (4) are

under the rim of annular piston (5).
properly positioned under the annu-
• Firmly re-tighten Allen screws (3).

Fig. 161
lar piston.
• Screw bolt unit (1) into bell-shaped
• Force off closing chamber bottom

piece (2).
(3) together with annular piston (4)

by turning the bolt unit clockwise.
Fig. 162

• Lift out closing chamber bottom (3)
and annular piston (4) (with fitted
gaskets) using the hoist.
Fig. 163

142 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Separate annular piston (1) from

closing chamber bottom (2) by tap-
ping with a mallet – as illustrated.
Fig. 164
• Remove spindle screw (1).
Fig. 165
• Remove gasket (1) and piston guide

If necessary:
ring (2).
Fig. 166
• Take the partial ejection ring out of

Partial ejection only!
the bowl bottom.
Fig. 167

2063-9001-420 / 0815 143
Removing the water chamber bottom

– Eye bolt (1)

• Screw eye bolt (1) into bowl bottom
and firmly tighten with an open-
ended wrench.
Fig. 168

• Hang the bowl bottom on to the load
hood of the hoist.
• Unscrew four Allen screws (1) from
water chamber bottom (2).
• Force off water chamber bottom (2)
with a screwdriver and remove to-
gether with fitted gaskets.
Fig. 169

144 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.3.2 Cleaning the bowl

In general, it is not necessary to dismantle self-cleaning bowls after separation
for cleaning unless
– the nature of the product necessitates it,
– the separator is to be shut down for a lengthy period (see section 4.8).
• Dismantle and clean the bowl for checking from time to time depending on
operational demands. See section 4.2.1 - Maintenance schedule.
• Use only cleaning agents approved for the specific application!
• Do not use cleaning agents containing acid or chlorine.

Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.
• Dislodge dried scale with citric acid.
• Do not use metal scrapers or metal brushes to

To clean the disks and bowl parts!
• Remove the gaskets from the bowl

parts.
• Clean grooves and gaskets to pre-
vent corrosion in the grooves.
• Replace damaged, very swollen,
hardened or brittle gaskets immedi-
ately.
Fig. 170
• Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid ex-
tremely carefully to ensure smooth functioning of the ejection process.
• Clean the distributor between the

ribs inside and outside with the
brush.
If the distributor neck is heavily con-
taminated, the feed will get blocked
which can cause overflow.
Fig. 171
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl
parts after drying (see 4.2.4 – Lubrication schedule).
• Re-assemble bowl immediately after cleaning!

2063-9001-420 / 0815 145
4.3.3 Cleaning the frame
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct jet of water.

CAUTION: Danger to life from electrical parts!
• Use only cleaning agents approved for the specific application!
• Do not use cleaning agents containing acid or chlorine.

NOTICE!
Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.

• Dislodge dried scale with citric acid.
• The inner surfaces of the upper section of the frame have to be cleaned from
time to time.
For this purpose:
– follow the Maintenance schedule (section 4.2.1),
– dismantle the bowl (section 4.3.1).
NOTICE: Escape of cleaning fluid!

When the bowl is dismantled, no
cleaning fluid may escape via the
spindle onto the drive belt.
• Ensure that safety cap (2) and spin-
dle cap (1) with gasket are fitted.
Fig. 172
NOTICE: Cavitation, cracks or in-

dentations on the upper part of the
• Refer to the maintenance schedule

frame due to operating liquid!
• Check the inside of the upper part of

(section 4.2.1).
the frame (1) for cavitation, cracks or
• In case of damage to the endan-

indentations.
gered area (see arrows), which is

deeper than 2 mm, contact GEA
Fig. 173 Endangered area

146 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.3.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system
• The strainer and the operating water feeding system must be cleaned de-
pending on the quality of the operating water and overall load. See section
4.2.1 Maintenance schedule
• Use citric acid in case of furring.
• Thoroughly clean the parts with water.
Replacing or cleaning the filter element
CAUTION: Danger due to electrical current!
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.

o
parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F)).
• Undo plug (1) (jaw span 22) with

fitted gasket (2).
• Remove filter element (3).
• Clean or replace filter element (3).
– Use citric acid in case of furring.
– Thoroughly rinse the cleaned
parts with water.
Fig. 174
• Fit the cleaned or new filter element (3).

NOTICE: Copper strip "A" to the inside!
• Hand-tighten plug (1) with fitted gasket (2) so that it seals well.
4.3.5 Cleaning the motor
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct jet of water.

CAUTION: Danger to life from electrical parts!
• Keep the motor clean in accordance with its instruction manual.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 147
4.3.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl

If the bowl is not correctly assembled or inadequately cleaned, the forces gen-
erated in the high-speed rotating bowl can endanger the operating safety of the
separator!
• Follow the cleaning instructions (section 4.3.2) and the assembly instructions
(section 4.3.7) precisely.
• Install the bowl in the frame only in accordance with section 4.3.7.
The following points should also be observed:
• Before assembling the bowl, ensure that the guide and bearing surfaces of
NOTICE!
the bowl parts are clean.

• Grease guide surfaces as specified in the lubrication schedule (see 4.2.4).
• Some bowl parts must be arranged

in fixed positions relative to one an-
• Locking devices and alignment

other.
marks must be in perfect condition.

NOTICE:
The bowl may not be operated un-
less this is the case!
Fig. 175
• When fitting the bowl parts, make

sure that the "O" marks on all parts
are in line with each other.
(Only then will the parts fit correctly
over arresting pins and guide ribs).
Fig. 176
• Avoid damage to bowl parts during assembly and dismantling by

– positioning accurately,


148 2063-9001-420 / 0815



• If the installation has several separa-

tors, be sure not to interchange

parts of different bowls.
The parts are marked
– with the serial number or
– the last three digits of the serial
number.
Fig. 177
• Thoroughly clean the gasket

grooves of the individual bowl parts
and apply a thin coat of grease.
• After fitting check that
– the gaskets are not twisted,
– the gaskets are evenly positioned
in the groove.
Fig. 178

2063-9001-420 / 0815 149
4.3.7 Assembling the bowl
• Pay particular attention to the sections "Safety", 4.3.2 and 4.3.6.

• For dimensions of the parts, see 4.3 – exploded view.
Fitting the water chamber

– Eye bolt (1)

• Screw eye bolt (1) into bowl bottom
and firmly tighten with an open-
ended wrench.
Fig. 179
• Insert gaskets (1) and (2) in the

grooves of the water chamber bot-
tom.

• Hang the bowl bottom on to the load
hook of the hoist and transport
above eye level.
• Place water chamber bottom in the
• Check "O" marks of the bowl bottom

bowl bottom.
and the water chamber bottom.

• Screw in the four Allen screws (3)
holding the water chamber bottom
and bowl bottom together tight.
Torque: 35 Nm
Fig. 180

150 2063-9001-420 / 0815
NOTICE: Do not grease the bowl
• Clean the bowl hub with a suitable

hub!
cloth.
– The cone must be clean and dry.

• Set down the bowl bottom with fitted
water chamber bottom.
Fig. 181
• Remove the hoist and unscrew the ring nut.
Fitting the annular piston and closing chamber bottom
• Grease contact surfaces as speci-

fied in the lubrication schedule (see
• Insert gasket (1) and piston guide

4.2.4).
ring (2) into the grooves in the bowl

bottom.
Fig. 182
• For replacing the polyamide gasket

(1), see section 4.3.9.
• Insert gasket (2) into the groove of
the annular piston, applying firm
and even pressure.
4.2.4).
Fig. 183

2063-9001-420 / 0815 151
• Insert annular piston (1) into bowl

bottom (2).
Fig. 184
• Insert guide strip (1) bit by bit into

the groove of the closing chamber
bottom and tap it in carefully and
• Thoroughly clean guide strip (1) and

evenly with a mallet!
its guide surfaces.
Fig. 185
• Insert gaskets (1), (2) and (3) in the

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.2.4).
Fig. 186

– Two complete assembling devices:
Hex head screw (1)
Wing nut (2)
Pipe (3)
Hexagon nut (4)
Fig. 187

152 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Insert two assembling devices into

opposite bores of closing chamber
bottom (5) and fasten with hexagon
• Check "O" marks of the closing

nuts (4).
chamber bottom and the bowl bot-

tom.
• Insert closing chamber bottom (5)

into the annular piston with the aid of

the assembling devices.
Fig. 188
• Remove two hexagon nuts (4).

• Screw two assembling devices into
• Insert the closing chamber bottom

the bowl bottom.
into the bowl bottom by turning wing
• Remove the assembling devices.

nuts (2) clockwise
Fig. 189
• Check “O” marks of the bowl bottom

and the closing chamber bottom.
• Fasten closing chamber bottom (1)

onto the bowl bottom by tightening

all Allen screws (2) crosswise.
Fig. 190
• Screw tight all the Allen screws hold-

ing the closing chamber bottom and
bowl bottom together.
Torque: 45 Nm
Fig. 191

2063-9001-420 / 0815 153
• Make sure that piston guide ring (1)

fits tightly in the groove.
Fig. 192
• Thoroughly clean and wipe dry the

Partial ejection only!
• Fit the partial ejection ring.

groove in the bowl bottom.
Fig. 193

154 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Fitting the sliding piston
Fig. 194

the groove of the sliding piston and
tap it in carefully and evenly with a
mallet.
Important: If necessary, shorten the

protruding guide strip (2).
• Insert gasket (1) in the groove of the

its guide surfaces.
sliding piston.
Fig. 195 4.2.4).
• Grease the thread of sliding piston
• Screw bell-shaped piece (3) of the

(1) (see section 4.2.4).
compressing device into the thread
• Screw bolt assembly (2) through the

of the sliding piston.
bell-shaped piece into the sliding

piston.
Fig. 196

2063-9001-420 / 0815 155

• Insert sliding piston (with inserted
gasket) into the bowl bottom with the

aid of compressing device and hoist.
bolt unit.
Fig. 197
Fig. 198
• Place disk (1) onto the bell-shaped
• Screw complete eye bolt (2) into the

piece.
• Press the sliding piston into its seat

bowl hub as far as it will go.
as far as it will go by turning hexa-

gon nut clockwise with an open-
• Remove the tools.

ended wrench.
Fig. 199

156 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Installing the distributor and the disk stack
NOTICE: Ensure the total number of

disks is correct!
This is marked on the blind disk, e.g.
84/1:
– Total number of disks A and B = 84
(number of disks with spacers
A + number of blind disks B)
– Number of blind disks B = 1
Fig. 200
NOTICE: The last disks must be

properly inserted into the guide ribs
of the distributor!
• Stack the disks carefully on the dis-

tributor neck.
Fig. 201
• Screw the bolt unit of the compress-

ing device into the distributor with a
wrench as far as it will go.
Fig. 202

2063-9001-420 / 0815 157

• Install the distributor together with
the disk stack with the bolt unit and
hoist.
– The "O" marks of the bowl bottom
and the distributor must be
• Pay attention to correct positioning!

aligned.

Fig. 203 bolt unit.
Fitting the separating disk
• Place the separating disk on the

distributor neck.
– The O marks of the bowl bottom
and the distributor must be
aligned.
Fig. 204
Installing the bowl top

• Turn the bowl top through 180° (o p-
posite the fitting position) using a
transport rope and a hoist.
• Thoroughly clean the grooves for
gaskets (1) and (2) in the bowl top.
• Check gaskets (1) and (2):
– Replace gaskets if damaged.
– Insert the gaskets.
Fig. 205
• For replacing the polyamide gasket (1), see section 4.3.8.

• Turn bowl top through 180° (fitting position).
• Remove the transport rope and hoist.

158 2063-9001-420 / 0815

Compressing device:
– Bolt unit (1)
– Bell-shaped piece (2)
Fig. 206
The bolt unit (1) comprises ring nut, lever and bolt.
– The ring nut must always be screwed into the bolt and be secured with a
high-strength liquid sealant (e.g. Loctite 275).
– The lever must always have smooth contact surfaces (remove any burrs!).
• Grease the thread of the bowl top
• Mount bell-shaped piece (2) on the

• Check "O" marks on the bell-shaped

bowl top.
piece and the bowl top.
• Screw on centripetal pump chamber

lock ring (3) as far as it will go (left-
• Screw bolt unit (1) into the bell-

hand thread).
shaped piece as far as it will go.

Fig. 207

• Install bowl top with bolt unit and
hoist.
– Pay attention to correct position-
• Check "O" marks on the bowl top

ing!
and the bowl bottom.

• Remove the hoist.
Fig. 208

2063-9001-420 / 0815 159
Compressing the disk stack
• Screw bolt unit (1) through the bell-

shaped piece and thread it into the
distributor as far as it will go using
an open-ended wrench.
Fig. 209
NOTICE: Sensitive bowl parts!

– Prevent seizing of the threads!
• The following items must be careful-
ly cleaned, wiped dry and greased in
accordance with the lubrication
schedule (see 4.2.4):
– Threads and guide surfaces of
bowl bottom and lock ring.
– Bearing surfaces of bowl top and
bowl lock ring.
Fig. 210

• Hold the bowl lock ring together with

the ring spanner and lower slowly
onto the bowl bottom using chains
• Screw the bowl lock ring into the

and a hoist.
thread of the bowl bottom as far as

possible by hand (left-hand thread).
Fig. 211
• Remove the hoist and chains.

160 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Screw on the lever until it is seated

on the bell-shaped piece.

cause injury!
• Hammer with the mallet forcefully

around the lever.
against the lever.

– Disk stack is compressed.
Fig. 212
CAUTION: The lever may cause

injury!
around the lever.
CAUTION: An insufficiently tight-

ened lock ring can endanger life!
Important when striking closed the
• Check the hex head screws (1) after

bowl lock ring:
a few blows.
– All hex head screws (1) must be
Fig. 213
screwed tight.
• Strike the bowl lock ring with a striking bolt until the "0" mark is reached (left-
hand thread).
• Check "0" marks on the bowl lock ring and bowl bottom.
• Remove the centripetal pump chamber lock ring, compressing device and ring
spanner.
• Screw in three threaded pins.
Fig. 214

2063-9001-420 / 0815 161
Installing the complete bowl and the centripetal pump
NOTICE: Do not grease the parts of

the cone!
• Dry and clean the spindle cone with

a suitable cloth.
Fig. 215

– Eye bolt (1)

• Screw eye bolt (1) completely into
the bowl bottom.
Fig. 216

• Carefully place the bowl on the
spindle cone using the eye bolt and
hoist.
Fig. 217

162 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Unscrew the eye bolt from the bowl

bottom.
Fig. 218
• Socket wrench
Required tools
• Torque wrench
• Fit gasket (1) to spindle screw (2).

• Grease thread of the spindle screw
• Put spindle screw in socket wrench

and screw in (left-hand thread).
Fig. 219
CAUTION: A loose spindle screw

can endanger life.
• Tighten the spindle screw.

Torque: 80 Nm
Fig. 220
• Check that the spindle and bowl are

centric.
The reference dimension B
– is 5 (±1.5) mm
– between the bowl and the upper
section of the frame.
• Note bowl height A (see section

4.6.1).
Fig. 221

2063-9001-420 / 0815 163
• Insert gaskets (1) and (2) in the

grooves of the bowl top.
Fig. 222
• Apply a thin film of grease threads

and contact surfaces of the centripe-
tal pump.
• Mount the centripetal pump (1).
Fig. 223
• Mount the centripetal pump chamber

cover.
ing.
Fig. 224
• Insert the gasket in the groove of the

centripetal pump chamber cover.
Fig. 225

164 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Mount the regulating ring selected

from the set of regulating rings.
• See section 2.6.
Fig. 226
• Grease the threads on the bowl top

and in the lock ring as specified in
• Screw the centripetal pump chamber

the lubrication schedule.
lock ring onto the bowl top (left-

hand thread).
Fig. 227

– Ring spanner
CAUTION: A loose centripetal pump

chamber lock ring can endanger
• Tighten the centripetal pump cham-

life!
ber lock ring by lightly striking the

handle of the ring spanner (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 228
• Pay attention to section 4.6.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 165
4.3.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

• For standard tools, see section 2.8.
• For special tools, see sections 2.9, 2.9.1 and 2.9.2.
REMOVAL
NOTICE: Sensitive bowl part!
– Do not damage the groove in the
bowl top when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically:
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approximately 50
to 60 mm.
Fig. 229

bowl top when screwing in!
• Screw two wood screws into the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• Lever it out of the groove bit by bit

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 230
Note:
If the polyamide gasket cannot be removed, repeat this procedure multiple
times.
FITTING
Important! To facilitate fitting, thoroughly clean dry the groove and poly-
amide gasket in the bowl top.
• Thoroughly clean and wipe dry the groove.
CAUTION: Risk of burns due to hot water and touching hot surfaces!
– Wear protective gloves.
– Act in a safety-conscious way.
• Heat the polyamide gasket in approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
o
• Thoroughly wipe dry the polyamide gasket.

166 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Fit the polyamide gasket into the

groove of the bowl top (with the nar-
• Mount a smooth piece of hard wood.

row side facing the bowl top).
• Hammer the polyamide gasket

evenly into the groove.
Fig. 231
• Assemble the bowl and centripetal pump and fit into the separator (see sec-
tion 4.3.7 “Assembling the bowl”).
• Close the hood (see section 4.4 “Closing the hood”).
• Start the separator (see section 3.3 “Starting the separator”).
NOTICE! Do not start the program!
• Start the program.

Only after a running time of 30 minutes
This running time must be adhered to so that the polyamide gasket is pressed
properly into the bowl top.
• switch on the separator motor by pressing the start key.

If the separator is switched off by the program,
• Compare the starting current and starting time with the diagram (see section
4.1.4) until the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 167
4.3.9 Replacing the polyamide gasket (annular piston)

Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged.
• For standard tools, see section 2.8.
• For special tools, see sections 2.9, 2.9.1 and 2.9.2.
REMOVAL

annular piston when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically:
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approximately 50
to 60 mm.
Fig. 232

annular piston when screwing in!
• Screw two wood screws into the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• Lever it out of the groove bit by bit

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 233
Note:
If the polyamide gasket cannot be removed, repeat this procedure several times
and increase the number of wood screws if necessary.

168 2063-9001-420 / 0815
FITTING
Important: To facilitate fitting, thoroughly clean dry the groove and poly-
amide gasket in the annular piston!
• Thoroughly clean and wipe dry the groove.
CAUTION: Risk of burns due to hot water and touching hot surfaces!
• Heat the new polyamide gasket in approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
o
• Wipe the gasket dry and press uni-

formly at four points into the groove.
Fig. 234
• Insert annular piston (1) into bowl

bottom (2).
Fig. 235

the groove of the closing chamber
bottom and tap it in carefully and

evenly with a mallet!
its guide surfaces.
Fig. 236

2063-9001-420 / 0815 169
• Insert gaskets (1), (2) and (3) in the

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.2.4).
Fig. 237
• Clamp mounting ring (1) under the

rim of the closing chamber bottom.
Fig. 238

– Two complete assembling devices:
Hex head screw (1)
Wing nut (2)
Pipe (3)
Hexagon nut (4)
Fig. 239
• Insert two assembling devices into

opposite bores of closing chamber
bottom (5) and fasten with hexagon
• Check "O" marks of the closing

nuts (4).
chamber bottom and the bowl bot-

tom.
• Insert closing chamber bottom (5)

into the annular piston with the aid of

the assembling devices.
Fig. 240

170 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Remove two hexagon nuts (4).

• Screw two assembling devices into
• Insert the closing chamber bottom

the bowl bottom.
into the bowl bottom by turning wing
• Remove the assembling devices.

nuts (2) clockwise
Fig. 241
• Check “O” marks of the bowl bottom

and the closing chamber bottom (1).
• Fasten closing chamber bottom (1)

onto the bowl bottom by tightening

twelve Allen screws (2) crosswise.
Fig. 242
• Screw tight the twelve Allen screws

holding the closing chamber bottom
and bowl bottom together.
Torque: 45 Nm
Fig. 243
Fig. 244

2063-9001-420 / 0815 171
• Unscrew twelve Allen screws hold-

ing the bowl bottom and the closing
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 245

– Compressing device:
Bolt unit (1)
Bell-shaped piece (2)
Fig. 246
• Insert bell-shaped piece (1) into the
• Fit assembling device (2) onto bell-

bowl bottom.
• Loosen three Allen screws (3) using

shaped piece (1).
the ratchet wrench (with extension
• Slip three disks (4) of the assem-

and socket).
bling device towards the periphery,
• Make sure that the disks (4) are

under the rim of annular piston (5).
properly positioned under the annu-
• Firmly re-tighten Allen screws (3).

Fig. 247
lar piston.
• Screw bolt unit (1) into bell-shaped
• Force off closing chamber bottom

piece (2).
(3) together with annular piston (4)

by turning the bolt unit clockwise.
Fig. 248

172 2063-9001-420 / 0815

• Lift out closing chamber bottom (3)
and annular piston (4) (with fitted
gaskets) using the hoist.
Fig. 249
• Separate annular piston (1) from

closing chamber bottom (2) by tap-
ping with a mallet – as illustrated.
Fig. 250
• Take out the assembly ring.
Fig. 251
Fig. 252

2063-9001-420 / 0815 173
• By carrying out several measure-

ments around the periphery of the
annular piston, determine whether
the polyamide gasket is seated par-
allel in the groove.
Fig. 253

174 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.3.10 Reworking the sliding piston
• The sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 254) (sliding piston sealing
The bowl seal consists of
• the polyamide gasket B of the bowl top (Fig. 255 )

surface H as delivered: 35 mm high) and
When worn, the sealing surface A of

the sliding piston can be remachined
up to max. 1.0 several times before it
has to be replaced.
NOTICE! When the first erosion

marks (0.2 to 0.3 mm deep) appear,
i.e. as soon as the bowl starts to
• Remachine the sealing surface of

leak:
the sliding piston.
Fig. 254
• When remachining, make sure that

– the sealing surface A is clean-machined and
– the sliding piston rim H is still at least 34 mm high.
Reference values for remachining the sealing surface A

Surface quality Ra 2 µm (Rz 12.5 µm)
Tool Hard metal steel of ISO quality M 30 or K 20
-1
speed 55 min
Cutting depth max. 0.15 mm
Feed max. 0.1 mm/revolution
NOTICE! After each face machining
• Fit a new polyamide gasket B into

operation
the bowl top (see section 4.3.8)!
Fig. 255

2063-9001-420 / 0815 175
4.4 Assembling the hood
If the gasket (1) has been removed to
• Insert a new gasket (1) in the groove

keep to the service intervals:
of the upper part of the frame.
Fig. 256
If the gaskets (2) and (3) have been

removed to keep to the service inter-
• Fit sleeve (1) with gaskets (2) and

vals:
(3) and place it on the centripetal

pump.
Fig. 257
If the hood has been dismantled to comply with the service intervals:
CAUTION: Risk of injury due to crushing!

– Wear safety gloves and safety shoes.
• Turn the hood through 90 (opposite fitting position) with the aid of the hoist.
o
• Secure the hood with suitable aids (e.g. wedges)!

CAUTION: Risk of rolling away and overturning!
• Assemble the hood in accordance with Fig. 258 to Fig. 260.

176 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Insert gasket (1) into the groove of

the hood.
Fig. 258
• Insert gasket (1) in the groove of the

connection piece.
Fig. 259
NOTICE! Avoid product contamina-
• Grease the bores of the hood and

tion.
connection piece!
• Bolt tight hood (1) and connection

piece (2) with four hex head screws
(3) and lock washers (4).
• Secure hex head screws (3) with
semi-solid sealant.
Fig. 260
• Remove aids to stabilize the hood:

CAUTION!
• Slowly lower the complete hood into its fitting position.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 177
4.4.1 Mounting the hood
• Screw two eye bolts (1) (M 16) into

the connection piece.
• Hang the transport chain as illustrat-
ed into the ring nuts (1) and hang on
the load hook of the hoist.

Fig. 261
NOTICE: Sensitive components!

– Do not damage stud bolts (2) for fastening the hood!
– Do not tilt the hood when mounting it.
• Place hood on the frame together with the fitted connection piece with the aid

of the hoist.
• Remove the transport chain and eye bolts (1).
• Firmly bolt the hood to the frame

using four washers and hexagon
nuts.
Fig. 262
If the gasket (2) has been removed to
• Provide handle connection piece (1)

keep to the service intervals:
with new gasket (2).
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the

guide surfaces and threads of the
handle connection piece in accord-
ance with the "Lubrication plan" (see
4.2.4).
Fig. 263

178 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Fit handle connection piece (1) in
• Hold the centripetal pump with the

the hood.
wrench (2) and tighten it by lightly

hammering the handle connection
piece with a mallet (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 264
• Grease threads as per lubrication

schedule, if supplied.
• Connect the following parts:
– Product feed line (1).
– Discharge line (2) for heavy liquid
– Discharge line (3) for light liquid
Fig. 265
• Ensure that pressure gauge (1) is
• Ensure that grooved coupling nut (2)

fitted and functional.
is screwed in.
Fig. 266

2063-9001-420 / 0815 179
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notes
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

180 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.5 Drive
Fig. 267 Exploded view of the drive

2063-9001-420 / 0815 181
Item Designation Dimensions
- Neck bearing bridge, compl.

10.1 Neck bearing bridge:
10.2 Neck bearing pressure ring
10.3 Threaded plug
10.4 Set of neck bearing springs
10.5 Spring piston
20 Gasket
30 Pivoting bearing
40 Bearing housing:
50 Gasket
60 Washer 12.5 x 22 x 1
70 Hex head screw M 12 x 40
75 Lock washer
- Spindle, compl.
80.1 Spindle
80.2 Neck bearing protection cap
80.3 Distance ring
80.4 Cylindrical roller bearing
80.5 Set collar
80.6 Threaded pin
80.7 Ball bearing protection ring
80.8 Angular contact ball bearing
80.9 Bearing sleeve
80.10 Cylindrical pin
80.11 Dowel pin
95 Lock washer
- Centrifugal clutch, complete
100.1 Clutch pulley
100.2 Grooved ball bearing
100.3 Spacer sleeve
100.4 Retaining ring 95 x 3
100.5 Clutch driver
100.7 Flat belt pulley
100.8 Allen screw M 10 x 35
100.9 Clutch shoe
100.10 Washer
110 Washer
130 Drive belt

182 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.5.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive

– The run-down time of the bowl is 60 minutes after switching off the motor.


in the frame,

ing.
Fig. 268



o
parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F) ).

In the case of motors with space heaters, residual voltages in the motor
terminal box are possible even if the main switch is off!


• refer to the frequency converter manual (option).
• take adequate preventive measures according to national provisions (in Ger-
many in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
cian!

2063-9001-420 / 0815 183
• Avoid damage to drive parts when fitting and removing by

– positioning accurately,




• Handle all drive parts gently and always set them down on a rubber mat or a
wooden pallet.
NOTICE: Before fitting the drive parts

• Thoroughly clean and dry the drive chamber.
Use only cleaning agents approved for the specific application!
• Thoroughly clean and dry the spindle parts.
– Use only cleaning agents approved for the specific application!
– Thoroughly clean all holes.
• Check the roller bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
Fit only the roller bearings specified in the parts list!
• Always operate the separator with the bowl fitted.

NOTICE: Avoid damage to bearings!

184 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.5.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly
• Pay special attention to section 4.5.1.
• Undo the oil drain screw and

• drain the oil into an oil pan (approx.
3.7 l).
Fig. 269
• Undo three hex head screws (1).

• Remove brake with brake housing
(2).
Fig. 270
• Unscrew four hex head screws (1).
Fig. 271

2063-9001-420 / 0815 185
• Pull the motor with hoist out of the

flange guide (about 10 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt downwards off the

NOTICE!
belt pulley (centrifugal clutch).
Fig. 272
• Lift the motor with centrifugal clutch

out of the lower section of frame.
Fig. 273
Remove operating water feeding

device in the upper section of the
• Undo nut (2).

frame:
• Take off pipe (3).
Fig. 274
• Remove spindle cap (1) with fitted

gasket.
Fig. 275

186 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Undo six hex head screws (1).

• Take out ring (2) and protective cap
(3) with fitted gasket (4).
Fig. 276
Dismantling the speed monitoring
• Unscrew hex head screw (1).

device:
• Take off speed monitoring device (2)

and set it down in the lower section
of frame.
Fig. 277
• Remove the drive belt from the low-

er section of the frame.
Fig. 278
• Unscrew three hex head screws (1)

with lock washers (2).
• Lift spindle assembly (3) out of the
lower part of the frame.
(For dismantling the spindle assem-
bly, see section 4.5.3.)
Fig. 279

2063-9001-420 / 0815 187
Required tools:
– Three hex head screws (1)
(M 12 x 75)
• Screw hex head screws (1) into the

puller holes.
• Force neck bearing bridge (2) off the
frame by turning screws (1) clock-
wise.
Fig. 280
NOTICE!
Before removing the neck bearing
• Mark the side of the neck bearing

bridge
A bridge facing the motor.
A Motor side
Fig. 281
• Take the neck bearing bridge to-

gether with the neck bearing pres-
sure ring and fitted gaskets out of
the lower part of the frame.
(For dismantling the neck bearing
bridge, see section 4.5.7.)
Fig. 282
• Unscrew four hex head screws (1)

with lock washers (2).
Fig. 283

188 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Required tools:
– Two hex head screws (2)
(M 10 x 40)
• Force off bearing housing (1) with
• Remove the bearing housing from

hex head screws (2).
the lower section of frame together

with pivoting bearing (3), washers
(4) and inserted gasket (5).
Fig. 284

2063-9001-420 / 0815 189
4.5.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly
Spindle assembly
Fig. 285
Required tools:
– Pulling tool (commercially available)
– Open-ended wrench
• Pull off the spindle:

– Cylindrical pin (1)
– Bearing sleeve (2)
– Angular contact ball bearing (3)
– Ball bearing protection ring (4)
Fig. 286

190 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Required tools:
– Mallet
NOTICE: Sensitive material!

– Make sure that the spindle does not
get damaged.
• Drive the dowel pin (1) out of the

spindle by means of light hammer
blows.
Fig. 287
• Unscrew threaded pins (1) out of the
• pull set collar (2) off the spindle.

set collar (2) and
Fig. 288
Required tools:
– Pulling tool (commercially available)
– Open-ended wrench
• Pull off the spindle:

– Cylindrical roller bearing (1)
– Spacer ring (2)
– Neck bearing protection cap (3).
Fig. 289

2063-9001-420 / 0815 191
4.5.4 Removing the centrifugal clutch
• Undo three hex head screws (1).

• Remove brake with brake housing
(2).
Fig. 290
• Unscrew four hex head screws (1).
Fig. 291
• Pull the motor with hoist out of the

flange guide (about 10 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt downwards off the

NOTICE!
flat belt pulley (centrifugal clutch).
Fig. 292

192 2063-9001-420 / 0815

• Lift the motor and centrifugal clutch
out of the lower section of the frame.
Fig. 293
CAUTION: Danger to life from roll-

ing away and overturning!
– Secure the motor with suitable auxil-
iaries (e.g. wedges).
• Set down the motor with fitted parts
on a level surface (mat or wooden
o
pallet) using hoist, turn through 90
(away from the fitting position) and
secure.
Fig. 294
• Loosen retaining ring (1).

• Remove disk (2).
Fig. 295
• Take clutch shoe out of the clutch

driver.
Fig. 296

2063-9001-420 / 0815 193
• Arrest clutch driver (1) with the

open-ended wrench.
• Unscrew hex head screw (2) out of
the motor shaft end.
• Remove disk (3).
Fig. 297
• Threaded pin (2) = (M 16 x 50)

Required special tool:

open-ended wrench.
NOTICE: Sensitive part!

– Do not damage the motor shaft end.
• Screw threaded pin (2) into the
thread of the motor shaft end.
Fig. 298
Required special tool:

– Hex head screw (M 30 x 240)
• Screw the hex head screw into the

clutch driver.
• Arrest clutch driver with the wrench.
• Force the centrifugal clutch off the
motor shaft end by turning the hex
head screw clockwise.
Fig. 299
• Unscrew hex head screw (1) from

the clutch driver and threaded pin
(2) from the motor shaft end.
Fig. 300

194 2063-9001-420 / 0815

• Place the clutch pulley with fitted flat
belt pulley and clutch driver on a
wooden base using transport ropes
and hoist.
• Secure the assembly using suitable

aids (e.g. wedges).

• Loosen the retaining ring from the
Fig. 301 clutch driver groove.
• Place on a wooden block.

• Drive the clutch driver downwards
by lightly hammering.
• Loosen the clutch driver from the
seat of the two ball bearings.
Fig. 302
• Turn the clutch pulley together with

o
fitted flat belt pulley 90 (upside
down) with the aid of the hoist.
• Secure the assembly using suitable

aids (e.g. wedges).
• Take the retaining rings out of the

clutch driver grooves.
Fig. 303
Required tools
– Disk (Ø 86 - 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer
• Turn the clutch pulley with fitted flat

o
belt pulley through 180 as shown
• set it down on a wooden base.

and
• Drive the grooved ball bearing and

spacer bush out of the clutch pulley.
Fig. 304

2063-9001-420 / 0815 195
4.5.5 Fitting the spindle unit

• Clean the bearing housing.

• Insert gasket into the groove in the
bearing housing.
Fig. 305
• Screw bearing housing (1) together

with pivoting bearing (2) into place
with the four hex head screws (3),
lock washers (4) and washers (5).
• For number of washers, refer to
section 4.6.1.
Fig. 306
• For assembling the neck bearing

bridge, see section 4.5.7).
• Provide neck bearing bridge (1) with
gaskets (2).
NOTICE: Pay attention to the cor-
rect fitting position of the neck
bearing bridge!
– The holes of the neck bearing bridge
must be flush with the tapholes in
the lower part of the frame.
• Fit in the neck bearing bridge (1)
with the marked side facing the
Fig. 307 motor into the lower part of the
frame.

196 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Note:
When the drive belt is dismantled, torn
or not tensioned, the neck bearing
pressure ring (1) is eccentric relative to
A the side facing away from the motor in
the neck bearing bridge.
The neck bearing pressure ring (1) is
pulled into the centric axis when the
belt is tensioned!
A = Motor side
Fig. 308
• Turn spindle by 180 (away from

o
fitting position).

rect fitting position of spacer ring
(2)!
– The small inner diameter of the
spacer ring must be directed to the
neck bearing protection cap (1).
• Mount neck bearing protection cap

(1) and spacer ring (2).
Fig. 309
CAUTION: Risk of burns due to hot oil and by touching hot surfaces!
• Heat cylindrical roller bearing (3) to 100 C (212 F) in an oil bath and slide it
o o
onto the spindle.

• Slide the adjusting ring (4) on to the spindle and secure in the spindle groove
with four threaded pins (5).
Required tool:
– Mallet
NOTICE: Sensitive material!

– Make sure that the spindle does not
get damaged.
• Fit clamp pin (1) in the centre by

applying light hammer blows.
Fig. 310

2063-9001-420 / 0815 197
CAUTION: Risk of burns due to hot

oil and by touching hot surfaces!
• Heat ball bearing protection ring (1)
and angular contact ball bearing (2)
o o
to 100 C (212 F) in an oil bath.
Fig. 311
NOTICE: Damage to bearings due to incorrect assembly!

– When fitting angular contact ball bearings (2) on the spindle, make sure that
the narrow rim of each ball bearing inner ring faces towards the spindle
end.
• Slide ball bearing protection ring (1) and angular contact ball bearing (2) onto
-
the spindle.
• Fit cylindrical pin (1) in the bearing

sleeve and secure with high-strength
fluid sealant.
CAUTION: Risk of burns due to hot

oil and by touching hot surfaces!
• Heat bearing sleeve (2) in oil to
o o
100 C (212 F).
Fig. 312
• Important! Before fitting bearing sleeve (2), make sure that the installed an-
gular contact ball bearings have cooled down to room temperature.
• Slide bearing sleeve (2) over the angular contact ball bearings and the ball
bearing protection ring.
NOTICE: Ensure the spindle is cor-

rectly fitted!
– The holes in the bearing cover must
be aligned with the tapholes in the
lower part of the frame.
• Install the assembled spindle as-
sembly (1) in the lower section of
frame.
ing!
• Screw tight the spindle with the
three hex head screws 2 and lock
Fig. 313 washers 3.

198 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Mount the drive belt on the spindle.
Fig. 314

2063-9001-420 / 0815 199
4.5.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch

• Clean clutch pulley (1) with bolted

flat belt pulley (2).
• Fit the retaining ring (3) in the lower
groove.
• Check that retaining ring (3) is cor-
rectly fitted.
Fig. 315
Required tools:
– Disk (2) (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer
NOTICE: Damage to ball bearings

as a result of incorrect assembly!
– Disk (2) may have contact only with
the outer ring of grooved ball bear-
ing (1)!
• Carefully drive the first grooved ball

bearing (1) with disk (2) up to the re-
taining ring.
Fig. 316

200 2063-9001-420 / 0815

ing (1)!
• Carefully drive the second grooved

ball bearing (1) with disk (2) up to
the first grooved ball bearing.
Fig. 317

– Distance sleeve (1) may only con-
tact the inner ring of grooved ball
bearing (2)!
• Position the distance sleeve (1) on

the ball bearing inner race.
Fig. 318

2063-9001-420 / 0815 201

ing (1)!
• Carefully drive the third grooved

ball bearing (1) with disk (2) up to
the distance sleeve.
Fig. 319
CAUTION: Risk of imbalance as a
• Fit retaining ring (2) in the upper

result of incorrect assembly!
o
groove with a 180 offset to retain-
ing ring (1).
Fig. 320

202 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Required tool:
– Disk (1) (Ø 61 – 69 mm)

• Turn the clutch pulley with bolted flat
belt pulley and fitted grooved ball
bearings through 180°.
Fig. 321
NOTICE: Damage to ball bearings as a result of incorrect assembly!

– Disk (1) may only contact the inner race of the grooved ball bearing!
• Place the ball bearing inner race on disk (1).
NOTICE: Ensure the spacer sleeve

is correctly fitted!
– Distance sleeve (1) must be flush
with the inner races of the grooved
ball bearings.
Fig. 322
Required tools:
– Wooden block
– Rubber mallet
• Carefully drive the drive pulley into

the grooved ball bearing with gentle
taps of the mallet.
Fig. 323

2063-9001-420 / 0815 203
• Turn clutch pulley with fitted flat belt

pulley and installed clutch driver
o
through 180 with the aid of the
• Fit the retaining ring in the groove of

hoist.
the clutch driver.
Fig. 324

• Turn the motor through 90 (oppo-
o
site fitting position) with the aid of

the hoist.

– Secure the motor with suitable auxil-
iaries (e.g. wedges).
• Set down the motor on a level sur-
Fig. 325 face (mat or wooden pallet) using
o
hoist, turn through 90 (away from
the fitting position) and secure.
Required tools:
– Hex head screw (3) (M 16 x 250)
– Hexagon nut (4) (M 16)
• NOTICE: Pay attention to the feath-

er key groove.
• Fit the mounted centrifugal clutch on
the motor shaft end.
open-ended wrench.
• Insert assembling device (2) - as
• screw hex head screw (3) with hex-

shown - and
agon nut (4) into the motor shaft

end.
Fig. 326

204 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Pull the centrifugal clutch onto the

motor shaft end as far as it will go by
turning hexagon nut (4) with a sec-
ond wrench.
Fig. 327
• Unscrew hex head screw (3) togeth-
• Remove mounting tool (2).

er with hexagon nut (4) and
Fig. 328
NOTICE: When clutch driver (1) is

arrested:
• Fit hex head screw (2) (M 16x65)
with washer (3) and thread it into the
motor shaft end.
Fig. 329

– Replace all clutch shoes at the
same time!
Never replace individual clutch
shoes.
– Make sure that the clutch shoes are
evenly spaced!
• Check thickness of clutch shoes.

– Replace clutch shoes when h is
less than 18 mm.
• Fit the clutch shoes.
Fig. 330

2063-9001-420 / 0815 205
• Fit washer (1).

• Fit the retaining ring (2) in the
groove of the clutch driver.
Fig. 331

206 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.5.7 Replacing the neck bearing springs (neck bearing bridge)
The neck bearing springs 2 are une-

venly loaded due to the drive belt ten-
sion (heavier load on the motor side A
of the neck bearing bridge).
A To check the condition of the neck
• they must be dismantled periodically

bearing springs 2,
(see section 4.2.1) and individually
• and their length measured (see Fig.

(see Fig. 333)
334 – dimension A).
Fig. 332
• Dismantle threaded plugs 1, neck

bearing springs 2 and spring pistons
3 from the marked motor side of the
neck bearing bridge.
Fig. 333
• Check neck bearing springs 2 for

deformation.
Neck bearing spring – New con-
dition:
A = 32 ±0.4 mm
Neck bearing spring –
Deformation limit:
A = 31 mm
• If the dimension “A” is below the

deformation limit:
Fig. 334
– Replace the neck bearing springs
in the neck bearing bridge in ac-
cordance with Fig. 335.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 207
• Replace the neck bearing springs

H1 of the strongly stressed motor
side A as illustrated with the neck
bearing springs H2 of the less
stressed side of the neck bearing
bridge.
A
• To fit the neck bearing springs refer
to Fig. 336.
Fig. 335
• Thoroughly grease spring pistons

(3).
• Fit neck bearing springs 2 into
spring pistons 3.
• Screw on threaded plug (1).
• Screw the threaded plugs 1 together

with neck bearing springs 2 and
spring pistons 3 into the taphole of
the neck bearing bridge and tighten.
Fig. 336
Note:
Do not forget to order a new set of neck bearing springs from Westfalia Separa-
tor.
The deformed neck bearing springs must be replaced after 8000 operating
hours.
Dismantling the complete neck bearing bridge
• Dismantle six threaded plugs (1),

neck bearing springs (2) and spring
pistons (3).
• Lift out neck bearing pressure ring 4
from neck bearing bridge 5.
Fig. 337

208 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Assembling the complete neck bearing bridge

Note:
The spindle cylindrical roller bearing is inserted into neck bearing pressure ring
(4), which is held in position by a radial arrangement of six evenly distributed
springs (2).
• Insert neck bearing pressure ring (4)

in the neck bearing bridge (5).
NOTICE: The six recesses in the
pressure ring must be aligned with
the six bores in the neck bearing
bridge.
• Thoroughly grease spring pistons
(3).
• Fit neck bearing springs (2) into
spring pistons (3).
• Screw on threaded plug (1).
Fig. 338
• Screw in the six threaded plugs (1) together with neck bearing springs (2) and
spring pistons (3) into the six holes in neck bearing bridge (5).

2063-9001-420 / 0815 209
4.5.8 Fitting the motor

• Carefully place the motor with cen-
trifugal clutch fitted on the lower sec-
tion of the frame using a hoist.
– Do not yet let the motor flange
engage in the opening in the
frame.
Fig. 339
• Degrease the belt contact surfaces

NOTICE:
of the spindle and the clutch pulley.

• Mount the drive belt:
– through the opening in the upper
part of the frame (1) and
– through the opening in the brake
• Pay attention to correct seating of

housing (2) (centrifugal clutch).
the drive belt on the flat belt pulley

and spindle pulley.
Fig. 340
• Remove screw plug (1) from the

lower section of the frame.
Fig. 341

210 2063-9001-420 / 0815
NOTICE: Avoid damage to the

grooved ball bearing.
– Do not screw in hex head screw (1)
all the way.
• Screw the complete clamp bolt as
illustrated through the frame hole in-
to the taphole of the centrifugal
clutch.
• Tension the drive belt by turning
hexagon nut (2) clockwise until the
motor flange engages in the frame
opening.
Fig. 342
• Secure the motor with four hex head

screws (2) (M 16 x 40).
• Unscrew the complete clamping bolt
(1) back out of the centrifugal clutch.
Fig. 343
• Screw in plug (1).

Fig. 344
Note:
Due to the design concept used, the spindle is at an inclined angle relative to
the opposite side of the motor when the drive belt has not been fitted or ten-
sioned (see Fig. 345, Item 2).
The spindle is only pulled into the concentric axis by the belt being tightened
(see Fig. 345, Pos. 1)!

2063-9001-420 / 0815 211
• Check
– that the spindle (1) can be turned
easily.
– whether the spindle has been
pulled into the centric axis by
tensioning the drive belt (3)
(see Fig. 221).
Fig. 345
Fitting the speed monitoring device:
• Position speed monitoring device (2)

on the lower section of the frame
• fasten with hex head screw (1).

and
Fig. 346
NOTICE: Pay attention to proper

installation.
– The distance X between spindle and
proximity switch must be 2.5 mm.
• Align proximity switch (1) as illus-

trated.
Fig. 347
• Insert protective cap (3) with fitted
• secure with six hex head screws (1)

gasket (4) and ring (2) and
(M 8 x 16).
Fig. 348

212 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Place spindle cap (1) with fitted gas-

ket on the spindle.
ing!
Fig. 349
Fit the operating water feed in the

upper section of the frame.
• Slide nut (2) over pipe (3).
rect fitting position.
– The tip of the pipe must be directed
upwards!
• Fit pipe (3) with nut (2) into the
screwed connection (1) and slide on
• Tighten nut (2) firmly.

as far as it will go.
Fig. 350
• Check the brake lining thickness.

– Replace brake lining when h is
less than 3 mm.
• Fit brake and brake housing (2) to
the lower section of the frame with
three hex head screws (1) (M 8 x
20).
Fig. 351
• Screw in oil drain screw (1) with

fitted gasket.
• Screw in sight glass (2).
• Fill in oil as described in section
• screw in plug (3) with gasket.

4.2.3 and
Fig. 352

2063-9001-420 / 0815 213
CAUTION: Danger to life and limb
• Only have the motor connected by a

from electric current!
qualified electrician.
Fig. 353 Example of a motor

214 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.6 Height adjustment
• bowl height and

For reasons of operational safety, adjusting
• centripetal pump play

needs to be performed especially carefully.
4.6.1 Bowl height

The bowl height is correctly adjusted at the factory before the separator is
shipped.
NOTICE: The bowl height may only be measured with fitted and tightened
drive belt!
CHECK
Check the bowl height and re-adjust if necessary:
– after replacing the drive parts,
– after fitting another bowl,
– after exchanging the centripetal pump,
– as soon as the centripetal pump shows any grinding marks.
CAUTION: A loose bowl lock ring

can endanger life!
• Tighten the bowl lock ring securely.

• Check the “O” marks on the bowl
bottom or top and on the bowl lock
ring.
Fig. 354
The reference dimension A

– is 18 (±2) mm
– between the upper edge of the bowl
lock ring and upper part of the
frame.
Fig. 355

2063-9001-420 / 0815 215
ADJUSTING
Bowl is too high Increase number of washers 3.
Bowl is too low Reduce number of washers 3.
Shim:
Inner diameter: 12,5 mm – outer diameter: 22 mm – thickness: 1 mm
CAUTION: Danger of crushing by
• Four hex head screws 1 of bearing

falling separator parts!
housing 2 must be
– loosened evenly and diametri-
cally opposite (do not remove!),
– loosen until a gap A is created for
the required number of washers 3
between the lower section of the
frame and the bearing housing.
Fig. 356
• Unscrew hex head screws 1 one by
• add or remove washer(s) (3).

one and
• Screw in hex head screw 1 again.

• Remaining hex head screws 1 must
be:
– unscrewed individually!
– fitted with the same number of
washers 3 and
– screwed in again.
Fig. 357
• Screw bearing housing 2 tightly into

place with the four hex head screws
1 and washers 3.
• Check the bowl height.
Fig. 358

216 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.6.2 Centripetal pump play
• Move the centripetal pump to and fro

in the centripetal pump chamber in
an axial direction.
– Measure total play A (approx. 10
mm).
• Close the hood.
• Check:
– Is the hood correctly seated cor-
rectly on the rim of the frame?
– Have the hood screws been tight-
ened firmly?
Fig. 359
• Apply a thin film of grease to the

thread of the centripetal pump in ac-
cordance with the lubrication sched-
ule.
• Push handle connection piece (1)
into the centripetal pump.
• holding the centripetal pump steady
with socket wrench (2).
• Screw handle connection piece into
the centripetal pump as far as it will
go (left-hand thread).
Fig. 360
• Hold the handle connection piece.

• Turn socket wrench (2) until the
handle connection piece lifts off the
hood slightly (approx. 0.5 mm).
Fig. 361

2063-9001-420 / 0815 217
• Lift the handle connection piece as

far as it will go.
• Measure axial play:
A/2 = 4 – 6 mm
Fig. 362

218 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.7 Final inspection after repairing the separator
Before starting the separator:

The following checks must be carried out after every repair, depending on the
repair scope
Check Section
Bowl height 4.6.1

Oil level in the drive chamber 4.2.3
Direction of rotation of the bowl 4.1.5
Bowl speed 4.1.6
Starting time of the bowl / current consumption 4.1.6
Smoothness of running of the separator 3.9.1
Suction line of product pump (if present) for leaks
When starting the separator

The following checks must be carried out after every repair when starting the
separator:
Check Section
Product temperature Operating data

sheet
Observe at all discharges whether the bowl is working 3.3
perfectly
4.8 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator

• Disconnect all electrical connections.
• Throughly clean the separator (see sections 4.3.2, 4.3.3 and 4.3.4).
• The clean bowl parts and all unvarnished machine parts must be wiped dry
and greased to avoid corrosion.
• Keep the cleaned, greased bowl in a dry place until it is re-used.
• Gaskets should be kept in a cool, dry room, away from dust and light, to pre-
vent them getting brittle.
• Check water shut-off devices for leakage.
• If necessary, disconnect water supply lines to avoid damage caused by drip
water.
4.8.1 Preserving the separator

• Drain the lubricating oil completely.
Observe local regulations when disposing of lubricating oil.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 219
• Fill the drive chamber with a slushing oil, e.g. Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE
50), to the middle of the sight glass.
• Run the separator without bowl for approx. 1 minute to make sure that all
drive parts are coated with slushing oil.
CAUTION!
• Keep a safe distance away from the rotating spindle.

The rotating separator parts may cause injury.
• After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating.
• Remove the drive belt.
4.8.2 Preserving the motor

• Follow the instructions provided by the motor manufacturer.

220 2063-9001-420 / 0815
4.9 Storage
NOTICE: Improper and incorrect storage of the separator and control unit
can damage or destroy their components!
– Outdoor storage is not admissible!
• Store accessories like spare parts, tools, lubricants properly!
Note:
Gaskets, hoses and hosepipes, for example, change their physical properties in
unfavourable storage conditions. This can result in a shorter service life. They
can be rendered useless due to excessive hardening, softening, permanent de-
formation, flaking, cracks or other surface damage.
4.9.1 After delivery
• store the separator and control unit in the original transport packaging.
If the separator and control unit are not installed immediately after delivery,
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 – 122 °F)

storage times!
– A storage time of more than 12 months of the separator and control unit is
only admissible after consulting the manufacturer.
• Check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule and
In the case of short-term storage (up to 24 months):

– See table "Maintenance after 4000 operating hours – after no more than 6
months"
– or see table "Maintenance after 8000 operating hours – after no more than
1 year".

In the case of long-term storage (longer than 24 months):
year".
4.9.2 Separator
The following procedure applies
– for storing the separator before commissioning and
– for storing the separator before a prolonged standstill period.
• Only store the separator with dismantled bowl!

NOTICE:
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place.

• The gaskets should be kept in a cool, but frost-free, dry room, protected from
dust and light, to prevent them from getting brittle.
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 – 122 °F)
• The separator with the bowl dismantled must be stored in stable and dry con-
ditions.
(Vibrations during standstill can cause bearing damage!).
• Protect the drive spindle and motor against dust.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 221
• Store all other separator parts dry and frost-free.
4.9.3 Control system

• The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
• Protect from excessive heat!
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 bis + 45 °C (41 – 113 °F)
4.10 Before restarting
Before restarting, the operator must ensure

• that all separators and plant components are checked for proper func-
tion by competent personnel (qualified specialists).
• that the maintenance intervals are adhered to.
• that the separator is assembled correctly by competent persons.

standstill or storage times!
• check all bowl parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule and re-
If the bowl has been out of commission for longer than 6 months,
place when necessary.

months".
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule and

year".

year".
Procedure:
• Drain the slushing oil.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the slushing oil.
• Remove the grease from all unpainted machine elements.
• Check the gaskets for damage.

NOTICE: Fit only gaskets in perfect condition!
• Assemble the bowl (see section 4.3.7).
• Check the roller bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
NOTICE: Fit only roller bearings in perfect condition!

222 2063-9001-420 / 0815
• Check the drive belt for damage.

NOTICE: Fit only drive belts in perfect condition!
• Assemble the separator correctly.

• Fill the drive chamber with the specified lubricating oil as specified in section
4.2.3.
4.11 Disposal
When consumables are past their useful life or the separator has reached the
end of its life cycle, the owner/operator is responsible for proper, environmen-
tally-friendly segregation and disposal of components and materials like
– metal,
– synthetic and natural rubber,
– plastic,
– glass,
– mineral oil-based gear and lubrication oils,
– synthetic gear and lubricating oils,
– cleaning fluids,
– electrical and electronic
equipment.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
Comply with applicable environmental protection legislation!
For more information about disposal, contact your local authority.
4.11.1 Gear and lubricating oils
When changing oil and disposing of

waste oil – resulting from oil changes
and servicing work in accordance with
• Collect dripping oil to prevent risk of

the schedule – proceed with care.
• It can be injurious to health, depend-

slipping or infection of the product.
• Waste oil must be disposed of in

ing on its chemical composition.
accordance with local regulations.
Note:
Pay particular attention to the compa-
Fig. 363
ny instructions on handling waste oils
drafted by the owner/operator and
local regulations for disposing of waste
oils.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 223
4.11.2 Cleaning fluids

Only cleaning agents quoted in the overall documentation (see operating data
sheet) may be used for cleaning.
CAUTION: Danger of acid and alkali burns!

The cleaning agents may be acids and alkalis which can cause severe
personal injury if used without due care.
– Wear personal protective gear.
• Pay attention to the company instructions on handling the cleaning fluids used
drafted by the owner/operator.
• Observe applicable local disposal regulations.
• Comply with environmental protection legislation.
4.11.3 Separator
Before disposing of the separator
• drain off the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section
4.11.1.
• Dismantle the separator, clean any adherent lubricants off separator parts
and either route to segregated waste disposal or recycling.

224 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notes
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2063-9001-420 / 0815 225
5 Spare parts
5.1 Requirements to be met by spare parts .............................................. 226

5.2 Instructions for ordering spare parts .................................................... 226

226 2063-9001-420 / 0815
5.1 Requirements to be met by spare parts
• Use only genuine spare parts from GEA

Westfalia Separator Group. The original
spare parts are listed in the spare parts cata-
logue.
The use of non-genuine spare parts leads to:
– safety risks,
– less durability of these parts,
– reduced availability of the separator,
Fig. 364
– increased maintenance requirement.
If a safety risk arises when non-genuine spare
parts are used, there may under certain circum-
stances be consequences under penal law for
thise involved. GEA Westfalia Separator Group
will not accept any liability or warranty in such
cases.
5.2 Instructions for ordering spare parts

Rapid and correct supply of spare parts is possible only if your order for spare
parts contains the following details:
• type of centrifuge see nameplate

e.g. VSE 40-02-007
• Serial-No. see nameplate

e.g. 9000-223
• Designation see order-specific parts catalogue

e.g. frame
• Part number see order-specific parts catalogue

e.g. 2050-1100-020
The order number is also marked on almost all the
individual parts.
Only need to be quoted when ordering spare parts for a bowl:

• Bowl S/N: if this is different from the serial number.
The bowl manufacturing no. is engraved on the
bowl lock ring, bowl bottom and bowl top.
Only required when ordering parts for pump and pump connection parts:
• type and number of see pump nameplate

pump
The information must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.

2063-9001-420 / 0815 227
Spare parts kits

Spare parts kits are not generally included in the scope of supply of the centri-
fuge. The following spare parts kits are available to suit the appropriate tech-
nical service intervals:
– "Bowl and hood" spare parts kit for operation of 1 year or 8,000 hours
– "Drive" spare parts kit for operation of 1 year or 8,000 hours
– "Drive" spare parts kit for operation of 2 years or 16,000 hours
The service schedule forms the systematic servicing basis for using these spare
parts kits.

228 2063-9001-420 / 0815
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notes
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

We live our values.
The GEA Group is a globally active engineering firm with turnover amounting to billions and operating
companies in over 50 countries. The company was founded in 1881 and is one of the biggest provid-
ers of innovative systems and process technology around. GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe
600 Index.

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax: +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
Data sheet
Description: Separator
Type: VSE 40-02-007
Machine-No.: ????-???
Order-No.: 1941809332/002000
Material-No.: 99870443890
Version: 04.08.2017
2 VSE 40-02-007 | 1941809332/002000 | 04.08.2017
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
The authors are always grateful for remarks and

suggestions for improving the documentation. Remarks and
suggestions can be sent to:
GEA Deutschland
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com

VSE 40-02-007 | 1941809332/002000 | 04.08.2017 3
Preface to this datasheet

This datasheet contains the order-specific technical data for the centrifuge.
Non-compliance with this datasheet can not only result in danger for centrifuges,
material and the environment but also endanger persons working on or in the
vicinity of the centrifuge.
The technical data from this datasheet have sole validity!

Technical data in the centrifuge documentation which deviate from this are invalid.
 Keep the datasheet complete, close to the centrifuge and accessible to all those
working on or with the centrifuge. It must be available to these people at all
times!
Other applicable documents

The documents below apply in addition to this datasheet.
 Operating instructions for the centrifuge
 Dimensions sheet for the centrifuge
 Operating instructions for components made by other manufacturers
Abbreviations and symbols used

bar (g) bar (g = pressure)
approx. approximately (roughly)
dB (A) decibels (A)
f frequency
FU frequency converter (Frequenzumrichter)
Hz Hertz
I/O switch on/off
3
kg/dm kilogrammes per cubic decimetre
kW kilowatts
l litres
l/h litres per hour
max. maximum
min. minimum
min minute
rpm revolutions per minute
mm/s RMS millimetres per second, RMS (= Root Mean Square)
mW milliwatts
3
m /h cubic metres per hour
sec second
V volts
ºC degrees Celsius
% per cent
Y star
Δ delta

4 VSE 40-02-007 | 1941809332/002000 | 04.08.2017
Centrifuge
Comments
Type VSE 40-02-007
Serial no. ????-???
Permitted bowl speed rpm 8200

3
Permitted density of feed material kg/dm 1,0 max.
3
Permitted density of heavy liquid kg/dm 1,0 max.
3
Permitted density of solids kg/dm 1,4 max.
3
Permitted throughput m /h 0,5/1,5 min. / max.
Permitted temperature of feed material ºC 20-40 min. / max.
Filling volume of bowl l 10 approx.

Run-down time without braking min 90
Run-down time without flat belt min 120
Permitted vibration velocity mm/s 7 max.
RMS Measuring point on
frame
Ambient temperature °C 5/45 min. / max.
Disk-stack compression bar (g) 250-300
Quantity of lubricating oil l 3,7 approx.
Main drive motor

Comments
Design IMV1
Capacity kW 18,5 (FU: 15)
Voltage V 400 For wiring, see motor
rating plate
Frequency Hz 50
Starting mode Normal starting
Enclosure IP55
Frequency converter - set frequency Hz 60 min. / max.
Process data
Comments
Intended use, feed material Olive oil
Designation of light liquid Olive oil
Designation of heavy liquid Water
Permitted operating pressure, light liquid bar (g) MAX 3 Water at nominal
output

We live our values.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and Process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007
Maschinen-Nr. / Serial number of machine

9077-305
Trommel-Nr. / Serial number of bowl

9077-305
Auftrags-Nr. / Order number

1941809332_02
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe lieferbar

Part or assembly available
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Teil oder Baugruppe in dieser Fertigungsstufe nicht lieferbar.

Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
3/65
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
1941809332 SEPARATOR VSE 40-02-007 5
1941809332_02 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR VSE 40-02-007 SEPARADOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n

9077-305
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
4/65 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
5/65
9987-0443-890 SEPARATOR VSE 40-02-007
1941809332 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR VSE 40-02-007 SEPARADOR
1100 2063-1100-120 1 GESTELL VOLLST. 8
SEPARATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
BASTIDOR, COMP.
7838 5389-7838-139 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
7759 2063-7759-100 1 HAUBE VOLLST. 26
HOOD, COMPL.
CAPÓ, COMP.
2213 2057-2213-060 1 EINZELGREIFER VOLLST.
SINGLE CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
PINZA SIMPLE, COMP.
6600 2063-6600-190 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 29
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
0070 0024-0070-000 1 SCHILD
Typ / Model PLATE
RÓTULO
VSE 40-02-007 5089 0018-5089-400 1 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 2975 0018-2975-400 2 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
9077-305 TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
1020 2057-1020-000 1 FUNDAMENTRAHMEN VOLLST. 35
FOUNDATION FRAME, COMPL.
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n MARCO DE FUNDACIÓN, COMP.
2110 2063-2110-120 1 SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE 37
9077-305 SET OF CONNECTION PARTS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE CONEXIÓN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF CONNECTION PARTS
02.10.2017 2110 2057-2110-000 1 SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE 41
SET OF CONNECTION PARTS
2215 2045-2215-000 1 ZUFLUSSLEITUNG VOLLST. 43
FEED LINE, CPL.
LÍNEA DE ALIMENTACIÓN, COMP.
Seite/Page
1941809332 SET OF CONNECTION PARTS
SEPARATOR VSE 40-02-007 JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE CONEXIÓN
6842 0018-6842-400 1 MUFFENKUGELHAHN
SEPARATOR
SOCKET BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA DEL MANGUITO
7383 0018-7383-400 1 2_2-WEGE-MAGNETVENTIL
2_2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE
ELECTROVÁLVULA DE 2_2 VÍAS
9901 2063-9901-060 1 SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE 51
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
JUEGO HERRAMIENTAS Y ACCESORIOS
9902 2063-9902-180 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE 57
SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
9902 2057-9902-000 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB 60
Typ / Model SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
JUEGO PIEZAS RECAMBIO ACCIONAMIENTO
VSE 40-02-007 9902 2057-9902-050 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB 62
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
JUEGO PIEZAS RECAMBIO ACCIONAMIENTO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9769 2060-9769-110 1 SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE 64
SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
9077-305 JUEGO PZAS. PUESTA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
9601 2058-9601-040 1 INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN EN
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS EN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NORMATIVAS DE INSTALACIÓN EN
9010 2063-9010-421 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EL
9077-305 INSTRUCTION MANUAL EL
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EL
920 8155-9991-100 1 KLEMMENPLAN
Ausgabe / Edition 930 2063-4100-340 1 MASSBLATT
DIMENSIONED DRAWING
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
8/65
10 2057-1001-000 1 GESTELLUNTERTEIL
2063-1100-120 LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
GESTELL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
20 2063-1002-030 1 GESTELLOBERTEIL
FRAME, COMPL.
UPPER SECTION OF FRAME
PARTE SUPERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
30 0019-7038-400 8 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
40 2063-1191-000 1 SCHUTZBLECH
GUARD PLATE
CHAPA PROTECTORA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
65 0026-1335-300 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
70 0019-8910-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
Typ / Model SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
VSE 40-02-007 75 0019-8899-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 80 0007-1796-550 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
9077-305 JUNTA ANULAR
90 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n MIRILLA
100 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
9077-305 COVER
TAPA
Ausgabe / Edition HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
02.10.2017 150 0008-4510-040 1 HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. 14
NECK BEARING BRIDGE, COMPL.
PUENTE DEL COLLARÍN, COMP.
160 0007-2643-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
180 0011-8070-000 1 GELENKLAGER
2063-1100-120 SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
GESTELL VOLLST. COJINETE ARTICULADO
190 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
FRAME, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
200 2057-3131-000 1 LAGERGEHAEUSE
BEARING HOUSING
ALOJAMIENTO DE COJINETE
210 0026-5741-300 16 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
230 0026-1328-300 7 FEDERRING
SPRING RING
ANILLO DE PRESIÓN
240 2063-3429-000 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 16
Typ / Model SPINDLE, COMPL.
HUSILLO, COMP.
VSE 40-02-007 250 0019-6541-400 3 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 270 2063-3060-010 1 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 18
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
9077-305 JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
290 2062-1089-000 1 RING
RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO
300 0007-2035-750 1 DICHTRING
9077-305 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
310 2062-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
Ausgabe / Edition PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
02.10.2017 320 0019-6900-300 7 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
330 2063-1464-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
LENGTH OF PIPE
EMPALME DE TUBOS
Seite/Page
340 0018-3469-400 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
2063-1100-120 SCREW COUPLING
GESTELL VOLLST. RACOR
350 0018-3215-400 1 STUTZEN
FRAME, COMPL.
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
360 0018-7944-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
370 2062-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
380 0007-2929-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 0018-7614-000 1 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 20
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
BLOQUE DE ELECTROVÁLVULA, COMP.
Typ / Model SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
VSE 40-02-007 400 0018-6585-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 410 0018-3812-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
HOSE CLIP
9077-305 ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
420 0018-6490-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n MANGUERA
430 0018-3817-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
9077-305 HOSE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
Ausgabe / Edition SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
02.10.2017 490 0018-0994-260 1 STOPFEN
PLUG
TAPÓN
540 2057-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 22
FOOT, COMPL.
PIE, COMP.
Seite/Page
570 0007-2638-750 1 DICHTRING
2063-1100-120 GASKET
GESTELL VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
580 0019-5384-050 2 RINGSCHRAUBE
FRAME, COMPL.
EYE BOLT
ANILLA
600 0019-1442-900 1 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
610 0005-1601-700 1 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE
CABLE SLEEVE
TUBO DE PROTECCIÓN PARA CABLES
620 2062-1145-000 1 HALTER
HOLDER
SOPORTE
630 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
PROXIMITY SWITCH
INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
640 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
Typ / Model SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
VSE 40-02-007 645 2060-2110-040 1 SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE 24
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 660 0019-2247-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
9077-305 TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
680 0019-2265-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
690 0024-4310-100 1 SATZ SCHILDER
9077-305 SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
0024-6324-050 1 KLEBESCHILD
Ausgabe / Edition ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
02.10.2017 0024-6327-050 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Seite/Page
0024-6426-100 1 SCHILD
2063-1100-120 PLATE
GESTELL VOLLST. RÓTULO
0024-5220-000 1 ABZIEHBILD _PFEIL
FRAME, COMPL.
DECAL _ARROW
CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-3500-100 1 TYPENSCHILD
Typ / Model TYPE PLATE
PLACA DE CARACTERÍSTICAS
VSE 40-02-007 0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
NOTCHED NAIL
REMACHE ESTRIADO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
9077-305 RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO
9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
14/65
10 0008-4506-020 1 HALSLAGERBRUECKE
0008-4510-040 NECK BEARING BRIDGE
HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. PUENTE DEL COLLARÍN
20 0008-5007-150 1 HALSLAGERDRUCKRING
NECK BEARING BRIDGE, COMPL.
NECK BEARING PRESSURE RING
ANILLO DE PRESIÓN DEL COLLARÍN
30 0019-1604-030 6 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
40 0006-4377-060 1 SATZ HALSLAGERFEDERN
SET OF NECK BEARING SPRINGS
JUEGO RESORTES COJINETE CUELLO
50 0026-1289-110 6 FEDERKOLBEN
SPRING PISTON
PISTÓN DE ALOJAMIENTO
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
16/65
10 2063-3410-000 1 SPINDEL
2063-3429-000 SPINDLE
SPINDEL VOLLST. HUSILLO
20 0008-5002-000 1 HALSLAGERSCHUTZKAPPE
SPINDLE, COMPL.
NECK BEARING PROTECTION CAP
CAPERUZA DE PROTECCIÓN DEL CUELLO
30 0008-5009-050 1 ABSTANDSRING
SPACING RING
ANILLO ESPACIADOR
40 0011-0210-670 1 ZYLINDERROLLENLAGER
CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING
COJINETE DE RODILLOS CILÍNDRICOS
50 0026-2499-000 1 STELLRING
SET COLLAR
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN
60 0019-8964-400 4 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
70 0008-2508-000 1 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING
Typ / Model BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
ARO PROTECTOR DE RODAMIENTO DE BOLAS
VSE 40-02-007 80 0011-7305-100 2 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
BOLAS DE CONTACTO ANGULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0010-6205-030 1 LAGERHUELSE VOLLST.
BEARING SLEEVE, COMPL.
9077-305 CASQUILLO DE COJINETE, COMP.
0026-2318-400 1 ZYLINDERSTIFT
CYLINDRICAL PIN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PASADOR CILÍNDRICO
100 0026-0314-170 1 SPANNSTIFT
9077-305 SPRING DOWEL SLEEVE
PASADOR DE SUJECIÓN
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
18/65
10 2057-3474-020 1 FLACHRIEMENSCHEIBE
2063-3060-010 FLAT-BELT PULLEY
SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE POLEA PLANA
20 0026-2649-400 1 SCHEIBE
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
40 0021-3311-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRIVE BELT
CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
20/65
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
0018-7614-000 PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
30 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
40 0018-7614-900 1 FILTEREINSATZ
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
Typ / Model SOLENOID
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
VSE 40-02-007 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-5947-820 2 MEMBRANE
DIAPHRAGM
9077-305 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NÚCLEO MAGNÉTICO
110 0018-5118-040 2 GERAETESTECKDOSE
9077-305 COUPLER SOCKET
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE
MANGUERA
02.10.2017 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
Seite/Page
22/65
10 2057-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2057-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
20 0021-3309-750 4 MASCHINENFUSS
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0026-1335-300 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
24/65
10 0005-1863-800 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
2060-2110-040 TERMINAL BOX
SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE CAJA DE BORNES
20 0005-0772-608 0.43 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
30 0005-3355-620 2 ENDHUELSE
ENDCOR SLEEVE
MANGUITO FINAL
40 0018-1253-300 3 ROHRSCHELLE
PIPE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE TUBO
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
26/65
10 2063-7765-030 1 HAUBE GESCHW.
2063-7759-100 HOOD, WELDED
HAUBE VOLLST. CAPÓ, SOLD.
HOOD, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
30 0026-1328-300 4 FEDERRING
SPRING RING
ANILLO DE PRESIÓN
40 0007-3510-830 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 2034-7095-000 1 ANSCHLUSSSTUECK
CONNECTING PIECE
PIEZA DE CONEXIÓN
60 0007-1944-830 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2063-2191-060 1 GRIFFKOERPER GESCHW.
Typ / Model HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE, WELDED
CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA, SOLD.
VSE 40-02-007 80 0007-2211-850 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0001-0300-400 1 MANOMETER
PRESSURE GAUGE
9077-305 MANÓMETRO
SCREW PLUG
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TORNILLO DE TOPE
110 2063-1074-000 1 HUELSE
9077-305 SLEEVE
CASQUILLO
120 0007-1945-830 1 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
02.10.2017 130 0019-7667-300 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD
PRISIONERO
140 0013-0280-400 3 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
Seite/Page
150 0026-0165-400 3 SCHEIBE
2063-7759-100 WASHER _ DISK
HAUBE VOLLST. ARANDELA _ DISCO
160 0007-2212-390 1 DICHTRING
HOOD, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0001-0041-850 1 SCHAUSCHEIBE
SIGHT GLASS DISK
MIRILLA DE INSPECCIÓN
180 0004-3366-660 1 DICHTUNG
GASKET
JUNTA
190 0013-0084-400 1 NUTUEBERWURFMUTTER
GROOVED COUPLING NUT
TUERCA RACOR RANURADA
200 0007-2212-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 0018-3899-400 1 KEGELSTUTZEN
Typ / Model CONE CONNECTION PIECE
EMPALME CÓNICO
VSE 40-02-007 220 0013-2846-300 1 NUTUEBERWURFMUTTER
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TUERCA RACOR RANURADA
250 0018-3894-400 2 KEGELSTUTZEN
9077-305 CONE CONNECTION PIECE
EMPALME CÓNICO
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
29/65
20 2063-6604-000 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL VOLLST.
2063-6600-190 BOWL BOTTOM, COMPL.
TROMMEL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL TAMBOR, COMP.
30 0007-3796-830 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0004-3273-810 1 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
50 2063-6698-000 1 WASSERKAMMERBODEN
WATER CHAMBER BOTTOM
BASE DE LA CÁMARA DE AGUA
60 2063-6469-010 1 TEILENTLEERUNGSRING
PARTIAL EJECTION RING
ANILLO DE DESCARGA PARCIAL
70 0007-3169-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model CYLINDRICAL SCREW
VSE 40-02-007 90 2063-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
GASKET
110 0007-3457-790 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
120 2063-6426-000 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
9077-305 CLOSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
130 0007-2827-790 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
02.10.2017 140 0007-3216-760 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
160 0004-1595-810 1 FUEHRUNGSBAND
GUIDE TAPE
CINTA DE GUÍA
Seite/Page
2063-6600-190 CYLINDRICAL SCREW
TROMMEL VOLLST. TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
180 2063-6501-000 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER
BOWL, COMPL.
SLIDING PISTON
VÁLVULA DE MANGUITO
190 0007-3798-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
200 0004-1702-850 1 FUEHRUNGSBAND
GUIDE TAPE
CINTA DE GUÍA
210 2063-6621-060 1 VERTEILER
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUIDOR
215 0019-4943-400 2 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
220 2063-6660-000 1 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 33
Typ / Model DISC STACK, COMPL.
SOPORTE DE PLATOS, COMP.
VSE 40-02-007 230 2063-6650-000 1 SCHEIDETELLER GESCHW.
SEPARATING DISC, WELDED
PLATO SEPARADOR, SOLD.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 240 2063-6610-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL VOLLST.
BOWL TOP, COMPL.
9077-305 TAPA DEL TAMBOR, COMP.
0026-1106-400 2 ZYLINDERSTIFT
CYLINDRICAL PIN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PASADOR CILÍNDRICO
250 0007-3800-540 1 DICHTRING
9077-305 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-2625-830 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
02.10.2017 270 0007-2080-530 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
280 2063-6631-000 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
Seite/Page
290 0019-6335-400 4 GEWINDESTIFT
2063-6600-190 THREADED PIN
TROMMEL VOLLST. PRISIONERO
300 0007-2940-390 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
310 0007-2023-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
320 2169-6645-060 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
TAPA DE LA CÁMARA DEL RODETE
330 2063-6691-020 1 SATZ REGULIERSCHEIBEN
SET OF REGULATING RINGS
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
2170-6726-200 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
2170-6726-280 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
Typ / Model REGULATING RING
VSE 40-02-007 2170-6726-340 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 2170-6726-350 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
9077-305 DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
340 2169-6631-070 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE CIERRE
350 0019-0966-360 1 SPINDELSCHRAUBE
9077-305 SPINDLE SCREW
TORNILLO DEL HUSILLO
360 0007-1941-390 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
33/65
10 2063-6663-000 136 TELLER VOLLST.
2063-6660-000 DISC, COMPL.
TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. PLATO, COMP.
20 2063-6666-000 2 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
DISC STACK, COMPL.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
35/65
10 2057-1003-000 1 FUNDAMENTRAHMEN GESCHW.
2057-1020-000 FOUNDATION FRAME, WELDED
FUNDAMENTRAHMEN VOLLST. MARCO DE CIMENTACIÓN, SOLD.
20 0019-4871-030 4 STEINSCHRAUBE
FOUNDATION FRAME, COMPL.
ANCHOR SCREW
PERNO DE ANCLAJE
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
37/65
30 2063-2776-020 1 SIPHON
2063-2110-120 SIPHON
SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE SIFÓN
40 2063-1134-000 1 HALTER GESCHW.
HOLDER, WELDED
SOPORTE, SOLD.
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
39/65
10 0018-3465-400 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
2063-2110-110 SCREW COUPLING
SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE RACOR
20 0018-7942-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
30 0018-5174-400 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
40 2065-2708-000 1 DUESE
NOZZLE
TOBERA
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
41/65
10 0018-4127-400 2 EINSCHRAUB-GEWINDESTUTZEN
2057-2110-000 THREADED SOCKET
SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE TUBULADORA ATORNILLABLE
20 0018-3894-400 2 KEGELSTUTZEN
CONE CONNECTION PIECE
EMPALME CÓNICO
40 0007-2210-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
43/65
20 0007-2210-390 3 DICHTRING
2045-2215-000 GASKET
ZUFLUSSLEITUNG VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
30 0018-1625-300 1 BOGEN
FEED LINE, CPL.
BEND
CODO
40 0001-0614-400 1 SCHAUZYLINDER VOLLST. 45
INSPECTION CYLINDER, COMPL.
MIRILLA CILÍNDRICA, COMP.
50 0018-1771-300 1 REDUZIER-T-STUECK
REDUCING T-PIECE
PIEZA DE REDUCCIÓN EN T
60 0018-1618-400 1 BOGEN
BEND
CODO
70 0007-2208-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR (EX -600)
80 0018-3893-400 1 KEGELSTUTZEN
Typ / Model CONE CONNECTION PIECE
EMPALME CÓNICO
VSE 40-02-007 90 0013-2842-300 1 NUTUEBERWURFMUTTER
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 100 0018-3894-400 1 KEGELSTUTZEN
9077-305 EMPALME CÓNICO
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TUERCA RACOR RANURADA
9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
45/65
10 0001-0614-390 1 SCHAUZYLINDERGEHAEUSE GESCHW.
0001-0614-400 INSPECTION CYLINDER HOUSING, WELDED
SCHAUZYLINDER VOLLST. CAJA CILÍNDRICA DE LA MIRILLA, SOLD.
20 0007-2245-750 2 DICHTRING
INSPECTION CYLINDER, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0001-0094-820 1 SCHAUZYLINDER
INSPECTION CYLINDER
MIRILLA CILÍNDRICA
40 0001-0614-380 1 DRUCKHUELSE
PRESSURE SLEEVE
CASQUILLO DE PRESIÓN
50 0001-0614-370 1 GEWINDESTUECK
THREADED PIECE
PIEZA ROSCADA
60 0007-2210-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
47/65
10 0018-4127-400 1 EINSCHRAUB-GEWINDESTUTZEN
2045-2110-010 THREADED SOCKET
SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE TUBULADORA ATORNILLABLE
20 0018-3894-400 2 KEGELSTUTZEN
EMPALME CÓNICO
40 0007-2210-530 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0018-6882-400 1 UEBERSTROEMVENTIL
SPILL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE REBOSE
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
49/65
2060-2110-080 GROOVED COUPLING NUT
SATZ ANSCHLUSSTEILE TUERCA RACOR RANURADA
10 0018-9394-400 1 ROHRBOGEN GESCHW.
PIPE BEND, WELDED
TUBO ACODADO, SOLD.
0018-3899-400 2 KEGELSTUTZEN
EMPALME CÓNICO
0013-2846-300 2 NUTUEBERWURFMUTTER
20 0007-2212-830 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0018-2117-300 1 UEBERGANGSSTUECK
TRANSITION PIECE
PIEZA DE EMPALME
40 0007-2210-530 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
VSE 40-02-007 70 2063-2776-030 1 SIPHON GESCHW.
SIPHON, WELDED
SIFÓN, SOLD.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 80 0018-5089-400 1 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
9077-305 TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
51/65
10 0003-0596-320 1 STECKSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
2063-9901-060 SOCKET WRENCH, COMPL.
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE LLAVE DE TUBO, COMP.
0026-1438-170 1 SPRENGRING
SNAP RING
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN
20 0003-0644-300 1 SCHLAGBOLZEN
MALLET
PERCUTOR
30 0003-0537-000 1 STECKSCHLUESSEL
SOCKET WRENCH
LLAVE DE TUBO
40 0003-3998-000 1 RINGSCHLUESSEL
RING SPANNER
LLAVE ANULAR
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
VSE 40-02-007 320 0019-7208-150 1 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 340 0019-6351-150 1 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
9077-305 PRISIONERO
400 2057-9828-010 1 SPANNBOLZEN VOLLST.
CLAMP BOLT, COMPL.
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PERNO TENSOR, COMP.
0019-6991-150 1 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
9077-305 HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
0026-1371-300 1 SCHEIBE
Ausgabe / Edition WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
02.10.2017 0013-0280-400 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
410 2062-9800-000 1 ABDRUECKVORRICHTUNG VOLLST. 55
JACK, COMPL.
MECANISMO DE EXTRACCIÓN, COMP.
Seite/Page
500 2058-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
2063-9901-060 WASHER _ DISK
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE ARANDELA _ DISCO
600 2062-9820-000 1 PRESSVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
COMPRESSING DEVICE, COMPL.
DISPOSITIVO COMPRESOR, COMP.
610 2063-9860-000 1 MONTAGEVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
MOUNTING TOOL, COMPL.
DISPOSITIVO DE MONTAJE, COMP.
620 2063-9823-000 1 MONTAGERING
MOUNTING RING
ANILLO DE MONTAJE
630 2063-9943-010 1 RINGSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
ANNULAR WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE ANULAR, COMP.
0013-0280-400 3 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
640 2062-9982-000 1 RINGSCHRAUBE VOLLST.
Typ / Model EYE BOLT, COMPL.
ANILLA, COMP.
VSE 40-02-007 0013-0297-150 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 650 2063-9860-010 2 MONTAGEVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
MOUNTING TOOL, COMPL.
9077-305 DISPOSITIVO DE MONTAJE, COMP.
0019-6955-300 2 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
0013-2565-260 2 FLUEGELMUTTER
9077-305 WING NUT
TUERCA DE MARIPOSA
0018-4250-300 2 ROHR
Ausgabe / Edition PIPE
TUBO
02.10.2017 0013-0279-300 2 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
660 0018-2916-050 1 DOPPELNIPPEL
DOUBLE NIPPLE
BOQUILLA DOBLE
Seite/Page
670 0013-0388-030 2 RINGMUTTER
2063-9901-060 RING NUT
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE TUERCA DE ANILLA
680 0019-5381-050 2 RINGSCHRAUBE
EYE BOLT
ANILLA
690 0019-5384-050 1 RINGSCHRAUBE
EYE BOLT
ANILLA
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
55/65
10 2062-9939-020 1 DRUCKSCHEIBE
2062-9800-000 PRESSURE DISK
ABDRUECKVORRICHTUNG VOLLST. DISCO DE PRESIÓN
20 2044-9939-000 1 DRUCKSCHEIBE
JACK, COMPL.
PRESSURE DISK
DISCO DE PRESIÓN
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
57/65
10 0007-2035-750 1 DICHTRING
2063-9902-180 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2929-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-3169-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0004-3273-810 1 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
50 0007-3796-830 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
55 0007-2700-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3216-760 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
VSE 40-02-007 70 0007-3457-790 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 80 0004-1595-810 1 FUEHRUNGSBAND
GUIDE TAPE
9077-305 CINTA DE GUÍA
90 0007-2827-790 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
100 0007-3799-840 1 DICHTRING
9077-305 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
110 0004-1702-850 1 FUEHRUNGSBAND
Ausgabe / Edition GUIDE TAPE
CINTA DE GUÍA
02.10.2017 120 0007-3798-760 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
130 0007-3800-540 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
140 0007-2625-830 2 DICHTRING
2063-9902-180 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE JUNTA ANULAR
150 0007-2080-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
160 0007-2940-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0007-2023-390 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-1945-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 0007-2211-850 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
200 0007-3510-830 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
VSE 40-02-007 210 0007-1944-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
230 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n GRASA LUBRICANTE
240 0007-2638-750 1 DICHTRING
9077-305 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
60/65
10 0007-2643-750 1 DICHTRING
2057-9902-000 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2643-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0011-7305-100 2 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
50 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
DRIVE BELT
Typ / Model
VSE 40-02-007

9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
62/65
10 0007-2643-750 1 DICHTRING
2057-9902-050 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2643-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0011-7305-100 2 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
50 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
DRIVE BELT
70 0011-6012-680 3 RILLENKUGELLAGER
Typ / Model GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
VSE 40-02-007 80 0021-3293-870 12 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
64/65
10 0007-1944-530 1 DICHTRING
2060-9769-110 GASKET
SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1945-530 1 DICHTRING
SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-2023-630 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2940-630 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-2080-530 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
80 0015-0036-000 3 SCHMIEROEL
LUBRICATING OIL
ACEITE LUBRICANTE
90 0015-0119-010 1 SCHMIERFETT
Typ / Model LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
VSE 40-02-007 100 0021-3311-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRIVE BELT
9077-305

9077-305
Ausgabe / Edition
02.10.2017
Seite/Page
82730/82740
2/2-way diaphragm valves
DN 8 ... 50, G1/4 ... 2, 1/4 ... 2 NPT
High flow rate

Damped operation
Functional compact design
Solenoid interchangeable without tools (c) c
Technical features
Medium: Flow direction: Fluid temperature: Material:
Slightly aggressive gases Determined –10 ... +90°C Body: Stainless steel (1.4408)
and liquid fluids Port size: Ambient temperature: Seat seal: NBR
Switching function: G1/4, G3/8, G1/2, G3/4, G1, –10 ... +50°C Internal parts: Stainless steel,
Normally closed G1 1/4, G1 1/2, G2 PVDF
Operation: 1/4 NPT, 3/8 NPT, 1/2 NPT,
Indirectly solenoid actuated 3/4 NPT, 1 NPT, 1 1/4 NPT, For contaminated fluids insertion
Mounting position: 1 1/2 NPT, 2 NPT of a strainer is recommended.
Optional, Operating pressure:
preferably solenoid See table
vertical on top Differential pressure:
0,1 bar required
Technical data - standard models

Symbol Port size Orifice Valve length Flow kv value *1) Operating pressure Weight Model
(mm) (mm) (m3/h) *2) (bar) (kg) Solenoid in d.c./a.c.
G1/4 8 60 1,9 0,1 ... 16 0,47 8273000.9101.xxxxx
1/4 NPT 8 60 1,9 0,1 ... 16 0,47 8274000.9101.xxxxx
G3/8 10 60 3 0,1 ... 16 0,45 8273100.9101.xxxxx
3/8 NPT 10 60 3 0,1 ... 16 0,45 8274100.9101.xxxxx
G1/2 12 67 3,8 0,1 ... 16 0,5 8273200.9101.xxxxx
1/2 NPT 12 67 3,8 0,1 ... 16 0,5 8274200.9101.xxxxx
G3/4 20 80 6,1 0,1 ... 16 0,65 8273300.9101.xxxxx
3/4 NPT 20 80 6,1 0,1 ... 16 0,65 8274300.9101.xxxxx
G1 25 95 9,5 0,1 ... 16 0,95 8273400.9101.xxxxx
1 NPT 25 95 9,5 0,1 ... 16 0,95 8274400.9101.xxxxx
A
G1 1/4 32 132 23 0,1 ... 10 2,6 8273500.9101.xxxxx
1 1/4 NPT 32 132 23 0,1 ... 10 2,6 8274500.9101.xxxxx
P
G1 1/4 32 132 23 0,1 ... 16 2,6 8273500.9151.xxxxx
1 1/4 NPT 32 132 23 0,1 ... 16 2,6 8274500.9151.xxxxx
G1 1/2 40 132 25 0,1 ... 10 2,84 8273600.9101.xxxxx
1 1/2 NPT 40 132 25 0,1 ... 10 2,84 8274600.9101.xxxxx
G1 1/2 40 132 25 0,1 ... 16 2,84 8273600.9151.xxxxx
1 1/2 NPT 40 132 25 0,1 ... 16 2,84 8274600.9151.xxxxx
G2 50 160 41 0,1 ... 10 3,85 8273700.9101.xxxxx
2 NPT 50 160 41 0,1 ... 10 3,85 8274700.9101.xxxxx
G2 50 160 41 0,1 ... 16 3,85 8273700.9151.xxxxx
2 NPT 50 160 41 0,1 ... 16 3,85 8274700.9151.xxxxx
xxxxx Please insert voltage and frequency codes
*1) Cv-value (US) ≈ kv value x 1,2
*2) For gases and liquid fluids up to 25 mm2/s (cSt)
03/14 2014-5862c Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend, N/en 5.8.647.01
without notice, the specifications given in this document. © 2014 Buschjost GmbH
82730/82740
Option selector 827˙˙˙˙.˙˙˙˙.˙˙˙˙˙

Thread form Substitute Frequency Substitute
ISO G 3 See table frequency codes xx
NPT 4 Voltage Substitute
Port size Substitute See Voltage codes xxx
1/4 0 Solenoid options Substitute
3/8 1 G1/4 ... 1 9101
1/2 2 Operating pressure
0,1 ... 16 bar
3/4 3
G1 1/4 ... 2 9101
1 4 Operating pressure
1 1/4 5 0,1 ... 10 bar
1 1/2 6 G1 1/4 ... 2 9151
2 7 Operating pressure
0,1 ... 16 bar
Valve options Substitute
Normally open (NO), 01
from G1 1/4 with solenoid 9151
0,1 ... 16 bar
Manual override 02
Seat seal FPM, 03
Fluid temperature –5 ... +110°C
Seat seal EPDM, 14
for hot water,
Fluid temperature +110°C
0,3 ... 16 bar (up to G1)
0,3 ... 10 bar (from G1 1/4)
Core tube stainless steel, 50
Seat seal FPM,
Fluid temperature +110°C
for a.c. solenoid with rectifier
Standard solenoid systems Electrical details for all solenoid systems

Voltage and Frequency Solenoid 9101 *1) *2) Design DIN VDE 0580
Code Code Voltage Frequency Power consumption Voltage range ±10%
Voltage Frequency Inrush Holding Duty cycle 100% ED
024 00 24 V d.c. - 8W 8W Protection class EN 60529 IP65
024 50 24 V a.c. 50 Hz 15 VA 12 VA Socket Form A acc. to DIN EN 175301-803 (included)
110 50 110 V a.c. 50 Hz 15 VA 12 VA
According to DIN VDE 0580 at coil temperature of +20°C.
120 60 120 V a.c. 60 Hz 15 VA 12 VA At operating state temperature the input power of a coil decreases by up to ca.
230 50 230 V a.c. 50 Hz 15 VA 12 VA 30% due to physical reasons.
x
Voltage and Frequency Solenoid 9151 *1) *2)
024 00 24 V d.c. - 18 W 18 W
024 50 24 V a.c. 50 Hz 45 VA 35 VA
110 50 110 V a.c. 50 Hz 45 VA 35 VA Additional solenoid systems
120 60 120 V a.c. 60 Hz 45 VA 35 VA ATEX category Protection class Solenoid Standard voltages
230 50 230 V a.c. 50 Hz 45 VA 35 VA II2GD EEx m II T4 T 130°C 9136 24 V d.c., 110 V a.c., 230 V a.c.
r
with 3 m connection cable
Attention!
*1) Coil only
The conditions imposed on the Ex approvals lead to reduction of the permissible
*2) Attention! Standard core tube with copper shading coil.
standard temperatures ranges in the case of explosion protected solenoids.
Look for fluid resistant further options
Further versions on request!
82730/82740
Section View
G1/4 ... 2
1/4 ... 2 NPT
400
701
1400 706
*105 *705
*103 *704
104 *707
102 703
101 *702
P A
No. Description
101 Valve body
102 Valve cover
*103 Diaphragm
104 Allen head screw
*105 Pressure spring
400 Solenoid
701 Core tube
*702 O-ring
703 Screw piece
*704 Pressure spring
*705 Plunger
706 Spring clip
*707 O-ring
1400 Socket (included)
* These individual parts form a complete wearing unit.

When ordering spare parts please state Model No. and Series No.
82730/82740
Dimensions
G1/4 ... 2
1/4 ... 2 NPT
48,3 42
26,5 30
36
20
50
33
2
H1
H
P A
R
T øA
L1 B
L
1 Solenoid rotatable 360°

2 Socket turnable 4 x 90°
(Socket included)
Port size R A B H H1 L L1 T Model

G1/4 44 19,5 78,5 67 60 27,5 12 8273000.9101.xxxxx
1/4 NPT 44 19,5 78,5 67 60 27,5 10 8274000.9101.xxxxx
G3/8 44 19,5 78,5 67 60 27,5 12 8273100.9101.xxxxx
3/8 NPT 44 19,5 78,5 67 60 27,5 10,5 8274100.9101.xxxxx
G1/2 44 19,5 81 67 67 31 14 8273200.9101.xxxxx
1/2 NPT 44 19,5 81 67 67 31 13,5 8274200.9101.xxxxx
G3/4 50 24 88 71,5 80 36,5 16 8273300.9101.xxxxx
3/4 NPT 50 24 88 71,5 80 36,5 14 8274300.9101.xxxxx
G1 62 29,5 97,5 77 95 44 18 8273400.9101.xxxxx
1 NPT 62 29,5 97,5 77 95 44 17 8274400.9101.xxxxx
G 1 1/4 92 44,5 124,5 95,5 132 60 20 8273500.9101.xxxxx
1 1/4 NPT 92 44,5 124,5 95,5 132 60 17 8274500.9101.xxxxx
G1 1/2 92 44,5 124,5 95,5 132 60 22 8273600.9101.xxxxx
1 1/2 NPT 92 44,5 124,5 95,5 132 60 17 8274600.9101.xxxxx
G2 109 54,5 142,5 108 160 74 24 8273700.9101.xxxxx
2 NPT 109 54,5 142,5 108 160 74 17,5 8274700.9101.xxxxx
Note to Pressure Equipment Directive (PED): Note to Electromagnetic Compatibility Guideline (EEC):
The valves of this series are according to Art. 3 § 3 of the Pressure The valves shall be provided with an electrical circuit which ensures the
Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EG. This means interpretation and limits of the harmonised standards EN 61000-6-3 and EN 61000-6-1 are
production are in accordance to engineers practice wellknown in the observed, and hence the requirements of the Electromagnetic
member countries. Compatibility Guideline (2004/108/EG) satisfield.
The CE-sign at the valve refers not to the PED. Thus the declaration of
conformity is not longer applicable for this directive.
Operation and Installation Manual
Ball Valves
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen · Telefon (05731) 7900-0 · Telefax (05731) 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
Impressum
© by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded , reproduced nor passed to third parties without the
written agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG . This restriction also applies to the corresponding
drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right or change parts of the valves and armatures at any time without
prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance or the properties is given.

Oberbecksener Straße 78
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 199
Internet: http://www.end.de
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 01/2012
2 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Guarantee 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Ball valves 11
5.1 General 11
5.2 Corresponding use 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly 11
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 13
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve 13
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends 14
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part 15
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection 16
5.5 Maintenance 17
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland 18
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing 19
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection 19
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection 22
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC 26
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the ball valves rapaidly
and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the ball valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the ball valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation manual.
Yours
General advice
2 General advice
2.1 Validity
These mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard version of the ball valves.
2.2 Inward monitoring
Please check
• directly after delivery the ball valves for any transport damages and defi-
ciencies.
• with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
Do not leave any parts in the package.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
In case of a return, please mention the following:

• Name and address of the consignee
• Stock-/ ordering-/ article-number
• Description of the defect
2.4 Warranty
For our ball valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
Symbols and their signification
2.5 Symbols and their signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these papgraphs without fail!
This symbol indicates paragraphs which contain comments / advices or tips.
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
Safety advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the armatures and
valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety
aspects in each case!
If, for example, a pneumatic actuator works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential
hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for
test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning,

you may find advices on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevant to you.
Please observe (only) the advices which applies to your situation!
3.1 Personal advice
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and eletrical installation of the armatures and valves must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directice after the mounting and instal-
ling of the armatures and valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the armature / valve (in a plant which is in operation)
inform the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in
order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good
time by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machi-
nes / plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting
As a result of the starting (pneumactic, electric or by hand) of the armatures and valves the flow
of gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of
the starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
Safety advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the slide / valve / flap.
Check the function of the limit switches (option)!
Check, whether the slide / valve / flap will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switch on armatures and valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrican or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potntial hazard!
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the armature / valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling or a armature or valve some essential points should be clarified!

• Will the armature/valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassmbly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Observe that some valves / armatures are able to enclose the pressured medium e.g. the ball
in the ball valve. You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the armture/valve is
mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
If necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the armature/
valve is mounted
• the switching on of pilot medium supply, pilot power supply and/or the power supply
of actuators and accessories.
In case of defect in the armature/valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will
be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the armature/valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please
observe the safefy advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
3.2 Device safety
The armatures/valves
• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the armatures/vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The armatures/valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The armatures/valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the armature/valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
sealings and the bearings.
The operating of the armatures/valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Never remove a cap or a other component part if the armature/valve will be under pressure.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a nameplate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed

+49 (0)5731 - 7901-0 www.end.de
Art. No.:฀ AE311028
Serial:฀ 220885
฀ Pressure range (PS):฀ 16 bar
Pilot pressure:฀ - bar
Temperature range (TS): -20°C ... +180°C
Size (DN):฀฀ 50 / G2"
Testing pressure (PT):฀ 60 bar
Fluidgroup:฀ 1
Date of manufacturing: 14.02.2002
0062
Fig. 4.1 - Name-plate
Art.No. article number of the valve / armature

Serial order- or production- number
Pressure range (PS) max. admisable working pressure of the valve / armature [bar]
Pilot pressure recommend pilot pressure for correct function of the valve / armature [bar]
(only at pneumatic actuated valves / armatures)
Size (DN) connecting size of the valve / armature
Testing pressure (PT) testing pressure of the body of the valve / armature
Fluidgroup allowed fluidgroup of the valve / armature
Date of manufacturing month and year of manufacturing of the valve / armature
10 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball Valves
5 Ball valves
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a ball valve you have to read the
Safety advices
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
5.2 Corresponding use
Ball valves will be used to cut off medium flow.

It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the ball valve will be resi-
stant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal temperature range
should causes damages on the armature especially on the seals.
In some cases you have to install an equalization boring into the ball, that there will be no overpres-
sure between the body and the ball by changing temperatures.
5.3 Operation
The ball valve will be open or close totally by using a handle or an pneumatic or electric actuator
(option).
During the operation of the ball valve take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs
into the armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it is necessary you have
to install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly
The mechanical installation will be same at all variants of the ball valve. There will be differences
in the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the safety devices (e.g. caps or plugs). Take care that there will be no
parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the ball valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the armature. If necessary you have to install a Y- strainer in
front of the ball valve.
Avoid stress in case of non align pipes.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 11
Ball valves
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp sealings
observe the screw direction. Don`t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve. Don`t use the handle as a lever.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends to harden it.
Check the tightness of all connections.
sealing compound
harden
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.1 - ball valves, mounting threaded connection (Fig.: Art. TB111025)
12 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection
Before welding you have to disassemble the center part of the ball valve to prevent the sealings
from damages.
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve
Clamp the valve between a vice carfully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of the
ends of the body.
Loosen the nuts crossvice and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully. To attach the center parts and the connection ends at a later mounting you
can sign the parts.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
atu Oeyn d.de
D -Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.2 - ball valves, mounting welded connection, disassembly of the center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 13
Ball Valves
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends
The center part of the ball valve must be substitute by a distance part as long as the center part
during the welding.
By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines.
The safety demands by welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts at a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate, inform the shift foreman/safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and pevention of accidents.
Fig. 5.3 -ball valves,mouting welded connections, welding of the connection ends(Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
14 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part
Before mounting the center part let the connection ends cool down.
Disassemble the distance part.
Insert the center part between the connection ends. Attach the center parts to the right connec-
tion ends.
Observe the correct seat of the sealings and that there will be no pollution in the seats of the seal-
ings and in the ball.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
Check the function of the ball valve.
G y
o. K man
& C er d.de
bH n · G en
Gm se st@
en hau po
tur yn e ·
r ma d Oe nd.d
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h cool down !
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - ball valves, mounting welded connections, mounting of the center part of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 15
Ball valves
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection
In the following discription we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the ball valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down.
Insert the ball valve and the flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the required and the
max. torque of the ball valve, the flanges, the flanges seals and the screws.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
D
atu Oeyn d.de
-Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
cool down !
3 ttp
h
N
F·OPE
AU SE
·CLO
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.5 - ball valves, mounting flanged connection (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
16 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the valves you have to read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
On normal accounts the ball valve is maintenance free.In periodical turns the controlling of the
function and the tightness should happen:
• check the tighness of the gland

• check the tightness of the ball seats
Depending on the version of the ball valve for decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be
readjust. See also chapter 5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
Ball valves in a multiple part design could be disassemble to exchange the seals and/or the ball.
See also chapter: 5.5.2. „Exchange of the ball and the sealings“.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you ascertain a demage of the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant! However before
doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 17
Ball valves
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland
For decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be readjust.
By keeping the nominal pressure you have to tighten up the screw of the gland until the tightness
of the the gland will be restored
After the readjusting the ball of the valve must be able to move slightly.
At ball valves with spring forced sealings or o-ring sealings at the stem the readjustment isn`t
necessary.
o.k. tightness
Fig. 5.6 - ball valves, readjusting of the gland (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
18 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing
For decreasing tightness the ball and/or the sealings of the ball valve could be exchange. The
availability of the spare parts kit you can see in the data sheet of your ball valve.
Corresponding to the wear of the parts exchange the sealings and the ball. By the replacement of
the ball you should also exchange the sealing.
In the following description we assume, that your ball valve will be actuated by hand. If your ball
valve will be actuated be a pneumatic or electric actuator, please also observe the opration and
installation manual of the actuator.
Cut off the media flow and relieve the media pressure.
Keep ready some fit tanks to catch up leaking liquids.
If it`s necessary remove the additional limt switches and gear boxes.
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection
At 3-part ball valve it will do when you remove the center part of the ball valve. Loosen the nuts
crosswise and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully.
. KG ny
Co rma e
H & · Ge end.d
mb en
n G aus post@
a ture eynh .de ·
rm d O nd
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O SE
AU
·CLO
ZU
Fig. 5.7 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of th center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 19
Ball valves
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Take the parts aside carefully. Place a mark on the body and the connection ends that you will be
able to join the correct parts by a subsequent mounting.
Remove the ball seals and the ball out of the body.
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
Throw away the old pieces by observing the appropriate demands and guide lines.
& er .de
. K ny
bH n · G end
Co ma
@
G
n G us st
re ha o
tu yn · p
e
ma Oe .de
Ar d d
D- Ba .en
m
EN 547 www
32 tp:/
ht
SE
LO
·C
N
ZU
PE
F·O
AU
Fig. 5.8 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
20 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Put the ball sealings and the ball into their seats at the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that
you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Move the center part of the body between the connection ends. If need be arange the center parts
to the correct connection ends.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.2.3. „Mounting of the center part“.
Check the tightness of all the connections.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 21
Ball valves
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection
Remove the ball valve out of the pipes. Loosen the flange screws and pull the screws out of the
flange.
Take the ball valve from the pipes.
Dismantle the ball balve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to screw out the screw of the body, or
• you have to screw the screw joint out of the body.
Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Put the parts aside carefully. Place marks on the parts that you will be able to join the correct parts
by a subsequent mounting of the ball valve.
Remove the ball sealing and the ball out of the body.
. KG any
& Co Germ d.de
bH ·
Gm sen st@en
uren nhau · po
mat d Oey d.de
D-Ar en
EN 547 Bawww.
32 tp://
ht
N
PE
F·O E
AU OS
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.9 - Ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
22 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences..
Remove the second ball sealing.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
& erm .de
. K ny
bH n · G nd
Co a
Gm e e
n us t@
G
re ha pos
atu eyn e ·
rm d O d.d
D-A Ba .en
EN 547 ww
32 p://w
htt
SE
LO
·C
EN
ZU
OP
F·
AU
Fig. 5.10 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 23
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Place the first ball seal into the seat in the body.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Place the second ball seal into the seat in the body.
Assemble the ball valve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to join the parts of the body together and to screw them up with the fit
screws; or
• you have to screw up the screw joint with the body.
If need be attach the different parts of the boby.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Insert the ball valve with new flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the max. torque of the
screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.3 „Mounting with flanged connection“.
Check the tightness of all the connections.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
24 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Notes
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 25
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(1)
Declaration in conformity
(2)
fi by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
as defined
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Butterfly valves
fl NG DN32 ... DN100 VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VN 1¼" ... 2" Non-return valves
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VO DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VS DN32 ... DN200 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 EK 1¼" ... 3" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
Gate valves GD 1¼" ... 2" VU 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE DN32 ... DN80 IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" EB 1¼" ... 3"
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 PE 1¼“ ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZE 1¼" ... 4" RK DN32 ... DN400
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE DN32 ... DN100 TD 4"
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZF 1¼" ... 4" Strainer
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZG 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
Pressure reducer VD DN32 ... DN100 ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS DN32 ... DN200
SD ⅜" ... 2"
⅜ VH 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD DN32 ... DN80 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VK DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2"
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZP DN32 ... DN200
and all variations of these articles
(4) of the company END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Germany
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG.
(6) Applied conformity assessment procedure: Modul H.
(7) Notied body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8)  numbers:
Certicate Quality Management System: INT110198DE
 of System approval PED:
Certicate 2011/70.10.1777/P
(9) Applied harmonized standards, in particular:
DIN EN 12516:2005 Industriearmaturen - Gehäusefestigkeit
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 17. january 2012

END-Armaturen Gm78
Oberbecksener Str. usen · Germany
32547 Bad Oey nha
- 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731· pos t@end.de
http://www.end .de
Friedhelm König Michael End
Technical Manager Quality Manager
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen (Germany) · Telefon +49 - 5731 - 7900-0 · Telefax +49 - 5731 - 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
(1)
Declaration in conformity
(2)
fi by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
as defined
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Gate valves BO-BO ½" ... 2" VK DN15 ... DN25 BH ⅜" ... 3"⅜
AA ½" ... 2" BT ½" ... 1" VL ¼" ... 1" CK3003 DN15 ... DN50
AB ¼" ... 1" BV ¼“ ... ¾“ VN ¼" ... 1" CK5000 DN40 ... DN250
AC ⅛" ... 2"⅛ CB ¼" ... 2½" VO DN25 CK5003 DN40 ... DN25
AD ½" ... 2" EK ¼" ... 1" VS DN15 ... DN25 CK5100 DN40 ... DN50
AE ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 GD ¼" ... 1" VT DN15 ... DN25 CK5200 DN40 ... DN50
AV ¼" ... 1" HF ¼" ... 1" ZA ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 CW5400 DN40 ... DN50
BE ⅜" ... 3"⅜ HO DN10 ... DN15 ZB ¼" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 DR DN50 ... DN300
BF ¼" ... 3" IB ¼" ... 2" ZD ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 EB ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
BS ½" ... 1¼" IK ¼" ... 1" ZE ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 MR ¼" ... 3"
CA5014 DN40 ... DN80 IL ¼" ... 1" ZF ¼" ... 1" RG DN15 ... DN25
CA5015 DN40 ... DN50 IW ¼" ... 1" ZG ¼" ... 1" TD ⅜" ... 3"⅜
CA5214 DN40 ... DN32 KA ½" ... 1" ZH ½" ... 1" TG ½" ... 2"
CD5010 DN15 ... DN25 KFE ⅜" ... ¾"⅜ ZK DN15 ... DN25 TR ⅜“ ... 4"⅜
CV3010 DN15 ... DN25 NK ⅜“ ... 4",⅜DN10 ... DN100 ZL ¼" ... 1" VB ¼“ ... 2“
CV5010 DN15 ... DN25 PB ⅛ ... 2" ⅛ ZM ¼" ... 1" ZR DN15 ... DN200
CV5020 DN15 ... DN25 PD ½" ... 1" ZP DN15 ... DN25 Sight glasses
IC ¼" ... 4" PE ¼“ ... 1“ ZU ¼" ... 1" SG ¼" ... 2", DN15 ... DN150
MV ½" SK ½" ... 3", DN10 ... DN80 Pipe fittingsfi Strainer
TC ¼" ... 4" TB ¼" ... 1" FG ⅛" ... 4"⅛ AS ¼“ ... 1“
Pressure reducer TE ½" ... 2" FS DN15 ... DN150 AS DN15 ... DN25
ID ⅜" ... ¾"⅜ TF DN20 ... DN25 GE Ø6 ... Ø20 BG ⅜" ... 2"⅜
MB ½" ... 2" TH ½" ... 1" GR Ø8 ... Ø28 CU DN15 ... DN250
MC ½" ... 2" TT ⅜" ... 1"⅜ GV Ø6 ... Ø20 EA ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
SD ⅜“ ... 1“,⅜DN20 ... DN25 TV ⅜" ... 1"⅜ TE Ø6 ... Ø25 IG ¼" ... 4"
Pressure relief valves VD ¼" ... 1" TV Ø6 ... Ø20 KU DN15 ... DN100
NG ⅜" ... 1",⅜DN15 ... DN25 VD DN10 ... DN25 WE Ø6 ... Ø38 STE DN25 ... DN150
Ball valves VE ¼" ... 1" WV Ø6 ... Ø20 Water-shock damper
AG ¼" ... 1" VF ⅛“ ... ½"⅛ Non-return valves TS ½"
BC ⅛“ ... ¾"⅛ VH ⅛“ ... 1"⅛ AH ¼" ... 1½"
BK DN15 ... DN25 VH3100 ½" ... 1" AR ½" ... 1"
and all variations of these articles
(4) of the company END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Germany
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of Article 3 Part 3 of the directive 97/23/EG. These products bear no CE mark, but are in line to the good engineering
practice designed and manufactured.
(6) Applied harmonized standards, in particular:
DIN EN 12516:2005 Industriearmaturen - Gehäusefestigkeit

en GmbH & Co. KG
END-Armatur 78
Oberbecksener Str. usen · Germany
(7) On behalf 32547 Bad Oeynha - 7900-0 Bad Oeynhausen, 17. january 2012
Tele fon: +49 (0)5 731
- 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731· pos t@e nd.d e
http://www.end.de
Friedhelm König Michael End

Technical Manager Quality Manager
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen (Germany) · Telefon +49 - 5731 - 7900-0 · Telefax +49 - 5731 - 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
watergates
knife-gate-valves - Stoffschieber
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG

Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Type 5281 Sicherheit Safety Sécurité
Manual de instrucciones
2/2-Wege-Magnetventil Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Proper Usage Utilisatio
Operating instructions
für neutrale Medien
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung To ensure the proper function of the device and promote Af
2/2-way solenoid valve sowie die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten ge- long service lift, you must comply with the information in pe
for neutral media mäß Datenblatt Typ 5281, damit das Gerät einwandfrei these Operating Instructions and the application conditions and contenues
Èlectrovanne à 2/2 voies funktioniert und lange einsatzfähig bleibt. Bei Nichtbeachtung specifications provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation
dieser Hinweise sowie bei unzulässigen Eingriffen in das Gerät the device in a manner that is contrary to these Operating technique
pour fluides neutres entfällt jegliche Haftung unsererseits, ebenso erlischt die Garantie Instructions or the application conditions and specifications tions et d’i
r 24V
Válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos auf Geräte u. Zubehörteile! Das Gerät dient ausschließlich als 2/ provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons
2 V o para medios neutrales 2-Wege-Magnetventil für die lt. Datenblatt zulässigen Medien. your warranty. This device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les access
ge 1 lid with
Eine andere oder darüber hinausgehende Benutzung gilt als solenoid valve for the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2
o l t a y
nicht bestimmungsgemäß. Für hieraus resultierende Schäden sheet. Any other use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre
V R va pply onl
haftet Bürkert nicht. Das Risiko trägt allein der Anwender. not be responsible for any improper use of the device. considérée
U
dommages
/
UL er su
toute respo
o w ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
s2p
• Halten Sie sich bei Einsatzplanung und Betrieb des • Be sure to observe generally accepted safety rules •
clas
Gerätes an die einschlägigen allgemein anerkannten when planning, installing and using this device. For
sicherheitstechnischen Regeln. example, take suitable measures to prevent
• Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtig- unintentional operations of the device.
tes Betätigen oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen • Do not impair the operation of the device. •
auszuschließen. • Do not attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or
• Beachten Sie, daß in Systemen, die unter Druck valves in the system that are under pressure, and
Notice d'utilisation
stehen, Leitungen und Ventile nicht gelöst werden always be sure to switch off the voltage supply •
Betriebsanleitung
dürfen. Schalten Sie vor Eingriffen in das System in before working on the system.
jedem Fall die Spannung ab! • When attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure
• Achten Sie auf den einwandfreien Sitz der Dichtung the seal is properly seated.
beim Verschrauben der Spule mit der Geräte- • Jammed coils can cause coil overheating with AC!
steckdose. • For explosion-proof models, data from the conformity •
• Festsitzender Kern bewirkt bei Wechselspannung certificate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be
(AC) Spulenüberhitzung! complied with! •
• Bei Ausführungen mit Explosionsschutz sind zusätz-
lich die Angaben der Konformitätsbescheinigung PTB WARNING! •
Nr. 00ATEX 2129 X zu beachten. • Do not touch the coil during use as it becomes very
hot.
WARNUNG!
• Verletzungsgefahr! Bei Dauerbetrieb kann die Spule •
sehr heiß werden.
Fluid Control Systems
Sécurité Seguridad Sicherheit Sicherheit
Utilisation conforme aux prescriptions Utilización con arreglo a las disposiciones Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad
e the proper function of the device and promote Afin que l’appareil puisse fonctionner parfaitement et Se ruega observar las indicaciones contenidas en este Ma-
vice lift, you must comply with the information in pendant longtemps, veuillez observer les instructions nual de instrucciones así como las condiciones de uso y datos Spannungsfreie Montage / Voltage-free assembly Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection
nstructions and the application conditions and contenues dans cette notice d’utilisation ainsi que les conditions admisibles con arreglo a la hoja de servicio Tipo 5281, de modo que el Montage sans tension / Montaje libre de tensión Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
vided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation et les données admissibles mentionnées dans la fiche aparato funcione impecablemente y permanezca durante largo tiempo
anner that is contrary to these Operating technique du type 5281. En cas d’inobservation de ces instruc- apto para el empleo. La inobservancia de estas indicaciones así como
e application conditions and specifications tions et d’interventions non autorisées dans l’appareil, nous las inter-venciones inadmisibles en el aparato suponen la declinación
ype 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons toute responsabilité et la garantie couvrant l’appareil et por nuestra parte de toda clase de responsabilidad, además de la
his device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les accessoires s’éteint! L'appareil sert uniquement d’électro- extinción de la garan-tía de los aparatos y de las piezas de los accesorios.
the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2 voies pour les fluides admis selon la fiche technique. El aparato sirve ex-clusivamente como válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos
use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre utilisation ou une utilisation excédant ce contexte sera para los medios autorizados según la hoja de datos. Cualquier otra
ble for any improper use of the device. considérée comme non conforme aux prescriptions. Pour les utilización que vaya más ella no será conforme a las disposiciones.
dommages qui en résulteraient, le fabricant/fournisseur décline El fabricante / suministrador no es responsable de los daños que de ello
toute responsabilité. L’utilisateur seul en assume le risque. pudieran resultar. El riesgo corresponde únicamente al usuario. 0 bar, psi, kPa Du
Dir rchflu
ATTENTION! ATTENTION! ¡ATENCIÓN! Se ectio ß
re to observe generally accepted safety rules • Pour la planification de l’utilisation et l’exploitation de • Para la planificación y operación del aparato atenerse Se s d'é n flo
n
ntid cc
planning, installing and using this device. For l’appareil, veuillez vous en tenir aux règles applicables a las correspondientes reglas generales y re- o d ou
ep
as
ple, take suitable measures to prevent et généralement reconnues en matière de technique conocidas de la técnica de seguridad.
entional operations of the device. de sécurité. • Tomar las medidas apropiadas para excluir
ot impair the operation of the device. • Prenez les mesures nécessaires pour exclure tout accionamien-tos no intencionados o perjuicios Elektrischer Anschluß / Electrical connection
ot attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or actionnement involontaire ou des altérations inadmisibles; prestar atención a que en el caso de Raccordement électrique / Conexión eléctrica
s in the system that are under pressure, and inadmissibles. sistemas que se encuentren bajo presión no deben
s be sure to switch off the voltage supply • Notez qu’il n’est pas permis de desserrer des desconec-tarse conducciones y válvulas.
e working on the system. conduites ou des vannes se trouvant sous pression • Antes de proceder a intervenciones en el sistema
attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure dans des systèmes! Avant d’intervenir dans le desco-nectar siempre la tensión.
eal is properly seated. système, coupez l’alimentation électrique dans tous • Prestar atención al asiento impecable de la empaque-
med coils can cause coil overheating with AC! les cas! tadura al atornillar la válvula con la caja de enchufe
xplosion-proof models, data from the conformity • Veillez à ce que le joint repose parfaitement lorsque para aparatos eléctricos.
icate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be vous visserez la bobine avec le connecteur. • Con tensión alterna (AC), el macho de asiento duro
lied with! • Un noyau bloqué provoque en cas d’alimentation en provoca sobrecalentamiento de la bobina!
tension alternative (AC) une surchauffe de la bobine! • En las ejecuciones con protección debe tenerse
WARNING! • Dans les exécutions antidéflagrantes, les indications adicio-nalmente en cuenta los datos de la declaración
ot touch the coil during use as it becomes very de l'attestation de conformité PTB N° 00ATEX 2129 X de con-formidad PTB n° 00ATEX 2129 X.
doivent observées en plus.
AVERTISSEMENT! ¡AVISO!
• Risque de blessure! En cas de fonctionnement • ¡Peligro de lesiones! En estado de operación continua
permanent, la bobine peut devenir très chaude. la bobina puede ponerse muy caliente.
Sicherheit Technische Daten Technische Daten
Caractéristiques techniques / Datos técnicos

Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Technical Data
Umgebungstemperatur Température d' ambiante
Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection Temperature of Surroundings Temperatura de ambiente
Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
Boîtier/Caja
Gehäuse/Housing Laiton/Latón
Messing/brass Acier fin/Acero inoxidable
Edelstahl/Stainless steel
Dichtwerkstoff Temp.
Matériau d’étanchéité Temp.
Sealing material Medium
Material de estanqueidad Fluide/Medio
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
0 bar, psi, kPa Du FKM -10 .. +120 °C
FKM -10 .. +120 °C
Dir rchflu
Se ectio ßrich Nennweite/Nominal size Dimension nominale
Se s d'é n flow tung
n
ntid cc Anchura nominal
o d oule
ep Wirkungsweise
as ment
o Circuit function Fonctionnement
A Funcionamiento
A
Typ/ Type
Type/Tipo
MADE IN GERMANY
MADE IN GERMANY
5281 A 13,0 FKM MS 5281 A 13,0 FKM MS
Beispiel 0,2 -16 bar 0,2 -16 bar
24V 50-60Hz 8W Exemple 24V 50-60Hz 8W
Example
Ejemplo
450000Y W14UN
450000Y W14UN
Bestell-Nr. / Id. No. N° id. / N° de pedido

Spannung (±10 %) - Frequenz - Leistung Tension (±10%) - fréquence - puissance
Voltage (±10 %) - Frequency - Power Tensión (±10 %) - frecuencia - potencia
Druckbereich/Pressure range Plage de pression / Gama de presión
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten Sous resérve de modification techniques.

We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice Nos reservamos el derecho de llevar a cabo modificaciones tècnicas
sin previo aviso.
Niederlassungen / Branch Offices Montage Montage Montage
Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage

Contact addresses / Kontaktadressen
Germany / Deutschland / Allemange
Spulenmontage / Coil assembly / Einbaulage beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Ab
Bürkert Fluid Control System
Montage de la bobine / Montaje de bobina de montage quelconque / Sentido de montaje Se
Sales Centre
discrecional Eta
Chr.-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
Mutter Vorzugsrichtung Ato
D-74653 Ingelfingen Nut Preffered direction
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111 Ecrou Orientation préférentielle
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448 Tuerca Colector de lodo
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International
Contact addresses can be found on the internet at:
Die Kontaktadressen finden Sie im Internet unter: max. 5 Nm
Les adresses se trouvent sur internet sous :
www.burkert.com Bürkert / Company / Locations
Schmutzfänger
Dirt trap
O-Ring
Collecteur d’impuretés
Joint torique Ge
Anillo en O Sentido de paso
en
Schutzleiterfunktion / Protective conductor function /
Fonctionnement du conducteur de protection / Función del Sc
conductor de protector Alw
Nach Spulenmontage immer prü- con
fen! flow Ra
Always test function after assembly of d cas
tion ida
of coil! irec nque tec
/ D ta
Toujours vérifier après montage de ng t / Es Co
htu
la bobine! ric men de
¡Tras el montaje de bobina hfluß oule tier
rc c
pruébese siempre la function¡ Du s d’é
n
se
Widerstand Prüfspannung Prüfstrom Rohrleitungen reinigen
resistance test voltage test current Cleaning the piperuns
résistance tension d’essai courant d’essai Nettoyer les conduites
intensidad tensión de prueba corriente de prueba
Limpieza tuberías
max. 0,1 Ω 12 V 1A
Operating Instructions 0512/13_EU-ML_00803312 12/05/1'M
Montage Montage Störungen Ersatzteile
sembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Troubleshooting / Dérangements / Averías Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza
e beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Abdichtung Einschrauben der Rohrleitungen / Screwing in the pipe Spannung und Stromart prüfen!
age quelconque / Sentido de montaje Seal connections Check the voltage and type of current!
al Etanchéification Vissage les conduites / Averías las tuberías Vérifier la tension et le genre de courant! Spulensatz
tung Atornillado Comprobar tensión y clase de corriente!
rection Coil kit
préférentielle PTFE
lodo
Jeu de bobines
Juego de bobina
Druck prüfen! / Check the pressure! Verschleißteilsatz

Vérifier la pression! / Comprobar presión!
änger Set of Wearing Parts
Normeinschraubtiefe nicht überschreiten!
r d’impuretés Do not exceed standard screw-in depth! Jeu de pièces d'usure
e paso Gerätesteckdose / Instrument socket / Connecteur / Caja de Ne pas dépasser la profondeur filetée
enchufe para aparatos eléctricos normalisée!
Juego del piazas de cierre
¡No sobrepasar la profundidad de
Schutzleiter immer anschließen! roscado normalizada!
bar, psi, kPa
Always connect the protective Dichtung
conductor! Seal
flow Raccordez dans tous les Joint d'étanchéité
of d cas le conducteur de pro-
tion ida Sellado Rohrleitungen prüfen! / Check the piperun!
irec nque tection!
/ D ta Vérifier les conduites! / Comprobar tuberías! Dichtungssatz
ng t / Es Conectar en todo caso el conductor
htu
ric men de puesta a
hfluß oule tierra!
1 Nm
Set of Seals
rc c
Du s d’é
n
se
Jeu de joints
ngen reinigen
the piperuns Juego de estanqueidad
es conduites
tuberías Type 2508
Ersatzteile Ersatzteile Ersatzteile
Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts/Pièces de rechange/Pieza de repuesto
Spannung Leistung Id-Nr. D ich tw erksto ff Id -N r.

Nennw eite
Voltage Power Id. No. Sealing m aterial Id . N o.
No m in al diam eter
M atière de jo int N o cd e .
Tension Puissance No cde. D iam ètre nom inal
Spulensatz M aterial de No de
Tensión Potencia No de pedito A n ch ura no m in al
estan queidad p edito
[V] [W]
Coil kit N BR 645 561 A
Europa, 024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Europe 13 - 65 FK M 645 562 B
Jeu de bobines
024 / 56 8 645 556 D E P DM 645 563 C
Juego de bobina 110 / 56 8 645 557 E

NBR 624 012 J
230 / 56 8 645 558 P 13 FKM 624 013 K
N.A.F.T.A. EPDM 624 014 L

024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Verschleißteilsatz NBR 624 015 M
024 / 56 8 645 556 D 20 FKM 624 016 N
Set of Wearing Parts EPDM 624 017 P
120 / 60 8 643 802 B
NBR 624 018 Y
Jeu de pièces d'usure 240 / 60 8 643 803 C
25 FKM 624 019 Z
Juego del piazas de cierre A.P.A.C. 024 / DC 8 126 434 R EPDM 624 020 W
024 / 56 8 645 556 D NBR 624 021 K
32, 40 FKM 624 022 L

100 / 56 8 645 559 Q
EPDM 624 023 M
110 / 56 8 645 557 E NBR 624 024 N
Dichtungssatz
200 / 56 8 645 560 M 50 FKM 624 025 P
Set of Seals
EPDM 624 026 Q
230 / 56 8 645 558 P
Jeu de joints Lors de la commande de pièces de rechange, indiquez, en
Bitte geben Sie bei der Bestellung von Verschleißteilen zusätz- plus de leur numéro de commande, celui de commande de
Juego de estanqueidad lich zur Bestellnummer der Ersatzteile auch die Bestellnummer votre appareil complet.
Typ 5281
Ihres Komplettgerätes an. Con ocasión del pedido de las pieza de repuesto, rogamos
When ordering spare parts, please also quote the order number indicar además del número de pedido de la pieza de
of your complete appliance in addition to the order number of the requesto también el número de pedido de su aparato
replacement parts. completo.
- Product information -
Solenoid valve block for water distribution Project 10168
Multi-valve block with adjustment and display of the output pressure
TECHNICAL DATA
Materials Valves Type 5281, DN13
Valve block Brass (alternative: Cv-value valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
brass, nickel-plated) Operating voltage 24 V DC (alternative: 120 V AC)
Coil jacket PA Voltage tolerance 10 %
Armature guide tube Stainless steel Nominal power 8 W per valve
Seal material EPDM / (alternative Nominal operating Long-term operation;
FKM) mode duty cycle 100 %
Medium Water Electrical connection Plug tabs DIN 43650 A
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C with pre-wired device
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C sockets incl. 1.6 m of cable
Medium feed pressure max. 10 bar Degree of protection IP 65 with device socket
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar Special feature Manually actuated valves
Operating range 1 to 6 bar Filter sieve 0.25 mm stainless steel
Connections Block fixing with 2 screws M8x50
Input E G 3/4 internal thread through housing drill holes
Output A1 M22x1.5; external Installation position of any, preferably drives at top
Output A2 M14x1.5; external block
A
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
A differential pressure of 0.5 bar is required to open the full valve cross section.
The minimum pressure at the system input is 1 bar.
OF VALVE
A 2/2-way valve, pilot-operated,
normally closed
DIMENSIONS [MM]
DESCRIPTION
The valve block consists of a brass
block, two or three valves of Type
Front view 5281 with manual actuation, a pres-
sure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) and a pressure gauge.
Valve V 1 is used as a safety valve at
the inlet and - if present - directs the
medium to the pressure controller.
Otherwise, the valve position is
sealed by a cover plate. Ball valve,
tube and dirt trap form a module that
can be rotated through 180° when
necessary, enabling medium feed
from the opposite side.
The valve seats are integrated in the
block. The block operates so that the
same respective water flow is applied
to each valve output in parallel opera-
tion. The water volumes flowing
through the valves can be adjusted
Rear view
via the set-point of the pressure con-
troller. The pressure gauge indicates
the set pressure.
The block is fixed in place with 2 hex-
agonal socket head screws via the
drill holes in the valve block.
Legend
V1 optional cover plate or safety valve (solenoid valve Type 5281, DN13);
the double block with cover plate is presented in the graphic
V2, V3 dosing valves
VS lock screw for sieve
SW7 external hex. screw (SW7 - wrench size 7) for setting the pressure set-point value
Ordering table water distributor

Housing material Seal material Voltage Number of valves EEx Order no.
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 175 777 Fixing
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 yes 183 535 screws 2 x M8x50
Brass FKM 24 V DC 2 no 187 621
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 3 no 200 670
Brass, nickel-plated EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 230 044
Brass EPDM 120 V AC 2 no 235 122
FLUID CONTROL SYSTEM
PI-10168_EN_2014-06-11.docx/bi/11/06/2014 Technical changes reserved

TFU006
Pressure regulator for water
• Brass version with DIN DVGW and international

drinking water approvals
• Stainless steel version with DIN DVGW-Approval
• Plastic compact version
• Pressure gauge connection at pressure output
The water pressure regulator works according Technical data – Version I

to the principle of pressure reduction. It is pref-
Body material EN 12165 CW602N
erably for use in the provided water systems.
Seal material NBR
The pressure regulator consists of a housing,
Diaphragm NBR
a piston or diaphragm valve with an adjustable
Valve type Single seat valve, relieved
spring and spring cap.
The inlet pressure reaches the target value, Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
opens the piston or the diaphragm against Pressure gauge connection G 1/4 (without pressure gauge)
the spring force of the control valve and the Port connections 1/2" to 2" (threaded male)
built-up output pressure. The output pressure Medium temperature +60 °C
is the controlled variable. When exceeding the Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
nominal value the valve closes, when there is Outlet pressure 1–6 bar1)
a shortfall the valve opens and thus the output Default setting 3 bar1)
pressure is kept almost constant. Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
By changing the spring tension, the spring Set-
Noise class II <30
point can be continuously adjusted.
Mounting place if possible directly behind the counter
Installation horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
Observe flow direction!
The pressure regulator is available in 3 versions:
Approvals
Version I:
Brass housing with DIN DVGW and
international drinking water approvals 1)
Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
Version II:
Stainless steel case with DIN DVGW approval
Version III:
with plastic housing
Union connection G 1/8 "and G 1/4"
www.burkert.com p. 1/4
TFU006
Technical data – Version II

Body material Brass DZR
EN 12165 CW602N
Seal material NBR
Diaphragm NBR
Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
Pressure gauge connection G 1/4 (without pressure gauge)
Port connections 1/2" to 1" (threaded male)
Medium temperature +40 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1–6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
Noise class II <30
Installation horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
Approvals
Technical data – Version III

Body material Stainless steel 1.4305
Seal material NBR
Diaphragm NBR
Material valve seat Stainless steel
Material strainer bowl Stainless steel
Pressure gauge connection both ways 1/4" (without pressure gauge)
Port connections 1/2" to 2" (threaded male)
Medium temperature +70 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1,5–6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
Noise class II <30
Installation in horizontal direction, strainer bowl downwards
Approvals
Technical data – Version IV

(plastic body, with threaded ports G 1/8 and G 1/4)
Body material Technopolymer
Threaded port Brass
Special roller diaphragm NBR
Medium water
Medium temperature max. +50 °C
Pressure gauge connection G 1/8 (without pressure gauge)
Port connections Threaded port G 1/8 or G 1/4
Inlet pressure max. 13 bar1)
Outlet pressure 0–4 bar1)
(continuously adjustable) 0–8 bar1)
0–12 bar1)
Setpoint adjustment only ascending pressure, screw can be locked
Installation As required, preferably controller handle upright.
Approvals None
1)
Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
p. 2/4
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water

Version I AUBE
¯ (
Port con-
nections
Item no.
Ø Cover
D (inch)
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
A
&
1/2 140.00 76.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 1.27 788 439
3/4 160.00 90.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 2.27 788 440
1 180.00 95.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 3.60 788 441
$
1 1/4 200.00 110.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 5.80 788 442
%
1 1/2 220.00 120.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 9.10 788 443
"
2 250.00 130.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 14.00 788 444
!
The pressure regulator version I have a

pressure gauge G 1/4 for measuring the
output pressure.
Delivered without pressure gauge.
Version II
E
Port con-
Delivered without
nections
Item no.
A (inch)
[m3/h]
pressure gauge.
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
G
D
B
1/2 169.00 86.50 100.50 54.00 58.00 1.27 771 130
D
3/4 180.00 89.00 98.00 54.00 58.00 2.27 770 991
1 205.00 88.50 99.50 54.00 58.00 3.60 770 992
A
C
F
Spare parts Version I and II B
Item no.
Spare
parts
Cartridge for 1/2" 771 847

Cartridge for 3/4" 771 847
Cartridge for 1" 771 848
Cartridge for 1 1/4" 771 849
Cartridge for 1 1/2" 771 850
Cartridge for 2" 770 243
Tool for filter case 771 851
Filter for 771 852
Version II
Filter case for 771 853
Version II Cartridge Filter Filter case
p. 3/4
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water (continued)

Version III
Port con-
Item no.
R (inch)
nection
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
H
Kvs
H
H
A
B
1/2 140.00 80.00 89.00 58.00 2.40 770 977
3/4 160.00 90.00 89.00 58.00 3.10 771 854
R "
1 180.00 100.00 111.00 64.00 5.80 771 855
1 1/4 200.00 105.00 111.00 64.00 5.90 771 856
h
1 1/2 225.00 130.00 173.00 126.00 12.60 771 857
2 255.00 140.00 173.00 126.00 12.00 771 858
B
Spare parts Version III

Spare parts
Item no.
Valve insert 772 210

1/2" and 3/4"
1" and 1 1/4"
1 1/2" and 2"
Replacement strainer 772 213
1/2" and 3/4"
1" and 1 1/4"
1 1/2" and 2"
Tool for releasing 772 217
Version IV
(plastic body, with threaded ports G 1/8 and G 1/4)
X
operating
threaded
pressure
Item no.
[bar] 1)
port
LTA
G 1/8 0–4 783 256

0–8 783 257
0–12 783 258

G 1/4 0–4 783 259

0–8 783 260
0–12 783 261

The pressure regulator version III have a

1)
Pressure values [bar]: Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure pressure gauge G 1/8 for measuring the

output pressure.
To find your nearest Bürkert office, click on the orange box www.burkert.com
In case of special application conditions, Subject to alterations

please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG 1503/3_EU-en_00895122
p. 4/4
Hydraulic characteristics
1 Flow velocity diagram
The steps to take for selecting the correct size are as follows:
V (m/s)
5 · The total flow rate is calculated from the number and type
4 of appliances present by taking the sum of the individual
3 flow rates.
2
Example:
1
One living unit with 1 bathroom
1 bidet G = 6 l/min
1/2” 3/4” 1 shower G = 9 l/min
0,5
1 wash basin G = 6 l/min
0,4
1 wc with cistern G = 6 l/min
0,3
1 kitchen sink G = 12 l/min
0,2 1 washing machine G = 12 l/min
Gtot = 51 l/min
0,1
No appliances = 6
0,2
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
5
10
20
50
100
· The design flow rate is calculated from the table of

coefficients of simultaneity (using that for 10 appliances).
2 Pressure drop diagram
∆p (bar) ∆p (m w.g.) Example:
1,5 15
1,2 12 Gds = Gtot · % = 51 · 41 % = 21 l/min

1 10
0,9 9
0,8 8
0,7 7
0,6 6 It is recommended that flow velocity is kept within 1 to 2
0,5 5
metres per second when calculating the correct reducer
0,4 4
1/2” 3/4”
size. This will prevent noise in the pipes and rapid wear of
0,3 3 appliances.
0,2 2 · The correct diameter of the reducing valve is taken from

diagram 1 on the basis of the design flow rate taking into
account an ideal flow velocity of between 1 and 2 m/s
0,1 1 (blue band).
0,2
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
Example:
5
10
20
50
100
for Gds = 21 l/min select diameter 1/2”

Under the following conditions Inlet pressure = 6 bar
(see indications on diagram 1)
Outlet pressure = 4 bar
· The pressure drop is taken from diagram 2 again on the

Sizing the valve basis of where the design flow rate intersects the curve for
the relative diameter already selected (the downstream
The flow rates of commonly used appliances in domestic pressure falls by an amount equal to the pressure drop, with
plumbing systems are given below to assist in the selection respect to the set pressure at no flow condition).
of the correct valve diameter:
Table of typical flow rates Example:
Bath tub, kitchen sink, dishwashing machine 12 l/min for Gds = 21 l/min 1/2” ∆p = 0,8 bar
Shower 9 l/min (see indications on diagram 2)
Wash basin, bidet, washing machine, w.c. with cistern 6 l/min
Recommended flow rates

The coefficient of simultaneous use must be taken into
For an average flow velocity of 1,5 m/s, the recommended
consideration to avoid selecting a valve that is too large.
flow rates for each diameter are as follows:
Basically the fewer the people using the system the lower the
probability will be of two appliances being used at the same
time. Diameter 1/2” Ø 15 3/4” Ø 22
Flow rate m3/h 1,2 1,2 2,1 2,1
Table showing simultaneos-use factor as % Flow rate l/min 20 20 35 35
Number of Residential Community Number of Residential Community Number of Residential Community
appliances appliances appliances
5 54 64,5 35 23,2 30 80 16,5 22

10 41 49,5 40 21,5 28 90 16 21,5
15 35 43,5 45 20,5 27 100 15,5 20,5
20 29 37 50 19,5 26 150 14 18,5
25 27,5 34,5 60 18 24 200 13 17,5
30 24,5 32 70 17 23 300 12,5 16,5
Intended use
The user must comply with the information in these operating instruc- Safety instructions
tions to ensure that the device functions perfectly and safely and has  Do not operate the block without first releasing the manual con-
a long service life and must observe the operating conditions and trols of the valves, otherwise the coils may burn out!
permitted data according to the data sheet and rating plate. The gen-  Never exceed the maximum media input pressure; otherwise
eral rules of technology must be observed for application planning and there is a danger of bursting!
operation of the device. Unintentional actuation or unacceptable im-  Do not install the valve block in a twisted position, as this may
pairments must be prevented by taking suitable measures. result in mechanical stress and impairment of the block function!
 Observe the specified screw tightening torques when changing
Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may work spare parts.
on the block.  Caution risk of hot surfaces! The solenoid drives may become
very hot during prolonged operation.
Operating principle of the single valves
Electrical connection
A 2/2-way solenoid valve,  The electrical connection is made with device sockets using pre-
pilot-controlled, assembled cables (cable length 1.60 m).
A closed when de-energized (NC)  Make the correct connections and carefully connect the ground
wires.
 Ensure that the flat seal is correctly fitted between the coil and
Structure device socket! The tightening torque for fastening screws of the
The valve block consists of a brass block, two or three valves of Type device socket is 1 Nm.
5281 with manual control, a pressure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) as well as a pressure gauge. Valve V1 is used – if fitted - Start-up/pressure setting
as a safety valve at the input and conveys the medium into the pres-  Before starting up the electrical system, release all manual con-
sure controller. Ball valve, hose and dirt trap form one module which trols on the valves.
can be rotated by 180° if required and therefore allows media connec-  Build up the media pressure. During the initial start-up the pres-
tion from the opposite side. sure gauge indicates 6 bar (factory setting).
The valve seats are integrated in the block. The block operates in  Set the required pressure using the set-point value screw A/F7
such a way that each valve output is supplied in parallel operation with on the pressure controller. The set pressure is indicated on the
the same water current. The volume of water flowing through the pressure gauge.
valves can be adjusted using the set-point value of the pressure con-  Apply the operating voltage and start the process.
troller. The pressure gauge indicates the set pressure.
If faults occur
Technical data  Check electrical connections, operating voltage, wire connec-
Also observe the specifications on the rating plate! tions, operating pressure and installation and rectify any errors.
Medium Water  If the valve still does not switch, please contact your Bürkert
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C Service representative.
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C
Operating voltage of valves 24 V DC
Nominal power of valves 8 W per valve Components / wire connections
Orifice of valves DN 13
Media input pressure max. 10 bar
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar
Kv value water valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
Housing and seal materials

Valve block Brass
Coil jacket Polyamide
Core guide pipe Stainless steel
Seal material EPDM / alternatively FKM
Line connections Input E: G 3/4; inside
Output A1: M22x1.5; outside
Output A2: M14x1.5; outside
Installation
 Check that the operating conditions comply with the performance
data of the block! E G 3/4; inside SW7 hexagon head A/F7
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de- A1 M22x1.5; outside for setting the
energized and depressurized! A2 M14x1.5; outside set-point pressure
 Before installing the block, clean the line connections and the V1 optional cover plate value
ends of the hose! or safety valve MS 2 mounting screws
(cover plate here) M8x50 with 6 mm
 The installation position is freely selectable.
Recommendation: Solenoid drives of the dosing valves face up. V2, V3 dosing valves Hexagon socket
VS lock screw
 Attach the block by screwing two hexagonal socket head screws
for sieve
M8x50 through the designated 9 mm holes.
 Connect the outputs. Ensure that the connection points are tight.
Caution! Bürkert Werke GmbH Bürkert Werke GmbH

To open the full valve cross-section, a differential pressure of 0.5 bar Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17 Christian-Bürkert-Str. 2
is required. The minimum pressure at the system input is D 74653 Ingelfingen D 01900 Großröhrsdorf
1 bar. Tel. +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-111 Tel. +49 (0)5952 / 36-300
Fax +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-448 Fax +49 (0)5952 / 36-551
info@de.buerkert.com info@de.buerkert.com
http://www.buerkert.com http://www.buerkert.com
BA-10168_EN_01_2015-06-25.docx/bi Page 1 of 3
Spare parts
Item Designation Order no.  Check the O-ring (22x2.5 mm) for damage. An undamaged O-
1 Pressure controller installation set 788 692 ring can be reused. A defective O-ring must be replaced (see
2 Ball valve G 3/4 inside/inside 781 755 spare parts).
3 Pressure gauge 787 035  Moisten the O-ring before installation and ensure that the O-ring
4 Filter sieve VA; 0.25 mm 788 812 is fitted properly during installation.
5.1 O-ring on filter lock screw – EPDM 9353 4827 Caution! Do not use any oil or grease!
5.2 O-ring on filter lock screw – FKM 902 478  Place the sieve unit - now offset by 180° - on the housing so that
6.1 O-ring on sieve unit – EPDM 786 525 the locking pin fits into the guide hole in the housing.
6.2 O-ring on sieve unit – FKM 790 667  Fix the sieve unit using the 2 fastening screws and washers.
7.1 Coil set 126 434  Tighten the fastening screws (see figure for “torques”).
7.2 Coil set – EEx 133 547  Reconnect the pressure and power.
8.1 Valve actuator – EPDM 145 458
8.2 Valve actuator – FKM 143 574 Sieve unit:
9.1 Wearing parts set – EPDM 624 014
9.2 Wearing parts set – FKM 624 019
10.1 Core, complete – EPDM 631 964
10.2 Core, complete – FKM 606 396
11 Device socket, assembled for V3 786 346
14 Both ends of hose fitted with union nut M30x2 786 122
Locking pin in first hole
Conversion and repair work (ex works)
Safety instructions second hole for locking pin (for 180° rotation)
 Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may
work on the block.
 Before starting work, order the required spare parts according to Changing the filter sieve (see figure of valve block 2)
the order table. If the filter sieve is very dirty, it should be cleaned or changed.
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de-
energized and depressurized! Valve block 2:
Rotating the sieve unit by 180° (conversion)

If required, the sieve unit can be rotated by 180° so that the input ball
valve is offset from the factory setting by exactly 180° (see diagram of
valve block 1).
 De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Loosen both fastening screws on the sieve unit (hexagon socket
5 mm).
 Remove the sieve unit from the locking pin (pin is tight, therefore
a little stiff).
 Remove the locking pin form the first guide hole in the sieve unit
(see figure of the “sieve unit”).
 Insert the locking pin into the second guide hole in the sieve unit.
Valve block 1:
Copper collar on the sieve O-ring Lock screw
 Have a new filter sieve ready.

 Loosen the lock screw on the filter unit (A/F 22).
 Remove the filter sieve.
 Assess whether the sieve should be cleaned or replaced.
 Re-insert the cleaned or new sieve in the correct position (cop-
per collar inwards).
 Screw the lock screw hand-tight to form a good seal. The O-ring
on the lock screw acts as the sealing element.
 Reconnect the pressure and power.
Fastening screws on the

sieve unit
(Hexagon socket 5 mm)
Locking pin O-ring
Changing the pressure gauge and ball valve Changing a pilot control diaphragm in the valve
The pressure gauge and the manual ball valve are screwed in with (see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
thread sealant (Loctite 542 or 577). The diaphragm is an important element for pilot control of the valve.
 Use the square head or hexagon head on the components to The diaphragm is subject to natural wear.
screw them out and in. Change the diaphragm as follows.
 Before screwing in the parts, place a little Loctite 542 or 577 on  Have a new diaphragm ready.
the thread and screw in the parts to form a good seal.  De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Mark the mounting position of the actuator with respect to the
housing.
Spare parts sets for the valve Type 5281  Loosen the fastening screws (tool Tx20) between actuator and
housing.
 Remove the valve actuator.
 Note the installation position and remove the diaphragm.
 If required, clean the valve housing.
Coil set  Insert the new diaphragm into the housing collar in the correct
SET1 position so that the middle plate of the diaphragm with the larger
diameter is visible.
 Place the valve actuator in the correct position.
 Attach the actuator and tighten the 4 screws crosswise (see
figure for “torques”).
Valve actuator
Screw tightening torques:
Core, complete
Wearing parts set

SET3
(parts list changed for
DN13
Changing a valve core

(see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
A complete core set consists of an iron core with a seal and a spring.
In particular, the valve seal is subject to natural wear. If a closed valve
is leaking, the core should be changed as follows.
 Have a new complete core ready.
 Loosen the fastening screw on the device socket and remove
the device socket.
 Loosen the fastening nut on the coil (A/F 14) and remove the
coil.
 Remove the plastic cover.
 Loosen the 4 fastening screws (tool Tx20). Note the local as-
signment of the screws which vary in length.
 Remove the core feed pipe upwards and use your other hand to
prevent the core from falling.
 If required, clean the inner parts of the valve.
 Insert the new core into the cleaned core feed pipe so that the
seat seal is visible.
 Place the core with the core feed pipe in the correct position on
the valve seat and hold the components with one hand.
 With the other hand, attach the core feed pipe using the fas-
tening screws. In doing so, ensure that the long and short fas-
tening screws are in the correct position.
 Tighten the fastening screws crosswise (see figure for “torques”).
 Attach the plastic cover so that one of the recesses is located
above the manual control.
 Place the coil in the correct position. Ensure that the coil locks
every 90° and can otherwise be placed in any position.
 Screw the fastening nut onto the coil (see figure for “torques”).
Original Operating Manual
Spill Valves
UV

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen · Telefon (05731) 7900-0 · Telefax (05731) 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
Impressum
© by END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied or published by means of printing,
photocopying, microfilm or otherwise without prior written consent of
END-Automation GmbH & Co.KG. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings.
END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG has the right to change parts of the valves at any time without
prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without
notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG
cannot be held responsible, either for any errors occurring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance of the properties is given.
END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG

Oberbecksener Straße 78
Telefon: 05731 / 7901 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7901 - 999
Internet: http://www.end.de
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 09/2012
The right is reserved to change designs and devices.
2 http://www.end.de UV - 09.2012
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 5
2 General advice 6
2.1 Validity 6
2.2 Inward monitoring 6
2.3 Complaints 6
2.4 Guarantee 6
2.5 Symbols and their Signification 7
3 Safety advice 8
3.1. Personal protection 8
3.1.1. Safety advice for mounting 8
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment and starting 9
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 9
3.2 Device safety 10
4 Name-plate 11
5 Spill Valves 12
5.1 General 12
5.2 Corresponding use 12
5.3 Operating 12
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly 13
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connections 13
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 14
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the spill valve 14
5.4.2.2 Welding of the body between two pipes 14
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the spring bonnet 15
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection 16
5.5 Maintenance 17
6 Index 18
UV - 09.2012 http://www.end.de 3
Contens
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge which is neces-
sary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the spill valve rapidly and
correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the spill vales.
If you have any questions in relation to the spill valves, we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
General Advice
2 General advice
2.1 Validity
These mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard version of the spill valve.
2.2 Inward monitoring
Please check
- directly after delivery the spill valve for any transport damages and
deficiencies
- with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
Do not leave any parts in the package.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement of goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage/repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
In case of return, please mention the following:

• Name and address of the consignee
• Stock-/ordering-/article-number
• Description of the defect
2.4 Guarantee
For our spill valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with the sales contract.
The warrenty and guarantee rules of END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
Symbols and their Signification
2.5 Symbols and their Signification
advices for averting health risks.
Observe these paragraphs without fail!
how to avoid damage to property.
Observe these paragraphs without fail!
This symbol indicates paragraphs which contain comments/advice or tips.
This bullet identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
Safety Advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the spill valve is
mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must in each case take into account particular safety
aspects!
If, for example, the spill valve works in an operational chemical plant, the potential hazards of com-
missioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for test purposes
an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room.
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning,

you may find advice on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevant to you .
Please observe (only) the advice which applies to your situation!
The spill valve must not be put into service until the final machinery into which it is to be incorpo-
rated has been declared in conformity with the provisions of the Directive 2006/42/EC on machin-
ery, where appropriate.
3.1. Personal protection
3.1.1. Safety advice for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, the electrical installation and the adjustment
of the spill valve and the accessories must be carried out only by trained specialist personnel
having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the spill valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform the
shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in order, for
example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time by
means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repair, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant.
Emty the conduit from medium.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!!
Safety advice
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment and starting
As a result of the starting of the spill valve the flow of gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled
or interrupted!
Satisfy yourself that, as the result of the starting or the test adjustments of the spill valve, no
potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the environment!
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the devices / machines / plant.
By ending mounting check the correct function and the tightness of the valve.
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency off push buttons / safety
valves, etc. )!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the spill valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling a spill vale some essential points should be clarified!

• Will the spill valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassmbly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
If necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the pressure
reducer is mounted
• the switching on of pilot medium supply, pilot power supply and/or the power supply
of actuators and accessories.
In case of defect in the pressure reducer make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will
be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
If you ascertain a damage of the pressure reducer, isolate the device from the mains. Please
observe the safefy advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the pressure reducer if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will
be damaged.
Device Safety
3.2 Device safety
The spill valves

• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the spill valve will only be used within their admissible limiting value (see
the technical data) .
The spill valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The spill valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the spill valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the sealings
and the bearings.
The operating of the spill valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner parts
and the body.
Never remove a cap or a other component part if the spill valve will be under pressure.
Do not mount, start or adjust the spill valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be dam-
aged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the spill vavle and the tightness of the
pipe connections.
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
The spill valves will be provided with a name-plate, which permits a definite identification of the spill valves and
shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be displaced or changed.

+49 (0)5731 - 7901-0 www.end.de
Art.Nr.: UV330127
Serial: 107527/10206
Pressure range (PS): 0,3 - 1,5 bar
Pilot pressure: ---- G/DN: 1/2"
Fluidgroup: 1
Temperature (TS): -30°C to +140°C
Testing pressure (PT): 60 bar
Date of manufacturing: 44/2010 0062
Fig. 4.1 - Name plate - example
Art.Nr. Article number of the spill valve

Serie Order- or production number
Betriebsdruck (PS) nominal pressure of the spill valve [bar]
Steuerdruck ---
Temperatur (TS) max. temperature range
Größe (DN) connection size
Prüfdruck (PT) testing pressure
Fluidgruppe allowed fluid group
Herstellung date of manufacturing
Spill Valves
5 Spill Valves
5.1 General
Before mounting /disassembly the spill valve we assume that you have read the advices and
warnings from chapter 3.
safety advice
If you have not read chapter 3. until now, read these important advices now and turn back to this
page..
5.2 Corresponding use
Spill valves open autmatically when the pressure inside the valve exceeds the adjusted blow-off
pressure. When the pressure inside the valve falls short of the blow-off pressure the spill valve
closes by spring force.
Spill Valves are no „ equipment part with safety function“ as defined at Art.1 of the European
Directive 97/23/EC
It should only be used clean fluids without doubts concerning the material resistance of the spill
valve. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and / or the nominal temperature range
should causes damages on the spill valve especially on the seat.
5.3 Operating
The adjustment of the blow-off pressure takes place by turning the adjustment screw. Before turn-
ing the adjustment screw the counter nut must be detached.
Increase of the blow-off pressure:

Turn the adjustment screw clockwise until the desired blow-off pressure will be reached.
Decrease of the blow-off pressure:

Turn the adjustment screw anti-clockwise until the desired blow-off pressure will be reached.
After the adjustment of the blow off pressure tighten the counter nut again. With the counter nut
you can prevent the unintentional distort of the adjustment screw.
decrease
blow-off pressure
increase
blow-offf pressure
Fig. 5.1 - spill valve, adjustment of the blow-off pressure (Fig.: Art. UV330125)
Spill Valves
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly
The mechanical installation are the same at all variants. If differs by the type of connection only.
Consider the flow direction of the medium, specified on the body of the spill valve.
The position of installation will be as you desired, the installation in vertical pipes with standing up
spring bonnet is preferred.
Before mounting the spill valve clean up the pipes
Avoid strains on the body by non align pipes.
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connections
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing of the pipes into the body of the spill
valve.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp sealings
consider the screw direction. Don´t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Screw the pipes into the threaded ends of the spill valve. Don´t use the bonnet of the spring as a
lever.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends for harden it.
Check the tightness af all connections.
sealing compound
harden !
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.2 - spill valve, mounting with threaded connection (Fig.: Art. UV330125)
Spill Valves
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection
By welding the spill valve between two pipes you have to disassemble the spill valve first to
prevent the damage of the sealings.
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the spill valve
Clamp the spill valve between a vice carefully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage
of the ends of the body.
Before disassembling the spill valve you have to release the spring to prevent the fly around of
pieces. Heavy injuries of persons or damages of the pieces would be the result,
Turn the adjusting screw anti-clockwise until the spring will be totally released.
Loosen the spring bonnet with a fit spanner. Put on the spanner ot the screw joint.
Screw out the spring bonnet out of the body ot the spill valve and take it by side carefully. Place
marks on the body of the spill valves and the spring bonnet, that you will be able to join the correct
parts by a subsequent mounting of the spill valve
5.4.2.2 Welding of the body between two pipes
By welding the body of the spill valves with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide
lines.
spring force
Fig. 5.3 - spill valves, disassembly of the sping bonnet (Fig.: Art. UV330164)
Spill Valves
The safety demands by welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts at a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate, inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager and the fire
brigade of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and prevention of accidents.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - spill valves, welding of the body between two pipes (Fig.: body of Art. UV330164)
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the spring bonnet
Before mounting the spring bonnet let the body of spill valve cool down.
The mounting of the spill valve takes place just the other way round to the disassembly ot the spill
valve.
Take care about the correct placement of the sealings and that there will be no pollution on the
sealings and the seat.
After mounting check the correct function of the spill valve.
Spill Valves
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection
We assume, that you have mounted the flanges at the end of pipes and they are cooled down.
(e.g. welded flanges).
Push the body of the spill valve between the flanges by using the appropriate sealings.
Aligns the flange borings and put the fit screws through the holes.
Screw the fit nuts onto the screws and tighten it up crosswise. By doing this consider the maximum
torque of the screws.
Check the tightness af all connections.
cool down!
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.5 - spill valve, mounting with flanged connection (Fig.: Art. UV330104)
Spill Valves
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the spill valve you have to read
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read these important advices now and turn
back to this page.
On normal accounts the spill valve is maintenance free. In periodical turns you have to:
• Check the right function of the spill valve

• Check the adjusting of the setpressure
In case of a defect of the spill valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you determinate that there is a demage to the spill valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
Index
6 Index
B O
Blow-off pressure, decrease of........................12 Operating..............................................................12
Blow-off pressure, increase of.........................12
P
C Personal protection..............................................8
Complaints.............................................................6 Position of installation........................................13
Corresponding use.............................................12 Pressure, nominal...............................................11
D S
Device safety.......................................................10 Safefy advice.........................................................8
Directive 97/23/EC...............................................12 Safety advice for adjustment and starting........9
Directive 2006/42/EC on machinery....................8 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing..........9
Disassembly of the spill valve...........................14 Safety advice for mounting.................................8
Spring force.........................................................14
E Symbols and their Signification..........................7
Equipment part with safety function................12
T
F Temperature range.............................................11
Flow direction......................................................13 Testing pressure.................................................11
Fluid group, allowed...........................................11
Foreword................................................................5 V
Validity....................................................................6
G
General advice......................................................6 W
Guarantee..............................................................6 Welding of the body between two pipes........14
I
Impressum.............................................................2
Inward monitoring................................................6
M
Maintenance.......................................................17
Manufacturing, date of......................................11
Mounting / Disassembly....................................13
Mounting of the sping bonnet...........................15
Mounting with flanged connection..................16
Mounting with threaded connections.............13
Mounting with welded connection..................14
N
Name-plate..........................................................11
Notes
watergates
knife-gate-valves - Stoffschieber
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG

Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauges
Stainless Steel Case, Crimped-on Ring, Accuracy Class 1.6 Nom. Size 63 (2½") Model RgG
Glycerine Filled
Application
For fluid and gaseous media (non-corrosive to brass and bronze),
which are not highly viscous and do not tend to polymerize
Nominal Case Size

63 (2½")
Accuracy Class (EN 837-1)

1.6 ( i.e. accuracy error max. + 1.6% of full scale value)
Pressure Ranges (EN 837-1)

0 ... 1 to 0 ... 600 bar 1)
also vacuum and compound ranges
Pressure Limitations
Steady pressure: 75% of full scale value
Cyclic pressure: 65% of full scale value
Temporary: full scale value
How to Order:
For ordering gauges from stock1) simply state the ordering number
Temperature Limitations as follows:
Ambient temperature: -20 / +60 °C (-4 / +140 °F) Bottom connection Center back
Pressure ranges
Medium temperature: max. +60 °C (+140 °F) connection
bar Ordering number (stock):
Further information about advantages, applications, specifications, temperature
limitations and pressure ranges of Bourdon tube pressure gauges, accuracy classes -1-0 L-631002 L-631102
1.0 and 1.6 according to EN, can be found in our model overview 1000
-1/+3 L-631005
0-4 L-631013 L-631113
Standard Configuration 0-6 L-631014 L-631114
Process Connection 0-10 L-631015 L-631115
G ¼ B (¼" BSP) bottom connection brass
0-16 L-631016 L-631116
Bourdon Tube 0-25 L-631017 L-631117
• up to 40 bar = bronze, C-form, soft soldered
0-40 L-631018 L-631118
• 60 bar and up = bronze, helical, silver brazed
0-60 L-631019 L-631119
Movement 0-100 L-631020 L-631120
Brass / German silver
0-160 L-631021 L-631121
Dial 0-250 L-631022 L-631122
Aluminum alloy, black figures, white background 0-400 L-631023 L-631123
Pointer 0-600 L-631024 L-631124

Aluminum alloy black Pressure gauges with center back connection (L-6311..) can be
ordered optionally with front flange (Fr) or U-clamp (BFr).
Case and Ring
Stainless steel, ring crimped-on Ordering Examples: 35 x L-631022
20 x L-631102, Fr
Filling Liquid To avoid mistakes it will be helpful to give a short description of the
Glycerine instrument (model, nom. size, case configuration, pressure range),
especially for special versions resp. instruments not available from
Window stock:
Polycarbonate
Model, nom. size, ordering
no. for wetted partes: RgG 63–1
Code letters for
Optional Special Configurations ase configuration: rm, rmFr, rmBFr
• ¼" 1
Other process connections (G / B resp. / BSP ,
NPT), minimum order quantity 10 pieces
8
1
8
1
/8 " NPT, (see reverse side) without code letter = bottom connection
Pressure range: according to EN 837-1,
• Front flange for versions with center back connection e.g. -1-0, 0-6 or 0-160 bar
Options: see left, e.g. ¼" NPT connection
• U-clamp for versions with center back connection (Minimum ordering quantity!)
1)
Examples for Ordering Information:
Pressure ranges -1/0 and 0/4 to 0/600 bar are available from stock (without
obligation). For all the other pressure ranges a minimum order quantity of 10 •50 x RgG 63–1, 0-2.5 bar 1)
pieces and the actual delivery time has to be considered. •50 x RgG 63–1 rmFr, 0-160 bar, ¼" NPT 1)
Subsidiary Company and Sales East Germany and Eastern Europe
ARMATURENBAU GmbH MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH 1112

Manometerstraße 5 • D-46487 Wesel - Ginderich Am Gewerbepark 9 • D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Phone: (0 28 03) 91 30–0 • Fax: (0 28 03) 10 35
armaturenbau.com • mail@armaturenbau.com
Phone: (0 37 74) 58–0 • Fax: (0 37 74) 58–545
manotherm.com • mail@manotherm.com
3/06
Case Configurations, Code Letters, Dimensional Data and Weight
Bottom connection, Center back connection,

without code letter to add code letters: rm
Center back connection, Center back connection,

front flange, U-clamp for panel mounting,
code letters: rmFr code letters: rmBFr
Dimensional Data ( mmm / inches ) and Weight ( kg / lb )

Weight
Nom. Size a b c c1 c2 d1 d2 d3 d4 D G g h ±1 M s s1 SW
(approx.)
63 10 32 5 2 13 75 88 3.6 74 67 G¼B 58 54 85 3 6.5 17 .25

2½" .39 1.26 .2 .08 .51 2.95 3.46 .14 2.91 2.64 ¼" BSP 2.28 2.13 3.35 .12 .26 .67 .55
The information in this leaflet is given in good faith, but we reserve the right to make changes without notice.
1112 -03/06 P. 2 of 2 • ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, Tel. +49(0)2803/9130–0, mail@armaturenbau.com • MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, Tel. +49(0)3774/58–0, mail@manotherm.com
Operating Instruction Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
Contents
Page Page
1. Important Note, Scope 1 7. Operation 7
2. Measuring Units, Construction of 8. Maintenance and Repair 8
Pressure Gauges and Chemical Seals 1 9. Electrical Accessories 8
3. Selection Criteria 3 10. Storage 8
4. Accessories 5 11. Installation in potentially explosive areas 8
5. Set-up Options 6 11.1 General Information 8
6. Installation 6 11.2 Marking for explosive area 8
1. Important Note, Scope

1.1 Important Note
Please inspect the transport packaging and the delivered goods immediately upon their receipt to determine their
integrity and completeness. In case of returns, please use the original packaging.
1.2 Scope
The information provided in this operating instruction, relating to the selection, application, set-up options, instal-
lation and operation, applies to pressure gauges with elastic element.
2. Elastic Elements, Construction of Pressure Gauges and Chemical Seals
2.1 Elastic Elements
Bourdon Tube Types:
C-Type Bourdon Tube Helical Bourdon Tube
Diaphragm Type: Capsule Type:

horizontal vertical
Sales and Export South, West, North Subsidiary Company, Sales and Export East
ARMATURENBAU GmbH MANOTHERMBeierfeldGmbH B1
Manometerstraße 5 • D - 46487 Wesel-Ginderich Am Gewerbepark 9 • D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Tel.: +49 (0) 28 03/ 91 30–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 28 03/ 10 35 Tel.: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–545 02/14
armaturenbau.com • mail@armaturenbau.com manotherm.com • mail@manotherm.com
2.2 Construction of Pressure Gauges

Pressure Gauge with C-type Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge with Horizontal Diaphragm
Hairspring
of the movement
Pinion Bourdon tube Dial

Pinion
Tip of the
Dial bourdon tube Toothed
Zero dead stop quadrant
Pointer
Link
Upper
Link screw measuring Connecting
flange rod
Pointer Toothed quadrant
Overrange
protector Upper movement plate
Stem
Process connection
(socket)
(here) radial bottom
Diaphragm,
connection Lower horizontal
measuring
Process connection,
flange
radial bottom con-
nection
Pressure Gauge with Diaphragm Capsule Pressure Gauge with Vertical Diaphragm
Capsule Connecting rod
Diaphragm,
Pointer vertical Dial
Process Pointer
connection
Movement (here) bottom
connection Movement
Process Dial
connection
(here) centre
back connection
Pressure Gauge in line with Safety Requirements according to EN 837-1, S3 (formerly DIN 16 006 Part 1 and Part 2)
Full blow-out back Case with solid

front Window made of
multilayer safety
glass
Bayonet ring
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 2 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
2.3 Types of Chemical Seals
Diaphragm Capsule In-line
3. Selection Criteria Bourdon tube pressure gauges are applied for pressure
The user has to ensure that the proper pressure gauge ranges from 0.6 bar to 4,000 bar, generally in the accu-
is selected regarding indication range and type (e.g. racy classes 0.6 to 2.5.
resistance of the materials against medium, atmosphere The influence of temperature changes on the indication
and temperature, overrange protection etc.). The regu- mainly depends on the temperature coefficient (TEC=
lations applying to the particular application as well as change in stiffness caused by change in temperature)
EN 837-2 have to be regarded. of the modulus of elasticity of the bourdon tube.
Depending on the material, the accuracy error caused
3.1 Principles of Measurement by differing temperatures lies between 0.3 % and
The pressure gauges described in this operating instruc- 0.4 % per 10 K.
tion contain measuring elements that deform elastically Diaphragm Pressure Gauges
when subjected to pressure.This motion is transferred to The diaphragms are corrugated and circular shaped.
a movement. Due to their robustness and easy handling, The pressure acts on one side of the diaphragm. The
these instruments (pressure gauges) are widely used in deflection of the diaphragm is a measure for the pres-
pressure measurement. sure. Diaphragms have a relatively high restoring force.
The measuring elements are generally made of copper Therefore, the influence of additional accessories is lower
alloys or alloyed steel. compared to bourdon tube gauges. Due to the annular
Pressure Gauges with Bourdon Tube fixing arrangement of the diaphragm it is less sensitive
Bourdon tubes are circular bent tubes with an oval cros- to vibrations. Diaphragms can be protected against high
section. The pressure that is to be measured acts on the overload, by supporting the measuring unit. They can be
interior of the tube so that the tube's oval cross section protected against corrosive media by applying coatings or
approaches a circular form. The hoop stress produced foils. Diaphragm gauges can be applied to an advantage
by this deformation causes the arced Bourdon tube with highly viscous and crystallising media, as extended
to open. The end of the bourdon tube that is not fixed connection bores, open connection flanges or purge
performs a motion, which is a measure for the pressure. holes allow for cleaning options.
For pressure ranges up to 40 bar, circular bent bourdon
tubes with a torsion angle of 270° are generally used. There are gauges with horizontal diaphragm and
For higher pressure ranges, helical bourdon tubes with with vertical diaphragm, i.e. where the diaphragm
several torsions are applied. is placed in parallel to the dial. For pressure ranges
Bourdon tubes have a relatively low restoring force. < 0.6 bar, diaphragms with a diameter of 160 mm are
generally used, whereas for higher pressure ranges
Therefore, when using additional accessories such diaphragms with a diameter of 100 mm are used. Due
as indicating pointers, limit switch contact assemblies to the annular fixing arrangement of the diaphragm, the
or potentiometric transducers, their influence on the deviation in indication caused by temperature changes is
indication has to be taken into account. significantly greater compared to bourdon tube gauges.
Diaphragm pressure gauges are applied for pressure
Pressure gauges with a bourdon tube can only be pro- ranges from 10 mbar to 25 bar in the accuracy classes
tected against overload to a limited extent, by supporting of 1.6 and 2.5, exceptionally also in 4.0.
the elastic element at a specific pressure limit.
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Capsule Pressure Gauges
A diaphragm capsule consists of two corrugated, cir- In both cases, the susceptibility to contamination is
cular shaped diaphragms or a diaphragm and a base disadvantageous. Attenuators at the movement only
plate that are assembled pressure tight at the edge. decelerate the pointer fluctuation. Fluid filled cases
The pressure is introduced at the centre of one of the dampen the fluctuation of the measuring element and
diaphragms and acts on the inside of the capsule. The reduce the wear of the moving parts.
hereby produced lifting movement is a measur for the
pressure. Temperature
Capsule pressure gauges are not suited for liquid media. If the temperature of the medium at the measuring point
They can be applied for pressure ranges from 2.5 mbar deviates from the operating temperature specified for the
to 600 mbar in accuracy classes from 0.6 to 1.6. pressure gauge (see section 7., as well as EN 837-1,
The deviation in indication caused by changes in tem- -2, -3), a measuring line with sufficient length, a siphon
perature can lie between 0.3 % and 0.4 % per 10 K, or a chemical seal with capillary line must be connected
depending on the material. upstream to the pressure gauge.
The influence on the indication owing to deviating instru-
3.2 Pressure Ranges ment temperatures from +20 °C must be considered.
The operating pressure should lie in the middle third of
the pressure range of the gauge. The maximum pressure Highly Viscous, Crystallising and Solid-Containing
load should not exceed 75 % of the full scale value at Media
steady load or 65 % of the full scale value at dynamic For measurements of highly viscous, crystallising or
load, cf. EN 837-2. solid-containing media, the use of diaphragm or bourdon
tube pressure gauges with attached chemical seal (see
3.3 Accuracy Limits section 4.4) is recommended.
The error limits for pressure gauges are defined in
EN 837-1 (bourdon tube gauges) and EN 837-3 (capsule Corrosive Media
and diaphragm gauges – formerly DIN 16 005). If corrosive media can be kept away from the measuring
Pressure gauges of the classes 0.1 to 0.6 and higher element by separating agents, then standard pressure
are preferably used in laboratories and workshops for gauges may be used. Otherwise, the selection of suitable
accurate measurements. material is mandatory, whereby the user must provide
Pressure gauges of the classes 1.0 and 1.6 are mainly the manufacturer with every information on the materials
used for measurements on machines and production that are compatible with the medium under the specific
facilities. measuring conditions, cf. EN 837-2, 4.3.
Pressure gauges of the classes 2.5 and 4.0 are used for Due to the restricted choice of materials for the elastic
monitoring tasks without special accuracy requirements. elements, diaphragm pressure gauges with a protective
lining possibly have to be used, or chemical seals made
3.4 Conditions of Usage of media resistant materials need to be connected
When selecting pressure gauges the selection criteria upstream to a bourdon tube pressure gauge.
and installation recommendations in accordance with
EN 837-2 (formerly DIN 16 005 Part 1 and Part 2) as well Safety
as the instructions provided here, especially in sections A higher risk exists, for example, with gases and fluids
3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 5. must be considered. under high pressure. In case of leakage or bursting of
The use of pressure gauges which do not meet the pressure-retaining components, employees standing
actual operating conditions, can cause great conse- in front of the window of the instrument, should not be
quential damages. endangered by medium emerging to the front. Safety
pressure gauges with a blow-out device at the rear, for
3.4.1 Pressure Media Properties example a blow-out back, provide for protection (see fig.
Pressure History on page 2, at the bottom).
Rapid pressure changes or pressure strokes should not With hazardous media, for example
act abruptly on the measuring element. – oxygen
Pressure strokes must not exceed the pressure limits – acetylene
specified for the pressure gauges. If necessary, overload – combustible substances
protection (see section 4) must be connected upstream. – toxic substances
Pressure changes of >10% of the full scale value per as well as refrigerating units, compressors etc., the
second impair the readings of the measured values. applicable regulations must be considered.
Moreover, this will severely reduce the service life of
the pressure gauges. In such cases, attenuators must In accordance with EN 837-1, 9.7 fluid filled pressure
be provided. gauges must be equipped with blow-out devices (version
With snubbers (restrictor screw or adjustable snubber) S1, or S2 resp. S3 according to EN 837-1).
the inlet cross section can be significantly reduced,
thus delaying the change in pressure in the measuring
element. The installation of an integrated restrictor screw
(reduction of the cross section of the measuring element)
is also possible.
3.4.2 Ambient Conditions

Vibrations Siphons
If an exposure of the pressure gauge to vibrations can To protect the shut-off fittings and pressure gauges
not be avoided by way of suitable installations, gauges against heating through hot media (e.g. steam), suf-
equipped with dampened movement or with fluid filling ficiently long measuring lines or siphons should be
must be used.
installed.
Ambient Temperature
Chemical Seals
The error limit given on the dial applies to a reference
With aggressive, hot, highly viscous or crystallising
temperature of +20 °C. Deviating temperatures have an
media, chemical seals can be mounted to bourdon tube
influence on the indication. The extent of the influence
gauges as separating element in order to prevent the
depends on the measuring principle (see section 3.1).
At outdoor installations, the ambient conditions must ingress of such media into the measuring element. The
be taken into account through selection or protection, pressure is transmitted to the measuring element by a
in order to prevent, for example, the pressure gauge neutral fluid that is selected depending on measuring
from freezing over at temperatures below 0 °C. In fluid range, temperature, viscosity and other influences,
filled instruments the viscosity of the fluid increases as whereby the compatibility of this fluid with the medium
the temperature drops causing a considerable delay of has to be considered.
indication. The ambient temperature must also be taken
into account regarding the maximum allowed operating Chemical seals are available in different configurations,
temperature for the pressure gauge. see figure in section 2.3, whereas the diaphragm seal
is the most commonly used model.
Corrosive Atmosphere
In corrosive atmospheres, correspondingly suitable With in-line and flange type diaphragm seals the pres-
casings and components made of corrosion resistant sure gauge must be mounted at works to the chemical
materials must be provided. seal, in accordance to the given installation position.
Special surface finishings help protect the pressure
gauge cases on the outside. Pressure gauge and chemical seal should not be
disconnected.
4. Accessories
Shut-off Fittings for Pressure Gauges Possible errors occuring due to mounting of a chemical
It is recommended to install a shut-off device between seal to a pressure gauge have to be considered.
the measuring point and the pressure gauge, which
allows for an exchange of the pressure gauge and check Overrange Protection Devices
of zero point during continued operation of the system. If, for operational reasons the indication pressure range
Depending on the application, either cocks or valves are has to lie below the maximum operating pressure, the
used. Cocks have three positions: pressure gauge can be protected against damages by
– Venting: The supply line is shut-off and connecting overrange protection devices.
the gauge is connected to the At a pressure stroke the overrange protector shuts down
atmosphere. The zero point can immediately, at slow rising pressure gradually. The clo-
be checked. sing pressure that needs to be set, therefore depends
– Operation: The supply line is open, the gauge on the progress in time.
is pressurised.
– Blow-out: The supply line is open, the medi- Highly viscous and contaminated media, however, can
um escapes into the atmosphere. impair the function of the overrange protector or render
The gauge is not working. it ineffective.
With valves (e.g. according to DIN 16 270 and DIN 16 271),
a venting screw is usually provided between valve seat Capsule and diaphragm pressure gauges can also be
and pressure gauge. produced overrange protected (3-fold, 5-fold or 10-fold
Venting to the atmosphere should be thus arranged that overrange protected).
employees are not endangered by escaping medium.
Environmental pollution should be avoided.
With certain applications (e.g. steam boilers), the shut-
off fittings must have a test port, to allow for checking
of the pressure gauge without having to remove it from
the system.
Pressure Gauge Holder

If the measuring line is not sufficiently stable to support
the pressure gauge free from vibrations, a suitable holder
is to be provided.
Table 1 State of medium fluid gaseous
fluid partly fully gaseous partly fully
State of the filling in the measuring degassing degassing condensed condensed
line (humid)
condensate boiling "liquid gases" dry moist air water vapour

Examples fluids air flue gas
1 2 3 4 5 6
a) Pressure gauge above

the measurement port
7 8 9 10 11
b) Pressure gauge below

the measurement port
The arrangements 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 and 11 are to be preferred.
5. Set-up Options The pressure gauge should be installed in such a way

General Remarks that the temperature does not drop below or exceed the
Proven measuring arrangements and proposals for permissible operating temperature (see also sections
components are detailed in VDE/VDI 3512 sheet 3. 3.4.1 and 7). In the process, the influence of convection
Table 1 shows an overview of possible arrangements. and thermal radiation should be considered. When the
measuring element of a pressure gauge is filled with
Pressure Measuring Port water or a water mixture, the instrument must be pro-
The pressure measuring port should be installed where tected against frost.
the flow is unimpaired and permanent measuring condi- Generally, the pressure gauge is mounted with a vertical
tions exist. It is recommended to provide for a sufficiently dial. In all other cases, the symbol on the dial indicating
large bore for the pressure measurement and to lock the the position according to EN 837 (formerly DIN 16 257)
measuring port with a shut-off device. applies.
Measuring Line A difference in height between the pressure measuring

The measuring line is the connection between pres- port and the pressure gauge causes a shift at the start
sure measuring port and pressure gauge. The inside of measurement, when the medium in the measuring
diameter of the measuring line should be sufficiently line does not have the same density as the ambient air.
large in order to avoid blockage. The measuring line This shift at the start of measurement Dp results from
should have a steady slope (recommended is a slope the difference in density (rM - rL) and the difference in
of 1:15). With gaseous media, a drain should be provi- height Dh: 10-5 · ( rM - rL ) g · Dh
ded at the lowest point, with high-viscosity fluids a vent
should be provided at the highest point. With gases or Dp = Shift at start of measurement (bar)
rM = Density of the medium kg/m3
fluids containing solids, separators should be provided rL = Density of the air (1.205 at 20 °C) kg/m3
that can be demounted from the system and emptied
during operation, due to shut-off valves. The measuring Dh = Difference in height m
line should be implemented and installed in such a way g = Gravitational acceleration m/s2
that it withstands loads caused by expansion, vibration (approx. gravitational acceleration = 9.81 m/s2)
or thermal effects. The indication is decreased by Dp when the pressure
gauge is positioned higher than the pressure measuring
Shut-off Valves at the Pressure Gauge port, and increased by Dp when it is positioned lower.
Shut-off valves at the pressure gauge serve the purpose
of checking the zero setting or exchanging the pressure 6. Installation
gauge during operation (cf. section 4). Pressure gauges should only be installed by trained
engineering personnel.
Pressure Gauge For measurement arrangement see section 5.
The pressure gauge has to be mounted free of vibrations
and so that the dial is easily readable. When reading During installation or removal, pressure gauges should
the dial, parallax errors should be avoided. It has to be never be held at the case but at the wrench flat of the
ensured that any blow-out devices in the pressure gauge socket. It must be ensured that the matching process
are not blocked (cf. EN 837-1, 9.7). connection is selected (nominal width, if required sui-
table sealing face, etc.).
For instruments with thread connection, an installation 7. Operation
with clamping sleeve or union nut is recommended, in Shut-off devices should be opened slowly in order to
order to allow for proper readability. avoid sudden pressure peaks when putting into ope-
Instruments with flange connections are fitted to the ration.
counter flange and secured with suitable screws. Ensure
that the screws are firmly tightened. Application Range
The connections must be tight. Therefore, sealings The application range for steady loads is indicated on
made of suitable medium-resistant material should be the dial of many pressure gauges by a pressure limit
used for the connection. indication mark (see EN 837-1, EN 837-3).
For the sealing of pressure measurement connections At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nomi-
with cylindrical thread spigots, flat sealing rings accor- nal case sizes 100, 160 or 250 are loadable to the full
ding to EN 837-1 or profile packings, resp. lense-type scale value. At dynamic load only the 0.9-fold as peak
sealing rings for corresponding high pressure connec- load of that pressure is permissible, for pressure ranges
tions have to be applied at the sealing surface. Tapered of 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar only 2/3 max. of the full
threads (e.g. NPT-threads) are sealed additionally with scale pressure value. Bourdon tube pressure gauges
sealants such as for example PTFE-tape (cf. EN 837-2). are overrange protected up to 1.3 of the full scale value
(instruments with the ranges 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar
can only be loaded to their full scale value!).
cylindrical thread tapered thread At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nominal
case sizes 40, 50, 60, 63, 80 and 72x72 are loadable up
to 3/4 of the full scale value, at dynamic load up to 2/3
wrench flats maximum of the full scale value and only temporarily to
the full scale value.
sealing in the
sealing surface thread Diaphragm pressure gauges with vertical diaphragm are
loadable to the full scale value at steady load, at dynamic
load to the 0.9-fold of the full scale value.
For pressure gauges with pressure ranges of < 6 bar and Diaphragm pressure gauges with horizontal diaphragm
with a pressure relief vent Ø of 13 mm at the top of the are overrange protected to the 5-fold of the full scale
case, it is recommended to cut off the fitting at the filling value (custom-made instruments also higher), but never
plug in order to allow for internal pressure compensation higher than 40 bar.
through venting of the gauge.
Capsule pressure gauges are loadable to the full scale
If the pressure gauge is positioned below the pressure value at steady load, at dynamic load maximum to the
relief vent, the measuring line should be rinsed thorough- 0.9-fold of the full scale value. Just as bourdon tube
ly before putting into operation. pressure gauges they are 1.3-fold overrange protected
(custom-made instruments also higher).
During pressure tests on pipes or vessels, the pressure
gauge must not be exposed to higher loads than indi- Zero Point Check
cated by the pressure limit indication mark on the In order to check the zero point of the pressure gauge
dial; resp. the pressure limit at steady load, specified during operation, the required shut-off device has to be
for the pressure gauge, should not be exceeded (see closed (see section 4.) and pressure is relieved. The
section 7.). pointer must rest within the zero range indicated by I.
If the pointer comes to rest outside this range, a perma-
With diaphragm gauges the clamping bolts for the upper nent deformation of the measruing unit can be assumed,
and lower flange must not be unloosened. which has to be checked thoroughly in order to avoid
The connections between pressure gauge and chemical accidents caused by measuring errors. Therefore, the
seal and possibly between chemical seal and capillary pressure gauge should be replaced and, if necessary,
line are not to be released. returned to the manufacturer for checking and repair.
Before removing the pressure gauge, the measuring Pressure Range Check
unit must be depressurised. Possibly the pressure must If the pressure range indication has to checked during
be relieved on the measuring line. Residues of the operation, the pressure gauge is separated from the
medium in demounted pressure gauges can endanger process via the required shut-off device with test port
personnel, facilities and the environment. Therefore, (see section 4.), and a test pressure is applied to the
precautionary measures must be taken. gauge. The error limits according to EN 837-1 resp.
EN 837-3 apply.
(Electrical accessories: see section 9).
Temperature-Resistance
The permissible operating temperatures of the pressure
gauge must not be exceeded.
The temperature resistance resp. the permissible If specified, suitable switch amplifiers or multifunctional
operating temperature generally lies between -40 °C to relais must be used (e.g. for instruments with inductive
+60 °C maximum (cf. EN 837-1 and EN 837-3 ), whereas contacts). The valid operating instructions must be
unfilled gauges with brazed bourdon tubes withstand considered.
measuring temperatures of up to +100 °C or with shiel-
ded arc welded bourdon tubes in stainless steel cases 10. Storage
up to +200 °C. During storage, the pressure gauges should remain
Special versions that are labelled accordingly (tA / tR) in their original packaging and be stored protected
can be suitable for higher temperatures. against damages caused through external influences.
Note: These are only pieces of information on tempera- After possible temporary removal of a pressure gauge
ture resistance of the materials resp. the soldered joints (e.g. for a test), it should be replaced in the original
or welded seams. The information on indication errors packging for further storage.
due to deviation from the reference temperature has to
be considered! In general, during storage the minimum temperature
Further details ca be found in our model overview 1000 should not fall below -40 °C and the maximum tem-
for bourdon tube pressure gauges. perature should not exceed +60 °C (cf. EN 837-1 and
EN 837-3).
© 2014 ARMATURENBAU GmbH and MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH · Technical changes, replacement of materials and printing errors excepted!
Cleaning Temperature
When rinsing the measuring line, the permissible ope- 11. Installation in Potentially Explosive Areas
rating temperature of the pressure gauge (see above) 11.1 General Information
must not be exceeded. If necessary, the gauge has to Pressure Gauges are mechanical pressure measuring
be shut-off or removed. instruments and when operated as intended, do not
The maximum cleaning temperature tR of pressure show sources of ignition. Versions made of stainless
gauges with chemical seals must not be exceeded. steel and with laminated safety glass are suitable for
application in areas of category 2 and 3 according to the
8. Maintenance and Repair
ATEX-Directive 94/9/EC. For applications in category 1
In general, pressure gauges are maintenance-free. (e.g. installation to Zone 0), only pressure gauges with
integrated, type-approved flame arresters, our model
They should only be repaired by the manufacturer. Adapt-FS, are suitable. This protection system prevents
Before returning an instrument for repair, all wetted a flame penetration at deflagration of explosive vapor-air
parts must be cleaned thoroughly, especially regarding resp. gas-air mixtures of explosion groups IIA, IIB and
hazardous media (see also section 6.). The repair IIC in an upstreamed volume of max. 0.2 l. The flame
order should include a description of the medium resp. arrester "Adapt-FS" is certified with
a declaration of contamination. IIG IIC PTB 12 ATEX 4001 X
9. Electrical Accessories on condition that the operating pressure does not ex-
Installation and electrical connections should only be ceed 1.1 bar abs. and the operating temperature does
performed by trained engineering personnel. not exceed 60 °C.
Instruments with electric accessories are marked with
a nameplate that indicates the electrical connection of To avoid heating of the measuring elements of bourdon
the instrument. tube pressure gauges, dynamic load is not allowed with
Consideration of load limits is obligatory. Exceeding of gaseous media!
load limits can cause damage.
The national and international safety regulations (e.g. 11.2 Marking for Explosive Area
VDE 0100) must be considered during installation, Pressure gauges without limit switch contacts for
starting up and operation of the instruments. application in potentially explosive areas, are marked
as follows:
It must be ensured that the cable diameters match the Example: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
nominal widths of the sealing inserts. Screw fittings must Type RCh 100 – 3
be tightened firmly. Only then compliance with certified Manufacturer ARMATURENBAU
protection standards can be ensured. In versions with Manometerstraße 5 • D-46487 Wesel
angular plugs, plug connectors or terminal boxes, the
centrally arranged fixing screws must be tightened Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
hand-tight.
Type RCh 100 – 3
For the connection of pressure transmitters DMU, only
shielded cables are to be used in order to conserve the II 2Gc
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The shield of the
II 2Dc
cable must be connected with the case resp. with the
ground terminal of the angular plug.
Temperature range -25…+75 °C
The CE-mark according to EMC-guidelines on instru- (content binding, partition free)
ments with magnetic contact only applies, when the
frequency of operation does not exceed 5 switching Please contact the manufacturer in case of uncertain-
cycles per minute. ties.
Mechanical
pressure measurement
Bourdon tube pressure gauge

Stainless steel version
Models 232.50, 233.50
WIKA data sheet PM 02.02
for further approvals

see page 2
Applications
■■ With liquid-filled case for applications with high dynamic
pressure loads or vibrations 1)
■■ For gaseous and liquid aggressive media that are
not highly viscous or crystallising, also in aggressive
ambience
■■ Process industry: Chemical/petro-chemical, power
stations, mining, on- and offshore, environmental techno-
logy, machine building and general plant construction
Special features
■■ Excellent load-cycle stability and shock resistance
■■ All stainless steel construction
■■ German Lloyd, Gosstandart and DVGW approval
■■ Scale ranges up to 0 … 1,600 bar Bourdon tube pressure gauge model 232.50
Description Pressure limitation

NS 63: Steady: 3/4 x full scale value
Design Fluctuating: 2/3 x full scale value
EN 837-1 Short time: Full scale value
Nominal size in mm NS 100, 160: Steady: Full scale value
63, 100, 160 Fluctuating: 0.9 x full scale value
Short time: 1.3 x full scale value
Accuracy class
NS 63: 1.6 Permissible temperature
NS 100, 160: 1.0 Ambient: -40 ... +60 °C without liquid filling
-20 ... +60 °C gauges with glycerine filling 1)
Scale ranges
Medium: +200 °C maximum without liquid filling
NS 63: 0 ... 1 to 0 ... 1,000 bar
+100 °C maximum with liquid filling 1)
NS 100: 0 ... 0.6 to 0 ... 1,000 bar
NS 160: 0 ... 0.6 to 0 ... 1,600 bar Temperature effect
or all other equivalent vacuum or combined pressure and When the temperature of the measuring system deviates
vacuum ranges from the reference temperature (+20 °C):
max. ±0.4 %/10 K of full scale value
Ingress protection
1) Model 233.50 IP 65 per EN 60529 / lEC 60529
WIKA data sheet PM 02.02 ∙ 08/2014 Page 1 of 3
Data sheets showing similar products:

Stainless steel, safety version; model 232.30; see data sheet PM 02.04
Standard version Special versions
Process connection Gauges for ammonia plants (NS 100 and 160)
Stainless steel 316L (NS 63: 1.4571), With temperature scale for refrigerant R 717 (NH3) in °C,
Lower mount (LM) or lower back mount (LBM), NS 63 centre Scale ranges: -1 ... 0 ... 15 bar or -1 ... 0 ... 26 bar
back mount (CBM)
NS 63: G ¼ B (male), 14 mm flats
NS 100, 160: G ½ B, 22 mm flats
Pressure element
Stainless steel 316L
CE conformity
< 100 bar: C-type
≥ 100 bar: Helical type Pressure equipment directive
97/23/EC, PS > 200 bar, module A, pressure accessory
Movement
Stainless steel ATEX directive 1)
Ignition protection type „c“, constructive safety
Dial
Aluminium, white, black lettering,
NS 63 with pointer stop pin Approvals
Pointer
■■ GL, ships, shipbuilding (e.g. offshore), Germany
Aluminium, black
■■ GOST, metrology/measurement technology, Russia
■■ GOST-R, import certificate, Russia
Case
■■ DVGW, safety (e.g. electrical safety, overpressure, ...),
Stainless steel, with pressure relief at case circumference,
Germany
12 o'clock (NS 63) and on the back of the case (NS 100
■■ KBA, automotive, European Community
and 160),
■■ CRN, safety (e.g. electr. safety, overpressure, ...), Canada
Scale ranges ≤ 0 ... 16 bar with compensating valve to vent
■■ KOSHA, ignition protection type „i“ - intrinsic safety,
case
South Korea
Window
Laminated safety glass
(NS 63: Polycarbonate)
Certificates 1)
■■ 2.2 test report per EN 10204 (e.g. state-of-the-art
Ring
manufacturing, material proof, indication accuracy)
Cam ring (bayonet type), stainless steel
■■ 3.1 inspection certificate per EN 10204 (e.g. indication
accuracy)
Filling liquid (for model 233.50)
Glycerine 99.7 % 1) Option
Approvals and certificates, see website

Options
■■ Other process connection
■■ Sealings (model 910.17, see data sheet AC 09.08)
■■ Assembly on diaphragm seals see product review DS
■■ Measuring system Monel (model 26x.50, not with NS 160
back mount connection)
■■ Measuring system stainless steel 1.4571
■■ Surface or panel mounting flange, stainless steel
■■ Panel mounting flange, polished stainless steel
■■ Triangular bezel, polished stainless steel, with clamp
■■ Ambient temperatures -40 °C: Silicone oil filling
■■ Limit indicator at NS 100 and 160, see data sheet
SP 09.03
■■ Pressure gauge with switch contacts, see model
PGS23.1x0, data sheet PV 22.02
■■ Pressure gauge with electrical output signal, see model
PGT23.100/160, data sheet PV 12.04
Page 2 of 3 WIKA data sheet PM 02.02 ∙ 08/2014

Dimensions in mm
Standard version
Lower mount (LM)
≤ 16 bar with compensating valve
1520806.03
> 16 bar without compensating valve
NS 63, centre back mount (CBM) NS 100, 160, lower back mount (LBM)
≤ 16 bar with compensating valve 14112247.01 ≤ 16 bar with compensating valve
1520814.03
> 16 bar without compensating valve > 16 bar without compensating valve
NS Dimensions in mm Weight in kg
a b b1 b2 D1 D2 e f G h ±1 SW Model 232.50 Model 233.50
63 9.5 33 33 57 63 62 11.5 - G¼B 54 14 0.16 0.20
100 15.5 49.5 49.5 83 101 99 17.5 30 G½B 87 22 0.60 0.90
160 15.5 49.5 2) 49.5 2) 83 1) 161 159 17.5 50 G½B 118 22 1.10 2.00
Process connection per EN 837-1 / 7.3
1) Plus 16 mm with scale ranges ≥ 100 bar
2) Plus 16 mm with scale range 1,600 bar
Ordering information
Model / Nominal size / Scale range / Connection size / Connection location / Options
© 2000 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG, all rights reserved.
The specifications given in this document represent the state of engineering at the time of publishing.
We reserve the right to make modifications to the specifications and materials.
WIKA data sheet PM 02.02 ∙ 08/2014 Page 3 of 3

08/2014 GB
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG

Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30
63911 Klingenberg/Germany
Tel. +49 9372 132-0
Fax +49 9372 132-406
info@wika.de
www.wika.de
Inductive sensor NJ5-11-N-G
Dimensions
M14x1
Ø 11
14
31
3
19
0102
Model Number
NJ5-11-N-G
Features
• Comfort series
• 5 mm not embeddable
Technical Data
• Usable up to SIL2 acc. to IEC 61508
General specifications
Switching element function NAMUR, NC
Connection Rated operating distance sn 5 mm
Installation not embeddable
Output polarity NAMUR
Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 4.05 mm
BN Reduction factor rAl 0.4
L+
Reduction factor rCu 0.3
Reduction factor r304 0.85
BU Nominal ratings
L- Nominal voltage Uo 8V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 3000 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5 %
Current consumption
Measuring plate not detected ≥ 3 mA
Measuring plate detected ≤ 1 mA
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
Mechanical specifications
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Core cross-section 0.34 mm2
Housing material Stainless steel 1.4305 / AISI 303
Sensing face PVDF
Protection degree IP68
General information
Use in the hazardous area see instruction manuals
Category 2G; 1D
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
NAMUR EN 60947-5-6:2000
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
Approvals and certificates
UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
Date of issue: 2012-02-09 112726_eng.xml
CSA approval cCSAus Listed, General Purpose

Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47
Subject to modifications without notice Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0001
fa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
fa-info@pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
fa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
1
ATEX 2G
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 2G for use in hazardous areas with gas, vapour and mist
Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-11:2007
Ignition protection "Intrinsic safety"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2048 X

Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual. The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to
be observed. The special conditions must be adhered to!
Directive 94/9/EG and hence also EC-Type Examination Certificates apply in gene-
ral only to the use of electrical apparatus under atmospheric conditions.
The use in ambient temperatures of > 60 °C was tested with regard to hot surfaces
by the mentioned certification authority.
If the equipment is not used under atmospheric conditions, a reduction of the per-
missible minimum ignition energies may have to be taken into consideration.
Highest permissible ambient temperature The temperature ranges, according to temperature class, are given in the EC-Type
Examination Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed. The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appro-
priate related apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Protection from mechanical danger When used in the temperature range below -20 °C the sensor should be protected
from knocks by the provision of an additional housing.
Electrostatic charging Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

2 Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
ATEX 1D
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 1D for use in hazardous areas with combustible dust

Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity IEC 61241-11:2002: draft; prEN61241-0:2002
type of protection intrinsic safety "iD"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 1D Ex iaD 20 T 108 °C (226.4 °F)

The Ex-relevant identification may also be printed on the accompanying adhesive
label.
EC-Type Examination Certificate ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X
Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual.
The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to be observed.
The special conditions must be adhered to!
Maximum housing surface temperature The maximum surface temperature of the housing is given in the EC-Type Exami-
nation Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed.
The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appropriate related
apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
The associated apparatus must satisfy at least the requirements of category ia IIB
or iaD. Because of the possibility of the danger of ignition, which can arise due to
faults and/or transient currents in the equipotential bonding system, galvanic isola-
tion in the power supply and signal circuits is preferable. Associated apparatus wit-
hout electrical isolation must only be used if the appropriate requirements of IEC
60079-14 are met.
The intrinsically safe circuit has to be protected against influences due to lightning.
When used in the isolating wall between Zone 20 and Zone 21 or Zone 21 und
Zone 22 the sensor must not be exposed to any mechanical danger and must be
sealed in such a way, that the protective function of the isolating wall is not
impaired. The applicable directives and standards must be observed.
If the Ex-relevant identification is exclusively printed on the included adhesive label,
this must be applied in the direct vicinity of the sensor! The surface to which the
label is to applied must be clean and free from grease! The applied adhesive label
must be durable adlegible to protect it against the possibility of chemical corrosion!
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Electrostatic charging The connection cables are to be laid in accordance with EN 50281-1-2 and must not
normally be subjected to chaffing during use.
Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
3
Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Manual Geral de Instalação, Operação e

Manutenção de Motores Elétricos
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual of Electric Motors
Manual General de Instalación, Operación
y Mantenimiento de Motores Eléctricos
Installations-, Betriebs- und
Wartungsanleitung für Elektrische Motoren
--
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
Deutsch 167
57 Motores Elétricos
www.weg.net
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL OF ELECTRIC MOTORS
This manual provides information about WEG induction motors fitted with squirrel cage,
permanent magnet or hybrid rotors, low, medium and high voltage, in frame sizes IEC 56
to 630 and NEMA 42 to 9606/10.
The motor lines indicated below have additional information that can be checked in their
respective manuals:
g Smoke Extraction Motors;
g Electromagnetic Brake Motors;
g Hazardous Area Motors.
These motors meet the following standards, if applicable:

g NBR 17094-1: máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 1: trifásicos
g NBR 17094-2: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 2: monofásicos
g IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and Performance
g NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators
g CSA C 22.2 N°100: Motors and Generators
g UL 1004-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - General Requirements
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
58 Manual of Electric Motors

www.weg.net
Table of Contents
1. Terminology......................................................................................................... 61
2. Initial Recommendations................................................................................ 62
2.1. Warning Symbol.......................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. Receiving Inspection................................................................................................................. 62
2.3. Nameplates................................................................................................................................... 63
3. Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 66
4. Handling and Transport................................................................................ 67

4.1. Lifting............................................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt....................................................................................... 67
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts...................................................................................... 68
4.1.3. Vertical motors . ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position................................................ 69
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position............................................... 70
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position..... 71
5. Storage.................................................................................................................. 73
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces.................................................................................................. 73
5.2. Storage........................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3 Bearings.......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings............................................................................................................ 74
ENGLISH
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing.......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement...................................................................................... 75
6. Installation.......................................................................................................... 78
6.1. Foundations.................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING......................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors......................................................................................................... 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. Balancing....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. Couplings....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling......................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling.................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling......................................................................................................... 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors....................................................................................... 83
6.5. Leveling.......................................................................................................................................... 84
6.6. Alignment....................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors.............................. 85
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system...................................................................... 85
6.9. Electrical connection............................................................................................................ 85
Manual of Electric Motors 59

www.weg.net
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices....................................................... 88

6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)................................................................. 89
6.12. Connection of the space heaters..................................................................................... 91
6.13. Starting Methods..................................................................................................................... 92
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter........................................................................... 93
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter.................................................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire....................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils................................................................................................ 93
6.14.2. Bearing insulation.................................................................................................................. 94
6.14.3. Switching frequency.............................................................................................................. 94
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation................................................................................................ 94
7. Commissioning..................................................................................................... 95
7.1. Initial Start-up ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2. Operating conditions .............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration .................................................................................................................... 98
8. Maintenance......................................................................................................... 99
8.1. General Inspection.................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. Lubrication................................................................................................................................... 99
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings...................................................................................... 100
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting.............................................................................................. 102
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting................................................................................................... 102
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases.............................. 102
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings......................................................................................................... 103
ENGLISH
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings................................................................................................. 103

8.2.4. Sleeve bearings..................................................................................................................... 103
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly.................................................................................... 104
8.3.1. Terminal box........................................................................................................................... 105
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation............................................................................ 105
8.5. Spare parts................................................................................................................................. 106
9. Environmental Information........................................................................ 107

9.1. Packaging..................................................................................................................................... 107
9.2. Product........................................................................................................................................ 107
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions.................................................... 108
11. Warranty Term................................................................................................ 109
12. Ec declaration of conformity.................................................................110

www.weg.net
1. Terminology
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
Qualified personnel: employee who meets the following conditions simultaneously:

g Receives training under the guidance and responsibility of a qualified and authorized professional;
g Works under the responsibility of a qualified and approved professional.
Note: The qualification is only valid for the company that trained the employee in the conditions set out by the authorized and qualified
professional responsible for training.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
2. Initial Recommendations
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50006742 / 50021973 brake motor manual
available on the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
ENGLISH
authorized Service Centers to maintain validity of the warranty.
2.1. Warning Symbol
Warning about safety and warranty.
2.2. Receiving Inspection

All motors are tested during the manufacturing process.
The motor must be checked when received for any damage that may have occurred during the transportation.
All damages must be reported in writing to the transportation company, to the insurance company and to
WEG. Failure to comply with such procedures will void the product warranty.
You must inspect the product:
g Check if nameplate data complies with the purchase order;
g Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely.
g Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.

www.weg.net
2.3. Nameplates
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 - IEC motor nameplate.

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 - NEMA motor nameplate

www.weg.net
3. Safety Instructions
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
4. Handling and Transport

Individually packaged motors should never be lifted by the shaft or by the packaging. They must be lifted only by
means of the eyebolts, when supplied. Use always suitable lifting devices to lift the motor. Eyebolts on the frame
are designed for lifting the machine weight only as indicated on the motor nameplate. Motors supplied on pallets
must be lifted by the pallet base with lifting devices fully supporting the motor weight.
The package should never be dropped. Handle it carefully to avoid bearing damage.
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc.
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
4.1. Lifting
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.1 - Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 - Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt.
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt

For horizontal motors fitted with only one eyebolt, the maximum allowed angle-of-inclination during the lifting
process should not exceed 30º in relation to the vertical axis, as shown in Figure 4.3.
30° Max.
Figure 4.3 - Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt.
www.weg.net
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts

When motors are fitted with two or more eyebolts, all supplied eyebolts must be used simultaneously for the
lifting procedure.
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
g For motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader bar for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 - Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts.
g For HGF motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in relation to the
vertical axis.
ENGLISH
30° Max.
Figure 4.5 - Maximum resulting angle for horizontal HGF motors
g For motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader bar is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Figure 4.6 - Use of a spreader bar for lifting.

www.weg.net
4.1.3. Vertical motors

For vertical mounted motors, as shown in Figure 4.7, the use of a spreader bar is required for maintaining the
lifting element (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
Figure 4.7 - Lifting of vertical mounted motors.
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 - Lifting of HGF motors.
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position

For safety reasons during the transport, vertical mounted Motors are usually packed and supplied in horizontal
position.
To place W22 motors fitted with eyebolts (see Figure 4.6), to the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Remove the motor from the packaging, using the top mounted eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.9;
Figure 4.9 - Removing the motor from the packaging.

www.weg.net
3. Install a second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.10;
Figure 4.10 - Installation of the second pair of eyebolts.
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.11 - End result: motor placed in vertical position.
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position

HGF motors are fitted with eight lifting points: four at drive end and four at non-drive end. The HGF motors are
usually transported in horizontal position, however for the installation they must be placed in the vertical
position.
To place an HGF motor in the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by using the four lateral eyebolts and two hoists, see Figure 4.12;
Figure 4.12 - Lifting HGF motor with two hoists.

www.weg.net
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13.
Figure 4.13 - Placing HGF motor in vertical position
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 - Lifting HGF motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end.
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15 - HGF motor in the vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position
To place W22 vertical mount motor in horizontal position, proceed as follows:

www.weg.net
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
Figure 4.16 - Install the first pair of eyebolts
3. Install the second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.17;

ENGLISH
Figure 4.17 - Install the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully.
Figure 4.18 - Motor is being rotated to horizontal position
5. Remove the first pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.19.
Figure 4.19 - Final result: motor placed in horizontal position

www.weg.net
5. Storage
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces

All exposed machined surfaces (like shaft end and flange) are factory-protected with temporary rust inhibitor. A
protective film must be reapplied periodically (at least every six months), or when it has been removed and/or
damaged.
5.2. Storage
The stacking height of the motor packaging during the storage period should not exceed 5 m, always
considering the criteria indicated in Table 5.1:
Table 5.1 - Max. recommended stacking height
ENGLISH
Packaging Type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging.
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2).
Figure 5.1 - Correct stacking

X
Figure 5.2 - Incorrect stacking

www.weg.net
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never stand on the steel tape or
without support (Figure 5.4).
Figure 5.3 - Correct stacking

X XFigure 5.4 - Incorrect stacking
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided to withstand the weight
(see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M (NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
Figure 5.5 - Use of additional battens for stacking
5.3 Bearings
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the center of the sight glass.
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least
five revolutions, thus achieving an even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good
operating conditions. Reinstall the shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to Item 8.2
before starting the operation. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be
replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according to
Item 8.2. The oil of vertical mounted motors that are transported in horizontal position is removed to prevent oils
leaks during the transport. These motors must be stored in vertical position after receiving and the bearing
must be lubricated.

www.weg.net
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in horizontal position. Lubricate the bearings with ISO VG 68 mineral oil in the
amount indicated in the Table 5.2 (this is also valid for bearings with equivalent dimensions). After filling with oil,
rotate the shaft by hand, at least five revolutions)
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand every week, at
least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Reinstall the shaft locking device
every time the motor has to be moved. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must
be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according
to item 8.2.
Table 5.2 - Amount of oil per bearing
Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml) Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml)
6201 15 6309 65
6202 15 6311 90
6203 15 6312 105
6204 25 6314 150
6205 25 6315 200
6206 35 6316 250
6207 35 6317 300
6208 40 6319 350
6209 40 6320 400
6211 45 6322 550
6212 50 6324 600
6307 45 6326 650
6308 55 6328 700
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the middle of the sight glass. During the storage period, remove the shaft locking
device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least five revolutions, and at 30 rpm, thus achieving an
even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good operating conditions. Reinstall the
shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to the Item
8.2 before starting the operation.
If the motor is stored for a period longer than the oil change interval, or if it is not possible to rotate the motor
shaft by hand, the oil must be drained and a corrosion protection and dehumidifiers must be applied.
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE
We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.

www.weg.net
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 - Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000V 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40 °C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 - Correction Factor for the Insulation Resistance corrected to 40 °C

ENGLISH
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40 °C (°C) corrected to 40 °C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000

www.weg.net
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values
indicated in Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 - Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor
should be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair
(This service is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying
process, see section 8.4.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
6. Installation
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.
Check some aspects before proceeding with the installation:
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
a. Rolling bearings: oxidized bearings must be replaced. If no oxidation is detected, lubricate the bearings as
described in Item 8.2. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be replaced
before starting the motor.
b. Sleeve bearing: if sleeve bearing motors are stored longer than the recommended oil change interval, the
oil must be changed before machine starting. Don’t forget to remove the dehumidifiers when you drain the
oil from the motor and to fill it again with new oil before starting the machine. For more details, see item
8.2.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry.
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10.
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance
between the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the
air inlet. Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
ENGLISH
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection
system (see Figure 6.12).
Closed position Open position
Figure 6.1 - Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position.

www.weg.net
8.Additional recommendations:
a. Check the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load.
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids
or solids that may drop onto the motors.
c. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end up must be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water
penetration inside the motor.
Remove or fix the shaft key before starting the motor.
6.1. Foundations
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) T
he features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
the driven load.
ENGLISH
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m - (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 and F2 = lateral stresses (N);

g = gravitational acceleration (9,8 m/s2);
m = motor weight (kg);
Tb = breakdown torque (Nm);
A = distance between centerlines of mounting holes in feet or base of the machine (end view) (m).

www.weg.net
The motors may be mounted on:

g Concrete bases: are most used for large-size motors (see Figure 6.2);
g Metallic bases: are generally used for small-size motors (see Figure 6.3).
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 - Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 - Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally
used where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier
to assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation
type is the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive
pulley is placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other
rail must be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
To facilitate assembly, the bases may have the following features:

ENGLISH
g shoulders and/or recesses;
g anchor bolts with loose plates;
g bolts cast in the concrete;
g leveling screws;
g positioning screws;
g steel & cast iron blocks, plates with flat surfaces.
Figure 6.4 - Motor installed on sliding base
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with
suitable rust inhibitor.

www.weg.net
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
Figure 6.5 - Detail of the transportation devices for footless motors.
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors

The drawings of the mounting hole dimensions for NEMA or IEC motors can be checked in the respective
technical catalogue.
The motor must be correctly aligned and leveled with the driven machine. Incorrect alignment and leveling may
result in bearing damage, generate excessive vibration and even shaft distortion/breakage.
For more details, see section 6.3 and 6.6. The thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at
ENGLISH
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 - Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.

www.weg.net
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors

Typically, this method of mounting is used in axial fans. The motor is fixed by tapped holes in the frame. The
dimensions of these tapped holes can be checked in the respective product catalogue. The selection of the
motor mounting rods/bolts must consider the dimensions of the fan case, the installation base and the thread
depth in the motor frame.
ENGLISH
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
Figure 6.8 - Mounting of the motor inside the cooling duct
6.3. Balancing
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report
6.4. Couplings
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The following
aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
g Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings.
Whenever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
g
machine operation.
The maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot
g
be exceeded.
g Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.

www.weg.net
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
6.4.1. Direct coupling

Direct coupling is characterized when the Motor shaft is directly coupled to the shaft of the driven machine
without transmission elements. Whenever possible, use direct coupling due to lower cost, less space required
for installation and more safety against accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling

Gearbox coupling is typically used where speed reduction is required.
Make sure that shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel (in case of straight spur gears) and in the right
meshing angle (in case of bevel and helical gears).
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling

Pulleys and belts are used when speed increase or reduction between motor shaft and driven load is required.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial Clearance
Figure 6.9 - Axial clearance of motor designed with sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
Table 6.1 - Clearance used for sleeve bearings
Bearing size Total axial clearance (mm)

9* 3+3=6
11* 4+4=8
14* 5 + 5 =10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. Leveling
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine, level
only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. Alignment
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Figure 6.10 - Typical misalignment condition
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
84 Manual of Electric Motors Figure 6.11 - Alignment with dial gauge.

www.weg.net
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
The coupling alignment must be checked periodically
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors

When oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors are installed, connect the existing lubricant tubes (oil inlet and
oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown in Figure 6.12. The lubrication system must ensure continuous
oil flow through the bearings as specified by the manufacturer of the installed lubrication system.
Inlet
ENGLISH
Drain
Outlet
Figure 6.12 - Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system

When water cooled motors are installed, connect the water inlet and outlet tubes to ensure proper motor
cooling. According to item 7.2, ensure correct cooling water flow rate and water temperature in the motor
cooling system.
6.9. Electrical connection

Consider the rated motor current, service factor, starting current, environmental and installation conditions,
maximum voltage drop, etc. to select appropriate power supply cables and switching and protection devices.
All motors must be installed with overload protection systems. Three-phase motors should be fitted with phase
fault protection systems.
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.

www.weg.net
Table 6.2 - Typical connection diagram for three-phase motors.

1 2 3
1
1
1 22
2 33 3
1 2 3
Type of 111 222 333
Configuration Quantity of Leads Connection
L1 1
L1 L2
L1
L2 2 diagram
L2 L3L33
L3 LL
L
connection L1
L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3
L3
L
L
L
L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L3
L3 3 L1
L
L1 L2 L3
3 - 66 44 55
66 44 55 6 66 44
6 4L1 55 L2 6 L3 4 55 6 4L
6
6 4 4 5 5 6 4
6 4 5
4 5 6
6 4 4
666
11 422 5334 4 5 6 611 4422 5533 666
11 4422
4
116 224 335 1 16 224 335 116 224
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1
1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2
1
1L1
L1 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1L1
L1
1 L2 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1
1L1
L1 222
L2
L2
6 Δ-Y
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2
L2 2 L333 L1
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L333
L3
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2 L2 2
L16 L2
L1 L2 4 L3 L3 5 L1 L1 L2 6 L2 L3 4 L3 5 L16 L2
L1 L2 4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 55 66 4 5 6 44 55
4 5 6 L144 4 L2 55 5L3 66 6 4 5
4L1 L2
4
7
4 5 L36
5
8
5 6
9
6 4
7
4 5
8
5 6
9 4L1 L2
4
7
5
5
8
44777 5588 8 6699 9 44777 5588 8 666 99
9 4
44777 558 58
8
1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825
771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822
YY - Y L1
L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L333
39 L1
3 L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L3
33
39
3 L1L1
L1
1 L2
1117 L2 L2
L2
2
2228
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2
L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 L1 1 L2 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2
L17 L28 L39 L17 L28 L39 L17 L28
9 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 5 66 4 5 6 44 5
L1 44 L25 5 L3 6 L144 4 L25 5 L36 6 L1 4 L25 5
47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6 47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6
4
47 5
7 58
8
ΔΔ - Δ 447 7 58 5 8 69 6 9 4 477 58 5 8 69 6 9 44477 58 5 5 8
Single Speed 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
9336 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
93
36 777
1
71
14 88 2
8225
L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28
L1L1
L1
1 1 L2
L2
L22 2 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2 L2
L2
22 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2L2
L2
2 2
L1 1
L1 1 L2 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 22
L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5
11 12 10 L1 11 L2 12L39 10 L1
11 7 12 L210 L39 11 12 10 11 12 10 L1 11 L2
11 12
11
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 12
11 12 10
12 10
10 1111
11 12 12810
12 10 11
10 11 12
11 12 10 10 11 12
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 11
11 1
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 5
11
11 2
5 12 6
12
126 10 34
10
104 5
11
11 1
5 12 6
12
12 6 10 2 4
10
4 311
10 55 12
11
11 66 10
12
12 44
10
10
11
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 55 2 1
11
11 6
1
1
115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11
115 5 126 6 4
10 4 11115 5 126 6 4
104 115 5 12 6
12 6 10 4
104 115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11115 5 12
16
5
88 6
5811669999124444
77 L1 5
8L2
8 6
9
5811669912449 L3 4
77 L15
8 8 6
9
581166991244 9L2 4
77 L3 5
88 6
9 9
581166991244 4
77 5
88 6
99
581166991244 4
77 L1 5
8L2
8
5811669 69
ΔΔ - YY - Δ - Y 558 7710 558 47 710 558 47710 558 47710 558 710 558
2
82
8
88225
63
993
93
936 1
71
714 882
2
8
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
71
14 8
882
2
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
714
1 882
2
8
82
25
63
9
9
993 3
6
3 1
7
71
14
2
888
225 969
82 336 747
93 1
71
714 888
225 969
82 3
9
L2
L22
2 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L3 3
3 L1771
L1 1 L2L2 22 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L33
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L22 L3
2 93
L3 3 L1
3 71
L117 L2 L2
2
22 L3 L3933
L2
2
L2 8
211L3 L3
3312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1
1107 L2
2
L2 8
211L3L3
3
312L19 L1
1 1
110 L2 L2
2 211 8 L3 333
L3
L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L252L3 L3
L363L1 L1
L141 L2 L2
L252L3 L3
L3
L2
L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L2 L3 9 L1
8 PART-WINDING 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 L17 L2
9WYE-DELTA 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7
PART-WINDIN L2 8 L
PART-WINDING WYE-DELTA PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
12 PART-WINDING
2 PART-WINDING
3 1
PART-WINDING 2 3 1 2 3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
1
WYE-DELTA 2 3 1 2 PART-WINDIN
3 1
PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
2
L2STARTPART-WINDING
PART-WINDING
L3 L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2START L3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2 PART-WINDING
PARTIDAPART-WINDING
L3 L1 OPERA
L2 L3
PART-WINDING
START
START RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTARUN RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA PART-WINDIN OPER
OPER
START
START PART-WINDING RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTA RUN
RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA OPERA
OPERA
12START
12
START 1010 11 1111 1212RUNRUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
START
12 10
START 1010 11 11
11 12 12
12 RUN
RUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
PARTIDA
12
PARTIDA 1010 1111 OPERA
OPERA 12
12 11
Δ - PWS 1212
START 1010 11 1212 RUN 10
10 11 12
START
12 10 11 12 RUN1010 11 PARTIDA
1212 1010 1111 OPERA 12
12 1 1
12
77 10
12 10
START88 11
10 11
99
11 12
77 10
12 10
RUN88 11
10 11
99
11 12
12 START
66 10 10
1044 11 11
55 12
11 12
66 10
12 10
RUN
44 11
10 11
55
11 12
12 10
7PARTIDA
88
10 11
99
11 OPER12
77 10
12 18
1
12
127 10 PART-WINDING
8 11 9 12
127 7 10 88 119 9 12
12 66 104 4 11
55
WYE-DELTA 12
6 6 10
44 11
55 12
127
7 1010 PART-WINDIN
8 1111 9 12
127 7 18 8
8
Part-winding start 7
6
712 84
6
76
8
4
8 10 95 9
5
9511 776 6
7 12884
6 4
8410995 5
9 11 667
5 6
7712 448 4
8 10559
8 5
911 667
9 6
7 12448
7 4
8810559 5
911
9
7
6
712 84
6
8
4
8 10 95
4
9
5
9511 776 6
7612884 4
8 4
776
6
1 884
4
2
4 995
5
3 76
6
1 844
2 95
5
3 671 482 59
3 67
1 48
2 59
3 777
6
6
1
6 884
4
PARTIDA
2 995
5
3 OPER766
1 844
2
61 START 2 53 17 44RUN 28 55 39 7 START
16 88 8 24 99 935 77 7 16 88 8
RUN
24 99 935 17 44 28 53 53 17 42 42
66117 444 2 28 553 39 6661 1 42 2 53 3 77711 82 2 933 71 1 822 933 61
661 42 2 5339 66161
422
L1112
1 L2
6 2L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
311
5 L1 1
1126 L2 L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
3115 L1 1
1127 22 L22210 L3
8 33 3
311
9 1L1 L11
112 2
L2
210 L33
311 L1112
1 L2
6 2L22
210 L3
4 3L3311
5 L1 11126 L L2 21
L1
11
L1
L1 L2 L3
2 L3
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L2 L3 L3
3 L1
11
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 17 22
L1 L2
L2 8 33 L3
L3 9 L1
11
L1 L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L393 L1
82 L3 L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93
L1
L161 L2
L1 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L3 53 L1
L1
L161 L2 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L353 L1
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93 L1 L171 L2 L2
L2 8
L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664 L3L35 L1 L1 L2 L244L3 L3 55 L1 L166 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664
L1 L2 L34 4 5
L1 6 6
L2 L3 7
L1 L2 8 4 9 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 L6
4 5 5 6 44 L35 5 6 6L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L34 4 5 L1 6
5 6
1 2 3444 11 555 21 666 32 3 1 4424 11 3555 2 666 31 2 3 1 2 3444 11 522 6332
5 5 1 6 6
14 22 25 33 36 14 22 25 33 36 1 225 33
YY - Y L1 L2 L31 1 L1
2 L2
3 L3 L1 L2 11 L3 2 L1
3 L2 L3 L1 L2 L31 14 L1 2 L3
111 222 333 111 222 333 111 222 333
ENGLISH
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 L3
Variable Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L36 L1
L1
L1 4 L252 L3
1 L2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2 L3 L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW L2 L3
SPEED L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L11 L2
LOW
LOW L2
L33
SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L3
L1
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 1 L2 L22
SPEED
L33
SPEED
SPEED L3
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1
L2
1 ROTAÇROTAÇ
ROTA
L2 2 L3 L3
LOW
44 5SPEED SPEED 66 HIGH 44 SPEED SPEED
55 66 MENOR
MENOR 44 ROTAÇ 55 66
LOW
LOW4 55 5SPEED 6 HIGH
HIGH 4 SPEED 5 66 MENOR 4 ROTAÇ 5 6
4
4LOW
4 5 SPEED 6
6 HIGH44 5 5SPEED 6 4 ROTA
4 5
5 6 6
4L1
411 L2 55522 6L3 6
633 4L14
411 L2 555
22 6L3 6
63 4
L14
411 L2 55522 6L 6
63
14 225 336 14 225 33 3 14 225 33 3
1
1LOW 2 SPEED 3 11 2 2SPEED 36 MENOR 1
1 ROTA 2 3 3
Δ - YY 1
11 22 33 2 3 HIGH 1
11 22 33 3 1
11 22 33 2
6 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Constant Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 L2
4 L25 L3 L3
L363 L1
L1
1
4 L25 L3L2 2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2 ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3
L33
L11 2SPEED 3 HIGH 1 L2 SPEED
2 3 MENOR ROTA 2
44 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED
55SPEED L3
66 HIGH
HIGH L144 SPEED 55 L3
SPEED
SPEED 6 MENOR
MENOR L144 ROTAÇ L2
ROTA 55 L6
Double Speed LOW
LOW44 5SPEED 5SPEED 6 6 HIGH
HIGH 44 SPEED 5 66 6 MENOR 4 ROTA 5
4LOW
4 5 SPEED
5 6
6 HIGH 4 5
4 5SPEED
5 6
6 MENOR 4
4 ROTA
4
5
5 6
5 66
Dahlander 441 L2
L1 552 6 L3633 4 411 L2
L1 552 6L3 633 441 L2
L1 552 6 63
1 1
14 225 336 2 114 225 3362 11
14 22 25 L3
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 ROTA 2 3 3
111LOW 22 SPEED 33 111 222SPEED
HIGH 33 MENOR 1
11 22 33 2
YY - Δ L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L22 L3
L1L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 63 L1 L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L363 L1L1
L1 41 L2 L25 L L
Constant Output L1
L1 LOW L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1 LOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3L3
LOW
L11 L2 2SPEED L33 HIGH L1 1 L2 SPEED
2 L3 3 MENOR L1 ROTA 2
LOW
LOW
LOW SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
SPEED
SPEED
SPEED MENORROTAÇ
MENOR ROTAL
L2
MENOR
7 88 ROTAÇ 99
77 8LOW 8LOW 99SPEED 77 88 HIGH 99HIGHSPEED 77 88 99 7 8
MENOR
7 8 ROTA 9
7 7 88 9 9 SPEED 77 8 8 99 SPEED
77 88 99 77
11 882L18 9
93 L
3
777
71 8
1 2L1
8 L293 L3
3
9 71 2
17 82 39 93L1 L2 7 71L3 8
1 822 99 93
3 777 1 822 2 99 L29 3
1 82 2 993 3 771 1 882 93 7711 82 3 1 3
117 82
4 28LOW
5 3
669SPEED11 17 82
4 28 93
5 3 9
6HIGH 17 82
SPEED
4 28 93
5 3669 11
447 22
11MENOR
4 5
2
58 3ROTA
5 36
3
3669
111
4 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 14 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
66
6 11
1
44
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 441 25 52 6 63
41
4 552 66 5 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4
4 55 663
1 5 2 6 444 5
55 L3 66 6
44
L1 L258 L3 69 444 L2
L1 555 L3 666 4L1
4L1 L258 L3 69 L1L1
L1
L2
74 L2L2
L2 8 L3 L39
9 Δ - Y - YY L1
L1
L1
7
L1
4 L2 L2
L2 L3 6
L25L3 L3
L3 L1 7
L14 L2
L1 L2
L1 L25 L3
L2 L3
8 L3
L3
L36
9 L1
L1
ONLY
7
L14 L2 L2
L25L3
L2FOR
L3
L3
L3 6
L1
L1
L1 L25L3
MENOR
L2
MENOR L3 6
L3
L1 1 L2L2 L3 L1 L2 ONLY
L1 L2 FOR
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
MENOR
L2
MENOR 2L3 L3 3
LOW
LOWL1
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L3 3 HIGH
HIGH L11L2
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L33 L11 L2
ONLY
L1
ONLY L2FOR2FOR
L3L3 3 MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
L1 L2
LOW
LOW
LOW L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED
4 SPEED L3 6
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED L3 ONLY
STARTING
ONLYL1
STARTING
STARTING
ONLY L2FOR
FOR
5 L36
FOR
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
4
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR 5 L36
LOW
LOW
5 HIGH4SPEED 5 6 ONLY 4 FOR
STARTING
STARTING ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED ONLY FOR
STARTING
STARTING
STARTING
ROTAÇÃO
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
L1 L211 11L3 2 2
2 3 3 HIGH
3 L1 L2 L3 66 SPEED 6 6 4 4 L15 5
4STARTING5L2 L3 L1 L2
ROTAÇÃO 11 L322 33
1 2 33
1 2 2 3 3 6 4 4 5 5 MENOR 11 2 2 3
LOW SPEED 111 222 333 HIGH SPEED 666 444ONLY 555 FOR 111 222 333
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 6 L2 L3
STARTING
4 5 ROTAÇÃO L1 1 L2 2 L3
Double Speed L1 L2
L1
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L
6 - LOWL1 L2
L1 L2
L2 SPEED L3
L3 HIGH
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
L2ROTA
ROTA
L3
L3
L3
Double Winding LOW
L1
LOW
L1
LOW
LOW
L2
L2
1 SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED
L3
L3 3
HIGH
L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH
HIGH
L2
L2
6 SPEED
SPEED
SPEEDL3
4 L3
SPEED
L3 5
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 1 ROTA
L2
L2 ROTA
ROTA2 L
L3
L3 3
LOW L1 L2
SPEED HIGH L1 L2
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
ROTA
LOW
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED MENOR ROTAÇ ROTA
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROT
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L
Equivalent table for lead identificationLOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROTA
Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single Speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double Speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double Winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.

www.weg.net
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.7
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.13) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.
Clearance distance
Clearance distance
ENGLISH
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Figure 6.13 - Clearance distance representation

Table 6.3 - Minimum clearance distance (mm) x supply voltage.
Voltage Minimum clearance distance (mm)

U ≤ 440 V 4
440 < U ≤ 690 V 5.5
690 < U ≤ 1000 V 8
1000 < U ≤ 6900 V 45
6900 < U ≤ 11000 V 70
11000 < U ≤ 16500 V 105
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.

www.weg.net
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Unused cable inlet holes in the terminal box must be properly closed to ensure the degree of protection
indicated on the motor nameplate.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-
glands and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase motor,
check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices

If the motor is supplied with temperature monitoring devices, such as, thermostat, thermistors, automatic
thermal protectors, Pt-100 (RTD), etc., they must be connected to the corresponding control devices as
specified on the accessory nameplates. The non-compliance with this procedure may void the product
warranty and cause serious material damages.
ENGLISH
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100)
according to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.14 and Figure 6.15 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
Figure 6.14 - Connection of the bimetal thermal protectors (thermostats)
Figure 6.15 - Thermistor connection

www.weg.net
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections
Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.
6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)

The thermocouples Pt-100 are made of materials, whose resistance depends on the temperature variation,
intrinsic property of some materials (usually platinum, nickel or copper), calibrated resistance. Its operation is
based on the principle that the electric resistance of a metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature,
thus allowing a continuous monitoring of the motor warm-up through the controller display ensuring a high level
of precision and answer stability. These devices are widely used for measuring temperatures in various industry
sectors.
In general these devices are used in installations where precise temperature control is required, for example, in
installation for irregular or intermittent duty.
The same detector may be used for alarm and tripping purposes.
Table 6.5 and Figure 6.16 show the equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017
-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
ENGLISH
-2 99.218 44 117.083 90 134.702 136 152.076 182 169.204

-1 99.609 45 117.469 91 135.083 137 152.451 183 169.574
0 100.000 46 117.854 92 135.463 138 152.826 184 169.943
1 100.391 47 118.240 93 135.843 139 153.200 185 170.313
2 100.781 48 118.625 94 136.223 140 153.575 186 170.682
3 101.172 49 119.010 95 136.603 141 153.950 187 171.051
4 101.562 50 119.395 96 136.982 142 154.324 188 171.420
5 101.953 51 119.780 97 137.362 143 154.698 189 171.789
6 102.343 52 120.165 98 137.741 144 155.072 190 172.158
7 102.733 53 120.550 99 138.121 145 155.446 191 172.527
8 103.123 54 120.934 100 138.500 146 155.820 192 172.895
9 103.513 55 121.319 101 138.879 147 156.194 193 173.264
10 103.902 56 121.703 102 139.258 148 156.568 194 173.632
11 104.292 57 122.087 103 139.637 149 156.941 195 174.000
12 104.681 58 122.471 104 140.016 150 157.315 196 174.368
13 105.071 59 122.855 105 140.395 151 157.688 197 174.736
14 105.460 60 123.239 106 140.773 152 158.061 198 175.104
15 105.849 61 123.623 107 141.152 153 158.435 199 175.472
16 106.238 62 124.007 108 141.530 154 158.808 200 175.840

www.weg.net
Figure 6.16 - Ohmic resistance of the Pt-100 x temperature
6.12. Connection of the space heaters

Before switching ON the space heaters, check if the space heaters connection have been made according to
the connection diagram shown on the space heater nameplate. For motors supplied with dual voltage space
ENGLISH
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.17.
Figure 6.17 - Dual voltage space heater connection.
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.

www.weg.net
6.13. Starting Methods

Whenever possible, the motor starting must be Direct On Line (DOL) at rated voltage. This is the most simple
and feasible starting method. However, it must only be applied when the starting current does not affect the
power supply. Please consider the local electric utility regulations when installing a motor.
High inrush current may result in:
a) high voltage drop in the power supply line creating unacceptable line disturbance on the distribution system;
b) requiring oversized protection system (cables and contactor) increasing the installation costs.
If DOL starting is not allowed due to the reasons mentioned above, an indirect starting method compatible with
the load and motor voltage to reduce the starting current may be used.
If reduced voltage starters are used for starting, the motor starting torque will also be reduced.
Table 6.6 shows the possible indirect starting methods that can be used depending on the number of the
motor leads.
Table 6.6 - Starting method x number of motor leads.
Number of leads Possible starting methods
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Series/Parallel
Part Winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-Starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part Winding
Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 - Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage Starting parallel switch Starting soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.

www.weg.net
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
Wmagnet Motors must only be driven by WEG frequency inverter.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
If the motor is operated above the rated frequency, please note:

g That the motor must be operated at constant output;
g That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
g Do not exceed the maximum speed and please consider:
g max. operating frequency stated on the additional nameplate;
g mechanical speed limitation of the motor.
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter

6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter 1
Inverter MTBP 3
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 2 Rise Time 3 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom ≤ 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
460 < Vnom ≤ 575 V ≤ 1800 V ≤ 6500 V/µs
≥ 0,1 µs ≥ 6 µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 4 ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 5 ≤ 2200 V ≤ 7800 V/µs
Notes:
1. For the application of motors with round enameled wires designed for 690 < Vnom ≤ 1100 V, please contact WEG.
2. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
3. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
4. When not stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
5. When stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils

Motors with prewound coils (medium and high voltage motors regardless of frame sizes, and low voltage
motors from IEC 500 / NEMA 800 frame on), designed for the use with frequency inverters, do not require the
use of filters, provided they comply with the criteria in Table 6.8.
Table 6.8 - Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
Turn to turn insulation (phase-phase) Phase-ground insulation

Type of Peak voltage at Peak voltage at
Motor rated voltage dV/dt at the motor dV/dt at the motor
modulation the motor the motor
terminals terminals
terminals terminals
Sinusoidal ≤ 5900 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 3400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
690 < Vnom ≤ 4160 V
PWM ≤ 9300 V ≤ 2700 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 2700 V/µs
Sinusoidal ≤ 9300 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
4160 < Vnom ≤ 6600 V
PWM ≤ 14000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs ≤ 8000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs

www.weg.net
6.14.2. Bearing insulation

Only the motors in IEC frame size 400 (NEMA 680) and larger are supplied, as standard, with insulated bearing.
If motor must be driven by frequency inverter, insulate the bearing according to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 - Recommendation on the bearing insulation for inverter driven motors
Frame size Recommendation
IEC 315 and 355
NEMA 445/7, 447/9, L447/9, 504/5, 5006/7/8, 5009/10/11, 586/7, g Insulated bearing/end shield
5807/8/9, 5810/11/12 and 588/9 g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
IEC 400 and larger g Insulated NDE bearing
NEMA 680 and larger g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
6.14.3. Switching frequency

The minimum inverter switching frequency must not be lower than 2.5 kHz and should not exceed 5 kHz.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation

Table 6.10 shows the maximum speeds allowed for motors driven by frequency inverter.
ENGLISH
Table 6.10 - Maximum motor speed (in rpm).

Frame size Maximum speed for
DE-bearing
IEC NEMA standard motors
6201
6202
63-90 143/5 6203 10400
6204
6205
100 - 6206 8800
6207 7600
112 182/4
6307 6800
132 213/5 6308 6000
160 254/6 6309 5300
180 284/6 6311 4400
200 324/6 6312 4200
6314 3600
6315 3600
6316 3200
6319 3000
6220 3600
225-630 364/5-9610
6320 2200
6322 1900
6324 1800
6328 1800
6330 1800
Note:
to select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical Guidelines
for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.

www.weg.net
7. Commissioning
7.1. Initial Start-up
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
g
factor, etc.) meet the application requirements.

g If the machine set (motor + driven machine) has been mounted and aligned correctly.
If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
g
in Table 6.10.
g Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4.
g Check the motor rotation direction.
Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
g
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
g
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9.
Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
g
forced cooling system, etc.).

Check bearing operating conditions. If signs of oxidation are detected, replace the bearings. If no sign of
g
oxidation is detected, relubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. If the motors are stored for more than
two years, the bearings must be replaced before starting the motor.
g When motors are fitted with sleeve bearings, ensure:

g correct oil level for the sleeve bearing. The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 6.8);
g that the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
that if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
g
ENGLISH
before starting the motor.
g Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics.
g Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
L
Figure 7.1- Minimum clearance to the wall

www.weg.net
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value
Table 7.1 - Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
500 8006/10 171 6.73
ENGLISH
560 8806/10 185 7.28

630 9606/10 200 7.87
g nsure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2.
e
g ensure
that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
g Start the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions.
g Ensure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again.
g If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1.
g Start the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate.
g Continue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels.
g Record the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
two successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
g
the second start immediately after the motor stops.

one start from hot condition, i. e., the motor windings are at rated temperature.
g
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions
www.weg.net
7.2. Operating conditions

Unless otherwise stated in the Purchase Order, electric motors are designed and built to be operated at
altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level and in a temperature range from -20 °C to +40 °C. Any deviation
from the normal condition of motor operation must be stated on the motor nameplate. Some components must
be changed if the ambient temperature is different from the specified one. Please contact WEG to check the
required special features.
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature.
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 - Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second).
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 14 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 10 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 20 12 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 22 18 12
315 to 355 445/7 to 588/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
g
variation in voltage and frequency:

g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
g IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
gZone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
www.weg.net
g NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
g ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
g ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
g A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20 °C and +40 °C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40 °C.
Table 7.4 - Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Frame size Flow rate Maximum allowed water

IEC NEMA (litres/minute) temperature rise (°C)
180 284/6 12 5
200 324/6 12 5
225 364/5 12 5
250 404/5 12 5
444/5
280 445/7 15 6
447/9
315 504/5 16 6
586/7
355 25 6
588/9
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
ENGLISH
the failure of the oil pumping system.
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 - Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration Grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1-T he values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3-T he values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc.

www.weg.net
8. Maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. General Inspection
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
g V
isually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required.
g Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4.
g C
lean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient.
g Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor.
g Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required.
ENGLISH
g D
rain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6).
g C
heck the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3.
g C
heck if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
specified in Table 8.7.
g C
heck the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
replace them, if required.
g C
heck the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time.
g Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. Lubrication
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.

www.weg.net
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings
Excess grease causes bearing overheating, resulting in bearing failure.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3 and Table 8.4 consider an absolute
temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA 324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC
225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor mounted in horizontal position and
greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters listed above must be evaluated.
Table 8.1 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC

Bearing Amount of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (g) (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 18100 15700 22000 20000
4
160 254/6 6309 13 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 13700 11500 17000 14000
4
180 284/6 6311 18 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 11900 9800 15000 12000
4
ENGLISH
200 324/6 6312 21 20000 20000

6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18000 14400 4500 3600 5000 4000
4 11600 9700 14000 12000
6314 27
6 20000 20000 16400 14200 20000 17000
8 19700 17300 24000 20000
364/5 *Upon *Upon *Upon

2 14000 3500 4000
404/5 request request request
444/5 4 6316 34 10400 8500 13000 10000
225 445/7
6 20000 20000 14900 12800 18000 16000
250 447/9
280 L447/9 8 18700 15900 20000 20000
315 504/5
*Upon *Upon *Upon
355 5008 2 9600 2400 3000
request request request
5010/11
586/7 4 6319 45 9000 7000 11000 8000
588/9 6 20000 20000 13000 11000 16000 13000
8 17400 14000 20000 17000
4 7200 5100 9000 6000
6 6322 60 20000 20000 10800 9200 13000 11000
8 15100 11800 19000 14000

www.weg.net
Table 8.2 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Amount
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
(g)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 19600 13300 9800 16000 12000
4
160 254/6 NU309 13 20000
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18400 12800 9200 6400 11000 8000
4 19100
180 284/6 NU311 18
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
20000
8
2 15200 10200 7600 5100 9000 6000
4 17200 21000
200 324/6 NU312 21
6 20000 20000 20000 25000
20000 25000
8
4 17800 14200 8900 7100 11000 9000
364/5 6 NU314 27 13100 11000 16000 13000
20000 20000
404/5 8 16900 15100 20000 19000
444/5 4 15200 12000 7600 6000 9000 7000
225 445/7 6 NU316 34 19000 11600 9500 14000 12000
250 447/9 20000
8 20000 15500 13800 19000 17000
280 L447/9
315 504/5 4 12000 9400 6000 4700 7000 5000
355 5008 6 NU319 45 19600 15200 9800 7600 12000 9000
5010/11 8 20000 20000 13700 12200 17000 15000
586/7 4 8800 6600 4400 3300 5000 4000
588/9 6 NU322 60 15600 11800 7800 5900 9000 7000
8 20000 20000 11500 10700 14000 13000
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50Hz 60Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4-8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6-8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8

www.weg.net
Table 8.4 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD - frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting

ENGLISH
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
Motors with grease fittings must be stopped to be lubricated. Proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Lift grease inlet protection;

g
Remove the grease outlet plug;

g
Pump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
g
1 (one) minute at rated speed;

Switch-off the motor and pump in the remaining grease;
g
Lower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
g
To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:

g Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g Pump the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate;
g Lower again the grease inlet protection.
For lubrication, use only manual grease gun.
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases

The Mobil Polyrex EM grease has a polyurea thickener and a mineral oil thus being compatible with greases
that contain:
Lithium based thickener, lithium-based complex thickener, polyurea thickener and refined mineral oil;
g
The used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
g
In general terms, greases with the same type of soap are compatible to each other. However, depending on the
proportion of the mixture there may be incompatibility. In such a case, it is not recommended to mix different
types of greases without contacting the supplier or WEG beforehand.
www.weg.net
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings

To change the oil of oil lubricated motor proceed as follows:
g s
witch-off the motor;
g r
emove threaded oil drain plug;
g o
pen the valve and drain the oil;
g c
lose the drain vale again;
g r
einstall the threaded oil drain plug;
g fi
ll-up with the type and amount of oil as specified on the nameplate;
g c
heck oil level. The oil level is OK when the lubricant can be viewed approximately in the center of the sight
glass;
g r
einstall oil inlet plug;
g c
heck for oil leaks and ensure that all not used threaded plugs are closed with plugs.
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.5 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.5 - Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
Frame Bearing Lubricant

Poles Oil (liters) Interval (h) Lubricant
Mounting - High axial thrust
IEC NEMA designation specification

315L/A/B e 5006/7/8T e
4-8 29320 20
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
355L/A/B e 5807/8/9T e ISO VG150
4-8 29320 26
ENGLISH
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin mineral oil with
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 / antifoam and
4-8 29320 37 SHC 629 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings

Check the service conditions of the seals and if replacement is required use only original components. Clean
the seal components before assembly (bearing caps, end shields, etc.).
Apply joint sealant between the bearing caps and end shields. The joint sealant must be compatible with the
used lubricating oil. Connect the oil lubricant tubes (oil inlet and oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown
in Figure 6.12.
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings
The lubricating oil of sleeve bearings must be changed at the intervals specified in Table 8.6. To replace the oil,
proceed as follows:
g N
DE-bearing: remove the protection plate from the fan cover;
g D
rain the oil through the drain hole located at the bottom of the bearing (see Figure 8.1);
g C
lose the oil drain hole;
g R
emove the oil inlet plug;
g F
ill the sleeve bearing with the specified oil and with the amount of oil specified in;
g C
heck the oil level and ensure it is kept close to the center of the sight glass;
g I
nstall the oil inlet plug;
g C
heck for oil leaks. Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.1 - Sleeve bearing Manual of Electric Motors 103

www.weg.net
Table 8.6 - Oil properties for sleeve bearings.
Frame Bearing Oil Lubricant

Poles Interval (h) Lubricant
IEC NEMA designation (liters) Specification
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T ISO VG32
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin
2 9-80 2.8 8000 antifoam and
DTA 10
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T additives
450 7006/10
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
9-90
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
2.8 ISO VG46
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
9-100 mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T
4-8 8000 Renolin DTA 15 antifoam and
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and
11-110 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
4.7 additives
450 7006/10
11-125
500 8006/10
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
ENGLISH
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected
from the power supply and is completely stopped.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc.
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.

www.weg.net
8.3.1. Terminal box

Proceed as follows to remove the terminal box cover and to disconnect/connect the power supply cables and
the cables of the accessory devices:
g E
nsure that during the screw removal the terminal box cover does not damage the components installed
inside the terminal box.
g I
f the terminal box cover is fitted with lifting eyebolt, lift the terminal box cover always by its lift eyebolt.
g I
f motors are supplied with terminal blocks, ensure the correct tightening torque on the motor terminals as
specified in Table 8.7.
g E
nsure that the cables do not contact sharp edges.
g E
nsure that the original IP degree of protection is not changed and is maintained as indicate on the motor
nameplate. The power supply cables and the control cables must always be fitted with components (cable
glands, conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations of each country.
g E
nsure that the pressure relief device is in perfect operating condition, if provided. The seals in the terminal
box must be in perfect condition for reuse and must be reinstalled correctly to ensure the specified degree of
protection.
g E
nsure the correct tightening torque for the securing bolts of the terminal box cover as specified in Table 8.7.
Table 8.7 - Tightening torque for the securing bolts [Nm]

Screw type and seal M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- 4 to 7 7 to 12 16 to 30 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 230 to 360
(without seal)
Combined slotted screw
- 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 - - - -
(without seal)
(with seal with metallic - - - 13 to 20 25 to 37 40 to 55 50 to 65 -
stop/cord)
Combined slotted screw
(with flat seal 'and/or - 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 - - - -
ENGLISH
mettallic stop/cord)
- - - 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 35 to 50 -
(with flat seal)
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 1,5 to 4 3 to 6,5 6 to 9 10 to 18 15,5 to 30 30 to 50 -
Grounding terminals - 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 -
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation

Dismantle the motor completely. Remove the end shields, the rotor with the shaft, the fan cover, the fan and the
terminal box before the wound stator with the frame is transferred to the oven for the drying process. Place the
wound stator in the oven heated to max. 120 °C for two hours. For larger motors a longer drying time may be
required. After the drying process has been concluded, allow the stator to cool to room temperature. Measure
the insulation resistance again as described in item 5.4. Repeat the stator drying process if the required
insulation resistance does not meet the values specified in Table 5.3. If the insulation resistance does not
improve despite several drying processes, evaluate the causes of the insulation resistance drop carefully and an
eventual replacement of the motor winding may be required. If in doubt contact WEG.
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.

www.weg.net
8.5. Spare parts

When ordering spare parts, always provide complete motor designation, indicating the motor type, the code
number and the serial number, which are stated on the motor nameplate.
Spare parts must always be purchased from WEG authorized Service Centers. The use of non-original spare
parts can cause motor failure, performance drop and void the product warranty.
The spare parts must be stored in a clean, dry and properly ventilated room, with relative air humidity not
exceeding 60%, with ambient temperature between 5 °C and 40 °C, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive
smokes and at constant temperature. The spare parts must be stored in their normal mounting position without
placing other components onto them.
ENGLISH
Figure 8.2 - Exploded view of the components of a W22 motor

www.weg.net
9. Environmental Information
9.1. Packaging
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. Product
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions

This troubleshooting chart provides a basic list of problems that may occur during motor operation, possible
causes and recommended corrective actions. In case of doubts, please contact WEG Service Center.
Problem Possible cause Corrective action

Check the control panel and the motor
Power cables are interrupted.
power supply cables.
Blown fuses. Replace blown fuses.
Motor does not start, neither coupled nor
decoupled Correct the motor connection according to
Wrong motor connection.
connection diagram.
Check motor shaft to ensure that it rotates
Locked rotor.
freely.
Load toque is too high during start-up. Do not start the motor on load.
The motor starts at no-load, but fails when
load is applied. It starts very slowly and Check the installation dimensioning
does not reach the rated speed. Too high voltage drop in the power cables (transformer, cable cross section, relays,
circuit breakers, etc.)
Defective transmission component or Check the transmission force, the coupling
defective driven machine. and the alignment.
Align / level the motor with the driven
Misaligned / unleveled base.
machine
Unbalanced components or unbalanced
Balance the machine set again
driven machine
Abnormal / excessive noise Different balancing methods used for motor
Balance the motor again
and coupling balancing (halve key, full key)
Wrong motor direction of rotation Reverse the direction of rotation
Loose bolts Retighten the bolts
Foundation resonance Check the foundation design
ENGLISH
Damaged bearings Replace the bearings

Clean air inlet and outlet and cooling fins
Check the minimum required distance
Insufficient cooling between the fan cover and nearest walls.
See item 7
Check air temperature at inlet
Measure motor current, evaluate motor
Overload
application and if required, reduce the load
Number of starts per hour is too high or the
Reduce the number of starts per hour
load inertia moment is too high
Check the motor power supply voltage.
Motor overheating Power supply voltage too high Power supply voltage must not exceed the
tolerance specified in item 7.2
Check the motor power supply voltage and
the voltage drop. Power supply voltage
Power supply voltage too low
must not exceed the tolerance specified in
item 7.2
Interrupted power supply Check the connection of the power cables
Check for blown fuses, wrong commands,
Voltage unbalance at the motor terminals voltage unbalance in the power line, phase
fault or interrupted power cables
Direction of rotation is not compatible with Check if the direction of rotation matches
the unidirectional fan the rotation arrow indicated on end shield
Excessive grease / oil
Clean the bearing and lubricate it
Grease / oil aging
according to the provided
The used grease / oil does not matches the recommendations
specified one
Bearing overheating
Lubricate the bearing according to the
Lack of grease / oil provided recommendations
Excessive axial or radial forces due to Reduce the belt tension
the belt tension Reduce the load applied to the motor

www.weg.net
11. Warranty Term

WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A, Motor Unit, offers warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for
their products for a period of 18 months from the invoice issue date by factory or distributor / dealer, limited to
24 months from date of manufacture. Motors of the HGF Line are covered for a period of 12 months from the
invoice issue date by the factory or distributor / dealer, limited to 18 months from the date of manufacture.
The paragraph above contains the legal warranty periods. If a warranty period is defined in a different way in
the commercial, technical proposal of a particular sale, that will override the time limits set out above.
The periods above are independent of installation date and provided that the following requirements are met:
proper transportation, handling and storage; correct installation in specified environmental conditions free of
aggressive agents; operation within the capacity limits and observation of the Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual; execution of regular preventive maintenance; execution of repairs and/or changes only by
personnel with WEG‘s written authorization; in the occurrence of an anomaly, the product must be available to
the supplier for the minimum period necessary to identify the cause of the anomaly and to repair it properly; the
buyer must immediately notify WEG of any defects occurred and they must be later confirmed as
manufacturing defects by WEG. The warranty does not include assembly and disassembly services at the
buyer’s premises, costs of product transportation, as well as travel, lodging and meals expenses for the
technical assistance staff when requested by the customer. The warranty service will be provided exclusively at
a WEG authorized Technical Assistance or at the plant.
Components, parts and materials whose useful life is usually less than 12 (twelve) months are not covered by
the warranty.
Under no circumstance will warranty services extend the warranty period of the equipment. However, new
warranty equivalent to the original one will be due only to the components repaired or replaced by WEG.
The present warranty is limited to the product supplied. WEG will not be liable for damages to people, third
parties, other equipment and facilities, loss of profits or other incidental or consequential damages.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
12. Ec declaration of conformity
WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A

Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil,
and its authorised representative established in the European Community,

WEGeuro - Industria Electrica SA
Rua Eng Frederico Ulrich, Apartado 6074
4476-908 - Maia - Porto - Portugal
hereby declare that the products:
WEG induction motors and components for using in these motors:
Three-phase
IEC frames 63 to 630
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 9610
……………
Single-phase
IEC frames 63 to 132
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 215
……………
when installed, maintained and used in applications for which they were designed, and in compliance with the relevant
installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, comply with the requirements of the following European Directives
ENGLISH
and standards where applicable:
Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Regulation (EC) No 640/2009
Directive 2009/125/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (induction motors are considered inherently benign in terms of electromagnetic compatibility)
Standards:
EN 60034-1/2-1/5/6/7/8/9/11/12/14/30 and 60204-1
From 29/12/2009 on low voltage electric motors are no longer considered under the scope of the current Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC.
CE marking in: 1996
Milton Oscar Castella

Engineering Director
Jaraguá do Sul, May 31st, 2011

WEG Worldwide Operations
ARGENTINA COLOMBIA MEXICO SINGAPORE
WEG EQUIPAMIENTOS WEG COLOMBIA WEG MEXICO WEG SINGAPORE
ELECTRICOS Bogotá Huehuetoca Singapore
San Francisco - Cordoba Phone: +57 1 416 0166 Phone: +52 55 5321 4231 Phone: +65 68589081
Phone: +54 3564 421 484 info-co@weg.net info-mx@weg.net info-sg@weg.net
info-ar@weg.net www.weg.net/co www.weg.net/mx www.weg.net/sg
www.weg.net/ar
FRANCE VOLTRAN - WEG Group SCANDINAVIA
WEG PINTURAS - Pulverlux WEG FRANCE Tizayuca - Hidalgo WEG SCANDINAVIA
Buenos Aires Saint Quentin Fallavier - Lyon Phone: +52 77 5350 9354 Kungsbacka - Sweden
Phone: +54 11 4299 8000 Phone: +33 4 74 99 11 35 www.voltran.com.mx Phone: +46 300 73 400
tintas@weg.net info-fr@weg.net info-se@weg.net
www.weg.net/fr NETHERLANDS www.weg.net/se
AUSTRALIA WEG NETHERLANDS
WEG AUSTRALIA GERMANY Oldenzaal - Overijssel UK
Victoria WEG GERMANY Phone: +31 541 571 080 WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS U.K.
Phone: +61 3 9765 4600 Kerpen - North Rhine Westphalia info-nl@weg.net Worcestershire - England
info-au@weg.net Phone: +49 2237 9291 0 www.weg.net/nl Phone: +44 1527 513 800
www.weg.net/au info-de@weg.net info-uk@weg.net
www.weg.net/de PERU www.weg.net/uk
AUSTRIA WEG PERU
WATT DRIVE - WEG Group GHANA Lima UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Markt Piesting - Viena ZEST ELECTRIC GHANA Phone: +51 1 472 3204 WEG MIDDLE EAST
Phone: +43 2633 404 0 WEG Group info-pe@weg.net Dubai
watt@wattdrive.com Accra www.weg.net/pe Phone: +971 4 813 0800
www.wattdrive.com Phone: +233 30 27 664 90 info-ae@weg.net
info@zestghana.com.gh PORTUGAL www.weg.net/ae
BELGIUM www.zestghana.com.gh WEG EURO
WEG BENELUX Maia - Porto USA
Nivelles - Belgium INDIA Phone: +351 22 9477705 WEG ELECTRIC
Phone: +32 67 88 84 20 WEG Electric India info-pt@weg.net Duluth - Georgia
info-be@weg.net Bangalore - Karnataka www.weg.net/pt Phone: +1 678 249 2000
www.weg.net/be Phone: +91 80 4128 2007 info-us@weg.net
info-in@weg.net RUSSIA and CIS www.weg.net/us
BRAZIL www.weg.net/in WEG ELECTRIC CIS
WEG EQUIPAMENTOS ELÉTRICOS Saint Petersburg ELECTRIC MACHINERY
Jaraguá do Sul - Santa Catarina WEG INDUSTRIES INDIA Phone: +7 812 363 2172 WEG Group
Phone: +55 47 3276-4002 Hosur - Tamil Nadu info-ru@weg.net Minneapolis - Minnesota
info-br@weg.net Phone: +91 4344 301 501 www.weg.net/ru Phone: +1 612 378 8000
www.weg.net/br info-in@weg.net www.electricmachinery.com
www.weg.net/in SOUTH AFRICA
CHILE ZEST ELECTRIC MOTORS VENEZUELA
WEG CHILE ITALY WEG Group WEG INDUSTRIAS VENEZUELA
Santiago WEG ITALIA Johannesburg Valencia - Carabobo
Phone: +56 2 784 8900 Cinisello Balsamo - Milano Phone: +27 11 723 6000 Phone: +58 241 821 0582
info-cl@weg.net Phone: +39 02 6129 3535 info@zest.co.za info-ve@weg.net
www.weg.net/cl info-it@weg.net www.zest.co.za www.weg.net/ve
www.weg.net/it
CHINA SPAIN
WEG NANTONG JAPAN WEG IBERIA
Nantong - Jiangsu WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS Madrid
Phone: +86 0513 8598 9333 JAPAN Phone: +34 91 655 30 08
info-cn@weg.net Yokohama City - Kanagawa info-es@weg.net
www.weg.net/cn Phone: +81 45 550 3030 www.weg.net/es
info-jp@weg.net
www.weg.net/jp
The values shown are subject to change without prior notice.
For those countries where there is not a WEG own operation, find our local distributor at www.weg.net.
Cod: 50033244 | Rev: 05 | Date (m/y): 04/2013
Grupo WEG - Motors Business Unit

Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil
Phone: +55 47 3276 4000
motores@weg.net
www.weg.net
1452809332 / 00 / 07.11.2017
We live our values.
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and
operations in more than 50 countries. Founded in 1881, the company is one of the
largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology. GEA Group is
listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@gea.com, www.gea.com

9077-305 VSE 40-02-007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

9077-305 VSE 40-02-007

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

9077-305 VSE 40-02-007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

EDITION / AUSGABE - 07.11.2017

CUSTOMER / KUNDE: COOP OF MALLON

MODEL / MODELL: VSE 40-02-007

engineering for a better world www.gea.com

Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

5.1 TERMINAL PLAN 581

6.2 BALL VALVE

6.3 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

6.4 SPILL VALVE

7.2 PRESSURE GAUGE

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

232.50 / 233.50 967

7.3 PROXIMITY SENSOR

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Designation: Safety precautions

engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

For your safety

• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

• Follow the instructions in the manual.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

Be sure to adhere to the plant

Disconnect power prior to start-

Before carrying out work on the

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Frequency converter operation!

Warning of extreme surface

The surfaces of the plant components

Danger due to electrical current!

Before working on electrical com-

• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Potential equalisation (protec-

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.2 Performing work on a plant

The plant works reliably, provided that

Special attention must be given to:

1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

The operator of the plant

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

1.2.2 Spare part requirements

• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

1.2.3 Electrical installation

• Electrical work may only be car-

• Carry out voltage equalization.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.2.4 Before start-up